Mercedes-Benz S500

2000-2007 TRANSMISSION

Automatic Transmission - Basic Knowledge - 215 & 220 Chassis

BASIC KNOWLEDGE
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (AT) FUNCTION - GF27.10-P-0001

Automatic transmission (AT) function - GF27.10-P-0001GA

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 163, 170, 202, 208, 210 with touch shift

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 215, 220, 240

Transmission 722.6 is an electronically controlled 5-speed transmission with a lockup clutch in the torque
converter. The ratios for the gear stages are achieved by 3 planetary gearsets. The 5th gear is designed as a low-
rev gear with an overdrive ratio.

Shifting is initiated electronically. The gears are shifted by the corresponding combination of 3 hydraulically

ca
actuated multi-disk brakes, 3 hydraulically actuated multi-disk clutches and 2 mechanical freewheels.

rd
Basically transmission 722.6 with electronic control offers the following advantages:

ia
Reduced fuel consumption

gn


 Greater ease of shifting

.c
 Favorable spacing by 5 gears

om
 Long service life and high reliability
 Low maintenance costs

The torque converter housing and transmission housing consist of a light-metal allow. Both housings are bolted
together and are centered via the external plate carrier of the multi-disk brake at the front. A coated intermediate
panel seals the two components.

The oil pump as well as the external plate carrier of the front multi-disk brake are bolted to the torque converter
housing.

The mechanical part of the transmission 722.6 consists of a drive shaft, output shaft, a sun gear shaft and 3
planetary sets which are coupled to each other.

The electrohydraulic control unit is screwed onto the transmission housing from below. The end of the
transmission is formed by an oil pan made of sheet steel.

The oil pressure of the torque converter lockup clutch and center multi-disk clutch is supplied via bore holes in
the drive shaft. The oil pressure to the rear multi-disk clutch is supplied via the output shaft. The lubricating oil
is supplied and distributed by additional bore holes in both shafts. Oil is supplied to all bearing points of the
gearsets as well as to the freewheels and shifting elements.
The parking lock gear and drive flange are connected to the output shaft by gearing.

Freewheels F1 and F2 optimize shifting. The front freewheelF1 is supported on the extension of the stator shaft
on the transmission end and connects in the locking direction the sun gear of the front planetary gearset with the
transmission housing.

The rear freewheel F2 connects in the locking direction the sun gear of the center planetary set with the sun gear
of the rear planetary set. The electrohydraulic control unit is comprised of a light alloy shift plate for the
hydraulic control and an electric control unit.

The electronic control unit consists of a plastic shell which combines all the electric components. The shell is
mounted on and bolted to the shift plate. Conductor tracks which are laid in the supporting body make the
connection between the electrical components and a 13-pin plug socket.

Automatic transmission, GF27.10-P-0001-07G

(AT), location of
mechanical components
Automatic transmission GF27.10-P-0001-08G
(AT), location of

ca
electrical / electronic
components

rd
Automatic transmission GF27.10-P-0001-09G

ia
(AT), location of
hydraulic components

gn
Automatic transmission Model 170,202,208,210 GF27.10-P-0001-04GB

.c
(AT), location of Model 163 GF27.10-P-0001-04GI
components, floor shift

om
Model 215, 220 up to GF27.10-P-0001-04GA
31.08.02
Model 215, 220 as of GF27.10-P-0001-04GAZ
01.09.02
Model 240 GF27.10-P-0001-04X
Automatic transmission Model 163 up to 31.07.01 GF27.10-P-0001-05GI
(AT), selector lever Model 163 as of 01.08.01 GF27.10-P-0001-05GIS
positions Model 170 (except 170.466) GF27.10-P-0001-05GB
up to 19.08.01, 202,208,210
Model 170.466, 170 as of GF27.10-P-0001-05GBS
20.08.01
Model 215, 220 up to GF27.10-P-0001-05GA
19.08.01
Models 215, 220 as of GF27.10-P-0001-05GAS
20.08.01 up to 31.08.02
Model 215, 220 (except GF27.10-P-0001-05GAZ
215.374/379,
220.074/174/179) as of
01.09.02
Model 215.374/379, GF27.10-P-0001-
 220.074/174/179 05RMZ
Model 240 GF27.10-P-0001-05X
Automatic transmission Model 163 GF27.10-P-0001-02GI
(AT), driver information Model 170 GF27.10-P-0001-02GC
Model 202, 208, 210 GF27.10-P-0001-02GB
Model 215, 220 up to GF27.10-P-0001-02GA
31.08.02
Model 215, 220 (except GF27.10-P-0001-02GAZ
215.374/379,
220.074/174/179) as of
01.09.02
Model 215.374/379, GF27.10-P-0001-02GRZ
220.074/174/179
Model 240 GF27.10-P-0001-02X
Automatic transmission GF27.10-P-0001-01G
(AT), gear ratios
Function of power Model 170, 202, 208, 210, GF27.10-P-2009G
transmission 215, 220, 240

ca
Model 163 GF27.10-P-2009GH
Function of gear shift Models 163, 170, 202, 208, GF27.60-P-2000GA

rd
210, 215, 220, 240 (except

ia
215.374/379,
220.074/174/179)

gn
Model 215.374/379, GF27.60-P-2000RMZ

.c
220.074/174/179

om
Function of transmission Model 163 GF27.60-P-2002GH
control Model 170,202,208,210, GF27.60-P-2002P
215, 220 up to 31.08.02
Model 215, 220 (except GF27.60-P-2002PZ
215.374/379,
220.074/174/179) as of
01.09.02, 240
Model 215.374/379, GF27.60-P-2002RMZ
220.074/174/179
Kickdown, function Model 163, GF27.10-P-2010GA
170,202,208,210
Model 215, 220 up to
31.05.02
Models 215, 220 as of GF27.10-P-2010T
1.06.02 240
Shift lock, function Model 163, GF27.10-P-2008GB
170,202,208,210
Model 215, 220, 240 GF27.10-P-2008GA

Automatic transmission (AT), gear ratios - GF27.10-P-0001-01G

Transmission 722.6

Ratio
W5A Ratio
Gear 580 W5A 330 B1 B2 B3 K1 K2 K3 F1 F2
1 3.59 3.93 •(3) • •(3) • •
2 2.19 2.41 • • •(3) •
3 1.41 1.49 • • •
4 1.0 1.0 • • •
5 0.83 0.83 •(3) • • •
N - - • •
R(1) -3.16 -3.10 •(3) • • •
R(2) -1.93 -1.90 • • •

1. Program "S"
2. Program "W" or "C" (depending on period of manufacture)
3. Shift elements are only necessary during deceleration

ca
Automatic transmission (AT), Mercedes-Benz-Driver Information Service - GF27.10-P-0001-02GA

rd
Transmission 722.6 in models 215, 220 up to 31.08.02

ia
gn
Gear indicator (A1p12) in instrument cluster (A1)

.c
Informs the driver about which shift range "1", "2", "3", or "4" is currently selected or about the position of the

om
selector lever "D", "R", "N" (neutral), or "P" (park).

Furthermore, the program, "S" (standard program) or "W" (winter program), selected at the transmission mode
switch (S16/5) is also displayed.

Fig. 1: Identifying Instrument Cluster And Gear Indicator (Winter Program)

Automatic transmission (AT), driver information - GF27.10-P-0001-02GAZ

Transmission 722.6 in models 215, 220 (except 215.374/379, 220.074/174/179) as of 01.09.02

Fig. 2: Identifying Instrument Cluster And Gear Display (Comfort Program)

ca
Gear indicator (A1p12) in instrument cluster (A1):

rd
It indicates to the driver the currently selected shift range "1", "2", "3", "4" or the selector lever position "D",

ia
"R", "N" (neutral) or "P" (park).

gn
Furthermore, the program, "S" (sport program) or "C" (comfort program), selected at the transmission mode

.c
switch (S16/5) is also displayed.

om
Automatic transmission (AT), driver information - GF27.10-P-0001-02GRZ

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 215.374/379, 220.074/174/179

Fig. 3: Identifying Instrument Cluster And Gear Display (Manual Program)

Gear indicator (A1p12) in the instrument cluster (A1) in the sport program "S" and in the comfort
program "C"

It indicates to the driver the currently selected shift range "1", "2", "3", "4" or the selector lever position "D",
"R", "N" (neutral) or "P" (park).

Gear indicator (A1p12) in the instrument cluster (A1) in the manual program "M"

It indicates to the driver the engaged gear "1", "2", "3", "4", "5".

Program selection display in gear indicator (A1p12)

It indicates to the driver the program selection "S" (sport program), "C" (comfort program) or "M" (manual
program) performed at the transmission mode switch (S16/5).

Automatic transmission (AT) location of components, floor shift - GF27.10-P-0001-04GA

Transmission 722.6 in models 215, 220 up to 31.08.02

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 4: Identifying Automatic Transmission Components Location (Transmission 722.6 In Models 215 Up
To 31.08.02)

Automatic transmission (AT) location of components, floor shift - GF27.10-P-0001-04GAZ

Transmission 722.6 in model 215, 220 as of 01.09.02

Fig. 5: Identifying Automatic Transmission Components Location (Models 220)

ca
Automatic transmission (AT), selector lever positions - GF27.10-P-0001-05GA

rd
Transmission 722.6 up to 19.08.01 in models 215, 220

ia
The selector lever can be moved into 6 different positions.

gn
.c
The selector lever positions have the following meanings:

om
P Park pawl and starting position

R Reverse gear

N Neutral and start position

(No power is transmitted. The vehicle is not in gear.)

D All five forward gears are available.

+ touch: Upshift by one shift range at a time.

Press and hold: Change from the current shift range direct to "D"

 Touch: Shift down one shift range.

The selected gear is only actuated at the permitted speed.

Press and hold: Change the shift range to the currently engaged gear (shift range display in instrument
cluster (A1)).
 Fig. 6: Identifying Selector Lever Positions (Winter Program)

Transmission mode switch (S16/5):

ca
S Standard program

rd
 Driving in 1st gear for all driving situations

ia
gn
W Winter mode

.c
 Starting off always in 2nd gear (except in 1st gear shift range).

om
 The gears are not completely disengaged.

NOTE: If kick-down is operated the upshifts and downshifts occur as in the standard
program "S".

Automatic transmission (AT), selector lever positions - GF27.10-P-0001-05GAS

Transmission 722.6 in model 215, 220 as of 20.08.01 up to 31.08.02

The selector lever can be moved into 6 different positions. The driver can select 2 different transmission modes
using the transmission mode switch (S16/5).

The selector lever positions have the following meanings:

P Park pawl and starting position

R Reverse gear

N Neutral and starting position

(No power transmission takes place. The vehicle is freely movable.)

D All 5 forwards gears are available

+ Touch: Shift up one shift range.

Press and hold down: Change from the current shift range direct to "D"

 Touch: Shift down one shift range.

The selected gear is only actuated at the permitted speed.

Press and hold down: The transmission is shifted into a gear from which the vehicle can be easily
accelerated or decelerated (shift range displayed in instrument cluster (A1)).

If the shift range is limited, the transmission shifts up gears when the engine speed is close to the
engine breakaway speed.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
Fig. 7: Identifying Selector Lever Positions (Winter Program)

Transmission mode switch (S16/5)

om
Standard program "S":

 Starting off in 1st gear for all driving situations.

Winter program "W":

 Starting off always in 2nd gear (except in 1st gear shift range).
 The maximum speed is not utilized in any one gear.
 If kickdown is actuated the gears are shifted up and down as for standard program "S".

Automatic transmission (AT), selector lever positions - GF27.10-P-0001-05GAZ

Transmission 722.6 in models 215, 220 (except 215.374/379, 220.074/174/179) as of 01.09.02

ca
rd
Fig. 8: Identifying Selector Lever Positions (Comfort Program)

ia
gn
The selector lever can be moved into 6 different positions. The driver can select 2 different transmission modes
using the transmission mode switch (S16/5).

.c
om
The selector lever positions have the following meanings:

P Park lock and start position

R Reverse gear

N Neutral and start position

(No power transmission takes place. The vehicle is not in gear).

D All 5 forward gears are available.

+ Touch: Upshift by one shift range in each case.

Press and hold down: Change from the current shift range direct to "D"

 Touch: Downshift by one shift range in each case.

The selected gear is only actuated at the permitted speed.

Press and hold down: The transmission is shifted into a gear from which the vehicle can be easily
 accelerated or decelerated (shift range displayed in instrument cluster (A1)).

If the shift range is limited, the transmission shifts up gears when the engine speed is close to the engine
breakaway speed.

Transmission mode switch (S16/5)

Sport program "S":

 Starting off in 1st gear for all driving situations.

Comfort program "C":

 Starting off always in 2nd gear (except 1st gear shift range).
 The maximum speed is not utilized in any one gear.

If kickdown is actuated the gears are shifted up and down as for the sport program "S".

Automatic transmission (AT), selector lever positions - GF27.10-P-0001-05RMZ

ca
Transmission 722.6 in model 209.376 as of 1.6.03, 209.476, 211.076 as of 01.09.03, 211.276, 215.374/379,

rd
219.376, 220.074/174/179, 230.474 as of 01.09.03, 230.479

ia
gn
Illustrated on model 230.474

.c
om
Fig. 9: Identifying Transmission Mode Switch

The selector lever can be moved into 6 different positions. The driver can select 3 different transmission modes
using the transmission mode switch (S16/5).

The selector lever positions have the following meanings:

P Park lock and start position

R Reverse gear

N NEUTRAL

(No power transmission takes place. The vehicle is freely movable.)

D All 5 forward gears are available.

Transmission mode switch (S16/5)

Sport program "S":

 Starting off in 1st gear for all driving situations.

Comfort program "C":

 Starting off always in 2nd gear (except in 1st gear range).

 The maximum speed is not utilized in any one gear.

ca
If kickdown is actuated the gears are shifted up and down as for the sport program "S".

rd
Manual program "M":

ia
gn
 The driver can select a gear directly using the selector lever in the electronic selector lever module control
unit (N15/5), the steering wheel gear shifter MINUS (S110/1) or the steering wheel gear shifter PLUS

.c
(S111/1).

om
Touch shift function

Program "C" or "S":

+ Touch: Upshift by one shift range each time.

Press and hold down: Change from the current shift range direct to "D"

 Touch: Downshift by one shift range each time.

The selected gear is only actuated if the engine speed permits.

Press and hold down: The transmission is shifted into a gear from which the vehicle can be easily
accelerated or decelerated.

Program "M":

+ Touch: Upshift by one gear in each case.

The selected gear is only engaged at the permitted rotational speed.

  Touch: Shift down one gear each time.

The selected gear is only engaged at the permitted rotational speed.

If the shift range is limited, the transmission shifts up gears when the engine speed is close to the engine
breakaway speed.

Automatic transmission (AT), location of mechanical parts - GF27.10-P-0001-07G

Transmission 722.6

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
Fig. 10: Sectional View Of Automatic Transmission
om
Automatic transmission (AT), location of electric/electronic components - GF27.10-P-0001-08G

Transmission 722.6
 ca
rd
Fig. 11: Automatic Transmission Electric/Electronic Components Location

ia
gn
Automatic transmission (AT), position of hydraulic components - GF27.10-P-0001-09G

.c
Transmission 722.6

om
 ca
rd
ia
gn
Fig. 12: Identifying Automatic Transmission Hydraulic Components Position

.c
Automatic transmission (AT) function - GF27.10-P-0001N

om
TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODELS 215, 220
 ca
rd
ia
Fig. 13: Identifying Automatic Transmission Mechanical Parts Location (Transmission 722.9)

gn
.c
om

Fig. 14: Communication Diagram - Automatic Transmission Electrical Part Function (Shown Up To
31.5.04)
Shown up to 31.5.04

General information

Transmission 722.9 is an electronically controlled automatic transmission with 7 forward gears and 2 reverse
gears. All the transmission functions and transmission components for this automatic transmission are combined
in one assembly module. Integrating the electrohydraulic control unit (21) in transmission 722.9 minimizes the
number of interfaces to the wiring harness. The electrohydraulic control unit (21) is installed below the
transmission housing; transmission oil is continuously flushed around the outside of the control unit, which
amongst other things, ensures the control unit is cooled.

Transmission 722.9 can be roughly divided into the following component groups:

 Torque converter with torsional damper and torque converter lockup clutch (16)
 The oil pump (6) for generating the necessary oil pressure and for lubricating the actuators and bearing
points properly.
 The transmission housing with transmission mechanism and the electrohydraulic control unit (21). The
transmission housing is made of a light alloy.
Transmission mechanism, consisting mechanism, consisting of a Ravigneaux gear set (9), front single

ca

planetary gear system (12a), rear single planetary gear system (12b) and the park pawl. Furthermore,
multi-disk clutch K1 (8), multi-disk clutch K2 (11), multi-disk clutch K3 (14), multi-disk brake B1 (7),

rd
multi-disk brake B2 (15), multi-disk brake B3 (10) and multi-disk brake BR (13) are integrated. Single-

ia
sided disks are used for multi-disk clutch K1 (8), multi-disk clutch K2 (11) and multi-disk clutch K3 (14).

gn
Furthermore, single-sided disks are also used for multi-disk brake B1 (7) and multi-disk brake B3 (10).
On this type of lamella the friction lining is only applied on one side. Among other things, this improves

.c
heat distribution in the disk pack, the design of the disk pack is more compact, the load-bearing capacity

om
is increased and the mass is reduced. Lamella coated on both sides continue to be used for the multi-disk
brake B2 (15) and multi-disk brake BR (13).

 The electrohydraulic control unit (21), consisting of the electric control unit VGS (Y3/8), the valve body
and the valve housing.

The following information are taken into account when shifting the drive positions:

 The vehicle speed

 Vehicle load
 Air drag and rolling resistance
 Position and operating speed of accelerator pedal
 Position of selector lever and engaged gear
 Position of transmission mode switch (S16/5)
 Oil temperature and other information about the status of the transmission
 Further signals which are available via the Controller Area Network bus class C (engine compartment)
(CAN-C)

Data is exchanged with the following control units via CAN-C:

  Instrument cluster (A1)
 ME-SFI [ME] control unit (N3/10)
 Electronic selector lever module control unit (N15/5)
 ESP, SPS [PML] and BAS control unit (N47-5)
 DTR control unit (N63/1) up to 31.5.04 or DTR control unit (A89) as of 1.6.04
 EIS [EZS] control unit (N73)
 Central gateway control unit (N93)

This involves the processing of the following data from other systems:

ME-SFI [ME] control unit (N3/10)

 Active downshift for heating up the catalytic converter (TWC)

 Driving off 1st. gear, for heating of catalytic converter
 Shift line displacement to heat up the catalytic converter
 Specified gear, lower and upper limit to heat up the catalytic converter
Emergency operation of the ME fuel injection and ignition system (motor electronics) (ME), the pedal

ca

value is limited to approx. 20 %, the driveability of the vehicle is assured

rd
 Cruise control governs, a specific shifting strategy for cruise control mode is filed in the fully integrated
transmission control (VGS) control unit (Y3/8n4)

ia
gn
 Engine coolant temperature, used as a substitute value if the transmission oil temperature sensor (VGS)
(Y3/8s2) malfunctions

.c
Engine oil temperature, shift limitation is canceled

om


 Requirement torque for Electronic Stability Program (Electronic-Stability-Program) (ESP), torque

reduction or torque increase taking into account directional stability and road adhesion
 Kickdown
 Pedal value
 Request for torque converter lockup clutch (16) "Open" in the heating up phase of the catalytic converter,
to increase engine speed
 Engine idle specified speed for the actuation of the torque converter lockup clutch (16)
 Engine speed, for slip calculation of torque converter lockup clutch (16) and for start of pressure
calculation by the fully integrated transmission control (VGS) control unit (Y3/8n4)
 Speed limiter function active, adaptations in the fully integrated transmission control (VGS) control unit
(Y3/8n4) switched off
 Engine torque

Electronic selector lever module control unit (N15/5)

 Selector lever position

 Transmission mode switch (S16/5)
ESP, SPS [PML] and BAS control unit (N47-5)

 Stop lamp switch (S9/1), change in shift strategy, braking the vehicle, the fully integrated transmission
control (VGS) shifts down earlier.
 Adjusted braking torque, change of shift strategy, brake the vehicle, fully integrated transmission control
shifts down earlier
 Wheel speeds and direction of rotation, substitute values in event of output speed sensor (VGS) (Y3/8n3)
malfunction
 ESP request shift into "N" (neutral), power flow interruption, transmission/rear axle
 Vehicle lateral acceleration at center of gravity, adaptation of shift strategy, detection of dynamic driving
style

DTR control unit (N63/1) up to 31.5.04 or DTR control unit (A89) as of 1.6.04

 Shift line displacement, brake the vehicle, fully integrated transmission control (VGS) shifts down earlier
 Active downshift, brake the vehicle, fully integrated transmission control shifts down earlier

EIS [EZS] control unit (N73)

ca
 Refrigerant compressor (A9) ON

rd
 Circuit 50, influencing fault memory

ia
 Torque requirement of refrigerant compressor (A9), torque correction

gn
Central gateway control unit (N93)

.c
om
 Refrigerant compressor (A9) ON
 Circuit 50
 Torque requirement of refrigerant compressor (A9), torque correction

The following information is output to other systems:

Instrument cluster (A1)

 Selector lever position for gear indicator (A1p12)

 Program selection at the transmission mode switch (S16/5) for gear indicator (A1p12)

ME-SFI [ME] control unit (N3/10)

 Engine torque requests, engine intervention when shifting

 Emergency-running mode for fully integrated transmission control
 Starter lockout release in selector lever position "P", "P", "N"
 Transmission variant, recognition of basic variants, difference in gear ratios
 Actual gear engaged/target gear, i.e. engaged gear, gear to be shifted, can be shown via STAR
DIAGNOSIS
  Torque converter lockup clutch (16) status

ESP, SPS [PML] and BAS control unit (N47-5)

 Wheel torque factor, overall gear ratio

 Transmission variant, recognition of basic variants, difference in gear ratios
 Actual gear engaged/target gear, i.e. engaged gear, gear to be shifted, can be shown via STAR
DIAGNOSIS

DTR control unit (N63/1) up to 31.5.04 or DTR control unit (A89) as of 1.6.04

 Transmission variant, recognition of basic variants, difference in gear ratios

 Actual gear engaged/target gear, i.e. engaged gear, gear to be shifted, can be shown via STAR
DIAGNOSIS
 Wheel torque factor, overall gear ratio

EIS [EZS] control unit (N73)

ca
 Selector lever position for the actuation of the backup lamp function

rd
Central gateway control unit (N93)

ia
Selector lever position for the actuation of the backup lamp function

gn


 Diagnosis

.c
om
GF27.10-P-0001-
Automatic transmission (AT), location of mechanical parts
07N
GF27.10-P-0001-
Automatic transmission (AT), location of electrical / electronic components
08N
GF27.10-P-0001-
Automatic transmission (AT), location of hydraulic components
09N
GF27.10-P-0001-
Automatic transmission (AT), location of components, floor shift
04N
GF27.10-P-0001-
Automatic transmission (AT), selector lever positions
05N
GF27.10-P-0001-
Automatic transmission (AT), driver information
02N
GF27.10-P-0001-
Automatic transmission (AT), features
14N
GF27.10-P-0001-
Automatic transmission (AT), gear ratios
01N
Automatic transmission (AT), updating the transmission control unit by flash- GF27.10-P-0001-
updating 15N
Power transmission, function GF27.10-P-2009N
 Gear shift, function GF27.60-P-2000N
Transmission control, function GF27.60-P-2002N
Kick-down, function GF27.10-P-2010N
Shift-lock, function GF27.10-P-2008N

Automatic transmission (AT), gear ratios - GF27.10-P-0001-01N

Transmission 722.9 in model 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230, 463.303/340/341

Gear Ratio B1 B2 B3 BR K1 K2 K3
W7A 700
1 4,377 • • •
2 2,859 • • •
3 1,921 • • •
4 1,368 • • •
5 1,000 • • •
6 0,820 • • •
7 0,728 • • •

ca
N • •

rd
R (1) -3,416 • • •

ia
R (2) -2,231 • • •

gn
(1) Program selection "S"

.c
(2) Program selection "C"

om
Automatic transmission (AT), driver information - GF27.10-P-0001-02N

Transmission 722.9 in model 215, 220

Fig. 15: Identifying Instrument Cluster And Gear Indicator

The gear indicator (A1p12) in the instrument cluster (A1) shows the driver the currently selected shift range
"1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6" or selector lever position "D", "R", "N" (neutral) or "P" (park).

Furthermore, the program, "S" (sport program) or "C" (comfort program), selected at the transmission mode
switch (S16/5) is also displayed.

Automatic transmission (AT), location of components, floor shift - GF27.10-P-0001-04N

Transmission 722.9 in model 215, 220

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 16: Identifying Automatic Transmission Components Location (Models 220)

Automatic transmission (AT), selector lever positions - GF27.10-P-0001-05N

Transmission 722.9 in model 215, 220

Fig. 17: Identifying Selector Lever Positions (Comfort Program)

The selector lever can be moved into 6 different positions. The driver can select 2 different transmission modes
using the transmission mode switch (S16/5).

The selector lever positions have the following meanings:

P Park pawl and starting position

R Reverse gear

N Neutral and starting position

(No power transmission takes place. The vehicle is freely movable.)

D All 7 forwards gears are available

+ Touch: Shift up one shift range.

Press and hold: Change from the current shift range directly to "D"

ca
 Touch: Shift down one shift range.

rd
The selected gear is only actuated at the permitted speed. Press and hold: The transmission changes into a
gear from which the vehicle can be accelerated or decelerated favorably (gear indicator (A1p12) in

ia
instrument cluster (A1)).

gn
.c
With a finite shift range, upshifting takes place close to the engine limit speed.

om
Transmission mode switch (S16/5)

Sport program "S":

 Starting off in 1st gear for all driving situations.

Comfort program "C":

 Starting off always in 2nd gear (except 1st gear shift range).
 The maximum speed is not utilized in any one gear.

If kickdown is actuated the gears are shifted up and down as for the sport program "S".

Automatic transmission (AT), location of mechanical parts - GF27.10-P-0001-07N

Transmission 722.9 in model 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230, 463.303/340/341
 ca
rd
ia
Fig. 18: Identifying Automatic Transmission Mechanical Parts Location (Transmission 722.9)

gn
Automatic transmission (AT), location of electric/electronic components - GF27.10-P-0001-08N

.c
Transmission 722.9 in model 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230, 463.303/340/341

om
 ca
rd
Fig. 19: Identifying Automatic Transmission Electric/Electronic Components Location (Transmission
722.9)

ia
gn
Automatic transmission (AT), location of hydraulic components - GF27.10-P-0001-09N

.c
Transmission 722.9 in model 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230, 463.303/340/341

om
Valve housing

Fig. 20: Identifying Valve Housing Hydraulic Components (Transmission 722.9)

Valve body

Fig. 21: Identifying Valve Body Hydraulic Components (Transmission 722.9)

ca
Automatic transmission (AT), features - GF27.10-P-0001-14N

rd
ia
Transmission 722.9 in model 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230, 463.303/340/341

gn
The following features differentiate transmission 722.9 from transmission 722.6:

.c
The transmission features 7 forward gears and 2 reverse gears.

om


 A Ravigneaux gear set and 2 single planetary gear systems are used and thus other ratios are achieved.
 The fully integrated transmission control (VGS) control unit (Y3/8n4) is located in the electric controller
unit (VGS) (Y3/8). The transmission oil is therefore continuously flushed around the outside of the
control unit which ensures the control unit is cooled.
 The transmission oil temperature is recorded by the transmission oil temperature sensor (Y3/8n4)
installed in the fully integrated transmission control (VGS) control unit (Y3/8s2).
 The interfaces to the wiring loom have been reduced by the new position of the fully integrated
transmission control (VGS) control unit (Y3/8n4).
 Transmission 722.9 is therefore available as a compact assembly unit.
 A torque converter lockup clutch with torsional dampers, which is slip-controlled in all 7 forward gears,
is used.
 The disks used on the multidisk clutches and 2 multidisk brakes are single-sided disks. The friction lining
is only applied to one side on this version.
 3 sensors are fitted for recording rpm. This increases ease of shifting and reduces the reaction time during
the shift operations.
 It is possible to update (flashing) the control unit software in transmission 722.9 as and when required.
This flash-updating is carried out using STAR DIAGNOSIS.
Automatic transmission (AT), updating the transmission control unit by flash-updating - GF27.10-P-0001-15N

Transmission 722.9 in model 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230, 463.303/340/341

ca
rd
ia
gn
Fig. 22: Updating Transmission Control Unit By Flash-Updating - Shows Model 230

.c
Shows model 230

om
On transmission 722.9 the transmission software used can be exchanged for a more up-to-date version. This
updating is described as flashing and is carried out using STAR DIAGNOSIS.

COMPONENT SURVEY FOR AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION - GF27.10-P-0025-02I

Model 220

Sales designation Model Engine Transmission

S 320 CDI 220.025 648.960 722.626
S 320 CDI 220.026 613.960 722.626
S 400 CDI 220.028 628.960 722.639
S 280 220.063 112.922 722.617
S 320 220.065 112.944 722.618
S 350 220.067 112.972 722.644
S 430 220.070 113.941 722.632
S 55 AMG 220.073 113.986 722.636
S 55 AMG Kompressor 220.074 113.991 722.643
722.633
S 500 220.075 113.960 722.635
S 430 4 MATIC 220.083 113.948 722.671
S 500 4 MATIC 220.084 113.966 722.672
S 350 4 MATIC 220.087 112.975 722.675
S 320 CDI 220.125 648.960 722.626
S 320 CDI 220.126 613.960 722.626
S 400 CDI 220.128 628.960 722.639
S 320 220.165 112.944 722.618
S 350 L 220.167 112.972 722.644
S 430 220.170 113.941 722.632
S 55 AMG 220.173 113.986 722.636
S 55 AMG Kompressor 220.174 113.991 722.643
722.633
S 500 220.175 113.960
722.635
S 600 220.176 275.950 722.649
S 600 220.178 137.970 722.628
S 430 4 MATIC 220.183 113.948 722.671

ca
S 500 4 MATIC 220.184 113.966 722.672
S 350 L 4 Matic 220.187 112.975 722.675

rd
S 55 AMG Kompressor Pullmann 220.874 113.991 722.643

ia
722.633

gn
S 500 Pullmann 220.875 113.960
722.635
S 600 Pullmann 220.876 275.950 722.649

.c
S 600 Pullmann 220.878 137.970 722.628

om
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION MODEL AND COMPONENT INSTALLATION SURVEY AS-BUILT
CONFIGURATION - GF27.10-P-0801AA

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 129, 140, 163, 170, 199, 202, 203, 208, 209, 210, 211, 215, 220, 230,
240

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 463

Component survey for Model 129 GF27.10-P-0025-02A

automatic transmission Model 140 GF27.10-P-0025-02C
Model 163 GF27.10-P-0025-02H
Model 170 GF27.10-P-0025-02B
Model 199 GF27.10-P-0025-02SLR
Model 202 GF27.10-P-0025-02D
Model 203 GF27.10-P-0025-02P
Model 208 GF27.10-P-0025-02E
Model 209 GF27.10-P-0025-02Q
Model 210 GF27.10-P-0025-02F
 Model 211 GF27.10-P-0025-02T
Model 215 GF27.10-P-0025-02J
Model 220 GF27.10-P-0025-02I
Model 230 GF27.10-P-0025-02R
Model 240.078/178 GF27.10-P-0025-02HA
Model 463 GF27.10-P-0025-02G

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (AT), CONTENTS, FUNCTION DESCRIPTION - GF27.10-P-0999

Automatic transmission (AT), contents, function description - GF27.10-P-0999GA

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 215, 220, 240

GF27.10-P-
Automatic transmission (AT) function
0001GA
Automatic transmission, (AT), location of GF27.10-P-
mechanical components 0001-07G
Automatic transmission (AT), location of GF27.10-P-

ca
electrical / electronic components 0001-08G
Automatic transmission (AT), location of GF27.10-P-

rd
hydraulic components 0001-09G

ia
Automatic transmission (AT), location of GF27.10-P-
Model 215, 220 up to 31.08.02
components, floor shift

gn
0001-04GA
GF27.10-P-
Model 215, 220 as of 01.09.02

.c
0001-04GAZ

om
GF27.10-P-
Model 240
0001-04X
Automatic transmission (AT), selector lever GF27.10-P-
Model 215, 220 up to 19.08.01
positions 0001-05GA
Models 215, 220 as of 20.08.01 up to GF27.10-P-
31.08.02 0001-05GAS
Model 215, 220 (except
GF27.10-P-
215.374/379, 220.074/174/179) as of
0001-05GAZ
01.09.02
Model 215.374/379, GF27.10-P-
220.074/174/179 0001-05RMZ
GF27.10-P-
Model 240
0001-05X
GF27.10-P-
Automatic transmission (AT), driver information Model 215, 220 up to 31.08.02
0001-02GA
Model 215, 220 (except
GF27.10-P-
215.374/379, 220.074/174/179) as of
0001-02GAZ
01.09.02
Model 215.374/379, GF27.10-P-
220.074/174/179 0001-02GRZ
 GF27.10-P-
Model 240
0001-02X
GF27.10-P-
Automatic transmission (AT), gear ratios
0001-01G
GF27.10-P-
Function of power transmission
2009G
GF27.10-P-
Power flow in 1st gear, function
3011G
GF27.10-P-
Power flow in 2nd gear, function
3012G
GF27.10-P-
Power flow in 3rd gear, function
3013G
GF27.10-P-
Power flow in 4th gear, function
3014G
GF27.10-P-
Power flow in 5th gear, function
3015G
Power flow in reverse gear, program selection GF27.10-P-
Model 215, 220 up to 31.08.02
"W", function 3016G

ca
Power flow in reverse gear, program selection GF27.10-P-
Models 215, 220 as of 01.09.02, 240
"C", function 3025G

rd
Power flow in reverse gear, program selection GF27.10-P-

ia
"S", function 3017G

gn
Models 215, 220, 240 (except GF27.60-P-
Function of gear shift
215.374/379, 220.074/174/179) 2000GA

.c
Model 215.374/379, GF27.60-P-

om
220.074/174/179 2000RMZ
GF27.60-P-
Function of gear change
3010G
GF27.60-P-
Shifting N to D (1st gear), function
4014GA
GF27.60-P-
Function of shift from 1 to 2
4013G
GF27.60-P-
Emergency default mode, function
3012G
GF27.60-P-
Function of operating pressure
3013G
GF27.60-P-
Function of lubricating pressure
3014G
GF27.60-P-
Shift pressure, function
3015G
GF27.60-P-
Function of modulator pressure
3016G
GF27.60-P-
Function of regulating valve pressure
3017G
 GF27.60-P-
Function of shift valve pressure
3018G
GF27.60-P-
Function of manual drive mode selection Model 215, 220 up to 31.08.02
3011GA
Model 215, 220 (except
GF27.60-P-
215.374/379, 220.074/174/179) as of
3011GAZ
01.09.02, 240
Model 215.374/379, GF27.60-P-
220.074/174/179 3011RMZ
GF27.10-P-
Oil level control, function
3024G
GF27.20-P-
Torque converter lockup clutch control, function
3002G
Function of torque converter lock-up clutch GF27.60-P-
control pressure 3019G
GF27.10-P-
Kickdown, function Model 215, 220 up to 31.05.02
2010GA
GF27.10-P-
Models 215, 220 as of 01.06.02, 240

ca
2010T
GF27.60-P-
Function of transmission control Model 215, 220 up to 31.08.02

rd
2002P
Model 215, 220 (except

ia
GF27.60-P-
215.374/379, 220.074/174/179) as of

gn
2002PZ
01.09.02, 240

.c
Model 215.374/379, GF27.60-P-
220.074/174/179

om
2002RMZ
GF27.10-P-
Shift lock, function
2008GA
GF27.10-P-
Ignition switch lock, function
3003GA
GF27.10-P-
Locking of selector lever position "P", function
3020GA
Overview of automatic transmission (AT) system GF27.10-P-
components, location/task/design/function 9990GA

Automatic transmission (AT), contents, function description - GF27.10-P-0999N

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 215, 220

Automatic transmission (AT) function GF27.10-P-0001N

GF27.10-P-0001-
Automatic transmission (AT), location of mechanical parts
07N
GF27.10-P-0001-
Automatic transmission (AT), location of electric/electronic components
08N
GF27.10-P-0001-
Automatic transmission (AT), location of hydraulic components 09N
GF27.10-P-0001-
Automatic transmission (AT), location of components, floor shift
04N
GF27.10-P-0001-
Automatic transmission (AT), selector lever positions
05N
GF27.10-P-0001-
Automatic transmission (AT), driver information
02N
GF27.10-P-0001-
Automatic transmission (AT), features
14N
GF27.10-P-0001-
Automatic transmission (AT), gear ratios
01N
Automatic transmission (AT), updating the transmission control unit by flash- GF27.10-P-0001-
updating 15N
Power transmission, function GF27.10-P-2009N
Power flow in 1st gear, function GF27.10-P-3011N
Power flow in 2nd gear, function GF27.10-P-3012N
Power flow in 3rd gear, function GF27.10-P-3013N
Power flow in 4th gear, function GF27.10-P-3014N

ca
Power flow in 5th gear, function GF27.10-P-3015N

rd
Power flow in 6th gear, function GF27.10-P-3021N
Power flow in 7th gear, function

ia
GF27.10-P-3026N
Power flow in reverse gear in transmission mode "S", function

gn
GF27.10-P-3017N
Power flow in reverse gear, program selection "C", function GF27.10-P-3025N

.c
Gear shift, function GF27.60-P-2000N

om
Gear change, function GF27.60-P-3010N
Limp-home mode, function GF27.60-P-3012N
Manual drive mode selection, function GF27.60-P-3011N
Oil level control, function GF27.10-P-3024N
Torque converter lockup clutch control, function GF27.20-P-3002N
Torque converter lockup clutch control pressure, function GF27.60-P-3019N
Kick-down, function GF27.10-P-2010N
Transmission control, function GF27.60-P-2002N
Shift-lock, function GF27.10-P-2008N
Ignition switch lock, function GF27.10-P-3003N
Function of locking of selector lever position "P" GF27.10-P-3020N
Shifting N to D (1st gear), function GF27.60-P-4014N
Shift from 1 to 2, function GF27.60-P-4013N
Working pressure, function GF27.60-P-3013N
Lubrication pressure, function GF27.60-P-3014N
Shift pressure, function GF27.60-P-3015N
Control valve pressure, function GF27.60-P-3017N
Survey of system components, automatic transmission (AT), location / task / GF27.10-P-9990N
 design / function

SHIFT-LOCK, FUNCTION - GF27.10-P-2008

Shift-lock, function - GF27.10-P-2008GA

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 215, 220, 230, 240

Operation

The term shift lock combines the functions which, in addition to the parking brake, offer an additional safeguard
for the vehicle to prevent it moving off unintentionally.

These include the functions of locking the selector lever position "P" and locking the ignition lock as well as the
parking lock in the transmission.

The shift lock function only permits shifting out of selector lever position "P" if the transmitter key (A8/1) has
been turned to the position "Ignition: ON" and the brake pedal is depressed.

ca
The vehicle is secured mechanically by blocking the park pawl gear.

rd
In order to ensure that after parking the vehicle the selector lever is shifted into selector lever position "P", the

ia
transmitter key (A8/1) can only be turned towards "0" in this position and removed from the EZS control
module (N73) (ignition lock locking, function).

gn
.c
At the same time the function locking of the selector lever position "P" serves as an anti-theft lock. For this
reason it is not possible to move the selector lever out of position "P" in the event of the failure of one of the

om
following components:

 for EIS control module (N73)

 Electronic selector lever module control module (N15/5)
 Voltage
 CAN data bus
 Stop light switch (S9/1)
 R/P locking solenoid

Locking the ignition lock, function GF27.10-P-3003GA

Function of locking of selector lever position "P" GF27.10-P-3020GA

Shift lock, function - GF27.10-P-2008N

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 215, 220, 230

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

The term shift lock combines the functions which, in addition to the parking brake, offer an additional safeguard
for the vehicle to prevent it moving off unintentionally. Included in this are the functions of locking the selector
lever position "P" and locking the ignition switch as well as the park pawl in the transmission. The Shift-Lock
only permits shifting out of selector lever position "P", if the transmitter key (A8/1) has been turned into
position "circuit 15 ON" and the brake pedal is depressed. The vehicle is secured mechanically by blocking the
parking lock gear. In order to ensure that after parking the vehicle the selector lever is shifted into selector lever
position "P", it is only possible to turn the transmitter key (A8/1) towards "0" in this position and to remove it
from the electronic ignition switch control unit (N73).

Simultaneously the function of locking selector lever position "P" serves as antitheft lockout. For this reason it
is not possible to move the selector lever out of position P" in the event of failure of one of the following
components:

 EIS [EZS] control unit (N73)

 Electronic selector lever module control unit (N15/5)
 Voltage supply
 Controller Area Network (data bus/CAN bus) (CAN)
 Stop lamp switch (S9/1)

ca
 R/P locking solenoid

rd
Ignition switch lock, function GF27.10-P-3003N

ia
Locking of selector lever position "P", function GF27.10-P-3020N

gn
POWER TRANSMISSION, FUNCTION - GF27.10-P-2009

.c
om
Power transmission, function - GF27.10-P-2009G

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 129, 140, 170, 202, 203, 208, 209, 210, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230, 240

Fig. 23: Power Transmission, Function Chart

The term power transmission refers to the transmission of propulsion power and engine torques. The engine
torques are transferred to the drive wheels by means of the mechanical-hydraulic connection between the
engine, torque converter and automatic transmission. The torques are converted in the transmission by several
planetary gearsets.

Power is transferred in the torque converter via the driven impeller by diverting hydraulic fluid to the turbine
wheel, which is connected to the transmission input shaft.

When the torque converter lockup clutch is engaged, power is transmitted via this mechanical connection. Via
the gear wheels of the individual planetary gearsets, the torques coming from the torque converter, depending
on the gear ratio and shift elements actuated, are passed on to the output shaft with the help of overrunning
clutches, multi-disk clutches and brakes.

A reduction of the output speed in the low gears provides lower vehicle speeds with high tractive forces and
drive torques at the drive wheels.

GF27.10-P-
Power flow in 1st gear, function
3011G
GF27.10-P-
Power flow in 2nd gear, function
3012G
GF27.10-P-
Power flow in 3rd gear, function
3013G

ca
GF27.10-P-
Power flow in 4th gear, function

rd
3014G
GF27.10-P-
Power flow in 5th gear, function

ia
3015G

gn
Function of power flow in Model 129, 140, 170, 202, 203 up to 31.05.03. 208,
GF27.10-P-
reverse gear Function of 209.3 up to 31.05.03, 210, 211 up to 31.08.03, 215 up to

.c
3016G
program selection" W" 31.08.02, 220 up to 31.08.02, 230 to 31.08.03

om
Power transmission in reverse Model 203, 209.3 as of 01.06.03, 209.4, 211 as of
GF27.10-P-
gear, program selection "C" 01.09.03, 215 as of 01.09.02, 219, 220 as of 01.09.02,
3025G
function 230 as of 01.09.03, 240
Function of power flow in
GF27.10-P-
reverse gear Function of
3017G
program selection" S"

Power transmission, function - GF27.10-P-2009N

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

Fig. 24: Power Transmission Function Diagram - Transmission 722.9

Power transmission, function

The term power transmission refers to the transmission of propulsion power and engine torques. The engine
torques are transferred to the drive wheels by means of the mechanical-hydraulic connection between the
engine, torque converter and automatic transmission. The torques are converted in the transmission by several
planetary gearsets.

ca
rd
Power is transferred in the torque converter via the driven impeller by diverting hydraulic fluid to the turbine
wheel, which is connected to the transmission input shaft.

ia
gn
When the torque converter lockup clutch is engaged, power is transmitted via this mechanical connection. Via
the gear wheels of the individual planetary gear set the torques going out from the torque converter, depending

.c
on the gear ratio and shift elements actuated, are passed on to the output shaft using multi-disk clutches and

om
multi-disk brakes.

A reduction of the output speed in the low gears provides lower vehicle speeds with high tractive forces and
drive torques at the drive wheels.

Power flow in 1st gear, GF27.10-P-3011N

function
Power flow in 2nd gear, GF27.10-P-3012N
function
Power flow in 3rd gear, GF27.10-P-3013N
function
Power flow in 4th gear, GF27.10-P-3014N
function
Power flow in 5th gear, GF27.10-P-3015N
function
Power flow in 6th gear, GF27.10-P-3021N
function
Power flow in 7th gear, GF27.10-P-3026N
function
 Power flow in reverse gear GF27.10-P-3017N
in transmission mode "S",
function
Power flow in reverse GF27.10-P-3025N
gear, program selection"
C", function

KICK-DOWN, FUNCTION - GF27.10-P-2010

Kick-down, function - GF27.10-P-2010GA

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 163, 170, 202, 208, 210 with touch shift

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 203, 215, 220 up to 31.5.02

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 25: Identifying Kick-Down Function

Operation

The driver's wish for maximum acceleration of the vehicle is met with the kick-down function.

When the kick-down switch (S16/6) is operated a CAN Signal is passed on from the electronic selector lever
module control module (N15/5) to the ETC control module (N15/3) via the electronic accelerator.

Based on this information the ETC control module (N15/3) actuates the solenoid valves so that the upshifts and
downshifts take place at higher engine speed in order to achieve maximum performance.

Kick-down switch, GF27.19-P-5141GA

location/task/design

Kick-down, function - GF27.10-P-2010N

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230
TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

Illustrated on model 230

Fig. 26: Kick-Down Function Diagram - Transmission 722.9

ca
Kickdown, function

rd
The driver's wish for the maximum vehicle acceleration is met by the kickdown function.

ia
The kick-down function is activated from a pedal travel at the electronic accelerator > approx. 90 %.

gn
Furthermore the driver can detect an increase in pedal effort at the kick-down point. A kick-down simulator

.c
(100) is integrated in the electronic accelerator for this purpose.

om
The "kick-down" signal is recorded by the accelerator pedal sensor (B37), read in by the ME control unit
(N3/10) or the CDI control unit (N3/9) and relayed via the class C controller area network bus (engine
compartment) (CAN-C) to the fully integrated transmission control (VGS) control unit (Y3/8n4).

On the basis of this information, the fully integrated transmission control (VGS) control unit (Y3/8n4) actuates
the control solenoid valves such that upshift and downshift operations take place at increased engine speed to
achieve maximum performance.

Kick-down simulator, GF27.10-P-5108N

location/task

Kick-down, function - GF27.10-P-2010T

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 203 as of 1.6.02, 209, 211, 215, 220, 230 as of 1.6.02, 240
Fig. 27: Kick-Down Function Diagram - Transmission 722.6 In Model 203 As Of 1.6.02

Operation

The driver's wish for the maximum vehicle acceleration is met by the kickdown function.

ca
The kick-down function is activated starting from a pedal travel at the electronic accelerator of more than
approx.90%.

rd
ia
Furthermore the driver can detect an increase in pedal effort at the kick-down point. For this purpose a kick-

gn
down simulator is integrated in the electronic accelerator.

.c
The kick-down signal is recorded by the pedal value sensor (B37), read in by the ME-SFI control module

om
(N3/10) or CDI (N3/9) control module and passed on to the ETC control module (N15/3).

Based on this information the ETC control module (N15/3) actuates the solenoid valves so that the upshifts and
downshifts take place at higher engine speeds in order to achieve maximum performance.

Kick-down simulator, GF27.10-P-5108T

location/task

IGNITION SWITCH LOCK, FUNCTION - GF27.10-P-3003

Ignition lock interlock - GF27.10-P-3003GA

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODELS 203, 215, 220, 230, 240

Shown on floor shift in models 215, 220

Fig. 28: Identifying Ignition Lock Interlock - Shown On Floor Shift In Models 215, 220

Operation

ca
The mechanism of the ignition lock interlock connects the selector lever of the floor shift with the ETC control

rd
module (N73). It prevents the transmitter key (A8/1) from being withdrawn when the selector lever is not at

ia
position "P".

gn
When the parking lock is not engaged (selector lever position "D", "R", "N"), the locking valve (60) locks the

.c
locking cam (61). The compression spring (62) only pulls the locking valve (60) away from the locking cam

om
(61) in selector lever position "P". The transmitter key (A8/1) can now be turned to position "0" and removed
from the ignition.

Parking lock, location / GF27.10-P-5100GA

task / design / function

Ignition switch lock, function - GF27.10-P-3003N

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 215, 220, 230

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

Shows floor selector models 215, 220

Fig. 29: Identifying Ignition Lock Interlock - Shown On Floor Shift In Models 215, 220

Ignition switch lock, function

ca
The mechanism of the ignition lock interlock connects the selector lever of the floor shift with the ETC control

rd
unit (N73). It prevents the transmitter key (A8/1) from being withdrawn when the selector lever is not at

ia
position "P".

gn
When the parking lock is not engaged (selector lever position "D", "R", "N"), the locking valve (60) locks the

.c
locking cam (61). The compression spring (62) only pulls the locking valve (60) away from the locking cam

om
(61) in selector lever position "P". The transmitter key (A8/1) can now be turned to position "0" and removed
from the ignition.

Park pawl, location/task/design/function GF27.10-P-5100N

POWER FLOW IN 1ST GEAR, FUNCTION - GF27.10-P-3011

Power flow in 1st gear, function - GF27.10-P-3011G

TRANSMISSION 722.6
 ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 30: Identifying Power Flow In 1st Gear

Principle of power transmission in 1st gear:

The torque coming from the torque converter is increased and transmitted to the output shaft (5) via the input
shaft (1), involving all three planetary gear sets.

The following are not engaged:

Front multi-disk clutch (K1)

Center multi-disc clutch (K2)

Center multi-disk brake (B3)

Front planetary gear set

The input shaft (1) drives the internal gear (V4). In drive mode the sun gear (V1) is supported via the locked
freewheel F1 and in overrun mode via the engaged front multi-disk brake (B1) in the housing (B1). The planet
gears (V2) roll over the fixed sun gear (V1) and provide an increase in torque between the internal gear (V4)
and the planet carrier (V3). The planet carrier (V3) moves at reduced speed in the direction of engine rotation.

Rear planetary gear set

The internal gear (H4) turns at a reduced speed because of its mechanical connection to the front planet carrier
(H3). The sun gear (H1) is supported via the engaged rear multi-disk brake (B2) and in drive mode via the
locked freewheel (F2), in overrun mode via the engaged rear multi-disk clutch (K3) in the housing. The planet
gears (H2) roll over the fixed sun gear (H1) and provide an increase in torque between the internal gear (H4)
and the planet carrier (H3). The planet carrier (H3) moves at a reduced speed in the direction of engine rotation.

Center planetary gear set

The ring gear (M4) is driven at the same speed as the rear planet carrier (H3) as a result of a mechanical
connection. The sun gear (M1) is supported in the housing via the rear multi-disk brake (B2) (M1). The planet
gears (M2) roll over the fixed sun gear(M1) and provide an increase in torque between the internal gear (M4)
and the planet carrier (M3). The output shaft (5) connected to the planet carrier (M3) turns at a reduced speed in
the running direction of the engine.

ca
rd
Torque converter, GF27.20-P-5100G
location / task / design /

ia
function

gn
Planetary gear set, GF27.50-P-5100G
location / task / design /

.c
function

om
Multiple-disc brake, GF27.51-P-5100G
location / task / design /
function
Multi-plate clutch, GF27.51-P-5101G
location / task / design /
function
Location / task / design / GF27.51-P-5102G
function of freewheel

Power flow in 1st gear, function - GF27.10-P-3011N

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

Fig. 31: Power Flow In 1st Gear Function Diagram - Transmission 722.9

ca
The Ravigneaux gear set consists of the following components:

rd
 Short planet gears (PL2k)

ia
 Long planet gears (PL2l)

gn
 Small internal-geared wheel (5)

.c
 Dual planet carrier (6)

om
 Sun gear (7)
 Large internal-geared wheel (8)

The single front planetary gear system consists of the following components:

 Planet gears (PL9)

 Internal-geared wheel (12)
 Planet carrier (13)
 Sun gear (14)

The single rear planetary gear system consists of the following components:

 Planet gears (PL6)

 Internal-geared wheel (9)
 Planet carrier (10)
 Sun gear (11)

Power flow in 1st gear function

The following multi-disk brakes and multi-disk clutches are engaged:

 Multi-disk brake B2 (B2)

 Multi-disk brake B3 (B3)
 Multi-disk clutch K3 (K3)

Ravigneaux gear set

The small internal-geared wheel (5) is driven via the transmission input shaft. The long planet gears (PL2l)
drive the short planet gears (PL2k) which roll in the stalled large internal-geared wheel (8). As a result an
increased torque and a reduced rpm arise which are transferred to the dual planet carrier (6).

Single rear planetary gear system

The internal-geared wheel (9) rotates at the same speed due to the mechanical connection to the dual planet
carrier (6). The planet gears (PL6) roll over the stalled sun gear (11) and transmit the rotary motion to the planet
carrier (10).

Single front planetary gear system

ca
The internal-geared wheel (12) has a mechanical connection to the planet carrier (10) and rotates at the same

rd
speed. The planet gears (PL9) roll on the stalled sun gear (14) and transfer the increased torque and reduced

ia
rotational speed as a result to the transmission output shaft via the planet carrier (13).

gn
The transmission output shaft therefore rotates in the direction of rotation of the engine at reduced rpm relative

.c
to the transmission input shaft.

om
Torque converter, GF27.20-P-5100N
location/task/design/function
Planetary gear set, Ravigneaux gear set GF27.50-P-5100N
location/task/design/function
Simple planetary gear GF27.50-P-5100NN
system
Multi-disk brake, GF27.51-P-5104N
location/task/design
Multi-disk clutch, GF27.51-P-5103N
location/task/design

POWER FLOW IN 2ND GEAR, FUNCTION - GF27.10-P-3012

Power flow in 2nd gear, function - GF27.10-P-3012G

TRANSMISSION 722.6
 ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 32: Identifying Power Flow In 2nd Gear

Principle of power transmission in 2nd gear:

Torque from the torque converter is increased via the propeller shaft (1) and the center and rear planetary
gearset and transferred to the output shaft (5).

The following are not engaged:

Front multi-disk brake (B1)

Center multi-disk brake (B3)

Freewheel F1

Center multi-disk clutch (K2)

Front planetary gear set

The planet carrier (V3) and sun gear (V1) are rigidly connected to each other via the engaged front multi-disk
clutch (K1). The planetary gearset is therefore blocked and turns as a closed unit at the input speed due to the
mechanical connection of the ring gear (V4) and propeller shaft.

Rear planetary gear set

The internal gear (H4) turns at the input speed because of its mechanical connection to the front planet carrier
(V3). The sun gear (H1) is supported via the engaged rear multi-disk brake (B2) and in drive mode via the
locked freewheel (F2), in overrun mode via the engaged rear multi-disk clutch (K3) in the housing. The planet
gears (H2) roll over the fixed sun gear (H1) and provide an increase in torque between the internal gear (H4)
and the planet carrier (H3). The planet carrier (H3) moves at a reduced speed in the direction of engine rotation.

Center planetary gear set

The ring gear (M4) is driven at the same speed as the rear planet carrier (H3) as a result of a mechanical
connection. The sun gear (M1) is supported in the housing via the rear multi-disk brake (B2). The planet gears
(M2) roll over the fixed sun gear (M1) and provide an increase in torque between the internal gear (M4) and the
planet carrier (M3). The output shaft (5) connected to the planet carrier (M3) turns at a reduced speed in the

ca
running direction of the engine.

rd
Torque converter,

ia
GF27.20-P-5100G
location / task / design /

gn
function
Planetary gear set,

.c
GF27.50-P-5100G
location / task / design /

om
function
Multiple-disc brake, GF27.51-P-5100G
location / task / design /
function
Multi-plate clutch, GF27.51-P-5101G
location / task / design /
function
Location / task / design / GF27.51-P-5102G
function of freewheel

Power flow in 2nd gear, function - GF27.10-P-3012N

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

Fig. 33: Power Flow In 2nd Gear Function Diagram - Transmission 722.9

ca
The Ravigneaux gear set consists of the following components:

rd
 Short planet gears (PL2k)

ia
 Long planet gears (PL2l)

gn
 Small internal-geared wheel (5)

.c
 Dual planet carrier (6)

om
 Sun gear (7)
 Large internal-geared wheel (8)

The single front planetary gear system consists of the following components:

 Planet gears (PL9)

 Internal-geared wheel (12)
 Planet carrier (13)
 Sun gear (14)

The single rear planetary gear system consists of the following components:

 Planet gears (PL6)

 Internal-geared wheel (9)
 Planet carrier (10)
 Sun gear (11)

Power flow in 2nd gear, function

The following multi-disk brakes and multi-disk clutches are engaged:

 Multi-disk brake B1 (B1)

 Multi-disk brake B2 (B2)
 Multi-disk clutch K3 (K3)

Ravigneaux gear set

The small internal-geared wheel (5) is driven by the transmission input shaft. The long planetary gears (PL2l)
roll over the stalled sun gear (7) and transmit the torque increased as a result as well as the rpm reduced as a
result to the dual planet carrier (6).

Single rear planetary gear system

The internal-geared wheel (9) rotates at the same speed due to the mechanical connection to the dual planet
carrier (6). The planet gears (PL6) roll over the stalled sun gear (11) and transmit the rotary motion to the planet
carrier (10).

Single front planetary gear system

ca
The internal-geared wheel (12) has a mechanical connection to the planet carrier (10) and rotates at the same

rd
speed. The planet gears (PL9) roll on the stalled sun gear (14) and transfer the increased torque and reduced

ia
rotational speed as a result to the transmission output shaft via the planet carrier (13).

gn
The transmission output shaft therefore rotates in the direction of rotation of the engine at reduced rpm relative

.c
to the transmission input shaft.

om
Torque converter, GF27.20-P-5100N
location/task/design/function
Planetary gear set, Ravigneaux gear set GF27.50-P-5100N
location/task/design/function
Simple planetary gear GF27.50-P-5100NN
system
Multi-disk brake, GF27.51-P-5104N
location/task/design
Multi-disk clutch, GF27.51-P-5103N
location/task/design

POWER FLOW IN 3RD GEAR, FUNCTION - GF27.10-P-3013

Power flow in 3rd gear, function - GF27.10-P-3013G

TRANSMISSION 722.6
 ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 34: Identifying Power Flow In 3rd Gear

Principle of power transmission in 3rd gear:

Torque from the torque converter is increased via the propeller shaft (1) and the center planetary gearset and
transferred to the output shaft (5)." The following are not engaged:

Front multi-disk brake (B1)

Center multi-disk brake (B3)

Freewheel F1

Freewheel F2

Rear multi-disk clutch (K3)

Front planetary gear set

The planet carrier (V3) and sun gear (V1) are rigidly connected to each other via the engaged front multi-disk
clutch (K1). The planetary gearset is therefore blocked and turns as a closed unit at the input speed due to the
mechanical connection of the ring gear (V4) and propeller shaft.

Rear planetary gear set

The center multi-disk clutch (K2) is engaged and transmits the input speed of the input shaft (1) to the planet
carrier (H3) via the hollow gear (M4). The ring gear (H4) turns in the same way as the planet carrier (H3) due to
the mechanical connection with the locked front planetary gearset. This planetary gearset is therefore locked
and turns as a closed unit.

Center planetary gear set

The hollow gear (M4) rotates at input speed due to the engaged center multi-disk clutch (K2). The sun gear
(M1) is supported in the housing via the multi-disk brake (B2). The planet gears (M2) roll over the fixed sun
gear (M1) and provide an increase in torque between the internal gear (M4) and the planet carrier (M3). The
output shaft (5) connected to the planet carrier (M3) turns at a reduced speed in the running direction of the
engine.

ca
rd
Torque converter, GF27.20-P-5100G
location / task / design /

ia
function

gn
Planetary gear set, GF27.50-P-5100G
location / task / design /

.c
function

om
Multiple-disc brake, GF27.51-P-5100G
location / task / design /
function
Multi-plate clutch, GF27.51-P-5101G
location / task / design /
function

Power flow in 3rd gear, function - GF27.10-P-3013N

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

Fig. 35: Power Flow In 3rd Gear Function Diagram - Transmission 722.9

ca
The Ravigneaux gear set consists of the following components:

rd
 Short planet gears (PL2k)

ia
 Long planet gears (PL2l)

gn
 Small internal-geared wheel (5)

.c
 Dual planet carrier (6)

om
 Sun gear (7)
 Large internal-geared wheel (8)

The single front planetary gear system consists of the following components:

 Planet gears (PL9)

 Internal-geared wheel (12)
 Planet carrier (13)
 Sun gear (14)

The single rear planetary gear system consists of the following components:

 Planet gears (PL6)

 Internal-geared wheel (9)
 Planet carrier (10)
 Sun gear (11)

Power flow in 3rd gear, function

The following multi-disk brakes and multi-disk clutches are engaged:

 Multi-disk brake B2 (B2)

 Multi-disk clutch K1 (K1)
 Multi-disk clutch K3 (K3)

Ravigneaux gear set

Due to the engaged multi-disk clutch K1 (K1) the components of the Ravigneaux gear set are locked together
and pass on the transmission input torque and transmission input speed unchanged to the internal geared wheel
(9).

Single rear planetary gear system

The internal-geared wheel (9) drives the planet gears (PL6) an. These roll over the stalled sun gear (11) and
transmit the rotary motion to the planet carrier (10).

Single front planetary gear system

ca
The internal-geared wheel (12) has a mechanical connection to the planet carrier (10) and rotates at the same
speed.

rd
ia
The planet gears (PL9) roll on the stalled sun gear (14) and transfer the increased torque and reduced rotational

gn
speed as a result to the transmission output shaft via the planet carrier (13).

.c
The transmission output shaft therefore rotates in the direction of rotation of the engine at reduced rpm relative

om
to the transmission input shaft.

Torque converter, GF27.20-P-5100N

location/task/design/function
Planetary gear set, Ravigneaux gear set GF27.50-P-5100N
location/task/design/function
Simple planetary gear GF27.50-P-5100NN
system
Multi-disk brake, GF27.51-P-5104N
location/task/design
Multi-disk clutch, GF27.51-P-5103N
location/task/design

POWER FLOW IN 4TH GEAR, FUNCTION - GF27.10-P-3014

Power flow in 4th gear, function - GF27.10-P-3014G

TRANSMISSION 722.6
 ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 36: Identifying Power Flow In 4th Gear

Principle of power transmission in 4th gear:

The direct drive ratio of the 4th gear (i=1) means that there is no torque and speed conversion. Power is
transferred from the propeller shaft (1) to the output shaft (5) via three locked planetary gearsets (5). The
following are not engaged:

Front multi-disk brake (B1)

Rear multi-disk brake (B2)

Center multi-disk brake (B3)

Freewheel F1

Freewheel F2
Front planetary gear set

The planet carrier (V3) and sun gear (V1) are rigidly connected with each other via the engaged front multi-disk
clutch (K1). The planetary gearset is therefore blocked and turns as a closed unit at the input speed due to the
mechanical connection of the ring gear (V4) and propeller shaft.

Rear planetary gear set

The center multi-disk clutch (K2) is engaged and transmits the input speed of the input shaft (1) to the planet
carrier (H3) via the hollow gear (M4). The ring gear (H4) turns in the same way as the planet carrier (H3) due to
the mechanical connection with the locked front planetary gearset. This planetary gearset is therefore locked
and turns as a closed unit.

Center planetary gear set

The hollow gear (M4) rotates at input speed due to the engaged center multi-disk clutch (K2). The rear multi-
disk clutch (K3) connects the sun gears of the center planetary gear set (M1) and the rear planetary gear set
(H1). The planetary gearset is locked by the same speeds of the ring gear (M4) and the sun gear (M1) and it
turns as a closed unit.

ca
Torque converter, GF27.20-P-5100G

rd
location / task / design /
function

ia
Planetary gear set,

gn
GF27.50-P-5100G
location / task / design /
function

.c
Multi-plate clutch,

om
GF27.51-P-5101G
location / task / design /
function

Power flow in 4th gear, function - GF27.10-P-3014N

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

Fig. 37: Power Flow In 4th Gear Function Diagram - Transmission 722.9

ca
The Ravigneaux gear set consists of the following components:

rd
 Short planet gears (PL2k)

ia
 Long planet gears (PL2l)

gn
 Small internal-geared wheel (5)

.c
 Dual planet carrier (6)

om
 Sun gear (7)
 Large internal-geared wheel (8)

The single front planetary gear system consists of the following components:

 Planet gears (PL9)

 Internal-geared wheel (12)
 Planet carrier (13)
 Sun gear (14)

The single rear planetary gear system consists of the following components:

 Planet gears (PL6)

 Internal-geared wheel (9)
 Planet carrier (10)
 Sun gear (11)

Power flow in 4th gear, function

The following multi-disk brakes and multi-disk clutches are engaged:

 Multi-disk brake B2 (B2)

 Multi-disk clutch K1 (K1)
 Multi-disk clutch K2 (K2)

Ravigneaux gear set

Due to the engaged multi-disk clutch K1 (K1) the components of the Ravigneaux gear set are locked together
and pass on the transmission input torque and transmission input speed unchanged to the internal geared wheel
(9).

Single rear planetary gear system

The rpm of the ring gear (9) and ring gear (12) is the same due to the engaged multi-disk clutch K2 (K2). As a
result the single rear planetary gear system is locked and not actively involved in the gear ratio.

Single front planetary gear system

ca
Due to the engaged multi-disk clutch K2 (K2) the internal-geared wheel (12) is driven at transmission input
speed. The planet gears (PL9) roll on the stalled sun gear (14) and transfer the increased torque and reduced

rd
rotational speed as a result to the transmission output shaft via the planet carrier (13).

ia
gn
The transmission output shaft therefore rotates in the direction of rotation of the engine at reduced rpm relative
to the transmission input shaft.

.c
om
Torque converter, GF27.20-P-5100N
location/task/design/function
Planetary gear set, Ravigneaux gear set GF27.50-P-5100N
location/task/design/function
Simple planetary gear GF27.50-P-5100NN
system
Multi-disk brake, GF27.51-P-5104N
location/task/design
Multi-disk clutch, GF27.51-P-5103N
location/task/design

POWER FLOW IN 5TH GEAR, FUNCTION - GF27.10-P-3015

Power flow in 5th gear, function - GF27.10-P-3015G

TRANSMISSION 722.6
 ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 38: Identifying Power Flow In 5th Gear

Principle of power transmission in 5th gear

Torque from the torque converter is increased via the propeller shaft (1) and all three planetary gearsets and
transferred to the output shaft (5).

The following are not engaged:

Rear multi-disk brake (B2)

Center multi-disk brake (B3)

Freewheel F2

Front multi-disk clutch (K1)

Front planetary gear set

The input shaft (1) drives the internal gear (V4). In drive mode the sun gear (V1) is supported via the locked
freewheel (F1) and in overrun mode in the housing via the engaged front multi-disk brake (B1). The planet
gears (V2) roll over the fixed sun gear (V1) and provide an increase in torque between the internal gear (V4)
and the planet carrier (V3). The planet carrier (V3) moves at reduced speed in the direction of engine ration.

Rear planetary gear set

The center multi-disk clutch (K2) is engaged and transmits the input speed of the input shaft (1) to the planet
carrier (H3) via the hollow gear (M4). The internal gear (H4) turns at a reduced speed because of its mechanical
connection to the front planet carrier (V3). The planet gears (H2) turn between the ring gear (H4) and the sun
gear (H1). The sun gear (H1) moves at increased speed in the direction of engine rotation.

Center planetary gear set

The hollow gear (M4) rotates at input speed due to the engaged center multi-disk clutch (K2). The rear multi-
disk clutch (K3) transmits a higher speed to the sun gear (M1) due to the connection to the sun gear (H1). The
planet gears (M2) turn between the ring gear (M4) and the sun gear (M1). The speed of the planet carrier (M3)
and the output shaft connected to the planet carrier (5) lies between that of the ring gear (M4) and the sun gear

ca
(M1). This provides a step-up ratio.

rd
Torque converter,

ia
GF27.20-P-5100G
location / task / design /

gn
function
Planetary gear set,

.c
GF27.50-P-5100G
location / task / design /

om
function
Multiple-disc brake, GF27.51-P-5100G
location / task / design /
function
Multi-plate clutch, GF27.51-P-5101G
location / task / design /
function

Power flow in 5th gear, function - GF27.10-P-3015N

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

Fig. 39: Power Flow In 5th Gear Function Diagram - Transmission 722.9

ca
The Ravigneaux gear set consists of the following components:

rd
 Short planet gears (PL2k)

ia
 Long planet gears (PL2l)

gn
 Small internal-geared wheel (5)

.c
 Dual planet carrier (6)

om
 Sun gear (7)
 Large internal-geared wheel (8)

The single front planetary gear system consists of the following components:

 Planet gears (PL9)

 Internal-geared wheel (12)
 Planet carrier (13)
 Sun gear (14)

The single rear planetary gear system consists of the following components:

 Planet gears (PL6)

 Internal-geared wheel (9)
 Planet carrier (10)
 Sun gear (11)

Power flow in 5th gear, function

The following multi-disk clutches are engaged:

 Multi-disk clutch K1 (K1)

 Multi-disk clutch K2 (K2)
 Multi-disk clutch K3 (K3)

The power flow runs from the transmission input shaft at the input (A) of the automatic transmission (AG) via
the locked Ravigneaux gear set and the locked front single planetary gear set to the output (B). The transmission
output shaft rotates at the transmission input speed in the direction of rotation of the engine.

Torque converter, GF27.20-P-5100N

location/task/design/function
Planetary gear set, Ravigneaux gear set GF27.50-P-5100N
location/task/design/function
Simple planetary gear GF27.50-P-5100NN
system
Multi-disk brake, GF27.51-P-5104N
location/task/design

ca
Multi-disk clutch, GF27.51-P-5103N
location/task/design

rd
ia
POWER FLOW IN REVERSE GEAR, PROGRAM SELECTION "W", FUNCTION - GF27.10-P-

gn
3016G

.c
TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 129, 140, 170, 202, 203 up to 31.5.03, 208, 209.3 up to 31.5.03, 210,

om
211 up to 31.8.03, 215, 220 up to 31.8.02, 230 up to 31.8.03

Fig. 40: Power Transmission Flow In Reverse Gear, Program Selection "W", Function Diagram -
Transmission 722.6 (1 Of 2)
Fig. 41: Power Transmission Flow In Reverse Gear, Program Selection "W", Function Diagram -
Transmission 722.6 (2 Of 2)

Principle of power flow in reverse gear:

Program selection "W"

ca
rd
Torque from the torque converter is increased via the drive shaft (1)

ia
Torque from the torque converter is increased via the drive shaft (1) and the center planetary gearset and rear

gn
planetary gearset and transferred with reversed direction of rotation to the output shaft (5).

.c
The following components are not engaged:

om
 Front multi-disk brake (B1)
 Rear multi-disk brake (B2)
 Freewheel (F1)
 Freewheel (F2)
 Center multi-disk clutch (K2)

Front planetary gearset

The planet carrier (V3) and sun gear (V1) are rigidly connected via the engaged front multi-disk clutch (K1).
The planetary gearset is therefore locked and turns as a closed unit at the input speed due to the mechanical
connection of the internal-geared wheel (V4) and drive shaft (1).

Rear planetary gearset

The engaged center multi-disk brake (B3) holds the planet carrier (H3) against the housing. The internal geared
wheel (H4) turns at the input speed because of its mechanical connection with the locked planet carrier (V3).
The planet gears (H2) turn between the internal-geared wheel (H4) and the sun gear (H1). The direction is
reversed by the fixed planet carrier (H3) so that the sun gear (H1) turns in the opposite direction to the running
direction of the engine.
Center planetary gearset

The internal geared wheel (M4) is held against the housing by the center multi-disk brake (B3) via the
mechanical connection with the planet carrier (H3). The sun gear (M1) turns backwards due to the engaged rear
multi-disk clutch K3. The planet gears (M2) turn on the fixed internal-geared wheel (M4) and increase the
torque from the sun gear (M1) to the planet carrier (M3). The output shaft (5) connected to the planet carrier
(M3) turns at a reduced speed in the opposite direction to the running direction of the engine.

Torque converter, GF27.20-P-5100G

location/task/design/function
Planetary gearset, GF27.50-P-5100G
location/task/design/function
Multi-disk brake, GF27.51-P-5100G
location/task/design/function
Multi-disk clutch, GF27.51-P-5101G
location/task/design/function
Freewheel, GF27.51-P-5102G
location/task/design/function

ca
FUNCTION OF POWER FLOW IN REVERSE GEAR FUNCTION OF PROGRAM SELECTION "S"

rd
- GF27.10-P-3017

ia
Function of power flow in reverse gear Function of program selection "S" - GF27.10-P-3017G

gn
TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 129, 140, 170, 202, 203, 208, 209, 210, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230, 240

.c
om

Fig. 42: Power Transmission Flow In Reverse Gear Function Of Program Selection "S" Diagram -
Transmission 722.6 (1 Of 2)
Fig. 43: Power Transmission Flow In Reverse Gear Function Of Program Selection "S" Diagram -
Transmission 722.6 (2 Of 2)

Principle of power transmission in reverse gear

ca
Program selection "S"

rd
Torque from the torque converter is increased via the propeller shaft (1) and all three planetary gearsets and

ia
transferred with reversed direction of rotation to the output shaft (5).

gn
The following are not engaged:

.c
om
 Rear multi-disk brake (B2)
 Freewheel F2
 Front multi-disk clutch (K1)

Front planetary gear set

The input shaft (1) drives the internal gear (V4). In drive mode the sun gear (V1) is supported via the locked
freewheel (F1) and in overrun mode in the housing via the engaged front multi-disk brake (B1). The planetary
gears (V2) roll on the stationary internal gear (V1) and ensure a torque increase from the sun gear (V4) to the
planet carrier (V3). The planet carrier (V3) moves at reduced speed in the direction of engine rotation.

Rear planetary gear set

The planet carrier (H3) is held securely in the housing due to the engaged center multi-disk brake. (B3) The
internal gear (H4) turns at a reduced speed because of its mechanical connection to the front planet carrier (V3).
The planet gears (H2) turn between the ring gear (H4) and the sun gear (H1). The direction is reversed due to
the securely held planet carrier (H3) so that the sun gear (H1) rotates in the opposite direction to the engine.

Center planetary gear set

The hollow gear (M4) is held securely in the housing by the center multi-disk brake (B3) via the mechanical
connection to the planet carrier (H3). The sun gear (M1) rotates backwards due to the engaged rear multi-disk
clutch (K3). The planetary gears (M2) roll on the stationary internal gear (M4) and ensure a torque increase
from the sun stationary internal gear (M4) and ensure a torque increase from the sun gear (M1) to the planet
carrier (M3). The output shaft (5) connected to the planet carrier (M3) turns at a reduced speed in the opposite
direction to the running direction of the engine.

Torque converter, GF27.20-P-5100G

location/task/design/function
Planetary gear set, GF27.50-P-5100G
location/task/design/function
Multi-disk brake, GF27.51-P-5100G
location/task/design/function
Multi-disk clutch, GF27.51-P-5101G
location/task/design/function
Overrunning clutch, GF27.51-P-5102G
location/task/design/function

Function of power flow in reverse gear Function of program selection" S" - GF27.10-P-3017N

ca
rd
TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230

ia
TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

gn
.c
om

Fig. 44: Power Flow In Reverse Gear Function Diagram - Transmission 722.9

The Ravigneaux gear set consists of the following components:

 Short planet gears (PL2k)

  Long planet gears (PL2l)
 Small internal-geared wheel (5)
 Dual planet carrier (6)
 Sun gear (7)
 Large internal-geared wheel (8)

The single front planetary gear system consists of the following components:

 Planet gears (PL9)

 Internal-geared wheel (12)
 Planet carrier (13)
 Sun gear (14)

The single rear planetary gear system consists of the following components:

 Planet gears (PL6)

 Internal-geared wheel (9)

ca
 Planet carrier (10)

rd
 Sun gear (11)

ia
Power flow in reverse gear, program selection "S", function

gn
The following multi-disk brakes and multi-disk clutches are engaged:

.c
om
 BR multi-disk brake BR
 Multi-disk brake B1 (B1)
 Multi-disk clutch K3 (K3)

Ravigneaux gear set

The small internal-geared wheel (5) is driven by the transmission input shaft. The long planet gears (PL2l) roll
over the stalled sun gear (7) and transmit the increased torque and reduced rotational speed as a result to the
dual planet carrier (6).

Single rear planetary gear system

The internal-geared wheel (9) rotates at the same speed due to the mechanical connection to the dual planet
carrier (6). The planet gears (PL6) roll on the sun gear (11). The sun gear (11) reverses its direction due to the
stalled planet carrier (10).

Single front planetary gear system

There is a connection between the sun gear (14) and sun gear (11) via the engaged multi-disk clutch K3 (K3).
As a result sun gear (14) rotates at the same speed and direction of rotation as the sun gear (11) and drives the
planet gears (PL9). The increased torque and reduced rotational speed as a result are transmitted via the planet
carrier (13) to the transmission output shaft.

The transmission output shaft therefore rotates in the direction of rotation of the engine at reduced rpm relative
to the transmission input shaft.

Torque converter, GF27.20-P-5100N

location/task/design/function
Planetary gear set, Ravigneaux gear set GF27.50-P-5100N
location/task/design/function
Simple planetary gear GF27.50-P-5100NN
system
Multi-disk brake, GF27.51-P-5104N
location/task/design
Multi-disk clutch, GF27.51-P-5103N
location/task/design

LOCKING OF SELECTOR LEVER POSITION "P", FUNCTION - GF27.10-P-3020

ca
Function of locking of selector lever position "P" - GF27.10-P-3020GA

rd
TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODELS 215, 220, 230, 240

ia
gn
Shown on model 215, 220

.c
om
Fig. 45: Identifying Function Of Locking Selector Lever Position P (Shown On Model 215, 220)

Operation

One of the functions of the shift lock is to lock the selector lever in position "P". The selector lever is locked
electronically.

The selector remains disabled in position "P" if no approval is given by the drive authorization system or the
brake is not operated or there is no power supply to the electronic selector lever module control module
(N15/5).

On receipt of a valid drive authorization code from the EIS (EZS) control module, via the engine compartment
bus (CAN) the electronic selector lever module control module (N15/5) actuates the R/P locking solenoids (89)
when the brake pedal is pressed and therefore the stop lamp switch (S9/1). The signal from the triggered brake
lamp switch (S9/1) is also transmitted to the electronic selector lever module control module (N15/5) via the
engine compartment bus (CAN).

The R/P locking magnet (89) releases the selector lever thus allowing the selector lever to be moved away from
position "P".

Parking lock, location / task / design / function GF27.10-P-5100GA

Locking of selector lever position "P", function - GF27.10-P-3020N

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 215, 220, 230

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

ca
Shown on model 215, 220

rd
ia
gn
.c
Fig. 46: Identifying Locking Of Selector Lever Position P Function (Shown On Model 215, 220) om
Function of locking of selector lever position "P"

One of the functions of the shift lock is to lock the selector lever in position "P". The selector lever is locked
electronically.

The selector remains disabled in position "P" if no approval is given by the drive authorization system or the
brake is not operated or there is no power supply to the electronic selector lever module control unit (N15/5).

Upon receipt of a valid drive authorization code from the electronic ignition switch control unit (N73) via the
Controller Area Network bus Class C (engine compartment) (CAN-C), the electronic selector lever module
control unit (N15/5) actuates the R/P blocking magnets (89) when the brake pedal is pressed and therefore the
stop lamp switch is actuated (S9/1). The signal from the stop lamp switch (S9/1) which has been operated is
likewise conveyed to the electronic selector lever module control unit (N15/5) via CAN-C. The R/P locking
magnet (89) releases the selector lever thus allowing the selector lever to be moved away from position "P".

Park pawl, location/task/design/function GF27.10-P-5100N

POWER FLOW IN 6TH GEAR, FUNCTION - GF27.10-P-3021N

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 47: Power Flow In 6th Gear Function Diagram - Transmission 722.9

The Ravigneaux gear set consists of the following components:

 Short planet gears (PL2k)

 Long planet gears (PL2l)
 Small internal-geared wheel (5)
 Dual planet carrier (6)
 Sun gear (7)
 Large internal-geared wheel (8)

The single front planetary gear system consists of the following components:

 Planet gears (PL9)

 Internal-geared wheel (12)
 Planet carrier (13)
  Sun gear (14)

The single rear planetary gear system consists of the following components:

 Planet gears (PL6)

 Internal-geared wheel (9)
 Planet carrier (10)
 Sun gear (11)

Power flow in 6th gear, function

The following multi-disk brakes and multi-disk clutches are engaged:

 Multi-disk brake B1 (B1)

 Multi-disk clutch K2 (K2)
 Multi-disk clutch K3 (K3)

Ravigneaux gear set

ca
The small internal-geared wheel (5) is driven by the transmission input shaft. The long planet gears (PL2l) roll

rd
over the stalled sun gear (7) and transmit the increased torque and reduced rotational speed as a result to the

ia
dual planet carrier (6).

gn
Rear single planetary gear system

.c
om
The internal-geared wheel (9) rotates at the same speed due to the mechanical connection to the dual planet
carrier (6). The planet gears (PL6) transmit the rotary motion to the sun gear (11). Sun gear (11) passes on the
rotational speed to sun gear (14) via the closed multidisk clutch K3 (K3).

Single front planetary gear system

The transmission input torque and transmission input speed are transmitted to the internal-geared wheel (12) by
the closed multi-disk clutch K2 (K2). An increased rpm and a reduced torque occurs due to the rpm difference
between the sun gear (14) and the ring gear (12). These are passed on via the planet carrier (13) to the
transmission output shaft.

The transmission output shaft therefore rotates in the direction of rotation of the engine at reduced rpm relative
to the transmission input shaft.

Torque converter, GF27.20-P-5100N

location/task/design/function
Planetary gear set, Ravigneaux gear set GF27.50-P-5100N
location/task/design/function
Simple planetary gear GF27.50-P-5100NN
system
 Multi-disk brake, GF27.51-P-5104N
location/task/design
Multi-disk clutch, GF27.51-P-5103N
location/task/design

OIL LEVEL CONTROL, FUNCTION - GF27.10-P-3024

Oil level control, function - GF27.10-P-3024G

TRANSMISSION 722.6

Operation

The oil level control system seals the opening between the oil gallery and gearset chamber so that the rotating
gearsets do not splash about in oil as the oil level rises. The oil level control reduces power loss and prevents oil
from being thrown out of the transmission housing at high oil temperatures.

Float, location/function GF27.10-P-5107G

Transmission housing GF27.40-P-2007G

ca
breathing, location/task

rd
Oil level control, function - GF27.10-P-3024N

ia
gn
TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230

.c
TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

om
The oil level control seals the openings between the oil chamber and gear seat chamber so that the rotating gear
sets do not churn in the oil as the oil level increases.

The oil level control reduces power loss and prevents oil from being thrown out of the transmission housing at
high oil temperatures.

Float, location/function GF27.10-P-5107N

Transmission housing GF27.40-P-2007N
ventilation, location/task

POWER FLOW IN REVERSE GEAR, PROGRAM SELECTION" C", FUNCTION - GF27.10-P-3025

Power flow in reverse gear, program selection" C", function - GF27.10-P-3025G

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in model 203, 209.3 as of 1.6.03, 209.4, 211 as of 1.9.03, 215 as of 1.9.02, 219, 220
as of 1.9.02, 230 as of 1.9.03, 240
Fig. 48: Power Flow In Reverse Gear, Program Selection "C", Function Diagram - Transmission 722.6 (1
Of 2)

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 49: Power Flow In Reverse Gear, Program Selection "C", Function Diagram - Transmission 722.6 (2
Of 2)

Principle of power transmission in reverse gear

Program selection "C"

Torque from the torque converter is increased via the drive shaft (1) and the center planetary gearset and rear
planetary gearset and transferred with reversed direction of rotation to the output shaft (5).

The following are not engaged:

 Front multi-disk brake (B1)

 Rear multi-disk brake (B2)
  Freewheel (F1)
 Freewheel (F2)
 Center multi-disk clutch (K2)

Front planetary gear set

The planet carrier (V3) and sun gear (V1) are rigidly connected to each other via the engaged front multi-disk
clutch (K1). The planetary gearset is therefore blocked and turns as a closed unit at the input speed due to the
mechanical connection of the ring gear (V4) and propeller shaft.

Rear planetary gear set

The planet carrier (H3) is held securely in the housing due to the engaged center multi-disk brake (B3). The
internal geared wheel (H4) turns at the input speed because of its mechanical connection with the locked planet
carrier (V3). The planet gears (H2) turn between the ring gear (H4) and the sun gear (H1). The direction is
reversed due to the securely held planet carrier (H3) so that the sun gear (H1) rotates in the opposite direction to
the engine.

Center planetary gear set

ca
rd
The hollow gear (M4) is held securely in the housing by the center multi-disk brake (B3) via the mechanical
connection to the planet carrier (H3). The sun gear (M1) rotates backwards due to the engaged rear multi-disk

ia
clutch (K3). The planetary gears (M2) roll on the stationary internal gear (M4) and ensure for a torque increase

gn
from the sun gear (M1) to the planet carrier (M3). The output shaft (5) connected to the planet carrier (M3)
turns at a reduced speed in the opposite direction to the running direction of the engine.

.c
om
Torque converter, GF27.20-P-5100G
location/task/design/function
Planetary gear set, GF27.50-P-5100G
location/task/design/
function
Multi-disk brake, GF27.51-P-5100G
location/task/design/function
Multi-disk clutch, GF27.51-P-5101G
location/task/design/function
Overrunning clutch, GF27.51-P-5102G
location/task/design/
function

Power flow in reverse gear, program selection" C", function - GF27.10-P-3025N

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

Fig. 50: Power Flow In Reverse Gear, Program Selection "C" Function Diagram - Transmission 722.9

ca
The Ravigneaux gear set consists of the following components:

rd
 Short planet gears (PL2k)

ia
 Long planet gears (PL2l)

gn
 Small internal-geared wheel (5)

.c
 Dual planet carrier (6)

om
 Sun gear (7)
 Large internal-geared wheel (8)

The single front planetary gear system consists of the following components:

 Planet gears (PL9)

 Internal-geared wheel (12)
 Planet carrier (13)
 Sun gear (14)

The single rear planetary gear system consists of the following components:

 Planet gears (PL6)

 Internal-geared wheel (9)
 Planet carrier (10)
 Sun gear (11)

Power flow in reverse gear, program selection" C", function

The following multi-disk brakes and multi-disk clutches are engaged:

 BR multi-disk brake BR
 Multi-disk brake B3 (B3)
 Multi-disk clutch K3 (K3)

Ravigneaux gear set

The small internal-geared wheel (5) is driven via the transmission input shaft. The long planet gears (PL2l)
drive the short planet gears(PL2k) which roll in the stalled large internal-geared wheel (8). The increased torque
and reduced rotational speed as a result are transmitted to the dual planet carrier (6).

Single rear planetary gear system

The internal-geared wheel (9) rotates at the same speed due to the mechanical connection to the dual planet
carrier (6). The planet gears (PL6) roll on the sun gear (11). The sun gear (11) reverses its direction due to the
stalled planet carrier (10).

Single front planetary gear system

ca
There is a connection between the sun gear (14) and sun gear (11) via the engaged multi-disk clutch K3 (K3).

rd
As a result sun gear (14) rotates at the same speed and direction of rotation as the sun gear (11) and drives the

ia
planet gears (PL9). The increased torque and reduced rotational speed as a result are transmitted via the planet

gn
carrier (13) to the transmission output shaft. The transmission output shaft therefore rotates in the direction of
rotation of the engine at reduced rpm relative to the transmission input shaft.

.c
om
Torque converter, GF27.20-P-5100N
location/task/design/function
Planetary gear set, Ravigneaux gear set GF27.50-P-5100N
location/task/design/function
Simple planetary gear GF27.50-P-5100NN
system
Multi-disk brake, GF27.51-P-5104N
location/task/design
Multi-disk clutch, GF27.51-P-5103N
location/task/design

POWER FLOW IN 7TH GEAR, FUNCTION - GF27.10-P-3026N

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

Fig. 51: Power Flow In 7th Gear Function Diagram - Transmission 722.9

ca
The Ravigneaux gear set consists of the following components:

rd
 Short planet gears (PL2k)

ia
 Long planet gears (PL2l)

gn
 Small internal-geared wheel (5)

.c
 Dual planet carrier (6)

om
 Sun gear (7)
 Large internal-geared wheel (8)

The single front planetary gear system consists of the following components:

 Planet gears (PL9)

 Internal-geared wheel (12)
 Planet carrier (13)
 Sun gear (14)

The single rear planetary gear system consists of the following components:

 Planet gears (PL6)

 Internal-geared wheel (9)
 Planet carrier (10)
 Sun gear (11)

Power flow in 7th gear function

The following multi-disk brakes and multi-disk clutches are engaged:

 Multi-disk brake B3 (B3)

 Multi-disk clutch K2 (K2)
 Multi-disk clutch K3 (K3)

Ravigneaux gear set

The small internal-geared wheel (5) is driven via the transmission input shaft. The long planet gears (PL2l)
drive the short planet gears (PL2k) which roll in the stalled large internal-geared wheel (8). The increased
torque and reduced rotational speed as a result are transmitted to the dual planet carrier (6).

Single rear planetary gear system

The internal-geared wheel (9) rotates at the same speed due to the mechanical connection to the dual planet
carrier (6). The planet gears (PL6) transmit the rotary motion to the sun gear (11). Sun gear (11) passes on the
rotational speed to sun gear (14) via the closed multidisk clutch K3 (K3).

Single front planetary gear system

ca
The transmission input torque and transmission input speed are transmitted to the internal-geared wheel (12) by

rd
the closed multi-disk clutch K2 (K2). An increased rpm and a reduced torque occurs due to the rpm difference

ia
between the sun gear (14) and the ring gear (12). These are passed on via the planet carrier (13) to the

gn
transmission output shaft. The transmission output shaft therefore rotates in the direction of rotation of the
engine at reduced rpm relative to the transmission input shaft.

.c
om
Torque converter, GF27.20-P-5100N
location/task/design/function
Planetary gear set, Ravigneaux gear set GF27.50-P-5100N
location/task/design/function
Simple planetary gear GF27.50-P-5100NN
system
Multi-disk brake, GF27.51-P-5104N
location/task/design
Multi-disk clutch, GF27.51-P-5103N
location/task/design

PARK PAWL, LOCATION/TASK/DESIGN/FUNCTION - GF27.10-P-5100

Park pawl, location/task/design/function - GF27.10-P-5100GA

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 163, 170, 202, 208, 210 With Tapping Circuit

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230, 240
Fig. 52: Identifying Parking Lock Gear And Park Pawl Mechanism - Transmission 722.6

Park pawl, location The park pawl gear (4) and

park pawl mechanism (4a)
are located in the rear part
of the transmission

ca
housing.
Park pawl, task Secures the vehicle

rd
mechanically to prevent it

ia
from rolling in addition to

gn
the parking brake.
Park pawl, design GF27.10-P-5100-03GA

.c
Park pawl, function GF27.10-P-5100-02GA

om
Park pawl, function - GF27.10-P-5100-02GA

Transmission 722.6 in models 163, 170, 202, 208, 210 with touch shift Transmission 722.6 in models 171.4,
203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230, 240
Fig. 53: Identifying Park Pawl Function (With Touch Shift)

ca
In selector lever position "P" the cone (42) moves between the park detent (43) and pilot bushing (40). The
parking lock pawl (43) is therefore pushed against the parking lock gear (4). If the tooth of the parking lock

rd
pawl (43) does not engage in a tooth space when the vehicle is stationary, but rather touches a tooth of the
parking lock gear (4), the cone (42) is pre-tensioned by the spring (41) and positioned ready for operation. If the

ia
parking lock gear (4) continues to turn, the parking lock pawl (43) engages in the next tooth space.

gn
To prevent damage due to misuse, the intervals between the tooth gaps are such that the park detent (43) can

.c
only engage when the vehicle is stationary or crawling at low speed. If the vehicle rolls faster, the shape of the

om
teeth prevents the parking lock pawl (43) from engaging

Park pawl, design - GF27.10-P-5100-03GA

Transmission 722.6 in models 163, 170, 202, 208, 210 with touch shift Transmission 722.6 in models 171.4,
203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230, 240
Fig. 54: Identifying Park Pawl - Design (Transmission 722.6)

ca
Parking lock, location / task / design / function - GF27.10-P-5100N

rd
TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230

ia
TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

gn
.c
om
Fig. 55: Identifying Parking Pawl Gear And Park Pawl Mechanism - Transmission 722.9

Park pawl, location The park pawl gear (4)

and park pawl mechanism
(4a) are located in the rear
area of the transmission
housing.
Park pawl, task Secures the vehicle
 mechanically to prevent it
from rolling in addition to
the parking brake.
Park pawl, design GF27.10-P-5100-03N
Park pawl, function GF27.10-P-5100-02N

Park pawl, function - GF27.10-P-5100-02N

Transmission 722.9 in model 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230, 463.303/340/341

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 56: Identifying Park Pawl Gear And Detent Plate - Transmission 722.9

In selector lever position "P" the cone (42) moves between the park detent (43) and pilot bushing (40). The
parking lock pawl (43) is therefore pushed against the parking lock gear (4). If the tooth of the parking lock
pawl (43) does not engage in a tooth space when the vehicle is stationary, but rather touches a tooth of the
parking lock gear (4), the cone (42) is pre-tensioned by the spring (41) and positioned ready for operation. If the
parking lock gear (4) continues to turn, the parking lock pawl (43) engages in the next tooth space.

To prevent damage due to misuse, the intervals between the tooth gaps are such that the park detent (43) can
only engage when the vehicle is stationary or crawling at low speed. If the vehicle rolls faster, the shape of the
teeth prevents the parking lock pawl (43) from engaging.

Park pawl, design - GF27.10-P-5100-03N

Transmission 722.9 in model 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230, 463.303/340/341
Fig. 57: Identifying Park Pawl Gear And Detent Plate - Transmission 722.9

ca
LOCATION / TASK / DESIGN / FUNCTION OF OIL PUMP - GF27.10-P-5103

rd
Location / task / design / function of oil pump - GF27.10-P-5103G

ia
gn
TRANSMISSION 722.6

.c
om
Fig. 58: Identifying Oil Pump Components Location

Oil pump, location The oil pump (crescent-

type pump) (6) is installed
in the torque converter
housing behind the torque
converter and is driven by
the drive flange of the
 torque converter.
Oil pump, task To produce the necessary
oil pressure for the
hydraulic sequences.
Oil pump, design An external gear (6a) which
is mounted eccentrically in
the pump housing in
located on the internal gear
(6b) which is connected to
the drive flange (6b). The
crescent (6c) drives the
external gear (6a).
Oil pump, function When the engine is running
oil is delivered through the
suction gallery (6e) along
the top and bottom side of
the crescent (6c) to the
pressure chamber (6d) of
the housing. The meshing

ca
of the teeth prevents oil
from flowing from the

rd
pressure side to the suction

ia
side.

gn
Location / task / design / function of oil pump - GF27.10-P-5103N

.c
om
TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

Fig. 59: Identifying Oil Pump Location - Transmission 722.9

Oil pump, location The oil pump (crescent-

 type pump) (6) is installed
in the torque converter
housing behind the torque
converter and is driven by
the drive flange of the
torque converter.
Oil pump, task To produce the oil
pressure required for the
hydraulic sequences
Oil pump, design An external gear (6a)
which is mounted
eccentrically in the pump
housing in located on the
internal gear (6b) which is
connected to the drive
flange (6b). The crescent
(6c) drives the external
gear (6a).
Oil pump, function When the engine is

ca
running oil is delivered
through the suction gallery

rd
(6e) along the top and

ia
bottom side of the crescent
(6c) to the pressure

gn
chamber (6d) of the

.c
housing. The meshing of
the teeth prevents oil from

om
flowing from the pressure
side to the suction side.

FLOAT, LOCATION/FUNCTION - GF27.10-P-5107

Float, location/function - GF27.10-P-5107G

TRANSMISSION 722.6
Fig. 60: Identifying Electric Control Unit And Float

Float, location In the electrical control

unit (Y3/6).
Float, function GF27.10-P-5107-04G

ca
Float, function - GF27.10-P-5107-04G

rd
Transmission 722.6

ia
gn
.c
om

Fig. 61: Identifying Float Function

Function

With low oil levels, the lubricating oil which flows constantly out of the gearset, flows back to oil gallery (A)
though the opening (46). If the oil level rises, the oil presses the float (45) against the housing.
The float (45) therefore separates the oil gallery (A) from the gearset chamber (B). The lubricating oil which
continues to flow out of the gearsets is thrown against the housing wall, incorporated by the rotating parts and
flows back into the oil gallery (A) through the upper opening (arrow).

Float, location/function - GF27.10-P-5107N

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 171.4,

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.30

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 62: Identifying Float 1, Float 2 And Electrical Control Unit Location - Transmission 722.9

Float, location Float 1 (31) and float 2

(32) are accommodated in
the electric control unit
(VGS) (Y3/8).
Float, function As the oil level rises, float
1 (31) and float 2 (32) seal
the openings between the
oil chamber and the gear
set chamber.

KICKDOWN SIMULATOR, LOCATION/TASK - GF27.10-P-5108

Kickdown simulator, location/task - GF27.10-P-5108N

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

Illustrated on model 230

Fig. 63: Identifying Kickdown Simulator (Transmission 722.9) - Illustrated On Model 230

Kick-down simulator, The kick-down simulator

location (100) is located in the

ca
footwell, installed in the
electronic accelerator.

rd
Kick-down simulator, task The kick-down simulator

ia
(100) enables the driver to

gn
detect the use of the kick-
down function with his

.c
foot.

om
Kick-down simulator, location/task - GF27.10-P-5108T

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in model 203 as of 1.6.02, 209, 211, 215 as of 1.6.02, 219, 220, 230 as of 1.6.02, 240

Illustrated on Model 230

Fig. 64: Identifying Kickdown Simulator (Transmission 722.6) - Illustrated On Model 230
 Kick-down simulator, The kick-down simulator
location (100) is located in the
footwell, installed in the
electronic accelerator.
Kick-down simulator, task The kick-down simulator
(100) enables the driver to
detect with his foot that
kick-down function is
used.

SURVEY OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS, AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (AT), LOCATION / TASK /

DESIGN / FUNCTION - GF27.10-P-9990

Overview of automatic transmission (AT) system components, location/task/design/function - GF27.10-P-9990GA

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 215, 220, 240

Starter lockout contact, GF27.19-P-

location/task/design/function 5106G

ca
GF27.20-P-
Torque converter, location/task/design/function

rd
5100G
GF27.19-P-
Location/task/function of rpm sensor

ia
5127G

gn
GF27.19-P-
Electric control unit, location/task/design/function
5104G

.c
GF27.51-P-

om
Location/task/design/function of freewheel
5102G
GF27.40-P-
Transmission housing vent, location/task
2007G
GF27.19-P-
Kickdown switch, location/task/design Model 215, 220 up to 31.05.02
5141GA
GF27.10-P-
Kickdown simulator, location/task Models 215, 220 as of 01.06.02, 240
5108T
GF27.60-P-
Location/task/function of command valve
5138G
Location/task/design/function of multiple-disc GF27.51-P-
brake 5100G
Location/task/design/function of multiple-disc GF27.51-P-
clutch 5101G
Model 215.374/379, GF27.19-P-
Steering wheel gear shifter, location/task/function
220.074/174/179 5137RM
Upshift/downshift solenoid valve, GF27.19-P-
location/task/design/function 4006G
GF27.60-P-
Location/task/design/function of floor shift
5100GA
 GF27.10-P-
Location/task/design/function of oil pump
5103G
GF27.10-P-
Parking lock, location/task/design/ function
5100GA
GF27.50-P-
Location/task/design/function of planetary gearset
5100G
GF27.19-P-
Location/task/function of position indicator Model 215, 220 up to 31.08.02
5129P
Model 215, 220 (except 215.374/379, GF27.19-P-
220.074/174/179) as of 01.09.02 5129PZ
Model 215.374/379, GF27.19-P-
220.074/174/179 5129RMZ
GF27.19-P-
Model 240
5129X
Torque converter lock-up clutch PWM solenoid GF27.19-P-
valve, location/task/design/function 5112G
Location/task/design/function of modulating GF27.19-P-
pressure regulating solenoid valve 5110G

ca
Location/task/design/function of shift pressure GF27.19-P-
regulating solenoid valve 5109G

rd
Location/task/function of operating pressure GF27.60-P-

ia
regulating valve 5131G
Regulating valve pressure regulating valve,

gn
GF27.60-P-
location/task/function 5133G

.c
Shift pressure regulating valve, GF27.60-P-

om
location/task/function 5132G
Shift valve pressure regulating valve, GF27.60-P-
location/task/function 5134G
Location/task/function of lubrication pressure GF27.60-P-
regulating valve 5122G
GF27.60-P-
Location/task/function of overlap regulating valve
5137G
Location/task/function of torque converter lockup GF27.60-P-
clutch regulating valve 5123G
GF27.60-P-
R/P lock, location/task
5121GA
GF27.60-P-
Location/task/design/function of shift detent
5101GA
Holding pressure shift valve, GF27.60-P-
location/task/function 5135G
GF27.60-P-
Shift pressure shift valve, location/task/function
5136G
GF27.10-P-
Float, location/function
5107G
 GF27.19-P-
ETC control unit, location/task
4012G
Electronic selector lever module control unit, GF27.19-P-
location/task 5140GA
GF27.19-P-
Temperature sensor, location/task/design/function
5108G
GF27.60-P-
Selector valve, location/task
5139G
Location/task/design/function of torque converter Model 215, 220 except code (479) GF27.20-P-
lock-up clutch cylinder shutoff, 240 5101G
Model 215, 220 with code (479) GF27.20-P-
cylinder shutoff 5101GA
Automatic transmission (AT), contents, function GF27.10-P-
description 0999GA

Survey of system components, automatic transmission (AT), location / task / design / function - GF27.10-P-9990N

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 215, 220

ca
Selection range sensor, location/task GF27.19-P-5142N

rd
Torque converter, location/task/design/function GF27.20-P-5100N

ia
Location/task/function of rpm sensor GF27.19-P-5127N

gn
Electric control unit, location/task/design/function GF27.19-P-5104N
Transmission housing ventilation, location/task GF27.40-P-2007N

.c
Kick-down simulator, location/task GF27.10-P-5108N

om
Multi-disk brake, location/task/design GF27.51-P-5104N
Multi-disk clutch, location/task/design GF27.51-P-5103N
Center shifter console, location/task/design/function GF27.60-P-5100N
Oil pump, location/task/design/function GF27.10-P-5103N
Park pawl, location/task/design/function GF27.10-P-5100N
Planetary gear set, location/task/design/function Ravigneaux gear set GF27.50-P-5100N
Simple planetary gear GF27.50-P-
system 5100NN
Location/task of R/P lock GF27.60-P-5121N
Shift detent, location/task/design/function GF27.60-P-5101N
Float, location/function GF27.10-P-5107N
VGS control unit, location/task GF27.19-P-4013N
Control solenoid valve, location/task/design/function GF27.19-P-5111N
Electronic selector lever module control unit,
GF27.19-P-5140N
location/task
Transmission oil temperature sensor,
F27.19-P-4014N
location/task/design

Torque converter lockup clutch, GF27.20-P-5101N

 location/task/design/function
Automatic transmission (AT), contents, function
GF27.10-P-0999N
description

UPSHIFT / DOWNSHIFT SOLENOID VALVE, LOCATION / TASK / DESIGN / FUNCTION -

GF27.19-P-4006G

TRANSMISSION 722.6

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 65: Identifying Upshift / Downshift Solenoid Valve Components Location

Upshift/downshift solenoid In the shell of the electric

valve, location control unit and pressed
against the shift plate with
a spring.
Upshift/downshift solenoid The shift solenoid valves
valve, task (Y3/6y3, Y3/6y4,
Y3/6y5) introduce the
sequence of upshifts and
downshifts in the shift
plate.
Upshift/downshift solenoid GF27.19-P-4006-03G
valve, design
Upshift/downshift solenoid GF27.19-P-4006-04G
valve, function

Upshift/downshift solenoid valve, design - GF27.19-P-4006-03G

Transmission 722.6
Fig. 66: Design - Upshift/Downshift Solenoid Valve

ca
Structure

rd
The shift solenoid valves (Y3/6y3, Y3/6y4, Y3/6y5) are sealed to the valve housing of the shift plate (2a) by
two O-rings (34, 35)(2a).

ia
gn
The contact springs (32) on the shift solenoid valves (Y3/6y3, Y3/6y4, Y3/6y5) engage in a slot in the
conductor tracks (33). The force of the contact spring (32) ensures safe contacts.

.c
om
Upshift/downshift solenoid valve, function - GF27.19-P-4006-04G

Transmission 722.6
Fig. 67: Identifying Upshift/Downshift Solenoid Valve Function

Operation

If a shift solenoid valve (Y3/6y3, Y3/6y4, Y3/6y5) is actuated via the ETC control module (N15/3), it opens
and directs the control pressure (p-SV) to the command valve assigned (31).

The respective shift solenoid valve (Y3/6y3, Y3/6y4, Y3/6y5) remains actuated and therefore open until the
shift process is completed. The shift pressure (p-SV) to the command valve is reduced to zero as soon as the
respective shift solenoid valve (Y3/6y3, Y3/6y4, Y3/6y5) is switched de-energized.

ETC CONTROL UNIT, LOCATION/TASK - GF27.19-P-4012

ETC control unit, location/task - GF27.19-P-4012G

TRANSMISSION 722.6

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
Fig. 68: Identifying ETC [EGS] Control Unit

om
ETC control unit, Model 129, 170, 202, 203, GF27.19-P-4012-01GG
location 208, 209, 211, 219, 240
Model 163 GF27.19-P-4012-01GH
Model 171.4 GF27.19-P-4012-01SK
Model 140,210,215,220 GF27.19-P-4012-01G
Model 230 GF27.19-P-4012-01R
ETC control unit, task Model 170, 202, 208, 210 GF27.19-P-4012-02G
without touch shift
Model 129, 140
Model 170, 202, 208, 210 GF27.19-P-4012-02GB
with touch shift
Model 163 without touch GF27.19-P-4012-02GH
shift
Model 163 with touch shift GF27.19-P-4012-02GI
Model 171.4 except code GF27.19-P-4012-02SK
(428) steering wheel shift
buttons
Model 171.4 with code GF27.19-P-4012-02SKB
 (428) steering wheel shift
buttons
Model 203 (except GF27.19-P-4012-02P
203.076/276) except code
(428) steering wheel shift
buttons
Model 203 with code (428) GF27.19-P-4012-02PM
steering wheel shift buttons
Type 203.076/276
Model 209 up to 31.05.04 GF27.19-P-4012-02Q
Model 209 as of 01.06.04 GF27.19-P-4012-02QX
Model 211 up to 31.05.04 GF27.19-P-4012-02T
Model 211 as of 01.06.04 GF27.19-P-4012-02TX
Model 219 GF27.19-P-4012-02TY
Model 215, 220 GF27.19-P-4012-02GA
Model 230 except code GF27.19-P-4012-02R
(428) steering wheel shift
buttons
Model 230 with code (428) GF27.19-P-4012-02RX

ca
steering wheel shift buttons

rd
Model 240 GF27.19-P-4012-02X

ia
gn
ETC control module, location - GF27.19-P-4012-01G

.c
TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 140, 210, 215, 220

om
Location

The ETC control module (N15/3) is installed in the control module housing in the right of the engine
compartment.

Shows model 220

 ca
rd
Fig. 69: Identifying ETC Control Module Location
Courtesy of MERCEDES-BENZ OF NORTH AMERICA.

ia
gn
ETC control module, task - GF27.19-P-4012-02GA

.c
Transmission 722.6 in models 215, 220

om
Input and output signals

Fig. 70: ETC Control Module Function Diagram - Input And Output Signals
CAN databus

Fig. 71: ETC Control Module Function Diagram - CAN Databus

ca
rd
Task

ia
The ETC control module (N15/3) determines the instantaneous operating condition of the vehicle and controls

gn
all gearshift sequences taking into account the ease of shifting and the driving situation.

.c
It receives operating data in the form of input signals from:

om
 Starter lock-out contact (Y3/6s1)
 Transmission oil temperature sensor (Y3/6b1)
 Rpm sensor 3 (Y3/6n3)
 Rpm sensor 2 (Y3/6n2)

In addition there is a connection via the engine compartment bus to the:

 Instrument cluster (A1)

 ME-SFI control module (N3/10) or CDI control module (N3/9)
 Electronic selector lever module control module (N15/5)
 Traction system control module (N47)
 for EIS control module (N73)

The ETC control module (N15/3) actuates the solenoid valves for the modulating and shift pressure and the gear
change. Matched to the moment to be transmitted the required pressure levels are calculated from all the input
signals.

The following information from other systems is then processed:

ME-SFI control module (N3/10) or CDI control module (N3/9)

 Engine torque
 Engine speed
 Accelerator pedal position
 Gear shift
 Engine status
 Kick-down (as of 01.06.02)

Electronic selector lever module control module (N15/5)

 Kick-down switch (S16/6) (up to 31.05.02)

 Selector lever position
 Transmission mode switch (S16/5)

Traction system control module (N47)

Wheel speeds

ca


 Gear shift

rd
 Traction status

ia
gn
EIS [EZS] control module (N73)

.c
The EIS [EZS] control module (N73) forms the gateway (link) between the engine compartment bus (CAN-C)
and the passenger compartment bus (Can-B). The ETC control module EGS (N15/3) receives the following

om
input signal via the EIS [EZS] control module (N73) from the AAC push-button control module (N22):

 A/C compressor torque

The following information is output to other systems:

Instrument cluster (A1)

 Selector lever position / shift range

 Mode selected on transmission mode switch (S16/5)

Traction system control module (N47)

 Transmission ratio
 Speeds

ME-SFI control module (N3/10) or CDI control module (N3/9)

 Kick-down switch (S16/6) (up to 31.05.02)

  Engaged drive mode
 Selector lever position P/N

(only on detection of the selector lever position "P" or "N" in the electronic selector lever module control
module (N15/5) and at the starter interlock contact (Y3/6s1))

ETC control unit, location/task - GF27.19-P-4012SLR

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 199

ca
Fig. 72: Identifying ETC [EGS] Control Unit

rd
ETC control unit, location GF27.19-P-4012-01SLR

ia
ETC control unit, task GF27.19-P-4012-02SLR

gn
.c
VGS CONTROL UNIT, LOCATION/TASK - GF27.19-P-4013N

om
TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

 ca
Fig. 73: Identifying VGS Control Unit Location - Transmission 722.9

rd
VGS control unit, location The fully integrated
transmission control

ia
(VGS) control unit

gn
(Y3/8n4) is integrated into
the electric controller unit

.c
(VGS) (Y3/8).

om
VGS [fully integrated Model 171.4 (except GF27.19-P-4013-02NK
transmission control], task model 171.473/44) except
code (428) Steering wheel
shift buttons
Model 171.4 with code GF27.19-P-4013-02NKL
(428) Steering wheel shift
buttons
Model 171.473
Model 203 except code GF27.19-P-4013-02NP
(428) Steering wheel shift
buttons
Model 203 with code (428) GF27.19-P-4013-02NPL
Steering wheel shift
buttons
Model 209 except code GF27.19-P-4013-02NQ
(428) Steering wheel shift
buttons
Model 209 with code (428) GF27.19-P-4013-02NQL
Steering wheel shift
buttons
 Model 211, except code GF27.19-P-4013-02NT
(428) Steering wheel shift
buttons
463.303/340/341
Model 211 with code (428) GF27.19-P-4013-02NTL
Steering wheel shift
buttons
Model 219 except code GF27.19-P-4013-02TX
(428) Steering wheel shift
buttons
Model 219 with code (428) GF27.19-P-4013-02TXL
Steering wheel shift
buttons
Model 215, 220 GF27.19-P-4013-02N
Model 230 except code GF27.19-P-4013-02NR
(428) Steering wheel shift
buttons
Model 230 with code (428) GF27.19-P-4013-02NRL
Steering wheel shift

ca
buttons

rd
VGS [fully integrated transmission control], task - GF27.19-P-4013-02N

ia
gn
TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODELS 215, 220

.c
Input and output signals

om

Fig. 74: VGS [Fully Integrated Transmission Control] Task Communication Diagram - Input And
Output Signals

ca
rd
ia
Fig. 75: Communication Diagram - Automatic Transmission Electrical Part Function (Shown Up To

gn
31.5.04)

.c
Shown up to 31.5.04

om
Task

The fully integrated transmission control (VGS) control unit (Y3/8n4) determines the instantaneous operating
condition of the vehicle and controls all the gear change sequences taking into account the ease of shifting and
driving situation.

It receives operating data as internal transmission input signals from the:

 Selection range sensor (VGS) (Y3/8s1)

 Transmission oil temperature sensor (VGS) (Y3/8s2), which is integrated in the fully integrated
transmission control (VGS) control unit (Y3/8n4)
 Turbine speed sensor (VGS) (Y3/8n1)
 Internal speed sensor (VGS) (Y3/8n2)
 Output speed sensor (VGS) (Y3/8n3)

In addition via the Controller Area Network bus Class C (engine compartment) (CAN-C) there is a connection
to the:

 Instrument cluster (A1)

  ME-SFI [ME] control unit (N3/10)
 Electronic selector lever module control unit (N15/5)
 ESP, SPS [PML] and BAS control unit (N47-5)
 DTR control unit (N63/1) up to 31.5.04 or DTR control unit (A89) as of 1.6.04
 EIS [EZS] control unit (N73)

The fully integrated transmission control (VGS) control unit (Y3/8n4) assumes control of the following control
solenoid valves depending on the processed input signals:

 Working pressure control solenoid valve (VGS) (Y3/8y1), for load-dependent and gear-dependent
operating pressure regulation
 Control solenoid valve coupling K1 (VGS) (Y3/8y2)
 Control solenoid valve coupling K2 (VGS) (Y3/8y3)
 Control solenoid valve coupling K3 (VGS) (Y3/8y4)
 Brake control solenoid valve B1 (VGS) (Y3/8y5)
 Brake control solenoid valve B2 (VGS) (Y3/8y6), which also actuates the multi-disk brake, brake
pressure regulation for reverse gear

ca
 Brake control solenoid valve B3 (VGS) (Y3/8y7)

rd
 Torque converter lockup clutch control solenoid valve (VGS) (Y3/8y8)

ia
This involves the processing of the following data from other systems:

gn
.c
ME-SFI [ME] control unit (N3/10)

om
 Active downshift for heating up the catalytic converter (KAT)
 Driving off 1st. gear, for heating of catalytic converter
 Shift line displacement for heating up the catalytic converter
 Specified gear, and lower/upper limit for heating up the catalytic converter
 Emergency operation of the ME fuel injection and ignition system (motor electronics) (ME), the pedal
value is limited to approx. 20 %, the driveability of the vehicle is assured
 Cruise control governs, a specific shifting strategy for cruise control mode is filed in the fully integrated
transmission control (VGS) control unit (Y3/8n4)
 Engine coolant temperature, used as a substitute value if the transmission oil temperature sensor (VGS)
(Y3/8s2) malfunctions
 Engine oil temperature, shift limitation is canceled
 Requirement torque for Electronic Stability Program (Electronic-Stability-Program) (ESP), torque
reduction or torque increase taking into account directional stability and road adhesion
 Kickdown
 Pedal value
 Request for torque converter lockup clutch "Open" in the heating up phase of the catalytic converter, to
increase engine speed
  Engine idle specified speed for the actuation of the torque converter lockup clutch
 Engine speed, for slip calculation of torque converter lockup clutch and for start of pressure calculation
by the fully integrated transmission control (VGS) control unit (Y3/8n4)
 Speed limiter function active, adaptations in the fully integrated transmission control (VGS) control unit
(Y3/8n4) switched off
 Engine torque

Electronic selector lever module control unit (N15/5)

 Selector lever position

 Transmission mode switch (S16/5)

ESP, SPS [PML] and BAS control unit (N47-5)

 Signal of stop lamp switch (S9/1s1), change of shift strategy, brake the vehicle, the fully integrated
transmission control (VGS) shifts down sooner
 Adjusted brake torque, change of shift strategy, brake the vehicle, the fully integrated transmission

ca
control shifts down earlier
Wheel speeds and direction of rotation, substitute values in event of output speed sensor (VGS) (Y3/8n3)

rd

malfunction

ia
 ESP request shift into "N" (neutral), power flow interruption, transmission/rear axle

gn
 Vehicle lateral acceleration at center of gravity, adaptation of shift strategy, detection of dynamic driving
style

.c
om
DTR control unit (N63/1) up to 31.5.04 or DTR control unit (A89) as of 1.6.04

 Shift line displacement, brake the vehicle, the fully integrated transmission control shifts down earlier
 Active downshift, brake the vehicle, the fully integrated transmission control shifts down earlier.

EIS [EZS] control unit (N73)

 Refrigerant compressor (A9) ON

 Circuit 50, influencing fault storage
 Torque requirement of refrigerant compressor (A9), torque correction

Central gateway control unit (N93)

 Refrigerant compressor (A9) ON

 Circuit 50
 Torque requirement of refrigerant compressor (A9), torque correction

The following information is output to other systems:

Instrument cluster (A1)

 Selector lever position for gear indicator (A1p12)

 Program selection at the transmission mode switch (S16/5) for gear indicator (A1p12)

ME-SFI [ME] control unit (N3/10)

 Engine torque requests, engine intervention when shifting

 Emergency-running mode for fully integrated transmission control
 Starting release in selector lever position "P", "N"
 Transmission variant, recognition of basic variants, difference in gear ratios
 Actual gear engaged/target gear, i.e. engaged gear, gear to be shifted, can be shown via STAR
DIAGNOSIS
 Torque converter lockup clutch status

ESP, SPS [PML] and BAS control unit (N47-5)

 Wheel torque factor, overall gear ratio

ca
 Transmission variant, recognition of basic variants, difference in gear ratios

rd
 Actual gear engaged/target gear, i.e. engaged gear, gear to be shifted, can be shown via STAR
DIAGNOSIS

ia
gn
DTR control unit (N63/1) up to 31.5.04 or DTR control unit (A89) as of 1.6.04

.c
Transmission variant, recognition of basic variants, difference in gear ratios

om


 Actual gear engaged/target gear, i.e. engaged gear, gear to be shifted, can be shown via STAR
DIAGNOSIS
 Wheel torque factor, overall gear ratio

EIS [EZS] control unit (N73)

 Selector lever position for the actuation of the backup lamp function

Central gateway control unit (N93)

 Selector lever position for the actuation of the backup lamp function
 Diagnosis

TRANSMISSION OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR, LOCATION/TASK/DESIGN - GF27.19-P-4014N

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

Fig. 76: Identifying Transmission Oil Temperature Sensor Location - Transmission 722.9

ca
Transmission oil The transmission oil
temperature sensor, temperature sensor (VGS)

rd
location (Y3/8s2) is integrated in

ia
the fully integrated
transmission control

gn
(VGS) control unit

.c
(Y3/8n4).
Transmission oil The transmission oil

om
temperature sensor, task temperature sensor (VGS)
(Y3/8s2) detects the
transmission oil
temperature and passes
this on as an input
parameter to the fully
integrated transmission
control (VGS) control unit
(Y3/8n4).
Transmission oil Temperature-dependent
temperature sensor, design resistor

ELECTRIC CONTROL UNIT, LOCATION/TASK/DESIGN/FUNCTION - GF27.19-P-5104

Electric control module, location / task / design / function - GF27.19-P-5104G

TRANSMISSION 722.6
Fig. 77: Identifying Valve Housing Of Shift Plate And Electric Control Unit

ca
Electric control module, Bolted onto the valve
location housing of shift plate (2a).

rd
Electric control module, To receive various input

ia
design signals and to convert the
control module

gn
information into hydraulic

.c
functions.

om
Electric control module, GF27.19-P-5104-01G
design
Electric control module, GF27.19-P-5104-02G
function

Electric control module, design - GF27.19-P-5104-01G

Transmission 722.6
Fig. 78: Identifying Electric Control Module Design

ca
Structure

rd
The electrical control unit (Y3/6) consists of a supporting body made from plastic, in which the electrical
components - rpm sensors 2 and 3 (Y3/6n2, Y3/6n3), the regulating solenoid valves (Y3/6y1, Y3/6y2), the shift

ia
solenoid valves (Y3/6y3, Y3/6y4, Y3/6y5), the PWM convertor lockup solenoid valve (Y3/6y6), the starter

gn
lockout contact (Y3/6s1) and transmission oil temperature sensor (Y3/6b1) - are combined.

.c
Conductor tracks integrated into the shell connect the electric components to a plug connection (11).

om
The connection to the wiring harness on the vehicle side and the ETC control module (N15/3) is made via this
13-pin connector (11) with a bayonet lock.

With the exception of the solenoid valves, all other electric components are fixed to the conductor tracks.

Electric control module, function - GF27.19-P-5104-02G

Transmission 722.6
Fig. 79: Identifying Electric Control Module Function

ca
Operation

rd
Signals from the ETC control module (N15/3) are converted into hydraulic functions in the electric valve
control unit (Y3/6). The rpm sensors (Y3/6n2, Y3/6n3), the starter lockout contact (Y3/6s1) and the

ia
transmission oil temperature sensor (Y3/6b1) of the electrical control unit (Y3/6) supply the ETC control

gn
module (N15/3) with input signals.

.c
The solenoid valves are controlled by the ETC control module (N15/3) and trigger the hydraulic functions.

om
Electric control unit, location/task/design/function - GF27.19-P-5104N

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

Locations
Fig. 80: Identifying Electric Control Unit Location - Transmission 722.9

Electric control unit, The electric control unit

ca
location (VGS) (Y3/8), valve body

rd
(21b), intermediate panel
(21c) and valve body

ia
(21d) are connected to

gn
each other by bolts and are
mounted under the

.c
transmission housing.

om
Electric control unit, Recording various input
design signals and converting
control unit information
into hydraulic functions
Electric control unit, GF27.19-P-5104-01N
design
Electric control unit, GF27.19-P-5104-02N
function

Electric controller unit, design - GF27.19-P-5104-01N

Transmission 722.9 in model 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230, 463.303/340/341
 ca
Fig. 81: Identifying Electric Control Unit - Transmission 722.9

rd
Design

ia
The electric controller unit (VGS) (Y3/8) consists of a plastic supporting body in which the following electrical

gn
components are combined:

.c
Turbine speed sensor (VGS) (Y3/8n1)

om


 Internal speed sensor (VGS) (Y3/8n2)

 Output speed sensor (VGS) (Y3/8n3)
 Fully integrated transmission control (VGS) control unit (Y3/8n4) with integrated transmission oil
temperature sensor (VGS) (Y3/8s2)
 Selection range sensor (VGS) (Y3/8s1)
 Working pressure control solenoid valve (VGS) (Y3/8y1)
 Clutch control solenoid valve K1 (VGS) (Y3/8y2)
 Clutch control solenoid valve K2 (VGS) (Y3/8y3)
 Clutch control solenoid valve K3 (VGS) (Y3/8y4)
 Brake control solenoid valve B1 (VGS) (Y3/8y5)
 Brake control solenoid valve B2 (VGS) (Y3/8y6)
 Brake control solenoid valve B3 (VGS) (Y3/8y7)
 Torque converter lockup clutch control solenoid valve (VGS) (Y3/8y8)

The printed-conductor foil which is inserted in the supporting body makes the connection between the electrical
components and a plug socket (11).
The connection to the cable set on the vehicle side is made with a bayonet lock via the plug socket (11).

Apart from the solenoid valves all the other electrical components are permanently connected to the printed-
conductor foil.

Electric controller unit, function - GF27.19-P-5104-02N

Transmission 722.9 in model 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230, 463.303/340/341

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 82: Identifying Electric Control Unit - Transmission 722.9

Function

In the electric controller unit (VGS) (Y3/8) signals from the fully integrated transmission control (VGS) control
unit (Y3/8n4) are converted into hydraulic functions. The following electrical components supply input signals
to the fully integrated transmission control (VGS) control unit (Y3/8n4):

 Turbine speed sensor (VGS) (Y3/8n1)

 Internal speed sensor (VGS) (Y3/8n2)
 Output speed sensor (VGS) (Y3/8n3)
 Transmission oil temperature sensor (VGS) (Y3/8s2) integrated into the fully integrated transmission
control (VGS) control unit (Y3/8n4)
 Selection range sensor (VGS) (Y3/8s1)

The control solenoid valves listed are actuated by the fully integrated transmission control (VGS) control
unit (Y3/8n4) and trigger the hydraulic functions:
  Working pressure control solenoid valve (VGS) (Y3/8y1)
 Clutch control solenoid valve K1 (VGS) (Y3/8y2)
 Clutch control solenoid valve K2 (VGS) (Y3/8y3)
 Clutch control solenoid valve K3 (VGS) (Y3/8y4)
 Brake control solenoid valve B1 (VGS) (Y3/8y5)
 Brake control solenoid valve B2 (VGS) (Y3/8y6)
 Brake control solenoid valve B3 (VGS) (Y3/8y7)
 Torque converter lockup clutch control solenoid valve (VGS) (Y3/8y8)

STARTER LOCK-OUT CONTACT, LOCATION/TASK/DESIGN/FUNCTION - GF27.19-P-5106G

TRANSMISSION 722.6

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 83: Identifying Starter Lock-Out Contact Location

Starter lockout contact, The starter lockout contact

location (Y3/6s1) is located in the
electrical control unit
(Y3/6) and is permanently
connected to the conductor
tracks.
Starter lockout contact, To recognize selector valve
task and selector lever position
"P" and "N".
Starter lockout contact, The starter lockout contact
design (Y3/6s1) consists of:

 a plunger
  a permanent magnet
 a reed contact
Starter lockout contact, GF27.19-P-5106-01G
function

Starter lock-out contact, function - GF27.19-P-5106-01G

Transmission 722.6

ca
rd
ia
gn
Fig. 84: Identifying Starter Lock-Out Contact Function

.c
Operation

om
In selector lever positions "P" and "N" the starter lockout contact (Y3/6s1) is actuated by a cam track which is
located on the detent plate.

The permanent magnet (47) is moved away from the dry-reed contact (48). The dry-reed contact (48) is opened.
The ETC control module (N15/3) receives an electric signal. The circuit to the starter in the selector lever
positions "P" and "N" is closed.

TEMPERATURE SENSOR, LOCATION / TASK / DESIGN / FUNCTION - GF27.19-P-5108G

TRANSMISSION 722.6
Fig. 85: Identifying Temperature Sensor Components Location

ca
Temperature sensor, The transmission oil
location temperature sensor

rd
(Y3/6b1) is located in the
electrical control unit

ia
(Y3/6) and is permanently

gn
connected to the conductor
tracks.

.c
Temperature sensor, task To measure the

om
temperature of the
transmission oil and pass
the temperature to the ETC
control unit (N15/3) as an
input signal.
Temperature sensor, Temperature-dependent
design resistor (PTC).
Temperature sensor, GF27.19-P-5108-04G
function

Temperature sensor, function - GF27.19-P-5108-04G

Transmission 722.6
Fig. 86: Identifying Transmission Oil Temperature Sensor

Operation

The temperature of the transmission oil has a major influence on the shift time and thus on the shift quality. It is
possible to optimize the gear shifts in all temperature ranges by detecting the oil temperature.

The transmission oil temperature sensor (Y3/6b1) is connected in series with the starter lockout contact
(Y3/6s1). The temperature signal is transmitted to the ETC control module (N15/3) only when the dry-reed
contact of the starter lockout contact (Y3/6s1) is closed.

ca
SHIFT PRESSURE REGULATING SOLENOID VALVE, LOCATION / TASK / DESIGN /

rd
FUNCTION - GF27.19-P-5109G

ia
TRANSMISSION 722.6

gn
.c
om

Fig. 87: Identifying Shift Pressure Regulating Solenoid Valve Components Location

Shift pressure regulating In the supporting body of

solenoid valve, location the electrical control unit
(Y3/6) and pressed against
 the valve housing of the
shift plate (2a) by means
of a leaf spring.
Shift pressure regulating to control the shift pressure
solenoid valve, task depending on the
constantly changing
operating conditions, such
as load/gear changes.
Shift pressure regulating GF27.19-P-5109-03G
solenoid valve, design
Shift pressure regulating The shift pressure
solenoid valve, function regulating solenoid valve
(Y3/6y2) assigns a
proportional pressure to
the current which is
controlled by the ETC
control module (N15/3)
according to the load.

ca
Shift pressure regulating solenoid valve, design - GF27.19-P-5109-03G

rd
Transmission 722.6

ia
gn
.c
om

Fig. 88: Identifying Shift Pressure Regulating Solenoid Valve - Design

Structure

The shift pressure regulating solenoid valve (Y3/6y2) has an interference fit and is sealed off to the valve body
of the shift plate (2a) by a seal (arrow).
The contact springs (32) on the shift pressure solenoid valve (Y3/6y2) engage in a slot in the conductor tracks
(33). The force of the contact spring (32) ensures safe contacts.

MODULATING PRESSURE REGULATING SOLENOID VALVE, LOCATION / TASK / DESIGN /

FUNCTION - GF27.19-P-5110G

TRANSMISSION 722.6

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
Fig. 89: Identifying Modulating Pressure Regulating Solenoid Valve Components Location

om
Modulating pressure In the supporting body of
regulating solenoid valve, the electrical control unit
location (Y3/6) and pressed against
the valve housing of the
shift plate (2a) by means
of a leaf spring.
Modulating pressure To control the modulating
regulating solenoid valve, pressure depending on the
task constantly changing
operating conditions such
as load/gear changes.
Modulating pressure GF27.19-P-5110-03G
regulating solenoid valve,
design
Modulating pressure The modulating pressure
regulating solenoid valve, regulating solenoid valve
function (Y3/6y1) assigns a
proportional pressure to
the current which is
controlled by the ETC
 control module (N15/3)
according to the load.

Modulating pressure regulating solenoid valve, design - GF27.19-P-5110-03G

Transmission 722.6

ca
rd
ia
gn
Fig. 90: Identifying Modulating Pressure Regulating Solenoid Valve - Design

.c
om
Structure

The modulating pressure regulating solenoid valve (Y3/6y1) has an interference fit and is sealed off to the valve
body of the shift plate (2a) by a seal (arrow).

The contact springs (32) on the modulating pressure regulating solenoid valve (Y3/6y1) engage in a slot in the
conductor tracks (33). The force of the contact spring (32) ensures safe contacts.

CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE, LOCATION/TASK/DESIGN/FUNCTION - GF27.19-P-5111N

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

 ca
Fig. 91: Identifying Control Solenoid Valve - Transmission 722.9

rd
ia
Control solenoid valve, The control solenoid
location valves are mounted on the

gn
electric control unit (VGS)

.c
(Y3/8).

om
Control solenoid valve, Working pressure control GF27.19-P-5111-01A
task solenoid valve
Clutch control solenoid GF27.19-P-5111-01B
valve K1
Clutch control solenoid GF27.19-P-5111-01C
valve K2
Clutch control solenoid GF27.19-P-5111-01D
valve K3
Brake control solenoid GF27.19-P-5111-01E
valve B1
Brake control solenoid GF27.19-P-5111-01F
valve B2
Brake control solenoid GF27.19-P-5111-01G
valve B3
Torque converter lockup GF27.19-P-5111-01H
clutch control solenoid
valve
Control solenoid valve, With the control solenoid
design valves used the
proportional solenoids
 convert the electric signals
of the fully integrated
transmission control
(VGS) control unit
(Y3/8n4). The float
needles can also be moved
into intermediate positions
as a result.
Control solenoid valve, The control solenoid
function valves assign a
proportional pressure to a
current regulated by the
fully integrated
transmission control
(VGS) control unit
(Y3/8n4).

Control solenoid valve, task - GF27.19-P-5111-01A

ca
Transmission 722.9 in model 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230, 463.303/340/341 working pressure
control solenoid valve

rd
ia
gn
.c
om

Fig. 92: Identifying Working Pressure Control Solenoid Valve - Transmission 722.9

The working pressure control solenoid valve (VGS) (Y3/8y1) is actuated by the fully integrated transmission
control (VGS) control unit (Y3/8n4) and influences the position of the working pressure regulating valve. The
working pressure depends on the regulating valve position and thus on the geometry of the working pressure
regulating valve.

The working pressure control solenoid valve (VGS) (Y3/8y1) has a lowering characteristic. This means that the
oil pressure applied in the working pressure regulating valve reduces as the actuating current increases. In limp-
home mode of the fully integrated transmission control (VGS) all the control solenoid valves are de-energized.
The working pressure control solenoid valve (VGS) (Y3/8y1) thus supplies maximum pressure.

Control solenoid valve, task - GF27.19-P-5111-01B

Transmission 722.9 in model 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230, 463.303/340/341 K1 clutch control
solenoid valve

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
Fig. 93: Identifying K1 Clutch Control Solenoid Valve - Transmission 722.9

om
The K1 clutch control solenoid valve (VGS) (Y3/8y2) is actuated by the fully integrated transmission control
(VGS) control unit (Y3/8n4) and influences the position of the K1 regulating valve. The pressure in the K1
multidisk clutch depends on the position of the regulating valve and thus on the geometry of the K1 regulating
valve.

The K1 clutch control solenoid valve (VGS) (Y3/8y2) has a rising characteristic. This means that the oil
pressure applied in the K1 regulating valve increases as the actuation current increases. In limp- home mode of
the fully integrated transmission control (VGS) all the control solenoid valves are de-energized. The K1 clutch
control solenoid valve (VGS) (Y3/8y2) thus supplies no pressure.

Control solenoid valve, task - GF27.19-P-5111-01C

Transmission 722.9 in model 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230, 463.303/340/341 K2 clutch control
solenoid valve
Fig. 94: Identifying K2 Clutch Control Solenoid Valve - Transmission 722.9

ca
The K2 clutch control solenoid valve (VGS) (Y3/8y3) is actuated by the fully integrated transmission control
(VGS) control unit (Y3/8n4) and influences the position of the K2 regulating valve. The pressure in the K2

rd
multidisk clutch depends on the position of the regulating valve and thus on the geometry of the K2. regulating
valve.

ia
gn
The K2 clutch control solenoid valve (VGS) (Y3/8y3) has a lowering characteristic. This means that the oil
pressure applied in the regulating valve K2 reduces as the actuation current increases. In limp-home mode of the

.c
fully integrated transmission control (VGS) all the control solenoid valves are de-energized. The K2 clutch

om
control solenoid valve (VGS) (Y3/8y3) thus supplies maximum pressure.

Control solenoid valve, task - GF27.19-P-5111-01D

Transmission 722.9 in model 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230, 463.303/340/341 K3 clutch control
solenoid valve
Fig. 95: Identifying K3 Clutch Control Solenoid Valve - Transmission 722.9

ca
The K3 clutch control solenoid valve (VGS) (Y3/8y4) is actuated by the fully integrated transmission control
(VGS) control unit (Y3/8n4) and influences the position of the K3 regulating valve. The pressure in the K3

rd
multidisk clutch depends on the position of the regulating valve and thus on the geometry of the K3. regulating
valve.

ia
gn
The K3 clutch control solenoid valve (VGS) (Y3/8y4) has a lowering characteristic. This means that the oil
pressure applied in the working pressure regulating valve reduces as the actuating current increases. In limp-

.c
home mode of the fully integrated transmission control (VGS) all the control solenoid valves are de-energized.

om
The K3 clutch control solenoid valve (VGS) (Y3/8y4) thus supplies maximum pressure.

Control solenoid valve, task - GF27.19-P-5111-01E

Transmission 722.9 in model 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230, 463.303/340/341 B1 brake control
solenoid valve
Fig. 96: Identifying B1 Brake Control Solenoid Valve - Transmission 722.9

ca
The B1 brake control solenoid valve (VGS) (Y3/8y5) is actuated by the fully integrated transmission control
(VGS) control unit (Y3/8n4) and influences the position of the B1 regulating valve. The pressure in the B1

rd
multidisk brake depends on the position of the regulating valve and thus on the geometry of the B1 regulating
valve.

ia
gn
The B1 brake control solenoid valve (VGS) (Y3/8y5) has a lowering characteristic. This means that the oil
pressure applied in the regulating valve B1 reduces as the actuation current increases. In limp-home mode of the

.c
fully integrated transmission control (VGS) all the control solenoid valves are de-energized. The brake control

om
solenoid valve B1 (VGS) (Y3/8y5) thus supplies maximum pressure.

Control solenoid valve, task - GF27.19-P-5111-01F

Transmission 722.9 in model 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230, 463.303/340/341 B2 brake control
solenoid valve
Fig. 97: Identifying B2 Brake Control Solenoid Valve - Transmission 722.9

ca
The B2 brake control solenoid valve (VGS) (Y3/8y6) is actuated by the fully integrated transmission control
(VGS) control unit (Y3/8n4) and influences the position of the B2/BR regulating valve. The pressure in the

rd
multi-disk brake B2 and pressure in the multi-disk brake BR depend on the regulating valve position and thus
on the geometry of the regulating valve B2/BR.

ia
gn
The B2 brake control solenoid valve (VGS) (Y3/8y6) has a rising characteristic. This means that the oil pressure
applied in the B2/BR regulating valve increases as the actuating current increases. In limp- home mode of the

.c
fully integrated transmission control (VGS) all the control solenoid valves are de-energized. The B2 brake

om
control solenoid valve (VGS) (Y3/8y6) thus supplies no pressure.

Control solenoid valve, task - GF27.19-P-5111-01G

Transmission 722.9 in model 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230, 463.303/340/341 B3 brake control
solenoid valve
Fig. 98: Identifying B3 Brake Control Solenoid Valve - Transmission 722.9

ca
The B3 brake control solenoid valve (VGS) (Y3/8y7) is actuated by the fully integrated transmission control
(VGS) control unit (Y3/8n4) and influences the position of the B3 regulating valve. The pressure in the B3

rd
multidisk brake depends on the position of the regulating valve and thus on the geometry of the B3. regulating
valve.

ia
gn
The B3 brake control solenoid valve (VGS) (Y3/8y7) has a rising characteristic. This means that the oil pressure
applied in the B3 regulating valve increases as the actuation current increases. In limp- home mode of the fully

.c
integrated transmission control (VGS) all the control solenoid valves are de-energized. The B3 brake control

om
solenoid valve (VGS) (Y3/8y7) thus supplies no pressure.

Control solenoid valve, task - GF27.19-P-5111-01H

Transmission 722.9 in model 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230, 463.303/340/341 torque converter
lockup clutch control solenoid valve
Fig. 99: Identifying Torque Converter Lockup Clutch Control Solenoid Valve - Transmission 722.9

ca
The torque converter lockup clutch control solenoid valve (VGS) (Y3/8y8) is actuated by the fully integrated
transmission control (VGS) control unit (Y3/8n4) and influences the position of the torque converter lockup

rd
clutch regulating valve. The clutch pressure in the torque converter lockup clutch depends on the regulating
valve position and thus on the geometry of the torque converter lockup clutch regulating valve.

ia
gn
The torque converter lockup clutch control solenoid valve (VGS) (Y3/8y8) has a rising characteristic. This
means that the oil pressure applied in the torque converter lockup clutch regulating valve increases as the

.c
actuation current increases. In limp-home mode of the fully integrated transmission control (VGS) all the

om
control solenoid valves are de-energized. The torque converter lockup clutch control solenoid valve (VGS)
(Y3/8y8) thus supplies no pressure.

LOCATION / TASK / DESIGN / FUNCTION OF PWM SOLENOID VALVE, TORQUE CONVERTER

LOCKUP CLUTCH - GF27.19-P-5112G

TRANSMISSION 722.6
Fig. 100: Identifying Converter Lockup Clutch Components Location

ca
Torque converter lockup In the supporting body of
clutch PWM solenoid the electrical control unit

rd
valve, location (Y3/6) and pressed against
the valve housing of the

ia
shift plate (2a) by means of

gn
a leaf spring (2c).

.c
Torque converter lockup The PWM solenoid valve
clutch PWM solenoid for the torque converter

om
valve, task lockup (Y3/6y6) controls
the pressure for the torque
converter lockup clutch.
Torque converter lockup GF27.19-P-5112-03G
clutch PWM solenoid
valve, design
Torque converter lockup It converts a pulse-width-
clutch PWM solenoid modulated current actuated
valve, function by the ETC control module
(N15/3) into the
corresponding hydraulic
pressure KUB (p-S/KUB).

Torque converter lockup clutch PWM solenoid valve, design - GF27.19-P-5112-03G

Transmission 722.6
Fig. 101: Identifying Torque Converter Lockup Clutch PWM Solenoid Valve - Design

ca
Structure

rd
The torque converter lockup PWM solenoid valve (Y3/6y6) is sealed off to the valve body of the shift plate (2a)
by an O-ring (34) and a seal (arrow).

ia
gn
The contact springs (32) on the PWM converter lockup solenoid valve (Y3/6y6) engage in a slot in the
conductor tracks (33). The force of the contact spring (32) ensures safe contacts.

.c
om
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR, LOCATION / TASK / FUNCTION - GF27.19-P-5127

Wheel speed sensor, location / task / function - GF27.19-P-5127G

TRANSMISSION 722.6
Fig. 102: Identifying Wheel Speed Sensor Components

ca
Wheelspeed sensor The RPM sensors 2 and 3
location (Y3/6n2 and Y3/6n3) are

rd
permanently connected
with the supporting body

ia
of the electrical control

gn
unit (Y3/6) via contact
tongues.

.c
Wheelspeed sensor - The signals from the RPM

om
Function sensors 2 3 (Y3/6n2,
Y3/6n3) are recorded in
the ETC control module
(N15/3) together with the
wheel and engine speeds
and other information, and
are the input signals for
the electronic control
system.
Speed sensor, function GF27.19-P-5127-04G

Speed sensor, function - GF27.19-P-5127-04G

Transmission 722.6
Fig. 103: Identifying Speed Sensor Function

Operation

The RPM sensors are pressed against the transmission housing (51) by a spring (49) which is held against the
valve housing of the shift plate (2a). This ensures a defined distance between the RPM sensors and the exciter

ca
ring (50).

rd
RPM sensor 2 (Y3/6yn2) records the speed of the front sun gear via the outer multiple-disc carrier of the front

ia
multiple-disc clutch (K1b) and RPM sensor 3 (Y3/6yn3) records the speed of the front planetary gear carrier via

gn
the inner multiple-disc carrier of the front multiple-disc clutch (K1c).

.c
Speed sensor, location/task/function - GF27.19-P-5127N

om
TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

Fig. 104: Identifying Speed Sensor Location - Transmission 722.9

ca
Speed sensor, location The turbine speed sensor
(VGS) (Y3/8n1), the

rd
internal speed sensor
(VGS) (Y3/8n2) and

ia
output speed sensor

gn
(VGS) (Y3/8n3) are
permanently connected to

.c
the electric control unit

om
(VGS) (Y3/8) and cannot
be replaced individually.
Speed sensor, task Turbine speed sensor GF27.19-P-5127-02N
Internal rpm sensor GF27.19-P-5127-02P
Output speed sensor GF27.19-P-5127-02O
Speed sensor, function Turbine speed sensor GF27.19-P-5127-04N
Internal rpm sensor GF27.19-P-5127-04P
Output speed sensor GF27.19-P-5127-04O

Speed sensor - Function - GF27.19-P-5127-02N

Transmission 722.9 in model 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230, 463.303/340/341 turbine speed
sensor
Fig. 105: Identifying Turbine Speed Sensor Location - Transmission 722.9

ca
The turbine speed sensor (VGS) (Y3/8n1) records the rotational speed of a ring gear of the Ravigneaux set for
the fully integrated transmission control (VGS).

rd
This rotational speed is processed by the fully integrated transmission control (VGS) control unit (Y3/8n4) as an

ia
input signal together with the information from the internal speed sensor (VGS) (Y3/8n2) and the output speed

gn
sensor (VGS) (Y3/8n3). This contributes to shortening the reaction time during shift operations.

.c
Speed sensor - Function - GF27.19-P-5127-02O

om
Transmission 722.9 in model 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230, 463.303/340/341 output speed sensor
Fig. 106: Identifying Output Speed Sensor Location - Transmission 722.9

The output speed sensor (VGS) (Y3/8n3) records the transmission output speed at the park pawl gear (4a) for
the fully integrated transmission control (VGS).

This rotational speed is processed by the fully integrated transmission control (VGS) control unit (Y3/8n4) as an
input signal together with the information from the turbine speed sensor (VGS) (Y3/8n1) and the internal speed
sensor (VGS) (Y3/8n2). This contributes to shortening the reaction time during shift operations.

Speed sensor - Function - GF27.19-P-5127-02P

Transmission 722.9 in model 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230, 463.303/340/341 internal speed
sensor

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 107: Identifying Internal Speed Sensor Location - Transmission 722.9

The internal speed sensor (VGS) (Y3/8n2) records the internal transmission speed at the ring gear of the front
single planetary gear system for the fully integrated transmission control (VGS).

This rotational speed is processed by the fully integrated transmission control (VGS) control unit (Y3/8n4) as an
input signal together with the information from the turbine speed sensor (VGS) (Y3/8n1) and the output speed
sensor (VGS) (Y3/8n3). This contributes to shortening the reaction time during shift operations.

Speed sensor, function - GF27.19-P-5127-04N

Transmission 722.9 in model 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230, 463.303/340/341 turbine speed
sensor
Fig. 108: Identifying Turbine Speed Sensor Location - Transmission 722.9

ca
A permanently magnetized pole wheel (ring magnet (1)) and the turbine speed sensor (VGS) (Y3/8n1), which
consists of magneto-resistive elements, are used to record the turbine speed. A magneto-resistive element

rd
changes its resistance under the influence of a magnetic field. The ring magnet (1) is stuck onto an aluminum
ring plate and is connected with a ring gear of the Ravigneaux set.

ia
gn
Magnetic field changes occur due to the rotary motion of the ring gear and as a result a resistance change occurs
in the magneto-resistive elements An electronic analysis system transmits this information to the fully

.c
integrated transmission control (VGS) control unit (Y3/8n4). By using this speed recording system the

om
measurement can take place over a greater distance than with the Hall sensor.

Speed sensor, function - GF27.19-P-5127-04O

Transmission 722.9 in model 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230, 463.303/340/341 output speed sensor
Fig. 109: Identifying Output Speed Sensor Location - Transmission 722.9

ca
The transmission output speed is recorded using a pulse ring (3) and a Hall difference sensor. This increases the
measuring accuracy. 2 Hall generators and a bar magnet are integrated into the output speed sensor (VGS)

rd
(Y3/8n3). Magnetic field changes occur due to the rotary motion of the pulse ring (3).

ia
As a result an induction difference arises between the two Hall elements of the Hall generators which changes

gn
its polarity due to the rotary motion. This polarity change is converted into an rpm signal by the electronic
analysis system and evaluated by the fully integrated transmission control (VGS) control unit (Y3/8n4).

.c
om
Speed sensor, function - GF27.19-P-5127-04P

Transmission 722.9 in model 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230, 463.303/340/341 internal speed
sensor
Fig. 110: Identifying Internal Speed Sensor Location - Transmission 722.9

ca
A permanently magnetized pole wheel (cylinder flange with integrated ring magnet (2)) and the internal speed
sensor (VGS) (Y3/8n2), which consists of magneto-resistive elements, are used to record the internal

rd
transmission speed. A magneto-resistive element changes its resistance under the influence of a magnetic field.
The cylinder flange with integral ring magnet (2) is connected to the ring gear of the single rear planetary gear

ia
system.

gn
Magnetic field changes occur due to the rotary motion of the ring gear and as a result a resistance change occurs

.c
in the magneto-resistive elements An electronic analysis system transmits this information to the fully

om
integrated transmission control (VGS) control unit (Y3/8n4). By using this speed recording system the
measurement can take place over a greater distance than with the Hall sensor.

POSITION SENSOR, LOCATION/TASK/FUNCTION - GF27.19-P-5129

Location / task / function of position indicator - GF27.19-P-5129P

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 203, 209.3 (except, 209.376) up to 31.5.03, 215, 220 up to 31.8.02

Shown in model 203.0

Fig. 111: Identifying Shift Pattern Display And Transmission Mode Switch (Transmission 722.6 Model
203, 209.3 Up To 31.5.03) - Shown In Model 203

ca
Position display, location The position display (shift

rd
pattern display (87)) is
housed in the cover of the

ia
center shifter console. In

gn
addition a gear display
and transmission mode

.c
display is located in the

om
instrument cluster (A1).
Position display, task GF27.19-P-5129-02P
Position display, function Models 203, 215, 220 GF27.19-P-5129-03P
Model 209 GF27.19-P-5129-03Q

Position display, task - GF27.19-P-5129-02P

Transmission 722.6 in models 203, 209.3 (except 209.376) up to 31.05.03, 211 (except 211.076) up to
31.08.03, 215, 220 up to 31.08.02, 230 (except 230.474) up to 31.08.03

To display visually the position of the selector lever or selected gear range and the program selection performed
at the transmission mode switch (S16/5) (no display of the gear currently shifted). The optional selector lever
positions and their sequence are shown symbolically via the position indicator.

Shown on Model 203

Fig. 112: Identifying Shift Pattern Display And Transmission Mode Switch (Models 203, 209.3 Up To
31.05.03) - Shown On Model 203

Position display, function - GF27.19-P-5129-03P

Transmission 722.6 in model 203 up to 31.05.03, 215, 220 up to 31.08.02

ca
The position display and program selection display in the instrument cluster (A1) is actuated via the CAN

rd
engine compartment. The program selection performed at the transmission mode switch (S16/5) is transmitted
from the ETC [ETC] control unit (N15/3) to the instrument cluster (< >) and the selector lever position is

ia
transmitted from the electronic selector lever module control unit (N15/5) to the instrument cluster (A1).

gn
The program selection performed at the transmission mode switch (S16/5) remains stored only after driving for

.c
approx. 1 minute and is then displayed again after the engine is started again. The driving time required of

om
approx. 1 minute is due to the system.

The shift pattern display (87) is illuminated when the driving lights are switched on.

Shown on Model 203

Fig. 113: Identifying Shift Pattern Display And Transmission Mode Switch (Transmission 722.6 Model
203 Up To 31.05.03, 215, 220 Up To 31.08.02) - Shown On Model 203

Location / task / function of position display - GF27.19-P-5129PZ

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 203 as of 1.6.03 up to 23.4.04, 215, 220 (except 215.374 /379,
220.074 /174 /179) as of 1.9.02

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 209.3 (except 209.376) as of 1.6.03, 209.4 (except 209.476)

Illustrated on model 203.0

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 114: Identifying Shift Pattern Display And Transmission Mode Switch - Illustrated On Model 203.0

Position display, location The position display is

accommodated in the
center shift console cover.
Position display, task GF27.19-P-5129-02PZ
Shift pattern display, Models 203, 215, 220 GF27.19-P-5129-03PZ
function
Model 209 GF27.19-P-5129-03QZ

Position display, task - GF27.19-P-5129-02PZ

Shown on Model 203

Fig. 115: Identifying Shift Pattern Display And Transmission Mode Switch - Shown On Model 203

The task of the position display is to display optically the position of the selector lever or selected gear range
and the program selection performed at the transmission mode switch (S16/5) (gear currently shifted not
displayed).

ca
The shift pattern display shows the possible selector lever positions and their sequence in the form of symbols.

rd
Shift pattern display, function - GF27.19-P-5129-03PZ

ia
gn
Transmission 722.6 in model 203 as of 01.06.03 up to 23.04.04, 215, 220 (except 215.374/379,
220.074/174/179) as of 01.09.02

.c
om

Fig. 116: Identifying Shift Pattern Display And Transmission Mode Switch (Transmission 722.6 Model
203 As Of 01.06.03 Up To 23.04.04)

The program selection performed with the driving program switch (S16/5) is sent from the ETC control unit
(N15/3) to the instrument cluster A1 and the selector lever position is sent from the electronic selector lever
module control unit (N15/5) to the instrument cluster ().

The program selection performed at the transmission mode switch (S16/5) only remains stored after a driving
time of approx. 1 minute and is then displayed again once the engine is started again. The driving time of
approx. 1 minute is necessary because of the system. The selector diagram system of symbols (87) is
illuminated when the driving lamps are switched on

Position sensor, location/task/function - GF27.19-P-5129RMZ

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in model 209.376 as of 1.6.03, 209.476, 211.076 as of 1.9.03, 211.276, 215.374 /379,
219.376, 220.074 /174 /179, 230.474 as of 1.9.03, 230.479

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 209, 211, 230 with CODE (428) Steering wheel shift buttons

Illustrated on model 230.474

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 117: Identifying Shift Pattern Display And Transmission Mode Switch - Illustrated On Model
230.474

Position display, location The position display is

accommodated in the
center shift console cover.
In addition a gear/ driving
program display is located
in the instrument cluster
(A1).
Position display, task GF27.19-P-5129-
02RMZ
Shift pattern display, Model 209, 211, 219, 230 GF27.19-P-5129-03RMZ
function
Model 215, 220 GF27.19-P-5129-03GAZ

Position display, task - GF27.19-P-5129-02RMZ

Transmission 722.6 in model 209.376 as of 1.6.03, 209.476, 211.076 as of 01.09.03, 211.276, 215.374/379,
219.376, 220.074/174/179, 230.474 as of 01.09.03, 230.479
Transmission 722.6 in models 209, 211, 230 with code (428) steering wheel shift buttons

Illustrated on model 230.474

Fig. 118: Identifying Shift Pattern Display And Transmission Mode Switch - Illustrated On Model
230.474

The task of the position indicator is to display optically the position of the selector lever, selected gear range
(for program selector "C/S") or the shifted gear (for program selection "M") and the program selection
performed at the transmission mode switch (S16/5).

ca
Via the selector scheme symbols (87) the alternative selector lever positions and their sequence are shown

rd
symbolically.

ia
Shift pattern display, function - GF27.19-P-5129-03GAZ

gn
TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 215.374/379, 220.074/174/179

.c
om
Fig. 119: Identifying Shift Pattern Display And Transmission Mode Switch (Model 215.374)

The position indicator and program selection indicator in the instrument cluster (A1) is actuated via the
Controller Area Network-bus class C (engine compartment) (CAN-C). The program selection performed with
the driving program switch (S16/5) is sent from the ETC control unit (N15/3) to the instrument cluster A1 and
the selector lever position is sent from the electronic selector lever module control unit (N15/5) to the
instrument cluster (A1).

The selector scheme symbols (87) are illuminated when the driving lamps are switched on.

Program selection "C/S"

The program selection performed at the transmission mode switch (S16/5) remains stored after a driving time of
approx.

1 minute and is then displayed once the engine is started again. The driving time of approx. 1 minute is
necessary because of the system.

Program selection "M"

The program selection "M" (Manual program) performed at the transmission mode switch (S16/5) does not
remain stored. The sport program "S" is displayed once the engine is started.

STEERING WHEEL GEAR SHIFTER, LOCATION/TASK/FUNCTION - GF27.19-P-5137RM

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 209.376 /476, 211.076 /276 up to 31.5.04, 215.374 /379,
220.074 /174 /179, 230.474 /479

Illustrated on Model 230.474

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
Fig. 120: Identifying Steering Wheel Gear Shifter MINUS And Steering Wheel Gear Shifter PLUS
om
(Illustrated On Model 230.474)

Steering wheel The steering wheel gear shifter MINUS (S110/1) is located on the left,
gear shifter, the steering wheel gear shifter PLUS (S111/1) is located on the right on
location the back of the multifunction steering wheel (MFL).
For program selection "M" (manual program) the individual gears of the
Steering wheel
transmission can be shifted directly via the steering wheel gear shifter
gear shifter, task
MINUS (S110/1) or the steering wheel gear shifter PLUS (S111/1).
Steering wheel
GF27.19-P-
gear shifter,
5137-04RM
function
Steering wheel gear shifter, function - GF27.19-P-5137-04RM

Transmission 722.6 in model 209.376/476, 211.076/276 up to 31.05.04, 215.374/379, 220.074/174/179,

230.474/479

Each time the steering wheel gear shifter MINUS (S110/1) or steering wheel gear shifter PLUS (S111/1) is
operated, the electronic selector lever module control unit (N15/5) receives an electrical signal. The signal is
read in by the electronic selector lever module control unit (N15/5) and is placed on the Controller Area
Network bus class C (engine compartment) (CAN-C). The ETC [EGS] control unit (N15/3) takes over the gear
change.

The steering wheel gear shifter MINUS (S110/1) and steering wheel gear shifter PLUS (S111/1) are not
capable of diagnosis.

CONTROL UNIT FOR ELECTRONIC SELECTOR LEVER MODULE, TASK - GF27.19-P-5138

Electronic selector lever module ESM control module, task - GF27.19-P-5138-02GA

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 215, 220

ca
CAN databus

rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 121: Electronic Selector Lever Module ESM Control Module Task Communication Diagram

Task

The electronic selector lever module control module (N15/5) receives digital and analog input signals, converts
these signals and controls various components or transfers information to various control modules via CAN.

The selector lever positions and touch shifts performed are recognized without contact using the opto-electronic
switches. A photoelectric barrier is closed or interrupted each time the position of the selector lever is changed.
Input signals:

 Selector lever position

 Transmission mode switch (S16/5)
 Touch button +/-
 Voltage supply (terminal 87)
 Kick-down switch (S16/6) (up to 31.05.02)

Output signals:

 R/P locking solenoid

 Shift gate illumination (terminal 58d)

The following information is received via CAN:

Instrument cluster (A1)

 Terminal 58 dimmed

ca
Traction system control module (N47)

rd
ia
 Rear right wheel speed

gn
 Rear left wheel speed

.c
for EIS control module (N73)

om
 Stop light switch (S9/1)
 Initialization, personalization, authentication (DAS3)

The following information is sent via CAN:

ETC [EGS] control module (N15/3)

 Selector lever position

 Transmission mode switch (S16/5)
 Kick-down switch (S16/6) (up to 31.05.02)
 Touch button +/for

EIS control module (N73)

 DAS3 messages (authorization request)

Control unit for electronic selector lever module, task - GF27.19-P-5138-02N

Transmission 722.9 in model 215, 220, 463.303/340/341

 ca
rd
Fig. 122: Communication Diagram - Automatic Transmission Electrical Part Function (Shown Up To
31.5.04)

ia
gn
Shown up to 31.5.04

.c
Task

om
The electronic selector lever module control unit (N15/5) receives digital and analog input signals, converts
these and actuates various components or transmits information to various control units via the Controller Area
Network bus class C (engine compartment) (CAN-C).

The selector lever positions and touch shifts performed are recognized without contact using the opto-electronic
switches. A photoelectric barrier is closed or interrupted each time the position of the selector lever is changed.

Internal input signals:

 Selector lever position

 Transmission mode switch (S16/5)
 Touch button +/-
 Power supply

Internal output signals:

 R/P locking solenoid

 Shift gate illumination (circuit 58d)
The following information is received via CAN-C:

Instrument cluster (A1)

 Circuit 58 dimmed

ESP, SPS [PML] and BAS control unit (N47-5)

 Wheel speed and direction, right rear

 Wheel speed and direction, left rear
 Set braking torque

EIS [EZS] control unit (N73)

 Circuit 50
 Circuit 15
 Stop light switch (S9/1)
 Stop lamp feedback

ca
 Initialization, personalization, authenticity for stage 3 drive authorization system (DAS 3)

rd
Central gateway control unit (N93)

ia
gn
 Diagnosis request

.c
The following information is sent via CAN-C:

om
Instrument cluster (A1)

 Selector lever position for gear display (A1p12)

ME-SFI [ME] control unit (N3/10)

 Selector lever position "P", "N"

EIS [EZS] control unit (N73)

 Selector lever position for actuation of backup lamp

 Drive authorization system 3 messages (enable request)

Central gateway control unit (N93)

 Selector lever position

 Diagnosis request

Fully integrated transmission control (VGS) control unit (Y3/8n4)

  Selector lever position
 Transmission mode switch (S16/5)

ELECTRONIC SELECTOR LEVER MODULE CONTROL UNIT, LOCATION/TASK - GF27.19-P-

5140

Electronic selector lever module control unit, location/task - GF27.19-P-5140GA

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODELS 215, 220, 230, 240

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 123: Identifying Electronic Selector Lever Module Control Unit (Shows Model 220)

Shows model 220

Electronic selector lever The control unit for the electronic selector lever module
module control unit, location (N15/5) is located in the center console of the vehicle.
Control unit for electronic GF27.19-P-
Model 215, 220
selector lever module, task 5138-02GA
Model 230 except code (428a) steering wheel shift GF27.19-P-
buttons 5138-02R
GF27.19-P-
Model 230 with code (428a) steering wheel shift buttons
5138-02RX
GF27.19-P-
Model 240
5138-02X

Electronic selector lever module control unit, location/task - GF27.19-P-5140N

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 215, 220, 230

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

ca
Fig. 124: Identifying Electronic Selector Lever Module Control Unit (Shows Model 220)

rd
ia
Shown on model 220

gn
Control unit for electronic
The control unit for the electronic selector lever module

.c
selector lever module,
(N15/5) is located in the center console of the vehicle.
location

om
Control unit for electronic GF27.19-P-
Model 215, 220, 463.303/340/341
selector lever module, task 5138-02N
Model 230 except code (428) Steering wheel shift GF27.19-P-
buttons 5138-02NR
GF27.19-P-
Model 230 with code (428) Steering wheel shift buttons
5138-02NRL

KICKDOWN SWITCH, LOCATION / TASK / DESIGN - GF27.19-P-5141GA

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 163, 170, 202, 208, 210 with touch shift

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 203, 215, 220, 230 up to 31.5.02

Shown in model 170

Fig. 125: Locating Kickdown Switch - Shown In Model 170

Kickdown switch position The kickdown switch

(S16/6) is located in the
footwell, integrated into the
electric accelerator pedal.

ca
Kickdown switch task Influencing the shift
program of the electronic

rd
transmission control.

ia
Kickdown switch design The kickdown switch

gn
(S16/6) consists of a
spring-tensioned electrical

.c
switch contact.

om
SELECTION RANGE SENSOR, LOCATION/TASK - GF27.19-P-5142N

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

Fig. 126: Identifying Selection Range Sensor - Transmission 722.9

ca
Selection range sensor, The selection range sensor
location (VGS) (Y3/8s1) is

rd
integrated in the electric

ia
control unit (VGS) (Y3/8).

gn
Selection range sensor, The task of the selection
task range sensor (VGS)

.c
(Y3/8s1) is to detect the
selection ranges "P", "R",

om
"N", "D" and the
intermediate position.

TORQUE CONVERTER LOCKUP CLUTCH CONTROL, FUNCTION - GF27.20-P-3002

Function of torque converter lockup clutch control - GF27.20-P-3002G

TRANSMISSION 722.6

Operating characteristics of the torque converter lockup clutch

Fig. 127: Operating Characteristics Graph Of Torque Converter Lockup Clutch

Operation

The aim of using the torque converter lockup clutch is to reduce the fuel consumption and exhaust gas
emissions of the vehicle by reducing torque converter slip. This stands in contradiction to the ride comfort

ca
demands made on the drive train with regard to its vibration behavior. The task of the electronic transmission
control is therefore to close the clutch in all driving situations relevant to fuel consumption, if possible, and

rd
ensure that the engine vibrations are isolated from the drive train.

ia
The characteristic curves shown in the diagram illustrate the different operating states of the torque converter

gn
lockup clutch in relation to the accelerator pedal position and the transmission output speed, plotted for one
transmission gear.

.c
om
In addition to the evaluation of these characteristics, the status of the torque converter lockup clutch is also
determined by other variables.

Variables influencing the states of the torque converter lockup clutch

 Accelerator pedal movement

 Uphill and downhill gradients
 Transmission shift functions
 ATF temperature
 Durability requirements
 Load condition
 Engine control influences

Torque converter lockup GF27.60-P-3019G

clutch control pressure,
function

Torque converter lockup clutch control, function - GF27.20-P-3002N

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

The clutch pressure in the torque converter lockup clutch is derived from the working pressure through the
torque converter lockup clutch regulating valve. The regulating valve position is influenced by the torque
converter lockup clutch control solenoid valve (VGS) (Y3/8y8). The clutch pressure in the torque converter
lockup clutch depends on the regulating valve position and thus on the geometry of the torque converter lockup
clutch regulating valve. The torque converter lockup clutch has the following control states:

 Open
 open-slipping
 SLIPPING
 slipping-open

"Open" control state"

The regulating valve of the torque converter lockup clutch is located in the basic position. The working pressure
acts on the converter regulating valve via a connecting line between the torque converter lockup clutch

ca
regulating valve and the converter regulating valve. Lubrication pressure is applied to the converter as a result.
The torque converter lockup clutch is in the unpressurized condition.

rd
ia
Control state "open-slipping"

gn
The torque converter lockup clutch regulating valve is no longer in the basic position and as a result interrupts

.c
the connection between the torque converter lockup clutch regulating valve and the converter regulating valve.

om
The torque converter lockup clutch is filled.

Control state "slipping"

The required slip (specified slip) is stored in the fully integrated transmission control (VGS) control unit
(Y3/8n4). The fully integrated transmission control (VGS) control unit (Y3/8n4) calculates the required control
current and actuates the torque converter lockup clutch control solenoid valve (VGS) (Y3/8y8) which influences
the position of the torque converter lockup clutch regulating valve (pre-control). The clutch pressure in the
torque converter lockup clutch depends on the regulating valve position and thus on the regulating valve
geometry. The actual slip is determined by the comparison of engine speed with the turbine speed. If necessary,
a post-regulation is introduced by the fully integrated transmission control (VGS) control unit (Y3/8n4). The
clutch pressure in the torque converter lockup clutch can be increased or reduced by post-regulation.

Control state "slipping-open"

In this control state the clutch pressure in the torque converter lockup clutch is reduced in stages. In this process
a constantly progressive operation is involved which is moved along a time ramp from the initial value to zero
until the clutch pressure in the torque converter lockup clutch is reduced.

The torque converter lockup clutch is not actuated in limp-home mode.

 Torque converter lockup GF27.60-P-3019N
clutch control pressure,
function

TORQUE CONVERTER, LOCATION / TASK / DESIGN / FUNCTION - GF27.20-P-5100

Torque converter, location / task / design / function - GF27.20-P-5100G

TRANSMISSION 722.6

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 128: Identifying Torque Converter Location / Design / Function

Torque converter, location The torque converter is

rigidly bolted to the driver
plate in the torque
converter housing.
Torque converter, task Reduces the power flow
between the engine and the
automatic transmission to a
minimum when the vehicle
is stationary and the engine
is idling, boosts the engine
torque and provides
infinitely variable engine
speed and torque matching
when moving off.
Torque converter, design The impeller (P) is
connected to the engine,
 the turbine wheel (T) is
connected to the
transmission input shaft.
The stator (L) is connected
to the transmission housing
via a freewheel and the
stator shaft (8).
Torque converter, GF27.20-P-5100-02G
function

Torque converter, function - GF27.20-P-5100-02G

Transmission 722.6

Transmission 722.7

Due to the effect of centrifugal force, the blades of the impeller (P) pump the oil outwards to the turbine wheel
(T), causing it to rotate. The turbine wheel blades direct the oil onto the blades of the stator, which in turn push
the oil back to the impeller (P) (arrow). This diversion at the stator (L), which is supported against the

ca
transmission housing via the freewheel, produces an increase in torque. At the maximum speed difference
between the impeller (P) and the turbine wheel (T), the torque conversion achieves its maximum value at a

rd
factor of 1.8 to 2.0, dropping to a torque ratio of 1:1 as the speeds converge. From this operating state onwards,
also referred to as the coupling point, the stator (L) rotates with the impeller (P) and the turbine wheel (T).

ia
gn
Efficiencies of up to approx. 98 % are achieved in the coupling range.

.c
The oil in the torque converter is constantly being replaced so that the heat produced in the operating phase can

om
be dissipated via the transmission oil cooler.
 ca
Fig. 129: Identifying Torque Converter Function

rd
ia
Torque converter, location/task/design/function - GF27.20-P-5100N

gn
TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230

.c
om
TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341
Fig. 130: Torque Converter Function Diagram - Transmission 722.9

Torque converter, The torque converter is

location rigidly bolted to the driven
plate in the torque
converter housing.
Torque converter, task When the vehicle is
stationary and at idle
speed it reduces the power
flow between the engine
and automatic
transmission to a
minimum; when starting
off it serves engine torque
multiplication and
continuous rpm/torque
adjustment.
Torque converter, design The impeller (4) is
connected to the engine

ca
and the turbine wheel (2)
to the transmission input

rd
shaft. The stator (3) is
connected to the

ia
transmission housing via a

gn
freewheel and stator shaft
(8).

.c
Torque converter,

om
GF27.20-P-5100-02N
function

Torque converter, function - GF27.20-P-5100-02N

Transmission 722.9 in model 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230, 463.303/340/341
Fig. 131: Identifying Torque Converter Components - Transmission 722.9

ca
Torque converter, function

rd
When the vehicle is stationary and at idle speed, it is the task of the torque converter to reduce the power flow

ia
between the engine and automatic transmission to a minimum. Furthermore, it serves to amplify engine torque
and to continuously match rotational speed and torque when starting off.

gn
.c
The impeller (4) is connected to the engine and turbine wheel (2) is connected to the transmission input shaft.
The stator (3) is connected to the transmission housing via a freewheel and the stator shaft.

om
The oil in the torque converter is continuously exchanged so that heat generated during the operating phase
can be drawn away by the transmission oil cooler.

TORQUE CONVERTER LOCKUP CLUTCH, LOCATION/TASK/DESIGN/FUNCTION - GF27.20-P-

5101

Torque converter lockup clutch, location/task/design/function - GF27.20-P-5101G

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODELS 129, 140, 163, 170, 202, 203, 208, 209, 210, 211, 219, 230, 240

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 215, 220 except CODE (479) Cylinder shutoff
 ca
Fig. 132: Identifying Torque Converter Lockup Clutch Location/Design/Function

rd
Torque converter lockup The torque converter

ia
clutch, location lockup clutch is integrated

gn
in the torque converter.
Torque converter lockup The torque converter

.c
clutch, task lockup clutch minimizes

om
the power losses of the
torque converter and as a
result reduces the engine
speed and improves the
efficiency of the
transmission.
Torque converter lockup The external plate carrier
clutch, design (16a) is connected to the
impeller (P) via the cover
shell (17). The internal
plate carrier (16b) is
connected to the turbine
wheel (T).
Torque converter lockup Model 129, 140, 163, 170, GF27.20-P-5101-02G
clutch, function 202, 203, 208, 210, 215,
220, 230
Model 209, 211,219, 240 GF27.20-P-5101-02T

Torque converter lockup clutch, function - GF27.20-P-5101-02G

Transmission 722.6 in models 129, 140, 163, 170, 202, 203, 208, 210, 230 Transmission 722.6 in models
215, 220 except code (479) cylinder shutoff

ca
Fig. 133: Identifying Torque Converter Lockup Clutch Function

rd
ia
Operation

gn
When actuated by the ETC control module (N15/3), oil pressure controlled by the torque converter lockup
PWM solenoid valve (Y3/6y6) is directed through the input shaft (1) to the pressure chamber behind the piston

.c
(16d). The piston presses the clutch pack (16c) together and allows torque to be transferred directly between the

om
impeller (P) and turbine wheel (T).

The torque converter lockup clutch is activated in 5th, 4th and 3rd gears in relation to the engine speed and
engine load.

Torque converter lock-up clutch, location/task/design/function - GF27.20-P-5101GA

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODELS 215, 220 with CODE (479) Cylinder shutoff
 ca
Fig. 134: Identifying Torque Converter Lock-Up Clutch Components Location

rd
Torque converter
The torque converter lockup clutch is integrated in the torque

ia
lockup clutch,
converter.

gn
location
Minimize the power losses of the torque converter by reducing the

.c
Torque converter
converter slip. Thereby reduce the engine speed and improve the
lockup clutch, task

om
efficiency of the transmission.
Torque converter The externally toothed disk carrier (16a) is connected to the
lockup clutch, impeller (P) the via the cover (17). The internally toothed disc
design carrier (16b) is connected to the turbine wheel (T).
Torque converter
GF27.20-P-
lockup clutch,
5101-02GA
function

Torque converter lockup clutch, function - GF27.20-P-5101-02GA

Transmission 722.6 in models 215, 220 with code (479) cylinder shutoff
Fig. 135: Identifying Torque Converter Lockup Clutch Function

ca
Operation

rd
When actuated by the ETC control module (N15/3), oil pressure controlled by the torque converter lockup
PWM solenoid valve (Y3/6y6) is directed through the input shaft (1) to the pressure chamber behind the piston

ia
(16d). The piston presses the clutch pack (16c) together and allows torque to be transferred directly between the

gn
impeller (P) and turbine wheel (T).

.c
The torque converter lockup clutch is activated in 5th, 4th and 3rd gears in relation to the engine speed and

om
engine load.

The torsional damper damps the vibrations produced by the engine when the cylinders are shut off. This
improves comfort for the driver and saves wear and tear on the mechanical components of the transmission.

Location / task / design / function of torque converter lockup clutch - GF27.20-P-5101N

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

 ca
Fig. 136: Torque Converter Lockup Clutch Function Diagram - Transmission 722.9

rd
Torque converter lockup The torque converter

ia
clutch, location lockup clutch is integrated
in the torque converter.

gn
Torque converter lockup To minimize the power

.c
clutch, task losses of the torque

om
converter by reducing
converter slip, to reduce
engine speed as a result
and to improve the
efficiency of the
transmission.
Torque converter lockup The external plate carrier
clutch, design (16a) is connected to the
impeller (4) via the torque
converter housing (17).
The internal plate carrier
(16b) is connected to the
turbine wheel (2).
Torque converter lockup GF27.20-P-5101-02N
clutch, function

Torque converter lockup clutch, function - GF27.20-P-5101-02N

Transmission 722.9 in model 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230, 463.303/340/341
Fig. 137: Torque Converter Lockup Clutch Function Diagram - Transmission 722.9

ca
Function

rd
With an actuation triggered by the fully integrated transmission control (VGS) control unit (Y3/8n4) oil

ia
pressure controlled by the torque converter lockup clutch control solenoid valve (VGS) (Y3/8y8) is lead
through the drive shaft (1) to the pressure chamber behind the piston (16d). The piston (16d) compresses the

gn
clutch pack (16c) and therefore enables direct torque transmission between the impeller (4) and turbine wheel
(2).

.c
om
The torque converter lockup clutch is engaged in all gears depending on engine speed and load.

The torsional damper damps the vibrations coming from the engine. This improves comfort for the driver and
saves wear and tear on the mechanical components of the transmission.

TRANSMISSION HOUSING BREATHER, LOCATION/TASK - GF27.40-P-2007

Transmission housing breather, location/task - GF27.40-P-2007G

TRANSMISSION 722.6
Fig. 138: Identifying Transmission Housing Breather

Transmission housing The inside of the

breather, location transmission and the
breather (72) are connected
by a channel which is cast
into the torque converter
casing.
Transmission housing The transmission housing
breather, task vent compensates the
pressure in the
transmission housing if
temperature-related volume
changes in the transmission
oil and air occur.

Transmission housing vent, location/task - GF27.40-P-2007N

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230

ca
TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 139: Identifying Transmission Housing Breather Location - Transmission 722.9

Transmission housing The inside of the

breather, location transmission and the
breather (72) are
connected by a channel
which is cast into the
torque converter housing.
Transmission housing The transmission housing
breather, task breather ensures that a
pressure equilibrium is
maintained in the event of
temperature-related
volume changes in the
transmission fluid and air
in the transmission
 housing.

PLANETARY GEAR SET, LOCATION/TASK/DESIGN/FUNCTION - GF27.50-P-5100

Planetary gear set, location / task / design / function - GF27.50-P-5100G

TRANSMISSION 722.6

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
Fig. 140: Identifying Planetary Gear Set Components Location

om
Planetary gear set, Three planetary gear sets
location are used to produce the
different gear ratios. These
are located in the
mechanical part of the
transmission as the front,
center and rear planetary
gear set (V, M, H)
Planetary gear set, task Power transmission and
production of different
gear ratios.
Planetary gear set, design A planetary gear set
consists of the ring gear
(1), the planet gears (2)
carried in the planet carrier
(4) and the sun gear (3).
Planetary gear set, GF27.50-P-5100-01G
function

Planetary gear set, function - GF27.50-P-5100-01G

Transmission 722.6

Fig. 141: Identifying Planetary Gear Set Components

Operation

The ring gear (1) and sun gear (3) elements of a planetary gear system are alternately driven and braked by the
actuating elements of the multi-plate clutch and multiple-disc brake. The planet gears (2) can turn on the
internal gearing of the ring gear (1) and on the external gearing of the sun gear (3). This allows for a variety of
gear ratios and the reversal of the rotation direction without the need for moving gear wheels or shift collars.

ca
The torque and speed are converted corresponding to the lever ratios or the ratio of the number of teeth on the

rd
driven to the driving gears and is known as the gear ratio i. The overall ratio of a number of planetary gear sets
connected in series is obtained by multiplying the partial ratios.

ia
gn
When two components of the planetary gear set are locked together, the planetary gear set is locked and turns as
a closed unit.

.c
om
Advantages of a planetary gear set:

 Shifting ability under load

 Several ratios can be produced
 Constant meshing of the gears
 Simple direction reversal
 High efficiency
 Coaxial location of input and output
 Compact design

The following basic ratio possibilities can be realized

1. Sun gear locked

Ring gear driving

Planet gears driven

Relatively low step-down ratio.

 Fig. 142: Identifying Planetary Gear Set Function (1 Of 4)

2. Hollow gear locked

Sun gear driving

Planet gears driven

Relatively high step-down ratio.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 143: Identifying Planetary Gear Set Function (2 Of 4)

3. Locking two elements together so that the planetary gear set turns as a unit, produces a direct power
transmission (i = 1).

Fig. 144: Identifying Planetary Gear Set Function (3 Of 4)

 4. Planetary carrier locked

Sun gear driving

Ring gear driven

Direction reversal and step-down ratio.

Fig. 145: Identifying Planetary Gear Set Function (4 Of 4)

ca
rd
Planetary gear set, location/task/design/function - GF27.50-P-5100N

ia
TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230 Ravigneaux gear set

gn
TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

.c
om

Fig. 146: Identifying Planetary Gear Set - Transmission 722.9

 Planetary gear set, The Ravigneaux gear set
location (9) is located in the
mechanical part of the
transmission.
Planetary gear set, task Power transmission and
production of different
gear ratios.
Planetary gear set, design The Ravigneaux gear set
(9) used consists of 2 ring
gears, a planet carrier, a
sun gear as well as short
and long planetary gears.
Planetary gear set, GF27.50-P-5100-01N
function

Planetary gear set, function - GF27.50-P-5100-01N

Transmission 722.9 in model 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230, 463.303/340/341 Ravigneaux gear set

ca
Ravigneaux gear set

rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 147: Identifying Ravigneaux Gear Set - Transmission 722.9

The elements ring gears, sun gear (3) and planet carrier (4) of the Ravigneaux gear set used are driven or stalled
alternately via the shift elements of multi-disk clutch and multi-disk brake. The planetary gears can turn on the
internal teething of the ring gears and on the external gearing of the sun gear (3). This allows for a variety of
gear ratios and the reversal of the rotation direction without the need for moving gear wheels or shift collars.

The torque and engine speed are converted according to the lever ratios or the ratio of the number of teeth on
the driven gears to that on the drive gears, and is referred to as the gear ratio i. The overall ratio of a number of
planetary gear sets connected in series is obtained by multiplying the partial ratios.

If 2 components of the Ravigneaux gear set are rigidly connected to each other, the planetary set is blocked and
rotates as a closed unit.

Advantages of a Ravigneaux gear set

 Shifting ability under load

 Several ratios can be produced
 Constant meshing of the gears
 Simple direction reversal
 High efficiency
 Coaxial location of input and output
 Compact design
 Combined 2 single planetary gear systems in one unit

Planetary gear set, location/task/design/function - GF27.50-P-5100NN

ca
TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230 Single planetary gear set

rd
TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

ia
gn
.c
om

Fig. 148: Identifying Single Planetary Gear Set - Transmission 722.9

Planetary gear set, The front single planetary

location gear set (12a) and the rear
single planetary gear set
(12b) are located in the
 mechanical part of the
transmission.
Planetary gear set, task Power transmission and
production of different
gear ratios.
Planetary gear set, design A single planetary gear
system consists of a ring
gear, the planetary gears
mounted in the planet
carrier and a sun gear
Planetary gear set, GF27.50-P-5100-01NN
function

Planetary gear set, function - GF27.50-P-5100-01NN

Transmission 722.9 in model 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230, 463.303/340/341

Simple planetary gear system

ca
Simple planetary gear system

rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 149: Identifying Simple Planetary Gear System - Transmission 722.9

The ring gear (3), sun gear or planet gear carrier (2) elements of a single planetary gear system are alternately
driven and braked by the actuating elements of the multidisk clutch and multidisk brake. In the process, the
planetary gears (1) can roll on the internal teething of the ring gear (3) and on the external teething of the sun
gear. This allows for a variety of gear ratios and the reversal of the rotation direction without the need for
moving gear wheels or shift collars.

The torque and engine speed are converted according to the lever ratios or the ratio of the number of teeth on
the driven gears to that on the drive gears, and is referred to as the gear ratio i. The overall ratio of a number of
planetary gear sets connected in series is obtained by multiplying the partial ratios.

If 2 components of a single planetary gear system are rigidly connected to each other, then this is locked and
rotates as a closed unit.

Advantages of a single planetary gear system

 Shifting ability under load

 Several ratios can be produced
 Constant meshing of the gears
 Simple direction reversal
 High efficiency
 Coaxial location of input and output
 Compact design

MULTI-DISK CLUTCH, FUNCTION - GF27.51-P-4000-01G

ca
Transmission 722.6

rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 150: Identifying Multi-Disk Clutch Function

Operation

Front multiple-disc clutch (K1)

If the piston (K1 a) on the front multiple-disc clutch (k1) is subjected to oil pressure, it presses the internal and
external discs of the disc set together.
The front sun gear (V1) is connected to the front planetary gear carrier (V3) via the external multiple-disc
carrier (K1b) and the internal multiple-disc carrier (K1c). The front planetary gear set is thus locked and turns
as a closed unit.

Center multiple-disc clutch (K2)

If the center multiple-disc clutch (K2) is engaged via the piston (K2a), the piston compresses the disc set Via
the internal multiple-disc carrier (K2b) and the center planetary gear carrier (M3) on which the internal discs are
seated, the front hollow gear (V4) of the front planetary gear set is connected to the center hollow gear (M4) of
the center planetary gear set. The front hollow gear (V4) and the center hollow gear (M4) move at the same
speed as the drive shaft (1).

Rear multiple-disc clutch (K3)

If the rear multiple-disc clutch (K3) is engaged via the piston (K3a), then this compresses the disc set. The
center sun gear (M1) of the center planetary gear set is connected to the rear sun gear (H1) of the rear planetary
gear carrier via the external multiple-disc carrier (K3b) and internal multiple-disc carrier (K3c). The center sun
gear (M1) and the rear sun gear (H1) move at the same speed.

ca
MULTIPLE-DISC BRAKE, LOCATION / TASK / DESIGN / FUNCTION - GF27.51-P-5100G

rd
TRANSMISSION 722.6

ia
gn
.c
om

Fig. 151: Identifying Multiple-Disc Brake Components

Multiple-disc brake, Three multiple-disc brakes

location arranged as the front,
center and rear multiple-
disc brake (B1, B3, B2) are
located in the planetary
 gear sets in the
transmission housing.
Multiple-disc brake, task Brace the ring gear, sun
gear or planet carrier of a
planetary gear set against
the transmission housing in
order to transmit the drive
torque.
Multiple-disc brake, A multiple-disc brake
design consists of a number of
internally toothed discs
(10) on an internally
toothed disc carrier and
externally toothed discs (9)
on an externally toothed
disc carrier, which is
rigidly connected to the
transmission housing.
Multiple-disc brake, GF27.51-P-5100-04G

ca
function

rd
Multiple-disc brake, function - GF27.51-P-5100-04G

ia
gn
Transmission 722.6

.c
om

Fig. 152: Identifying Multiple-Disc Brake Function

Operation

If the piston (B1a) on multiple-disc brake B1 is subjected to oil pressure, it presses the internal and external
discs of the disc set together. The front sun gear (V1) on the housing is locked via the internal multiple-disc
carrier (B1c). The front planetary gears (V2) roll on the front sun gear (V1).

If the rear multiple-disc brake (B2) is engaged via the piston (B2a), then this presses the disc set together. The
center sun gear (M1) is locked against the housing via the internal multiple-disc carrier (B2c). The center
planetary gears (M2) roll on the center sun gear (M1)

If the center multiple disc brake (B3) is engaged via the piston (B3a), then the rear planetary gear carrier (H3)
and the center hollow gear (M4) are locked. When the center multiple-disc brake (B3) is engaged the direction
of rotation reverses.

MULTI-PLATE CLUTCH, LOCATION / TASK / DESIGN / FUNCTION - GF27.51-P-5101G

TRANSMISSION 722.6

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 153: Identifying Multi-Plate Clutch Components Function

Multi-disk clutch, Three multi-plate clutches,

location the front, middle and rear
multi-plate clutches K1,
K2 and K3, are located in
the planetary gear sets in
the transmission housing.
Multi-disk clutch, task Produces a non-positive
locking connection
between two elements of a
planetary gear set or
between one element from
each of two planetary gear
sets in order to transmit the
 drive torque.
Multiple-disc clutch, A multi-plate clutch
design consists of a number of
internally toothed discs
(10) on an internally
toothed disc carrier and
externally toothed discs (9)
on an externally toothed
disc carrier.
Multi-disk clutch, GF27.51-P-4000-01G
function

LOCATION / TASK / DESIGN / FUNCTION OF FREEWHEEL - GF27.51-P-5102G

TRANSMISSION 722.6

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 154: Identifying Freewheel Components Function

Freewheel, location In the front planetary gear

set a freewheel (F1, F2) is
installed between the front
sun gear (V1) and the
stator shaft (8) and in the
rear planetary gear set
between the rear sun gear
(H1) and the intermediate
shaft (3).
 Freewheel, task Optimizes individual
gearshifts. Support of the
individual elements of a
planetary gear set against
each other or against the
transmission housing in
one direction of rotation in
order to permit torque
transmission.
Freewheel, design The freewheels (F1, F2)
consist of an outer race
(12), an inner race (13), a
number of clamping bodies
(14) and a clamping body
cage (15).
Freewheel, function GF27.51-P-5102-04G

Freewheel, function - GF27.51-P-5102-04G

ca
Transmission 722.6

rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 155: Identifying Freewheel Function

Operation

If the inner race (13) of the freewheel is locked and the outer race (12) turns in direction "A", the locking
elements (14) adopt a diagonal position on account of their special contours, allowing the freewheel function.
The outer race (12) slides over the locking elements (14) with negligible friction.

If the rotation of the outer race (12) changes to direction "B", the locking elements (14) stand up and lock the
outer and inner races (12, 13) together.

MULTI-DISK CLUTCH, LOCATION/TASK/DESIGN - GF27.51-P-5103N

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
Fig. 156: Identifying Multi-Disk Clutch - Transmission 722.

om
Multi-disk clutch, 3 multi-disk clutches
location made up of multi-disk
clutch K1 (8), multi-disk
clutch K2 (11) and multi-
disk clutch K3 (14) are
arranged in planetary gear
systems in the
transmission housing.
Multi-disk clutch, task To produce a friction
connection between 2
elements of a planetary
gear set or one element
each from 2 planetary gear
sets, for transferring the
drive torque.
Multi-disk clutch, design GF27.51-P-5103-03N

Multi-disk clutch, design - GF27.51-P-5103-03N

Transmission 722.9 in model 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230, 463.303/340/341

ca
Fig. 157: Identifying Multi-Disk Clutch Design - Transmission 722.9

rd
A multi-disk clutch consists of a number of internally toothed plates (10) on an internal plate carrier and

ia
externally toothed plates (9) on an externally toothed plate carrier. Single-sided lamella are used on the K1
multidisk clutch (K1), on the K2 multidisk clutch (K2) and on the K3 multidisk clutch (K3).

gn
.c
On this type of lamella the friction lining is only applied on one side. Among other things, this improves heat
distribution in the disk pack, the design of the disk pack is more compact, the load-bearing capacity is increased

om
and the mass is reduced.

MULTI-DISK BRAKE, LOCATION/TASK/DESIGN - GF27.51-P-5104N

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

Fig. 158: Identifying Multi-Disk Brake - Transmission 722.9

ca
Multi-disk brake, location 4 multi-disk brakes made

rd
up of multi-disk brake B1
(7), multi-disk brake B3

ia
(10), multi-disk brake BR

gn
(13) and multi-disk brake
B2 (15) are arranged in

.c
the planetary gear systems

om
in the transmission
housing.
Multi-disk brake, task To support the ring gear,
sun gear or planet carrier
of a planetary gear set
relative to the
transmission housing, to
transmit the drive torque.
Multi-disk brake, design GF27.51-P-5104-03N

Multi-disk brake, design - GF27.51-P-5104-03N

Transmission 722.9 in model 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230, 463.303/340/341
Fig. 159: Identifying Multi-Disk Brake Design - Transmission 722.9

ca
A multi-disk brake consists of several internally toothed plates (10) on an internal plate carrier and several
externally toothed plates (9) on an external plate carrier which is connected in a fixed manner to the

rd
transmission housing. Single-sided lamella are used on the B1 multidisk brake (B1) and on the B3 multidisk
brake (B3). On this type of lamella the friction lining is only applied on one side.

ia
gn
Among other things, this improves heat distribution in the disk pack, the design of the disk pack is more
compact, the load-bearing capacity is increased and the mass is reduced. Furthermore, disks coated on both

.c
sides are used on multi-disk brake B2 (B2) and multidisk brake BR (BR).

om
SURVEY OF MULTIPLE-DISC COMPONENTS, PRODUCTION DETAILS - GF27.51-P-5200

Survey of multiple-disc components, production details - GF27.51-P-5200A

TRANSMISSION 722.6

Transmission Transmission Transmission

722.600/619/660 722.601/602/603/610 722.604/606/609/617
Friction
plates Steel plates Friction plates Steel plates Friction plates Steel plates
K1 3 4 3 4 4 5
K2 4 5 3 4 4 5
K3 3 4 3 4 4 5
B1 2 3 2 3 3 4
B2 4 5 4 5 4 5
B3 3 4 3 4 4 5
Torque 1 2 1 2 2 3
converter
lockup clutch

Transmission Transmission Transmission

722.605/607/608/611/614/616/618/ 722.665 722.620/621/624/626/627/628/630/
662/664/699 633/636/643/666
Friction Steel
Friction plates Steel plates plates plates Friction plates Steel plates
K1 4 5 4 5 6 7
K2 4 5 4 5 6 7
K3 4 5 4 5 5 6
B1 3 4 3 4 4 5
B2 5 6 4 5 5 6
B3 4 5 4 5 5 6
Torque 2 3 2 3 2 3
converter
lockup
clutch

ca
Transmission

rd
722.622/623/625/631 /632/663/669 Transmission 722.629/634/661

ia
Friction plates Steel plates Friction plates Steel plates
K1 5 6 5 6

gn
K2 5 6 5 6

.c
K3 4 5 4 5

om
B1 3 4 4 5
B2 5 6 5 6
B3 5 6 5 6
Torque converter 2 3 2 3
lockup clutch

Survey of multi-disk components, production details - GF27.51-P-5200W

TRANSMISSION 722.9 /9

Transmission 722.901
Internally Internally Internally Externally Externally Externally
toothed plates toothed toothed plates toothed plates toothed plates toothed plates
without plates Single- Double-sided without Single-sided Double-sided
friction lining sided friction friction lining friction lining friction lining friction lining
lining + (end disk)
K1 - 4 - (1) 4 -
K2 - 4 - (1) 4 -
K3 - 5 - (1) 5 -
B1 - 4 - (1) 4 -
B2 5 - - 1 + (1) - 6
B3 - 4 - (1) 4 -
BR - - 4 4 + (1) - -

GEAR SHIFT, FUNCTION - GF27.60-P-2000

Function of gear shift - GF27.60-P-2000GA

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 163, 170, 202, 208, 210 with touch shift

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 203 up to 23.4.04, 215, 220, 240 (except 215.374 /379,
220.074 /174 /179)

On transmission 722.6 the electrohydraulic control unit converts the electric signals going out from the
electronic transmission control (EGS) into hydraulic signals.

Faults occurring in the ETC control unit (N15/3) are handled by the limp-home system. The limp-home system
is designed so that the driver can reach a Service Operation even under extreme conditions.

ca
Selector lever positions "P", "R", "N" and "D" are transmitted by the electronic selector lever module control

rd
unit (N15/5) on the Controller Area Network bus class C (engine compartment) (CAN-C) and in parallel to this

ia
by means of a shift rod to the range selector lever at the transmission end. By touching or holding the selector

gn
lever towards"+" or"-" the shift range is preselected and displayed in the instrument cluster (A1) until an upshift
of transmission 722.6 is possible.

.c
om
Function of gear change GF27.60-P-3010G
Emergency default mode, GF27.60-P-3012G
function
Function of manual drive Model 163 GF27.60-P-3011GI
mode selection Model 170,202,208,210 GF27.60-P-3011GB
Model 203 up to 31.05.03 GF27.60-P-3011P
Model 203 as of 01.06.03 GF27.60-P-3011PZ
Model 215, 220 up to GF27.60-P-3011GA
31.08.02
Models 215, 220 as of GF27.60-P-3011GAZ
01.09.02, 240
Oil level control, function GF27.10-P-3024G
Torque converter lockup GF27.20-P-3002G
clutch control, function

Gear shift, function - GF27.60-P-2000N

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 215, 220

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 219, 230 (except 171.473 /44) except CODE
(428) Steering wheel shift buttons

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

The electrohydraulic controller unit converts electrical signals going out from the fully integrated transmission
control (VGS) into hydraulic signals. Faults occurring in the VGS are covered by the limp-home mode. The
limp-home strategy is designed so that the driver can still reach a Mercedes-Benz service operation under
extreme conditions.

The selector lever positions "P", "R", "N" and "D" are transferred by the electronic selector lever module
control unit (N15/5) to the Controller Area Network bus Class C (engine compartment) (CAN-C) and - in
parallel - mechanically forwarded with the aid of shift rod to the selection range sensor (VGS) (Y3/8s1). By
touching or holding the selector lever in the "+" and "-" direction the shift range, up to which the a upshifting of
the transmission is possible, is programmed and displayed in the instrument cluster (A1).

Gear change, function GF27.60-P-3010N

Emergency default mode, GF27.60-P-3012N
function
Manual drive mode Model 171.4 GF27.60-P-3011NK

ca
selection, function
Model 203 GF27.60-P-3011NP

rd
Model 209 GF27.60-P-3011NQ

ia
Model 211, 219 GF27.60-P-3011NT

gn
Model 215, 220, 230, GF27.60-P-3011N
463.303/340/341

.c
Oil level control, function GF27.10-P-3024N

om
Torque converter lockup GF27.20-P-3002N
clutch control, function

Gear shift, function - GF27.60-P-2000RMZ

TRANSMISSION 722.6

in model 209.376 as of 1.6.03, 209.476, 211.076 as of 1.9.03, 211.276, 215.374 /379, 219.376,
220.074 /174 /179, 230.474 as of 1.9.03, 230.479

On transmission 722.6 the electrohydraulic control unit converts the electric signals going out from the
electronic transmission control (EGS) into hydraulic signals.

Faults occurring in the ETC control unit (N15/3) are handled by the limp-home system. This is designed to
allow the driver to reach a service outlet even under extreme conditions.

In parallel with being conveyed via the controlled area network bus class C (engine compartment)(CAN-C), the
selector lever positions "P", "R", "N" and "D" are passed on mechanically by means of a shift rod mechanically
to the range selector lever at the transmission side.
Program selection "C/S"

Via touching or holding the selector lever towards "+" or "-", the shift range is preselected and displayed in the
instrument cluster (A1) until an upshift of the transmission 722.6 is possible.

Program selection "M"

Program selection "M" is only possible in selector lever position "D". In the process the 5 forward gears of
transmission 722.6 can be shifted direct, either via the steering wheel gear shifter MINUS (S110/1), steering
wheel gear shifter PLUS (S111/1) or via the selector lever.

The shifted gear is displayed in the instrument cluster (A1). The transmission automatically changes into the
sport program "S" when the selector lever is shifted out of selector lever position "D".

Shift processes at unacceptably high or low engine speed are not carried out.

In addition a mandatory downshift occurs at too low an engine speed or a mandatory upshift occurs at too high
an engine speed. When the vehicle is stationary the transmission automatically shifts into 1st gear. It is possible
to start off both in 1st or 2nd gear.

ca
Gear change, function GF27.60-P-3010G

rd
Limp-home mode, function GF27.60-P-3012G

ia
Manual drive mode selection, function GF27.60-P-3011RMZ

gn
Oil level control, function GF27.10-P-3024G
Torque converter lockup clutch control, function GF27.20-P-3002G

.c
om
FUNCTION OF TRANSMISSION CONTROL - GF27.60-P-2002

Transmission control, function - GF27.60-P-2002N

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 215, 220

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 219, 230 (except 171.473 /44) except CODE
(428) Steering wheel shift buttons

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

The transmission control is dived into electronic and hydraulic transmission control.

While the electronic transmission control takes over the gear selection and adaptation of pressures to the torque
to be transmitted, the power supply of the transmission is controlled via the hydraulic elements of the
electrohydraulic control unit. The oil supply to the hydraulic elements, such as the hydrodynamic torque
converter, the shift elements and the hydraulic transmission control, is provided by way of an oil pump
connected to the torque converter.

The fully integrated transmission control (VGS) makes possible precise adaptation of pressures to the respective
operating conditions and to the engine output during the shift phase which results in a significant increase in
shift quality.

It is possible to reach the engine rpm limit in the individual gears using full throttle and kickdown.

The shift range can be changed in the forwards gears while driving, however the fully integrated transmission
control (VGS) prevents an unacceptably high engine speed by means of a downshift lockout device The VGS
also offers an additional advantage of flexible adaptation to different vehicle and engine variants. The driver can
choose between the two transmission modes "S" (sport program) and "C" (comfort program). These also
provide different gear ratios for reverse gear.

The fully integrated transmission control (VGS) control unit (Y3/8n4) monitors and shifts depending on:

 The vehicle speed

 The position of the selector lever
 Accelerator pedal position
 Program selection (C/S)
 The state of the transmission
 Signals on the Controller Area Network bus class C (engine compartment) (CAN-C)

ca
VGS control unit, GF27.19-P-4013N

rd
location/task

ia
Electric control unit, GF27.19-P-5104N

gn
location/task/design/
function

.c
Kick-down simulator, GF27.10-P-5108N

om
location/task
Selection range sensor, GF27.19-P-5142N
location/task
Transmission oil temperature GF27.19-P-4014N
sensor, location/ task/design
Location/task/function of GF27.19-P-5127N
rpm sensor
Oil pump, GF27.10-P-5103N
location/task/design/function

Function of transmission control - GF27.60-P-2002P

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODELS 170, 202, 208, 210 with touch shift

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 203, 209 (except, 209.376) up to 31.5.03, 211 (except 211.076) up to
31.8.03, 215, 220 up to 31.8.02, 230 (except 230.474) up to 31.8.03

Transmission control is divided into the electronic and hydraulic transmission control functions.

While the electronic transmission control (ETC) takes over gear selection and the adaptation of pressures to the
moment to be transmitted, the power supply control of the transmission takes place via the hydraulic elements
of the electrohydraulic control unit. The oil supply to the hydraulic elements, such as the hydrodynamic torque
converter, the shift elements and the hydraulic transmission control, is provided by way of an oil pump
connected with the torque converter.

The electronic transmission control (ETC) makes possible precise adaptation of the pressures to the respective
operating conditions and to the engine output during the shift phase which leads to a significant increase in shift
quality. It is possible to reach the rpm limit in the individual gears at full throttle and using kick-down. While
driving, the shift range can be changed in the forwards gears, however the electronic transmission control (ETC)
prevents an unacceptably high engine rpm by means of downshift protection.

Furthermore, electronic transmission control (ETC) offers the advantage of flexible adaptation to various
vehicle and engine versions. The driver can choose between the two transmission mode "S" (standard program)
and "W" (winter program). These also provide different gear ratios for reverse gear.

The ETC [ETC] control unit (N15/3) monitors and shifts depending on:

 The vehicle speed

 The position of the selector lever

ca
 Accelerator pedal position
Program selection ("W/S")

rd


The state of the transmission

ia


CAN signals

gn


.c
ETC control module, GF27.19-P-4012G
location/task

om
Electric control unit, GF27.19-P-5104G
location / task / design /
function
Starter lockout contact, GF27.19-P-5106G
location / task / design /
function
Temperature sensor, GF27.19-P-5108G
location / task / design /
function
Speed sensor, GF27.19-P-5127G
location/task/function
Oil pump, location / task / GF27.10-P-5103G
design / function

Function of transmission control - GF27.60-P-2002PZ

TRANSMISSION 722.6

in MODEL 203 as of 1.6.03 up to 23.4.04,

215, 220 (except 215.374 /379, 220.074 /174 /179) as of 1.9.02, 240

Transmission control is divided into the functions of electronic transmission control (ETC) and hydraulic
transmission control. While the EGS takes over the gear selection and adaptation of pressures to the torque to be
transmitted, the power supply control of transmission 722.6 takes place via the hydraulic elements of the
electrohydraulic control unit. The oil supply to the hydraulic elements, such as the hydrodynamic torque
converter, the shift elements and the hydraulic transmission control, is provided by way of an oil pump
connected with the torque converter.

The electronic transmission control (ETC) makes possible a precise adaptation of pressures to the respective
operating conditions and to the engine output during the gearshift phase, resulting in a significant improvement
in shift quality. The engine speed limit can be reached in the individual gears at full throttle and kickdown.

The shift range can be changed in the forwards gears while driving, however the ETC prevents an unacceptably
high engine speed by means of a downshift lockout device

Furthermore ETC offers the advantage of a flexible adaptation to various vehicle and engine versions. The
driver can choose between the two transmission modes "S" (sport program) and "C" (comfort program). These
also provide different gear ratios for reverse gear.

ca
The ETC [EGS] control unit (N15/3) monitors and shifts depending on:

rd
The vehicle speed

ia


The position of the selector lever

gn


 Accelerator pedal position

.c
 Program selection ("C/S")

om
 The state of the transmission
 Controller Area Network (CAN) signals

ETC control unit, GF27.19-P-4012G

location/task
Electric control unit, GF27.19-P-5104G
location/task/design/ function
Location/task/design/function GF27.19-P-5106G
of starter interlock contact
Temperature sensor, GF27.19-P-5108G
location/task/design/ function
Location/task/function of GF27.19-P-5127G
rpm sensor
Location/task/design/function GF27.10-P-5103G
of oil pump

Transmission control, function - GF27.60-P-2002RMZ

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in model 209.376 as of 1.6.03, 209.476, 211.076 as of 1.9.03, 211.276, 215.374 /379,
219.376, 220.074 /174 /179, 230.474 as of 1.9.03, 230.479

The transmission control is dived into electronic and hydraulic transmission control.

While the electronic transmission control (EGS) takes over the gear selection and the adaptation of the pressures
to the torque to be transmitted, the power supply of the transmission is controlled via the hydraulic elements of
the electro-hydraulic control unit. The oil supply to the hydraulic elements, such as the hydrodynamic torque
converter, the shift elements and the hydraulic transmission control, is provided by way of an oil pump
connected to the torque converter. The electronic transmission control (ETC) makes possible a precise
adaptation of pressures to the respective operating conditions and to the engine output during the gearshift
phase, resulting in a significant improvement in shift quality.

The electronic transmission control offers the advantage of flexible adaptation to various vehicle and engine
versions.

The driver can choose between 3 transmission modes "S" (sport program), "C" (comfort program) and
"M" (manual program). These also provide different gear ratios for reverse gear.

The engine speed limit can be reached in the individual gears at full throttle and kickdown. The shift range can
be changed in the forwards gears while driving, however the ETC prevents an unacceptably high engine speed

ca
by means of a downshift lockout device

rd
Electronic transmission control takes place depending on the following factors:

ia
gn
 The vehicle speed
The position of the selector lever

.c


om
 Accelerator pedal position
 Program selection ("M", "C", "S")
 Programmed shift range (with program selection "C", "S")
 Selected gear (with program selection "M")
 The state of the transmission
 Controller Area Network (data bus/CAN bus) (CAN) signals

ETC control unit, location/task GF27.19-P-4012G

Electric control unit, location/task/design/function GF27.19-P-5104G
Starter interlock contact, location/task/design/function GF27.19-P-5106G
Temperature sensor, location/task/design/function GF27.19-P-5108G
Location / task / function of rpm sensor GF27.19-P-5127G
Oil pump, location/task/design/function GF27.10-P-5103G

FUNCTION OF GEAR CHANGE - GF27.60-P-3010

Function of gear change - GF27.60-P-3010G

TRANSMISSION 722.6
Operation

Every gear change is triggered by the electronic transmission control (ETC). Each shift sequence is assigned a
control block. Each of these contains one overlap regulating valve, one holding pressure shift valve, one shift
pressure shift valve, one command valve and one electromagnetically actuated switchover valve (upshift /
downshift solenoid valve).

Actuation of the solenoid valve switches over from stationary mode to the shift phase.

When the gear change is complete the solenoid valves are no longer actuated as the different gears are subject to
a self-hold function in stationary mode.

Shifting N to D (1st Transmission 722.6 up to GF27.60-P-4014G

gear), function 30.06.96
Transmission 722.6 as of GF27.60-P-4014GA
01.07.96

Gear change, function - GF27.60-P-3010N

ca
TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230

rd
TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

ia
Each gear shift is triggered by the fully integrated transmission control (VGS). In the process one component

gn
group is assigned to each shift operation. One component group consists of the respective control solenoid

.c
valve, the regulating valve involved, the responsible shift valve and the necessary multi-disk brake or necessary
multi-disk clutch.

om
The pressure in the engaging multi-disk brake or multi-disk clutch is increased constantly and simultaneously
the pressure in the disengaging multi-disk brake or multi-disk clutch is reduced. In the process a flowing
transition is involved, but nevertheless the components affected are actuated directly and as a result enable
downshifting via several gears.

Shifting N to D (1st gear), GF27.60-P-4014N

function

FUNCTION OF MANUAL DRIVE MODE SELECTION - GF27.60-P-3011

Manual program selection, function - GF27.60-P-3011GA

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 215, 220 up to 31.8.02, 230 (except 230.474) up to 31.8.03
Fig. 160: Manual Program Selection Function Flow Chart

Using the selector lever and the transmission mode switch (S16/5) it is possible to adapt the automatic sequence
of the shift to particular operating conditions.

In the forward gears the shift range can in fact be changed while driving, but the electronic transmission control
(ETC) prevents a shift at an unacceptably high engine speed.

ca
In the "W" (winter program) position of the transmission mode switch (S16/5) a lower overall ratio and as a

rd
result a lower output moment is available when starting off forwards and when reversing. This allows the

ia
vehicle to move off more gently. In addition, the gears are not driven to maximum revs.

gn
Floor shift, location/task/design/function GF27.60-P-5100GA

.c
Location / task / design / function of shift detent GF27.60-P-5101GA

om
R/P lock, location/task GF27.60-P-5121GA
Location / task / function of position indicator Models 215, 220 GF27.19-P-5129P
Model 230 GF27.19-P-5129R
ETC control module, location/task GF27.19-P-4012G
Electronic selector lever module control module, location/task GF27.19-P-5140GA

Function of manual drive mode selection - GF27.60-P-3011GAZ

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 215, 220 (except 215.374 /379, 220.074 /174 /179) as of 1.9.02, 240

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 230 (except 230.474 /479) as of 1.9.03 except CODE (428a) Steering
wheel shift buttons
Fig. 161: Manual Drive Mode Selection Function Flow Chart - (Transmission 722.6 In Model 230 (Except
230.474 /479)

With the selector lever and the transmission mode switch (S16/5) it is possible to adapt the automatic sequence
of the shift to particular operating conditions.

The shift range can in fact be changed in the forward gears while driving, however the electronic transmission

ca
control (ETC) prevents a shift at an unacceptably high engine speed.

rd
In position "C" (comfort program) of the transmission mode switch (S16/5) a lower overall ratio and therefore a

ia
lower output torque is available when driving backwards and forwards. This allows the vehicle to move off

gn
more gently. In addition, the gears are not driven to maximum revs.

.c
Location/task/design/function of floor shift GF27.60-P-5100GA

om
Location/task/design/function of shift detent GF27.60-P-5101GA
R/P lock, location/task GF27.60-P-5121GA
Location/task/function of position indicator Model 215, 220 GF27.19-P-5129PZ
Model 230 GF27.19-P-5129RZ
Model 240 GF27.19-P-5129X
ETC control unit, location/task GF27.19-P-4012G
Electronic selector lever module control unit, location/task GF27.19-P-5140GA

Function of manual drive mode selection - GF27.60-P-3011N

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 215, 220

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 230 except CODE (428) Steering wheel shift buttons

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

Fig. 162: Manual Drive Mode Selection Function Flow Chart - Transmission 722.9 In Model 463.303

With the selector lever and the transmission mode switch (S16/5) it is possible to adapt the automatic sequence
of the shift to particular operating conditions.

Although the shift range can be changed in the forward gears while driving, the electronic transmission control
prevents a gearshift if the engine speed is too high.

ca
In position "C" (comfort program) of the transmission mode switch (S16/5) a lower overall ratio and therefore a

rd
lower output torque is available when driving backwards and forwards. This allows the vehicle to move off

ia
more gently. In addition, the gears are not driven to maximum revs.

gn
Location/task/design/function of floor shift GF27.60-P-5100N

.c
Location/task/design/function of shift detent GF27.60-P-5101N

om
R/P lock, location/task GF27.60-P-5121N
VGS control unit, location/task GF27.19-P-4013N
Electronic selector lever module control unit, location/task GF27.19-P-5140N

Manual drive mode selection, function - GF27.60-P-3011RMZ

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in model 209.376 as of 1.6.03, 209.476, 211.076 as of 1.9.03, 211.276, 215.374 /379,
219.376, 220.074 /174 /179, 230.474 as of 1.9.03, 230.479
Fig. 163: Manual Drive Mode Selection Function Flow Chart - Transmission 722.6 In Model 209.376

With the selector lever and the transmission mode switch (S16/5) it is possible to adapt the automatic sequence
of the shift to particular operating conditions.

The shift range can in fact be changed in the forward gears while driving, however the electronic transmission
control (ETC) prevents a shift at an unacceptably high engine speed.

ca
In position "C" (comfort program) of the transmission mode switch (S16/5) a lower overall ratio and therefore a

rd
lower output torque is available when driving backwards and forwards. This allows the vehicle to move off

ia
more gently. In addition, the gears are not driven to maximum revs.

gn
In position "M" (manual program) of the transmission mode switch (S16/5) all forward gears can be shifted

.c
directly by means of the selector lever (touch shifts to "+" or "-") or by operating the steering wheel gear shifter

om
MINUS (S110/1) or steering wheel gear shifter PLUS (S111/1).

A shift is not carried out at an unacceptably high or low rpm.

Center shifter console, Model 209, 211, 219 GF27.60-P-5100P

location/task/design/function
Models 215, 220, 230 GF27.60-P-5100GA
Shift detent, Model 209, 211, 219 GF27.60-P-5101P
location/task/design/function
Models 215, 220, 230 GF27.60-P-5101GA
GF27.60-P-5103P
R/P lock, Model 209, 211, 219
location/task/design/function
Location / task of R/P lock Models 215, 220, 230 GF27.60-P-5121GA
Position sensor, GF27.19-P-5129RMZ
location/task/function
ETC control unit, GF27.19-P-4012G
location/task
Electronic selector lever Model 209, 211, 219 GF27.19-P-5138P
module control unit,
 location/task/design
Electronic selector lever Models 215, 220, 230 GF27.19-P-5140GA
module control unit,
location/task

EMERGENCY DEFAULT/LIMP MODE , FUNCTION - GF27.60-P-3012

Limp-home mode, function - GF27.60-P-3012G

TRANSMISSION 722.6

Operation

In order to ensure a safe driving state and to prevent damage to the automatic transmission, the ETC control
module (N15/3) switches to limp-home mode in the event of critical faults. A fault code assigned to the fault is
stored in memory.

All solenoid and regulating valves are thus de-energized.

ca
Effect

rd
 The gear last engaged remains engaged.

ia
 The modulating pressure and shift pressure rise to the maximum levels.

gn
 The torque converter lockup clutch is switched off.

.c
In order to preserve the operability of the vehicle to some extent, the hydraulic control can be used to engage

om
2nd gear or reverse:

 Stop vehicle
 Switch off engine
 Move selector lever to "P"
 Wait at least 10 seconds
 Start engine
 Move the selector lever to "D": --> 2nd gear
 Move selector lever to "R": --> Reverse gear

The limp-home function remains active until the fault is rectified or the stored fault code is erased. Sporadic
faults can be reset via ignition OFF/ON.

Upshift/downshift solenoid GF27.19-P-4006G

valve, location /
design/task/function
Location/task/design/function GF27.19-P-5112G
of PWM solenoid valve, torque
 converter lockup clutch
Modulating pressure regulating GF27.19-P-5110G
solenoid valve,
location/task/design/function
Shift pressure regulating GF27.19-P-5109G
solenoid valve,
location/task/design/function

Emergency default mode, function - GF27.60-P-3012N

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

In order to ensure a safe driving state and to prevent damage to the automatic transmission, the VGS electric
control unit (Y3/8) switches to the limp-home mode if critical faults occur. In the event of a hardware fault all
the control solenoid valves are switched off. They are then de-energized. In limp-home mode, the transmission
shifts to 6th gear. After engaging selector lever position "P", 2nd gear is selected in selector lever position "D".
Reverse gear R from the convenience program is available. As a result the vehicle can be brought to the nearest

ca
Mercedes-Benz service outlet.

rd
If hydraulic faults occur, the transmission does not shift out of the gear currently engaged. If the fault is in the

ia
control solenoid valves, the gear affected is locked out and cannot be engaged anymore.

gn
Up to 16 faults are stored simultaneously in the fault memory. These can be read out using STAR

.c
DIAGNOSIS.

om
VGS control unit, GF27.19-P-4013N
location/task
Control solenoid valve, GF27.19-P-5111N
location/task/design/function

FUNCTION OF OPERATING PRESSURE - GF27.60-P-3013

Operating pressure, function - GF27.60-P-3013G

TRANSMISSION 722.6

Operation

The working pressure supplies pressure to the hydraulic control and transmission elements. The working
pressure is the highest hydraulic pressure in the entire hydraulic system. The working pressure is regulated at
the working pressure regulating valve in relation to the load and gear. All other pressures required for
transmission control are diverted from the working pressure.

Working pressure regulating GF27.60-P-5131G

 valve, location/ task/function
Upshift / downshift solenoid GF27.19-P-4006G
valve, location / design / task /
function
Shift pressure control solenoid GF27.19-P-5109G
valve
location/task/design/function
Multiple-disc brake, location / GF27.51-P-5100G
task / design / function
Multiplate clutch, location / GF27.51-P-5101G
design / task / function
Holding pressure shift valve, GF27.60-P-5135G
location/task/ function
Shift pressure shift valve, GF27.60-P-5136G
location / task / function
Overlap regulating valve, GF27.60-P-5137G
location / task / function
Location/task/function of GF27.60-P-5138G

ca
command valve
Selector valve, location/task GF27.60-P-5139G

rd
Location / task / design / GF27.10-P-5103G

ia
function of oil pump

gn
Function of operating pressure - GF27.60-P-3013N

.c
om
TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

The oil pressure produced by the oil pump is converted into working pressure by the working pressure
regulating valve. The level of operating pressure depends on the position of the regulating valve and thus on its
geometry. The position of the working pressure regulating valve is influenced by the working pressure control
solenoid valve (VGS) (Y3/8y1) in a load/gear dependent manner. All other pressures required for the
transmission control are derived from the working pressure.

Control solenoid valve, GF27.19-P-5111N

location/task/design/
function
VGS control unit, GF27.19-P-4013N
location/task
Location / task / design / GF27.10-P-5103N
function of oil pump

LUBRICATION PRESSURE, FUNCTION - GF27.60-P-3014

Lubricating pressure, function - GF27.60-P-3014G

TRANSMISSION 722.6

Operation

The working pressure regulating valve diverts surplus oil to the lubrication pressure regulating valve, from
where it is controlled and used for lubricating and cooling the mechanical transmission and torque converter. In
addition the pressure in the torque converter is limited via the lubrication pressure.

Working pressure regulating GF27.60-P-5131G

valve, location/ task/function
Lubrication pressure regulating GF27.60-P-5122G
valve, location/ task/function
Torque converter lockup clutch GF27.60-P-5123G
regulating valve,
location/task/function
Upshift / downshift solenoid GF27.19-P-4006G
valve, location / design / task /

ca
function
Shift pressure control solenoid

rd
GF27.19-P-5109G
valve

ia
location/task/design/function

gn
Multiple-disc brake, location / GF27.51-P-5100G
task / design / function

.c
Multiplate clutch, location / GF27.51-P-5101G

om
design / task / function
Holding pressure shift valve, GF27.60-P-5135G
location/task/ function
Shift pressure shift valve, GF27.60-P-5136G
location / task / function
Overlap regulating valve, GF27.60-P-5137G
location / task / function
Location/task/function of GF27.60-P-5138G
command valve
Selector valve, location/task GF27.60-P-5139G
Location / task / design / GF27.10-P-5103G
function of oil pump

Lubrication pressure, function - GF27.60-P-3014N

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

Excess oil is diverted to the lubrication pressure regulating valve at the working pressure regulating valve and
from there used in a regulated manner for lubricating and cooling the mechanical transmission parts and torque
converter. In addition the pressure in the torque converter is limited via the lubrication pressure.

Control solenoid valve, GF27.19-P-5111N

location/task/design/
function
Torque converter, GF27.20-P-5100N
location/task/design/function
Oil pump, GF27.10-P-5103N
location/task/design/function

SHIFT PRESSURE, FUNCTION - GF27.60-P-3015

Shift pressure, function - GF27.60-P-3015G

TRANSMISSION 722.6

Operation

ca
The shift pressure is determined by the shift pressure regulating solenoid valve (Y3/6y2) and the shift pressure
regulating valve.

rd
ia
The shift pressure

gn
 Regulates the pressure in the activating shift element during the shift phase.

.c
 Determines together with the modulating pressure the pressure reduction at the deactivating shift element

om
as regulated by the overlap regulating valve.
 Initializes 2nd gear in limp-home mode.

Shift pressure regulating GF27.19-P-5109G

solenoid valve, location /
task / design / function
Shift pressure regulating GF27.60-P-5132G
valve, location / task /
function
Overlap regulating valve, GF27.60-P-5137G
location / task / function
Upshift / downshift GF27.19-P-4006G
solenoid valve, location /
design / task / function
Modulating pressure GF27.19-P-5110G
regulating solenoid valve,
location / task / design /
function
Location / task / design / GF27.19-P-5112G
 function of PWM solenoid
valve, torque converter
lockup clutch
Multiple-disc brake, GF27.51-P-5100G
location / task / design /
function
Multiplate clutch, location / GF27.51-P-5101G
design / task / function
Holding pressure shift GF27.60-P-5135G
valve, location / design /
function
Shift pressure shift valve, GF27.60-P-5136G
location / design / function
Command valve, location / GF27.60-P-5138G
design / function
Selector valve, GF27.60-P-5139G
location/task
Location / task / design / GF27.10-P-5103G
function of oil pump

ca
rd
Shift pressure, function - GF27.60-P-3015N

ia
TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230

gn
.c
TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

om
The shift pressure (pressure in the multi-disk clutch or in multi-disk brake) is derived from the working
pressure. The respective control solenoid valve influences the position of the associated regulating valve. In turn
the position influences the pressure prevailing in the multi-disk brake or in multi-disk clutch. The pressure is
thus dependent of the area of the respective regulating valve on which the working pressure acts.

Control solenoid valve, GF27.19-P-5111N

location/task/design/
function
Multi-disk brake, GF27.51-P-5104N
location/task/design
Multi-disk clutch, GF27.51-P-5103N
location/task/design
Oil pump, GF27.10-P-5103N
location/task/design/function

MODULATING PRESSURE, FUNCTION - GF27.60-P-3016G

TRANSMISSION 722.6

Operation
The modulating pressure influences the size of the working pressure and determines together with the shift
pressure the pressure regulated at the overlap regulating valve.

The modulating pressure is regulated at the modulating pressure regulating solenoid valve (Y3/6y1), which is
under regulating valve pressure. The modulating pressure is variable and relative to the engine load.

Modulating pressure regulating GF27.19-P-5110G

solenoid valve, location / task /
design / function
Working pressure regulating GF27.60-P-5131G
valve, location/ task/function
Overlap regulating valve, GF27.60-P-5137G
location / task / function
Upshift / downshift solenoid GF27.19-P-4006G
valve, location / design / task /
function
Shift pressure control solenoid GF27.19-P-5109G
valve
location/task/design/function

ca
Location / task / design / GF27.19-P-5112G
function of PWM solenoid

rd
valve, torque converter lockup

ia
clutch

gn
Multiple-disc brake, location / GF27.51-P-5100G
task / design / function

.c
Multiplate clutch, location / GF27.51-P-5101G

om
design / task / function
Holding pressure shift valve, GF27.60-P-5135G
location / design / function
Shift pressure shift valve, GF27.60-P-5136G
location / design / function
Command valve, location / GF27.60-P-5138G
design / function
Selector valve, location/task GF27.60-P-5139G
Location / task / design / GF27.10-P-5103G
function of oil pump

FUNCTION OF REGULATING VALVE PRESSURE - GF27.60-P-3017

Regulating valve pressure, function - GF27.60-P-3017G

TRANSMISSION 722.6

Operation

The regulating valve pressure is regulated at the regulating valve pressure regulating valve depending on the
working pressure up to a maximum pressure of 8 bar. It supplies the modulating pressure regulating solenoid
valve (Y3/6y1), the shift pressure regulating solenoid valve (Y3/6y2) and the shift valve pressure regulating
valve.

Regulating valve pressure GF27.60-P-5133G

regulating valve, location /
task / function
Shift pressure regulating GF27.19-P-5109G
solenoid valve, location /
task / design / function
Modulating pressure GF27.19-P-5110G
regulating solenoid valve,
location / task / design /
function
Shift valve pressure GF27.60-P-5134G
regulating valve, location/
task/function
Upshift / downshift solenoid GF27.19-P-4006G
valve, location / design /

ca
task / function
Multiple-disc brake, location /

rd
GF27.51-P-5100G
task / design / function

ia
Multiplate clutch, location / GF27.51-P-5101G

gn
design / task / function
Holding pressure shift valve,

.c
GF27.60-P-5135G
location/task/ function

om
Shift pressure shift valve, GF27.60-P-5136G
location / task / function
Overlap regulating valve, GF27.60-P-5137G
location / task / function
Location/task/function of GF27.60-P-5138G
command valve
Selector valve, location/task GF27.60-P-5139G
Location / task / design / GF27.10-P-5103G
function of oil pump

Function of regulating valve pressure - GF27.60-P-3017N

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

The control valve supply pressure is derived from the working pressure and is limited to a maximum pressure of
8 bar. 2 supply pressure regulating valves are used. Supply pressure regulating valve 1 supplies the following
control solenoid valves:
  Working pressure control solenoid valve (VGS) (Y3/8y1)
 Clutch control solenoid valve K2 (VGS) (Y3/8y3)
 Brake control solenoid valve B2 (VGS) (Y3/8y6)
 Torque converter lockup clutch control solenoid valve (VGS) (Y3/8y8)

Supply pressure regulating valve 2 supplies the following control solenoid valves:

 Clutch control solenoid valve K1 (VGS) (Y3/8y2)

 Clutch control solenoid valve K3 (VGS) (Y3/8y4)
 Brake control solenoid valve B1 (VGS) (Y3/8y5)
 Brake control solenoid valve B3 (VGS) (Y3/8y7)

By using supply pressure regulating valve 1 and supply pressure regulating valve 2 the control solenoid valve
groups are isolated from each other and, in the event of any shift operations (via a gear), none of the control
solenoid valve groups has an effect on any other.

Control solenoid valve, GF27.19-P-5111N

location/task/design/function

ca
Location / task / design / GF27.10-P-5103N

rd
function of oil pump

ia
gn
SHIFT VALVE PRESSURE, FUNCTION - GF27.60-P-3018G

.c
TRANSMISSION 722.6

om
Operation

The shift valve pressure is derived from the regulating valve pressure, regulated at the shift valve pressure
regulating valve and is then present at

 1-2 and 4-5 shift solenoid valve (Y3/6y3)

 3-4 shift solenoid valve (Y3/6y4)
 2- -3 shift solenoid valve (Y3/6y5)
 Torque converter lockup PWM solenoid valve (Y3/6y6)
 3-4 and 2-3 shift pressure shift valve.

The shift valve pressure controls the command valves via the upshift / downshift solenoid valves.

Upshift / downshift solenoid GF27.19-P-4006G

valve, location / task /
design / function
Location / task / design / GF27.19-P-5112G
function of PWM solenoid
valve, torque converter
 lockup clutch
Shift pressure regulating GF27.60-P-5132G
valve, location / task /
function
Shift pressure shift valve, GF27.60-P-5136G
location / design / function
Shift valve pressure GF27.60-P-5134G
regulating valve, location/
task/function
Shift pressure regulating GF27.19-P-5109G
solenoid valve, location /
task / design / function
Multiple-disc brake, location / GF27.51-P-5100G
task / design / function
Multiplate clutch, location / GF27.51-P-5101G
design / task / function
Holding pressure shift valve, GF27.60-P-5135G
location / design / function

ca
Overlap regulating valve, GF27.60-P-5137G
location / design / function

rd
Location/task/function of GF27.60-P-5138G

ia
command valve
Selector valve, location/task

gn
GF27.60-P-5139G
Location / task / design / GF27.10-P-5103G

.c
function of oil pump

om
TORQUE CONVERTER LOCKUP CLUTCH CONTROL PRESSURE, FUNCTION - GF27.60-P-3019

Torque converter lockup clutch control pressure, function - GF27.60-P-3019G

TRANSMISSION 722.6

Apart from the extreme states of open or closed, it is possible to operate the torque converter lockup clutch with
preset slip speeds. To enable this variable control pressure must be applied to the torque converter lockup clutch
regulating valve.

The torque converter lockup clutch control pressure is adapted to each operating state via the pulse-width-
modulated torque converter lockup solenoid valve (Y3/6y6) which is actuated by the ETC control unit (N15/3).

Torque converter lockup clutch GF27.19-P-5112G

PWM solenoid valve,
location/task/design/function
Torque converter lockup Model 129, 140, 163, 170, GF27.20-P-5101G
clutch, location/task/ 202, 203, 208, 209,
design/function 210,211,230,240
 Models 215, 220 except
code (479) cylinder
shutoff
Model 215, 220 with code GF27.20-P-5101GA
(479) cylinder shutoff
Type 171.4 GF27.20-P-5101SK
Model 199 GF27.20-P-5101SLR
Torque converter lockup clutch GF27.60-P-5123G
regulating valve,
location/task/function
ETC control unit, location/task GF27.19-P-4012SLR

Torque converter lockup clutch control pressure, function - GF27.60-P-3019N

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

The torque converter lockup clutch is operated at specified slip speeds. In order to make this possible, the

ca
variable control pressure has to be applied to the torque converter lockup clutch regulating valve.

rd
The torque converter lock-up clutch control pressure is adapted to the respective operating condition via the

ia
torque converter lockup clutch control solenoid valve (VGS) (Y8/8y8) which is actuated by the fully integrated

gn
transmission control (VGS) control unit (Y3/8n4).

.c
Control solenoid valve, GF27.19-P-5111N

om
location/task/design/
function
Torque converter lockup GF27.20-P-5101N
clutch, location/task/
design/function
VGS control unit, GF27.19-P-4013N
location/task

SHIFT FROM 1 TO 2, FUNCTION - GF27.60-P-4013

Shift from 1 to 2, function - GF27.60-P-4013G

TRANSMISSION 722.6

1st gear engaged

Fig. 164: Identifying Shift From 1 To 2 Function - 1st Gear Engaged

Shift phase

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 165: Identifying Shift From 1 To 2 Function - Shift Phase

2nd gear engaged

Fig. 166: Identifying Shift From 1 To 2 Function - 2nd Gear Engaged

Aim

ca
Engage front multiple-disc clutch (K1), disengage front multiple-disc brake (B1).

rd
ia
Operation

gn
1st gear engaged

.c
The end face of the 1-2/4-5 command valve (31a) is kept depressurized via the 1-2 and 4-5 shift solenoid valve

om
(Y3/6y3). Via the 1-2/4-5 holding pressure shift valve (28a), working pressure (p-A) is applied to the front
multiple-disc brake (B1). The front multiple-disc clutch (K1) is depressurized.

Shift phase

Via the 1-2 and 4-5 shift solenoid valve (Y3/6y3), the shift valve pressure (p-SV) is directed onto the end face
of the command valve 1-24-5 (31a). The 1-2/4-5 command valve (31a) is displaced and the shift pressure (p-S)
coming from the 1 -2/4-5 shift pressure shift valve (29a) via the 1-2/4-5 command valve (31a) is directed to the
front multiple-disc clutch (K1). At the same time the front multiple-disc brake (B1) is subjected to overlap
pressure from the 1 -2/4-5 overlap regulating valve (30a).

The B1 pressure acting on the end face of the 1-2/4-5 shift pressure shift valve (29a) is superseded by the
working pressure (p-A). The increasing shift pressure (p-S) at the front multiple-disc clutch (K1) acts on the
annular area of the 1-2/4-5 overlap regulating valve (30a) and reduces the overlap pressure regulated by the 1-
2/4-5 overlap regulating valve (30a). With an appropriate pressure level at the 1-2/4-5 holding pressure shift
valve (28a) this valve switches over.

2nd gear engaged

After the gear change is complete, the pressure on the end face of the 1-2/4-5 command valve (31a) is reduced
via the 1-2 and 4-5 shift solenoid valve (Y3/6y3) and the command valve is pushed back into its original
position. Via the 1 -2/4-5 holding pressure shift valve (28a) working pressure (p-A) now reaches the front
multiple-disc clutch K1) via the 1-2/4-5 command valve (31a).

The front multiple-disc brake (B1) is disengaged (depressurized). The spring in the 1-2/4-5 shift pressure shift
valve (29a) pushes this into its original position.

Operating pressure, GF27.60-P-3013G

function
Shift pressure, function GF27.60-P-3015G
Modulating pressure, GF27.60-P-3016G
function
Shift valve pressure, GF27.60-P-3018G
function
Lubricating pressure, GF27.60-P-3014G
function
Regulating valve pressure, GF27.60-P-3017G
function

ca
Shift from 1 to 2, function - GF27.60-P-4013N

rd
TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230

ia
gn
TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

.c
In 1st gear the multi-disk brake B2, the multi-disk brake B3 and the multi-disk clutch K3 are engaged. During

om
the shift from 1st gear into 2nd gear the multi-disk brake B3 is disengaged and the multi-disk brake B1 is
engaged. The shift process is started by the fully integrated transmission control (VGS) control unit (Y3/8n4).
In the process multi-disk brake B1 is filled and the pressure in multi-disk brake B1g increased. Simultaneously
the pressure in multi-disk brake B3 is reduced.

This involves a flowing transition. If 2nd gear torque is now reached, the engine speed must be adapted to the
level of 2nd gear. (magnification phase). This rpm adaptation is achieved so that the pressure in the multi-disk
brake B1 is increased and if necessary an engine torque reduction is carried out via the ME control unit (N3/10)
or CDI control unit (N3/9).

Working pressure, GF27.60-P-3013N

function
Lubrication pressure, GF27.60-P-3014N
function
Shift pressure, function GF27.60-P-3015N
Control valve pressure, GF27.60-P-3017N
function

SHIFTING N TO D (1ST GEAR), FUNCTION - GF27.60-P-4014

Shifting N to D (1st gear), function - GF27.60-P-4014G

TRANSMISSION 722.6 up to 30.6.96

Function in selector lever position "N"

ca
rd
ia
Fig. 167: Function In Selector Lever Position "N" Diagram - Transmission 722.6

gn
Function in selector lever position "D" (gearshift)

.c
om

Fig. 168: Function In Selector Lever Position "D" Diagram (Gearshift) - Transmission 722.6

Function in selector lever position "N"

No pressure is applied to the rear multiple-disc brake piston (B2a), the shift side and opposite side are emptied
via the selector valve (52).

The 3-4 shift solenoid valve (Y3/6y4) is activated. The shift valve pressure (p-SV) acts on the end face of the 3-
4 command valve (31c) against the spring force towards the right.

The 3-4 holding pressure shift valve (28c) is held in the left-hand position by the spring. The shift pressure
regulating valve (24) regulates a maximum shift pressure. This reaches the rear multiple-disc clutch (K3) via the
3-4 shift pressure shift valve (29c) and the 3-4 command valve (31c). The 3-4 overlap regulating valve (30c) is
held in the position on the right by the shift pressure.

Function in selector lever position "D" (gearshift)

The shift pressure is reduced with the aid of the shift pressure regulating solenoid valve (Y3/6y2) via the shift
pressure regulating valve (24). This moves the 3-4 overlap regulating valve (30c) to the regulation position. Via
the 3-4 overlap regulating valve (30c), the 3-4 shift pressure shift valve (29c), 3-4 command valve (31c),
selector valve (52) and shift valve B2 (26), pressure oil reaches the rear multiple-disc brake piston (B2a) on the
shift side and opposite side.

The rear multiple-disc brake is engaged with a reduced effective area for reasons of comfort. The 3-4 holding

ca
pressure shift valve (28c) switches to the right as soon as the B2 pressure acting on the end face exceeds the

rd
spring force.

ia
Shift from 1 to 2, function GF27.60-P-4013G

gn
.c
Shifting N to D (1st gear), function - GF27.60-P-4014GA

om
TRANSMISSION 722.6 as of 1.7.96

Fig. 169: Identifying Shifting N To D (1st Gear) Function

Engine started

ca
Fig. 170: Identifying Shifting N To D (1st Gear) - Engine Started

rd
Activation sequence active

ia
gn
.c
om
 ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 171: Identifying Shifting N To D (1St Gear) - Activation Sequence Active

Initial situation:

 Selector lever in position "N" or "P"

 Engine off
 No pressure in hydraulic system
 All valves in the shift plate in neutral position

Aim

To engage 1st gear with program "S" selected

Shifting 2nd gear with program selection "W" or "C" (depending on the production period)

Function

Start engine

The working pressure (p-A) is formed, reaches via the holding pressure 2-3 shift valve, the command valve 2-3
and ball valve (33a) to the rear multi-disk clutch (K3) and via the command valve 3-4 (31 c) to the end face of
the shift pressure 3-4 (29c) shift valve. The 3-4 shift pressure shift valve (29c) is moved against the force of the
spring towards the right. At the same time the 3-4 solenoid valve (Y3/6y4) is energized.

As a result shift valve pressure (p-SV) reaches the spring chamber of the shift valve B2 (26) and the end face of
the command valve 3-4 (31c).

The shift valve B2 (26) is held in the upper position and the 3-4 command valve (31c) switches towards the
right.

The working pressure (p-A) is replaced by the shift valve pressure (p-SV) at the end face of the shift pressure 3-
4 shift valve.

(See diagram "Engine started")

Move selector lever from "N" to "D"

The selector valve (52) opens the shift pressure (p-S) feed connection from the ball valve (33b) with the shift
valve B2 (26). In the upper position of the shift valve B2 (26) shift pressure (p-S) reaches behind (p-S) the
piston of the multi-disk brake (B2a) and simultaneously to the opposed surface of the rear multi-disk brake

ca
piston (B2b).

rd
The rear multi-disk brake begins to close.

ia
gn
(See diagram "Activation sequence active")

.c
The pressure on the opposed surface of the piston of the rear multi-disk brake (B2b) causes a gentle engagement

om
of the rear multi-disk brake.

The ETC control unit (N15/3) monitors the engagement process via the reduced speed of the drive shaft as the
frictional connection of the rear multi-disk brake increases. When the speed drops to the specified level, the
ETC control module (N15/3) shuts off the power to the 3-4 shift solenoid valve (Y3/6y4). The spring chamber
of the shift valve B2 (26) is depressurized and switches downwards. As a result the line to the opposed surface
of the rear multi-disk brake piston (B2b) is connected to the pressure maintaining valve (32). The pressure on
the opposed surface of the rear multi-disk brake piston (B2b) reduces to a residual pressure.

The 3-4 command valve (31c) moves to the left. The working pressure (p-A) reaches via the holding pressure
shift valve 3-4 (28c) and the command valve 3-4 (31c) to the piston of the rear multi-disk brake (B2a).

The activation sequence is complete; 1st gear is engaged.

(See diagram "1st gear engaged")

Move selector lever from "N" to "R"

The selector valve (52) opens the connection of the feed of shift pressure (p-S) with the center multi-disk brake
(B3). The further sequence of the switch-on process is as when engaging the rear multi-disk brake.
 No mating surface on the piston of the center multi-disk brake (B3).

Residual pressure

To avoid air getting into the hydraulic system, which causes a deterioration in shift quality, the line system
remains filled with oil in steady-state operation of the automatic transmission.

Function of shift from 1 to GF27.60-P-4013G

2

Shifting N to D (1st gear), function - GF27.60-P-4014N

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 171.4, 203, 209, 211, 215, 219, 220, 230

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

Multi-disk brake B3 and multi-disk clutch K3 are engaged in selector lever position "N". By shifting from
selector lever position "N" to selector lever position "D" the supply to multi-disk brake B2 is released by the
selector valve. The fully integrated transmission control (VGS) control unit (Y3/8n4) actuates the brake control

ca
solenoid valve B2 (VGS) (Y3/8y6) and multi-disk brake B2 is filled with transmission oil. Due to the rpm
difference (actual slip) between engine speed and turbine speed the fully integrated transmission control (VGS)

rd
control unit (Y3/8n4) detects whether the multi-disk brake B2 is full. The brake control solenoid valve B2

ia
(VGS) (Y3/8y6) actuates the regulating valve B2/BR, which converts the adjacent working pressure into shift
pressure and passes it on to the multi-disk brake B2.

gn
.c
The slip required (nominal slip) for the respective gear is stored in the fully integrated transmission control
(VGS) control unit (Y3/8n4). Depending on this, the control pressure on the regulating valve BR is changed via

om
the brake control solenoid valve B2 (VGS) (Y3/8y6)B2/. The shift pressure produced by the regulating valve
B2/BR depends on the geometry of the regulating valve B2/BR. The pressure in the multi-disk brake B2 in
changed until the nominal slip stored in the fully integrated transmission control (VGS) control unit (Y3/8n4) is
reached.

Function of shift from 1 to GF27.60-P-4013N

2

SHIFTER, LOCATION/TASK/DESIGN/FUNCTION - GF27.60-P-5100

Floor shift, location/task/design/function - GF27.60-P-5100GA

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODELS 215, 220, 230, 240

Fig. 172: Identifying Floor Shift Location (Shows Model 220)

Shows model 220

Floor shift,
The floor shift is located in the center console of the vehicle.
location

ca
Floor shift, The floor shift is the central control for the driver to influence the
task shift program of the automatic transmission.

rd
Floor shift, GF27.60-P-5100-

ia
Model 215, 220 up to 31.08.02
design 03GA

gn
GF27.60-P-5100-
Models 215, 220 as of 01.09.02
03GAZ

.c
GF27.60-P-5100-

om
Model 230 up to 31.08.03
03R
GF27.60-P-5100-
Model 230 as of 01.09.03
03RZ
GF27.60-P-5100-
Model 240
03X
Floor shift, GF27.60-P-5100-
function 04GA

Floor shift, design - GF27.60-P-5100-03GA

Transmission 722.6 in models 215, 220 up to 31.08.02

Fig. 173: Identifying Floor Shift Components (Transmission 722.6 In Models 215, 220 Up To 31.08.02)

ca
Floor shift, design - GF27.60-P-5100-03GAZ

rd
Transmission 722.6 in model 215, 220 as of 01.9.02

ia
gn
.c
om

Fig. 174: Identifying Automatic Transmission Components Location (Models 220)

Floor shift, function - GF27.60-P-5100-04GA

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 215, 220, 230, 240

Function
The selector lever is guided and positioned in the shift gate. All the selector lever positions are recognized by
the electronic selector lever module control module (N15/5), coded and transmitted to the ETC control module
via CAN. In parallel to sending via CAN the selector lever positions "P", "R", "N" and "D" are passed on
mechanically to the range selector lever on the transmission side by means of a shift rod.

Shows floor selector models 215, 220

ca
rd
ia
Fig. 175: Identifying Floor Shift (Shows Floor Selector Models 215, 220)

gn
Center shifter console, location/task/design/function - GF27.60-P-5100N

.c
om
TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 215, 220, 230

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

Fig. 176: Identifying Floor Shift Location (Shows Model 220)

Shown on model 220

 Center shifter
The floor shift is located in the center console of the vehicle.
console, location
Center shifter The floor shift is the central control for the driver to influence the
console, task shift program of the automatic transmission.
Center shifter GF27.60-P-
Model 215, 220, 463.303/340/341
console, design 5100-03N
GF27.60-P-5100-
Model 230 except code (428) Steering wheel shift buttons
03NR
GF27.60-P-5100-
Model 230 with code (428) Steering wheel shift buttons
03NRL
Center shifter GF27.60-P-
console, function 5100-04N

Center shifter console, design - GF27.60-P-5100-03N

Transmission 722.9 in model 215, 220, 463.303/340/341

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
Fig. 177: Identifying Automatic Transmission Components Location (Models 220) om
Center shifter console, function - GF27.60-P-5100-04N

Transmission 722.9 in model 215, 220, 230, 463.303/340/341

Shown on model 215, 220

Fig. 178: Identifying Electronic Selector Lever Module Control Unit - Shown On Model 215, 220

Floor shift, function

The selector lever is guided and positioned in the shift gate. All selector lever positions are recognized by the
electronic selector lever module control unit (N15/5), then coded and forwarded via the Controller Area

ca
Network bus Class C (engine compartment) (CAN-C) to the fully integrated transmission control (VGS) control
unit (Y3/8n4).

rd
In parallel to transmission via CAN-C, the selector lever positions "P", "R", "N" and "D" are passed on

ia
mechanically to the selection range sensor (VGS) (Y3/8s1) by means of a shift rod.

gn
.c
SHIFT DETENT MECHANISM, LOCATION/TASK/DESIGN/FUNCTION - GF27.60-P-5101

om
Shift detent mechanism, location/task/design/function - GF27.60-P-5101GA

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 215, 220, 230, 240

 ca
Fig. 179: Identifying Selector Lever, Spring Body And Electronic Selector Lever Control Module

rd
Shift detent, The shift detent is integrated in the electronic selector lever module
location control module (N15/5).

ia
Shift detent,

gn
Fixes selector lever position "D".
task

.c
The shift detent consists of a plastic body (83) which is rigidly connected
Shift detent,

om
to the selector lever (80), a metal roller (84) clamped inside and a leaf
design
spring (85) with a recess.
Shift detent, GF27.60-P-
function 5101-04GA

Shift detent, function - GF27.60-P-5101-04GA

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODELS 215, 220, 230, 240

Operation

When the selector lever (80) is moved out of selector lever position "N" into position "D" the roller (84) locks in
position in the recess in the leaf spring (85). The selector lever (80) is locked to prevent longitudinal movement.

It can still be moved in the transverse direction (touch shift in the "+" and "-" directions). The spring (82)
presses the selector lever (80) back into its original position once the touch shift has taken place.
Fig. 180: Identifying Selector Lever, Spring, Plastic Body And Left Spring

ca
Location / task / design / function of shift detent - GF27.60-P-5101N

rd
TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 215, 220, 230

ia
TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

gn
.c
om

Fig. 181: Identifying Selector Lever, Spring Body And Electronic Selector Lever Control Module

Shift detent, The shift detent is integrated in the electronic selector lever module control
 location unit (N15/5).
Shift detent,
Fixing the selector lever position "D"
task
The shift detent consists of a plastic body (83) permanently connected to
Shift detent,
the selector lever (80), a roller (84) clamped in it and a leaf spring
design
provided with a recess (85).
Shift detent, GF27.60-P-
function 5101-04N

Shift detent, function - GF27.60-P-5101-04N

Transmission 722.9 in model 215, 220, 230, 463.303/340/341

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 182: Identifying Selector Lever, Spring, Plastic Body And Left Spring

Shift detent, function

When the selector lever (80) is moved out of selector lever position "N" into position "D" the roller (84) locks in
position in the recess in the leaf spring (85). The selector lever (80) is locked to prevent longitudinal movement.

It can still be moved in the transverse direction (touch shift in the "+" and "-" directions). The spring (82)
presses the selector lever (80) back into its original position once the touch shift has taken place.

R/P LOCK, LOCATION/TASK - GF27.60-P-5121

Location / task of R/P lock - GF27.60-P-5121GA

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 215, 220, 230, 240

Fig. 183: Identifying R/P Locking Solenoid And Electronic Selector Lever Control Module

R/P lock,
The R/P lock is integrated in the electronic selector lever module control module (N15/5).
location
In order to avoid damage to the automatic transmission, the R/P lock prevents the selector
R/P lock,
lever from being moved to position "R" at speeds in excess of approx. 8 km/h. The R/P

ca
task
lock also locks the selector lever in position "P" when the shift lock is active.

rd
ia
R/P lock, location/task - GF27.60-P-5121N

gn
TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 215, 220, 230

.c
TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 463.303 /340 /341

om

Fig. 184: Identifying R/P Locking Solenoid And Electronic Selector Lever Control Module

R/P lock,
The R/P lock is integrated in the electronic selector lever module control unit (N15/5).
location

The R/P lock prevents the selector lever from being shifted into selector lever position
 "R" above a speed of approx.
R/P lock, task 8 km/h. The R/P lock also locks the selector lever in position "P" when the shift lock is
active.

LUBRICATION PRESSURE REGULATING VALVE, LOCATION/TASK/FUNCTION - GF27.60-P-

5122G

TRANSMISSION 722.6

ca
rd
ia
Fig. 185: Identifying Pressure Regulating Valve Components

gn
Lubrication pressure In the valve housing of the

.c
regulating valve, location shift plate (2a).

om
Lubrication pressure Lubricates and cools the
regulating valve, task mechanical part of the
transmission, and limits
the pressure in the torque
converter.
Lubrication pressure GF27.60-P-5122-01G
regulating valve, function

Lubrication pressure regulating valve, function - GF27.60-P-5122-01G

Transmission 722.6

Operation

At the working pressure regulating valve (22) surplus oil is diverted to the lubrication pressure regulating valve
(23), from where the lubrication pressure (p-Sm) is used in regulated amounts to supply the transmission
lubrication system including the torque converter.
Fig. 186: Identifying Lubrication Pressure Regulating Valve, Function

TORQUE CONVERTER LOCKUP CLUTCH REGULATING VALVE, LOCATION/TASK/

FUNCTION - GF27.60-P-5123G

TRANSMISSION 722.6

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 187: Locating Torque Converter Lockup Clutch Regulating Valve Components

Torque converter lockup In the valve housing of the

clutch regulating valve, shift plate.
location
Torque converter lockup Hydraulic control of the
clutch regulating valve, torque converter lockup
task clutch and distribution of
the lubricating oil.
Torque converter lockup GF27.60-P-5123-01G
clutch regulating valve,
function

Torque converter lockup clutch regulating valve, function - GF27.60-P-5123-01G

Transmission 722.6

ca
rd
ia
gn
Fig. 188: Identifying Torque Converter Lockup Clutch Regulating Valve Function

.c
Operation

om
The converter lockup clutch regulating valve (27) regulates the working pressure in the converter lockup clutch
(p-KUB) depending on the control pressure in the converter lockup clutch (p-S/KUB).

Depending on the working pressure in the converter lockup clutch (p-KUB) the converter lockup clutch (KUB)
is

 Engaged
 Disengaged
 in slip mode

In the lower position of the converter lockup clutch regulating valve (27) lubricating oil (p-Sm) flows through
the torque converter and oil cooler (65) into the transmission (converter lockup clutch depressurized). In its
regulating position (slipping, torque converter lockup clutch pressurized), a reduced volume of lubricating oil
(p-Sm) flows through the annular passage (27a) bypassing the torque converter and passing direct through the
oil cooler (65) into the transmission. 65 The other part of the lubricating oil (p-Sm) is led via the restrictor (a)
into the torque converter for cooling the converter lockup clutch (KUB).

WORKING PRESSURE REGULATING VALVE, LOCATION/TASK/FUNCTION - GF27.60-P-5131G

TRANSMISSION 722.6

Fig. 189: Identifying Valve Housing Of Shift Plate, Working Pressure Regulating Valve

Working pressure 2In the valve housing of

regulating valve, location the shift plate.

ca
Working pressure Regulates the primary

rd
regulating valve, task pressure of the hydraulic
system.

ia
Working pressure GF27.60-P-5131-01G

gn
regulating valve, function

.c
Working pressure regulating valve, function - GF27.60-P-5131-01G

om
Transmission 722.6

Fig. 190: Identifying Pressure Regulating Valve Function

Operation
The working pressure (p-A) is regulated at the working pressure regulating valve (22) depending on the load
(modulating pressure (p-Mod) and depending on the gear (p-K1, p-K2). A minimum level (basic pressure) is
adjusted by the spring in the working pressure regulating valve (22).

SHIFT PRESSURE REGULATING VALVE, LOCATION / TASK / FUNCTION - GF27.60-P-5132G

TRANSMISSION 722.6

ca
rd
Fig. 191: Identifying Valve Housing Of Shift Plate, Working Pressure Regulating Valve

ia
gn
Shift pressure regulating In the valve housing of
valve, location shift plate (2b).

.c
Shift pressure regulating Control of shift pressure.

om
valve, task
Shift pressure regulating GF27.60-P-5132-04G
valve, function

Shift pressure regulating valve, function - GF27.60-P-5132-04G

Transmission 722.6
Fig. 192: Identifying Shift Pressure Regulating Valve Function

Operation

The shift pressure (p-S) is determined by the shift pressure regulating solenoid valve (Y3/6y2) and the shift
pressure regulating valve (24). In addition, pressure from the multiple-disc clutch K2 (p-K2) is also present at

ca
the annular surface (24a) of the shift pressure regulating valve (24). This reduces the shift pressure in 2nd gear.

rd
REGULATING VALVE PRESSURE REGULATING VALVE, LOCATION / TASK / FUNCTION -

ia
GF27.60-P-5133G

gn
TRANSMISSION 722.6

.c
om

Fig. 193: Identifying Valve Housing Of Shift Plate, Working Pressure Regulating Valve

Regulating valve pressure In the valve housing of

regulating valve, location shift plate (2b).
Regulating valve pressure Controls the regulating
regulating valve, task valve pressure.
Regulating valve pressure GF27.60-P-5133-04G
 regulating valve, function

Sidegate Regulating Valve-Regulating Valve Pressure Function - GF27.60-P-5133-04G

Transmission 722.6

Operation

The regulating valve pressure (p-RV) is controlled up to the maximum pressure at the regulating valve pressure
regulating valve (25) depending on the working pressure (p-A).

ca
rd
ia
gn
Fig. 194: Identifying Sidegate Regulating Valve-Regulating Valve Pressure Function

.c
SHIFT VALVE PRESSURE REGULATING VALVE, LOCATION/TASK/FUNCTION - GF27.60-P-

om
5134G

TRANSMISSION 722.6

Fig. 195: Identifying Valve Housing Of Shift Plate, Working Pressure Regulating Valve

Shift valve pressure In the valve housing of

 regulating valve, location shift plate (2b).
Shift valve pressure Control of shift valve
regulating valve, task pressure.
Shift valve pressure GF27.60-P-5134-04G
regulating valve, function

Shift valve pressure regulating valve, function - GF27.60-P-5134-04G

Transmission 722.6

Operation

The variable regulating valve pressure (p-RV) is controlled to a constant shift valve pressure (p-SV) at the shift
valve pressure regulating valve (21) and is used to supply the solenoid valves for 1 -2 and 4-5 shift, 3-4 shift, 2-
3 shift (Y3/6y3, Y3/6y4, Y3/6y5) as well as the PWM solenoid valve for the converter lockup (Y3/6y6).

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 196: Identifying Shift Valve Pressure Regulating Valve Function

HOLDING PRESSURE SHIFT VALVE, LOCATION/TASK/FUNCTION - GF27.60-P-5135G

TRANSMISSION 722.6
Fig. 197: Identifying Holding Pressure Shift Valve Components

ca
Holding pressure shift Each shift group is
valve, location assigned a holding

rd
pressure shift valve (28a,
28b, 28c).

ia
The holding pressure shift

gn
valves 1-2/4-5 (28a) and
2-3 (28b) are installed in

.c
the valve housing (2b), the

om
3-4 holding pressure shift
valve (28c) is installed in
the valve housing of the
shift plate (2a).
Holding pressure shift Allocates the working
valve, task pressure to one actuator of
a shift group.
Holding pressure shift GF27.60-P-5135-04G
valve, function

Holding pressure shift valve, function - GF27.60-P-5135-04G

Transmission 722.6

Basic condition (one shift element engaged)

Fig. 198: Identifying Holding Pressure Shift Valve Function Basic Condition (One Shift Element
Engaged)

Shift condition

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 199: Identifying Holding Pressure Shift Valve Function Shift Condition

Operation

The holding pressure shift valve (28) is engaged by pressures in the shift elements acting on the front face and a
spring. It assigns the working pressure (p-A) to the shift element with the higher pressure (taking into account
the spring force and the effective area).

The other element of the shift group is then unpressurized. The valve switches over only during the shift phase
and only at a certain pressure ratio between the overlap pressure (p-U) and the shift pressure (p-S).

SHIFT PRESSURE SHIFT VALVE, LOCATION / TASK / FUNCTION - GF27.60-P-5136G

TRANSMISSION 722.6
Fig. 200: Identifying Pressure Shift Valve Components

ca
Shift pressure shift valve, Each shift group possesses
location one shift pressure shift

rd
valve. The 1-2/4-5 shift
pressure shift valves (29a)

ia
and 2-3 shift pressure shift

gn
valve (29b) are installed in
the valve housing of the

.c
shift plate (2b), the 3-4

om
shift pressure shift valve
(29c) is installed in the
valve housing of the shift
plate (2a).
Shift pressure shift valve, To assign shift pressure to
task the engaging shift actuator
and to assign the overlap
pressure, controlled by the
overlap regulating valve,
to the disengaging shift
actuator.
Shift pressure shift valve, GF27.60-P-5136-04G
function

Shift pressure shift valve, function - GF27.60-P-5136-04G

Transmission 722.6

1-2/4-5 shift pressure shift valve

Multiple-disc brake (B) engaging, multiple-disc clutch (K) disengaging

Fig. 201: Identifying Pressure Shift Valve Function (1 Of 2)

1-2/4-5 shift pressure shift valve

Multiple-disc brake (B) engaging, multiple-disc clutch (K) disengaging

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 202: Identifying Pressure Shift Valve Function (2 Of 2)

Operation

When the multiple-disc brake (B) is engaged, the working pressure (p-A) is applied to the end face of the shift
pressure shift valve (29) via the command valve (31). Its shift condition is retained in the shift phase, whilst the
shift element pressure acting on the end face and which is variable during the shift phase is replaced by a
corresponding, constant pressure.

When the multiple-disc clutch (K) is engaged (K) the end face of the shift pressure shift valve (29) is
depressurized during the stationary and shift phases, here the shift condition is also retained during the shift
phase.

OVERLAP REGULATING VALVE, LOCATION / TASK / FUNCTION - GF27.60-P-5137G

TRANSMISSION 722.6
Fig. 203: Identifying Overlap Regulating Valve Components

ca
Overlap regulating valve, Each shift group is

rd
location assigned one overlap

ia
regulating valve. The 1-

gn
2/4-5 overlap regulating
valve (30a) is installed in

.c
the valve housing of the

om
shift plate (2b), the 2-3
overlap regulating valve
(30b) and 4-5 (30c) are
installed in the valve
housing of the shift plate
(2a).
Overlap regulating valve, The overlap regulating
location valve regulates the
pressure reduction during
a shift phase.
Overlap regulating valve, GF27.60-P-5137-04G
function

Overlap, function - GF27.60-P-5137-04G

Transmission 722.6

Operation

During the shift phase the pressure in the disengaging shift actuator is controlled depending on the engine load
(modulating pressure (p-Mod)) and the pressure in the engaging shift actuator. The regulated pressure is
inversely proportional to the transfer capacity of the activating shift actuator (regulated overlap).

Fig. 204: Identifying Overlap Function

LOCATION/TASK/FUNCTION OF COMMAND VALVE - GF27.60-P-5138G

TRANSMISSION 722.6

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 205: Identifying Command Valve Components

Command valve, location Each shift group possesses

one command valve. The
1-2/4-5 command valves
(31a) and 2-3 (31b) are
installed in the valve
housing of the shift plate
(2b), the 3-4 command
valve (31c) is installed in
 the valve housing of the
shift plate (2a).
Command valve, task The command valves
switch the shift groups
from the stationary phase
into the shift phase and
back again
Command valve, function GF27.60-P-5138-04G

Command valve, function - GF27.60-P-5138-04G

Transmission 722.6

1-2/4-5 command valve shown

Stationary phase (B1 engaged, K1 disengaged)

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 206: Identifying Command Valve Function Diagram - Stationary Phase (B1 Engaged, K1
Disengaged)

1-2/4-5 command valve shown

Shift phase (B1 disengaging, K1 engaging)

Fig. 207: Identifying Command Valve Function Diagram - Shift Phase (B1 Disengaging, K1 Engaging)

Operation

When the end face is unpressurized (stationary phase), the working pressure is directed to the actuated shift
element.

If the end face of the command valve (31) is subjected to shift valve pressure (p-SV) (shift phase), then the shift

ca
pressure (p-S) is switched to the engaging element and the overlap pressure (p-U) is switched to the disengaging

rd
element.

ia
SELECTOR VALVE, LOCATION/TASK - GF27.60-P-5139G

gn
.c
TRANSMISSION 722.6

om

Fig. 208: Identifying Valve Housing Of Shift Plate, Selector Valve

Selector valve, location The selector valve (52) is

located in the valve
housing of the shift plate
(2a).
Selector valve, task Distributes pressure to the
appropriate hydraulic
components according to
the selector lever position
selected by the driver.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
 2000-2007 TRANSMISSION

Automatic Transmission - Component Modifications - 215 & 220 Chassis

COMPONENT MODIFICATIONS
ADDITIONAL SHIM BETWEEN DEEP-GROOVE BALL BEARING AND OUTPUT FLANGE -
BT27.10-P-0005-01A

Transmission 722.6

TRANSMISSION 722.6## (except 722.66) ## as of 1658778 as of 19.7.99

TRANSMISSION 722.6## ## as of 1658778 as of 19.7.99

In order to avoid load change noise during driving, and to provide an additional safeguard against slackening of
the twelve-point nut, a shim with a thickness of 0.3 mm is installed between the deep-groove ball bearing and
the output flange.

ca
OIL PAN AND OVERFLOW TUBE MODIFIED - BT27.10-P-0006-01W

rd
TRANSMISSION 722.901

ia
To improve fluid supply to the transmission, the transmission oil pan and the overflow tube have been

gn
redesigned.

.c
The characteristic sloped surface (arrow) can be used to identify the new oil pan (1). This oil pan configuration

om
should be installed only together with the white overflow tube (2).

The fluid temperatures used as references for checking and refilling are different with the new components.
 ca
Fig. 1: Identifying Overflow Tube And Oil Pan

rd
ia
Whenever a transmission is removed for repairs, the earlier oil pan (3) with the black overflow tube (4) should
be replaced by the new sloped-surface version (1) with the white overflow tube (2).

gn
.c
om

Fig. 2: Identifying Black Overflow Tube And Oil Pan

RETAINING LUG ADDED TO ELECTROHYDRAULIC CONTROL MODULE - BT27.19-P-0001-01A

TRANSMISSION 722.6## # as of 0026195

722.6

PRODUCTION BREAKPOINT DATA/MODIFICATIONS/NEW FEATURES

Transmission/steering gear Transmission ident. end no. as Type of and reason for
of modification
722.6 0026195

In order to prevent the plastic material bending away in the area of the oil temperature sensor at high
transmission temperatures, the control module has been strengthened by a stiffening rib in this area.

The retaining lug also engages in the extended end of the sealing plate.

CAPS FOR SOLENOID VALVE, NEW - BT27.19-P-0003-01A

Transmission 722.6

ca
rd
TRANSMISSION 722.6 as of 1.8.97

ia
To prevent a short-circuit due to metal abrasion or metal shavings on the contact tongues of the solenoid valves,

gn
all solenoid valves are covered with caps.

.c
om

Fig. 3: Identifying Caps For Solenoid Valve

PILOT BUSHING MODIFIED - BT27.19-P-0004-01A

Transmission 722.6
TRANSMISSION 722.6

Improved materials on the pilot bushing (21) and the sealing rings (20). In addition, the levering rib on the side
has been omitted. The optimized pilot bushing (21) is marked with a green dot. If leakage occurs then in this
case only the sealing rings (20) are replaced and not the whole pilot bushing (21).

ca
Fig. 4: Identifying Pilot Bushing Modified - Transmission 722.6

rd
ia
OIL DRAIN PLUG ON TORQUE CONVERTER DELETED - BT27.20-P-0001-01A

gn
Transmission 722.6

.c
om
TRANSMISSION 722.6## /6## ## as of 1772285 as of 22.9.99

For reasons of cost, the oil drain plug on the torque converter has been deleted for all transmission variants.

INSTALLATION OF A PRESSURE FEED VALVE - BT27.35-P-0002-01A

TRANSMISSION 722.6## # as of 0027083

Fig. 5: Identifying Pressure Feed Valve - Transmission 722.6## # As Of 0027083

ca
PRODUCTION BREAKPOINT DATA/MODIFICATIONS/NEW FEATURES

rd
Transmission/steering gear Transmission ident. end no. as Type of and reason for
of modification

ia
722.6 0027083

gn
A pressure feed valve (146) has been installed in the 2-3 shift group to prevent harsh 3-2 downshifts and roll-

.c
out shifts.

om
STRAINER FOR MODULATING PRESSURE AND SHIFT PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE, NEW - BT27.35-P-0004-01A

Transmission 722.6

TRANSMISSION 722.6## ## as of 0538312

Strainer to protect against dirt and metal shavings for the modulating pressure and shift pressure control
solenoid valves in the valve housing.

As a result also new control solenoid valves with a new part number.
Fig. 6: Identifying Strainer For Modulating Pressure And Shift Pressure Control Solenoid Valve -
Transmission 722.6

ca
STRAINER IN INLET TO CONVERTER LOCK-UP CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE, NEW -

rd
BT27.35-P-0005-01A

ia
Transmission 722.6

gn
.c
TRANSMISSION 722.6## ## as of 0485895

om

Fig. 7: Identifying Strainer In Inlet To Converter Lock-Up Control Solenoid Valve - Transmission 722.6
Strainer to protect against dirt and metal shavings in inlet to converter lock-up control solenoid valve in valve
housing.

MAGNET IN OIL PAN, NEW PART - BT27.40-P-0003-01A

TRANSMISSION 722.6## ## as of 2871384 as of 17.4.01, 722.7## ## as of 0153700 as of 9.7.01

To avoid malfunctions from metal particles, a magnet is placed in the oil pan.

The magnet can be retrofitted in the field.

ca
rd
ia
gn
Fig. 8: Identifying Oil Pan Magnet

.c
om
PLAIN BEARING OF INPUT SHAFT CHANGED TO AN ANTI-FRICTION BEARING - BT27.50-P-
0002-02A

TRANSMISSION 722.60# /61# /660 /662 /664 /665 /69# ## as of 1317917 as of 7.1.99,
722.62# /63# /661 /663 /666 /669 ## as of 1324240 as of 12.1.99

The plain bearing in the input shaft was replaced by an anti-friction bearing (needle bushing).

As a result, the inside diameter of the needle bushing in the input shaft and the outside diameter of the journal at
the output shaft have also changed.

When repairing a vehicle, therefore, both shafts must be replaced.

Fig. 9: Identifying Needle Bushing - Transmission 722.60# /61# /660 /662 /664 /665 /69# ## As Of 1317917
As Of 7.1.99, 722.62# /63# /661 /663 /666 /669 ## As Of 1324240 As Of 12.1.99

OUTER MULTIPLE-DISC CARRIER B1 MODIFIED - BT27.50-P-0008-01A

TRANSMISSION 722.6## # as of 0005900

ca
rd
PRODUCTION BREAKPOINT DATA/MODIFICATIONS/NEW FEATURES
Transmission/steering gear Transmission ident. end no. as Type of and reason for

ia
of modification

gn
722.6 0005900 Outer multiple-disc carrier B1
modified, disc spring therefore

.c
does not contact the outer

om
multiple-disc carrier

1. Only place the disc spring lugs in the marked recesses of the outer multiple-disc carrier

Insert disc spring with the curvature towards the piston

Fig. 10: Identifying Outer Multiple-Disc Carrier B1 Modified - Transmission 722.6## # As Of 0005900

PEAK-TO-VALLEY HEIGHT ON PISTON B2 MODIFIED - BT27.50-P-0009-01A

ca
TRANSMISSION 722.6## # as of 0023104

rd
ia
PRODUCTION BREAKPOINT DATA/MODIFICATIONS/NEW FEATURES

gn
Transmission/steering gear Transmission ident. end no. as Type of and reason for
of modification

.c
722.6 0023104

om
The peak-to-valley height on the diameter of the piston B2 has been reduced to improve the engagement from
"D" and "R". The O-ring wear and digging in of the piston is therefore minimized.

PISTON B2 CHANGED - BT27.50-P-0010-01A

Transmission 722.6 phased in

TRANSMISSION 722.6## ## as of 0552036 as of 1.8.97

To improve the piston guide and avoid the piston jamming the position of the sealing ring (14d) on the piston
(27) was changed.
Fig. 11: Identifying Sealing Ring And Piston - Transmission 722.6 Phased In

FRICTION BEARING IN SUN WHEEL OF REAR PLANET GEAR SET CONVERTED TO ANTI-
FRICTION BEARING - BT27.50-P-0011-01A

ca
Transmission 722.6

rd
TRANSMISSION 722.60# /61# /660 /662 /664 /665 /69# ## as of 1572721 as of 1.6.99,

ia
722.62# /63# /650 /654 /661 /663 /666 /669 ## as of 1574575 as of 2.6.99

gn
The friction bearing bush in the sun gear (45e) has been replaced with an anti-friction bearing (1).

.c
om
This improves the bearing of the hollow shaft and the freewheel (45d) is no longer worn away by the friction
bearing bush.

Fig. 12: Identifying Friction Bearing In Sun Wheel Of Rear Planet Gear Set Converted To Anti-Friction
Bearing - Transmission 722.6

CONVERSION FROM 18° TO 23° GEARING IN FRONT AND REAR PLANETARY GEAR SYSTEM
- BT27.50-P-0012-01A

TRANSMISSION 722.60# /61# /61# (except 722.601 /612 /614) ## as of 2102731 as of 21.3.00,
722.621 /623 /624 /626 /628 /63# /63# /661 ## as of 2094082 as of 16.3.00, 722.662 ## as of 2102731 as of
21.3.00, 722.663 ## as of 2094082 as of 16.3.00, 722.664 /665 ## as of 2102731 as of 21.3.00, 722.666 /669 ##
as of 2094082 as of 16.3.00, 722.69# ## as of 2102731 as of 21.3.00

The helical gearing angle in the front and rear gear sets was changed from 18° to 23° to improve the noise level
of the gear sets.

MULTI-DISKS FOR B1, K1 AND K3 CHANGED - BT27.50-P-0013-01A

TRANSMISSION 722.6## ## as of 3947440 as of 2.9.02

Phased in as of 02.09.02 the multi-disks for B1, K1 and K3 will be changed. The multi-disks will only have a
friction lining on one side (single-sided) as a cost-cutting measure.

ca
The setting procedure for the clearance and the special tool required for this procedure remain unchanged.

rd
Single-sided multi-disks cannot be replaced with double sided multi-disks and vice versa.

ia
gn
THICKNESS OF FRICTION AND STEEL DISKS K3 CHANGED - BT27.51-P-0001-01A

.c
TRANSMISSION 722.6

om
PRODUCTION BREAKPOINT DATA/CHANGES/NEW FEATURES
Transmission/Steering gear Transmission ident. end no. as Type of and reason for
of modification
722.6 Phased in

The thickness of the friction disks has been increased by 0.5 mm and the thickness of the steel disks reduced by
0.7mm.

This improves heat dissipation and prevents shift judder

The clearance adjustment has not changed.

THICKNESS OF STEEL PLATES OF B1, K1 AND K2 MODIFIED - BT27.51-P-0002-01A

Transmission 722.6

TRANSMISSION 722.6## ## as of 1596205 as of 15.6.99

In order to reduce costs, the thickness of the steel plates has been reduced by 0.7 mm.
The adjustment values for the play settings remain unchanged.

ADDITIONAL DISHED WASHER IN MULTI-PLATE SET K2 - BT27.51-P-0003-01A

Transmission 722.6

TRANSMISSION 722.6## ## as of 1596205 as of 15.6.99

In order to improve the smoothness of the gearshift, an additional dished washer has been inserted in the multi-
plate set.

This modification changes the play settings of the multi-plate clutch. Observe the new adjustment data!

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
 2000-2007 TRANSMISSION

Automatic Transmission - Maintenance - 215 & 220 Chassis

MAINTENANCE
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION - OIL AND FILTER CHANGE - AP27.00-P-2702

Automatic transmission - oil and filter change - AP27.00-P-2702I

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 211, 215, 219, 220

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 1: Identifying Oil Drain Screw, Oil Pan, Magnet And Oil Filter

Remove/install
Align vehicle between the columns of
the lifting platform and position the
Risk of death caused by vehicle slipping or AS00.00-Z-
four support plates at the lifting
toppling off of the lifting platform. 0010-01A
platform support points specified by
the vehicle manufacturer.
Except Keyless Go code 889
1.1 Switch off ignition Remove transmitter key from
electronic ignition switch control unit
With Keyless Go code 889
Remove cards for Keyless Go or transmitter Keep outside the range of the
1.2
key from vehicle transmitter
Switch off engine.
2 Raise vehicle with lifting platform
Remove rear section of lower engine
3.1 Vehicles with gasoline engine
compartment paneling
 Remove and install bottom engine AR61.20-P-
Model 211
compartment paneling 1105T
AR61.20-P-
Model 219
1105TX
AR61.20-P-
Model 215, 220
1105M
Remove rear part of bottom sections of
3.2 In vehicles with diesel engine
soundproofing
Remove/install bottom parts of AR94.30-P-
Model 211
soundproofing 5300T
AR94.30-P-
Model 220
5300M
If transmission oil is burnt or
Unscrew oil drain screw (1) and drain contains wear debris, flush oil cooler
4
transmission oil lines and oil cooler to prevent
subsequent damage to transmission: ?
Flushing out oil cooler lines and oil AR27.55-P-
cooler 0001A
Installation: Install new sealing

ca
ring (2).

rd
*BA27.10-

ia
P-1001-03A
Installation: Pay attention to sprag

gn
5 Remove bolts (3)
(4).

.c
*BA27.10-

om
P-1002-03A
6 Remove oil pan (5) Installation: Install new gasket
Transmission 722.6## ## as of
7.1 Remove magnet (6) from oil pan (5)
2871384, as of 17.4.01
BT27.40-P-
Magnet in oil pan, newly included
0003-01A
Clean abrasion particles from
magnet (6).
8 Remove oil filter (7) Installation: Install new O-ring.
9 Install in the reverse order
Risk of accident caused by vehicle starting Secure vehicle to prevent it from
off by itself when engine is running. Risk of moving by itself.
AS00.00-Z-
injury caused by contusions and burns Wear closed and snug-fitting work
0005-01A
during starting procedure or when working clothes.
near the engine as it is running Do not touch hot or rotating parts.
Pour ATF into automatic transmission and
10
inspect ATF level
Check oil level in automatic transmission, AR27.00-P-
correct if necessary 0100AC
 OIL PAN, AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Number Designation Transmission 722.6 Transmission Transmission
except 722.628/648/649 722.628 722.649
BA27.10-P- Drain plug on
Nm 20 20 22
1001-03A transmission oil pan
Bolt, oil pan to Nm 8 8 8
BA27.10-P-
transmission
1002-03A Angle° - - -
housing

Automatic transmission - oil and filter change - AP27.00-P-2702W

TRANSMISSIONS 722.9

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 2: Identifying Automatic Transmission Oil And Filter Components - Transmissions 722.9

MODIFICATION NOTES
2.8.05 Reference to modified Step 2.1
transmission oil pan on
transmission 722.901
added

Remove
Risk of accident caused Secure vehicle to prevent AS00.00-Z-0005-01A
by vehicle starting off by it from moving.
itself when engine is Wear closed and snug-
running. Risk of injury fitting work clothes.
caused by contusions and Do not grasp hot or
 burns during starting rotating parts.
procedure or when
working near engine
Risk of death caused by Align vehicle between the AS00.00-Z-0010-01A
vehicle slipping or columns of the lifting
toppling off of the liftingplatform and position the
platform. four support plates at the
lifting platform support
points specified by the
vehicle manufacturer.
1 Raise vehicle with lifting The vehicle must be
platform situated on the lifting
platform so that it is level
in both the longitudinal
and transverse axes.
2.1 Check transmission oil Transmission 722.901
pan (3) The transmission oil
pan (3) and the overflow
pipe (31) have been

ca
redesigned to optimize the
oil feed of the

rd
transmission. The old

ia
transmission oil pan (3)

gn
without chamfers and
with a black overflow

.c
pipe (31) after removal is
to be replaced by the

om
transmission oil pan (3)
with chamfers and with a
white overflow pipe (31).
Oil pan and overflow tube BT27.10-P-0006-01W
modified
3 Remove oil drain screw Collect transmission
from the transmission oil oil which runs out in a
pan (3) suitable container.
4 Pay overflow pipe (31) Collect transmission
off base using a drift oil which runs out in a
(arrow) suitable container.
Drift Fig. 4
5 Remove transmission oil To do this, remove
pan (3) bolts (3b) and remove
sprag (3a).
6 Remove transmission oil
filter (34)
7 Remove overflow pipe
(31) from the
 transmission oil pan (3)
Clean
8 Clean seal (33) A seal (33) which is
not damaged can be used
again.
9 Clean magnet (32) Check magnet (32) for
damage and replace if
necessary.
10 Clean the transmission oil
pan (3)
Install
11 Install new transmission
oil filter (34)
12 Install new overflow pipe Press new overflow
(31) pipe (31) firmly onto the
base (arrow) in the
transmission oil pan (3).
The overflow pipe (31)

ca
must latch noticeably.
13 Install transmission oil The sprags (3a) are

rd
pan (3) only authorized for

ia
transmission 722.9 and

gn
may not be mixed up with
other sprags (3a)

.c
otherwise contact

om
corrosion can occur.
Replace bolts (3b).
*BA27.10-P-1002-03A
Adding transmission oil
14 Mount adapter in the bore The adapter can be
of the oil drain screw and obtained from two
connect oil dispenser manufacturers.
Adapter NAG 2, Deutsche *WE58.40-Z-1003-17A
Teclamit 2000
Adapter NAG 2, Flaco *WE58.40-Z-1003-17A
Gerate
Oil dispenser, mobile with *WE58.40-Z-1001-17A
calibrated meter
Oil dispenser, mobile with *WE58.40-Z-1002-17A
meter not capable of
calibration
15 Fill with transmission oil With the oil dispenser
pump approx. 1 l more
transmission oil into the
transmission than was
 drained.
Filling capacity *BF27.00-P-1001-01C
Oil dispenser, mobile with *WE58.40-Z-1001-17A
calibrated meter
Oil dispenser, mobile with *WE58.40-Z-1002-17A
meter not capable of
calibration
16 Call up the transmission On transmissions with
fluid temperature using chamfered transmission
STAR DIAGNOSIS oil pan (3) and white
overflow pipe (31) the
transmission oil
temperature must be 40°
C.
On transmissions
without chamfered
transmission oil pan (3)
and with black overflow
pipe (31) the transmission

ca
oil temperature must be
30°C

rd
STAR DIAGNOSIS *WH58.30-Z-1048-13A

ia
diagnosis system

gn
17 Start engine and allow to
run in selector lever

.c
position "P"

om
18 Shift through "P-R-N-D"
several times with the
vehicle stationary and the
engine idling
19 Allow engine to idle in
selector lever position "P"
20 Call up the transmission The transmission oil
fluid temperature using temperature must not
STAR DIAGNOSIS exceed the specified value
in each case as the
overflow pipe (31) in the
transmission oil pan (3) is
designed for the
respective transmission oil
temperature.
On transmissions with
chamfered transmission
oil pan (3) and white
overflow pipe (31) the
transmission oil
 temperature must be 40°
C.
On transmissions
without chamfered
transmission oil pan (3)
and with black overflow
pipe (31) the transmission
oil temperature must be
30°C
STAR DIAGNOSIS *WH58.30-Z-1048-13A
diagnosis system
21 Detach adapter
22 Allow the surplus oil It is essential that the
quantity to drain out at the engine be running at idle,
specified transmission oil and that the temperature
temperature until a small of the transmission fluid
quantity still drains out not exceed the specified
level. If the operation is
carried out with the fluid

ca
at a higher temperature,
too much fluid will be

rd
drained.

ia
On transmissions with

gn
chamfered transmission
oil pan (3) and white

.c
overflow pipe (31) the
transmission oil

om
temperature must be 40°
C.
On transmissions
without chamfered
transmission oil pan (3)
and with black overflow
pipe (31) the transmission
oil temperature must be
30°C
23 Screw oil drain screw into Replace sealing ring.
the transmission oil pan
(3)
*BA27.10-P-1001-03A
24 Turn off engine
25 Lower vehicle

OIL PAN, AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

Number Designation Transmission 722.9
BA27.10-P-1001-03A Oil drain plug to oil pan Nm 22
BA27.10-P-1002-03A Bolt, oil pan to Nm 4
transmission housing Angle ° 180

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Number Designation Transmission 722.9 Transmission Transmission
except 722.960/961/962/963/964 722.901 with
722.960/961/962/963/964, code A25
except 722.901 with code
A25
For new
filling
BF27.00- Filling Initial charge Liters 9 9,6 6.7
P-1001- capacity Oil change Liters - - -
01C Specifications Sheet BB00.40-P-0236-12A BB00.40-P-0236-12A BB00.40-P-
for Operating 0236-12A
Fluids Sheet - - -

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 3: Identifying Drift (722 589 03 15 00)

COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE TOOLS

Number Designation
WH58.30-Z-1048-13A STAR DIAGNOSIS diagnosis 6511 1801 00
system, Compact Passenger Car

WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT
WE58.40-Z-1001-17A Oil dispenser, mobile with calibrated counter
WE58.40-Z-1002-17A Mobile oil dispenser, with counter (cannot be
calibrated)
WE58.40-Z-1003-17A Adapter for NAG [New Automatic Transmission] 2
Fig. 4: Identifying Drift (722 589 03 15 00)

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
 2000-2007 TRANSMISSION

Automatic Transmission - Test & Adjustment Values - 215 & 220 Chassis

TEST & ADJUSTMENT VALUES

TEST AND ADJUSTMENT VALUES: PASSENGER CARS: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION -
BE27.00-Z-9999AZ

MODEL all

Modulating pressure TRANSMISSION 722.5 BE27.10-P-1000-01A

Modulating pressure TRANSMISSION 722 ... BE27.10-P-1000-01B
Modulating pressure TRANSMISSION 722.4 BE27.10-P-1000-01C
Modulating pressure TRANSMISSION 722 ... BE27.10-P-1000-01D
Modulating pressure TRANSMISSION 722 ... BE27.10-P-1000-01E
Modulating pressure TRANSMISSION 722 ... BE27.10-P-1000-01F
Shift points in selector TRANSMISSION 722.5 in BE27.10-P-1000-02A

ca
lever position "D" MODEL 124
Shift points in selector TRANSMISSION 722.5 in BE27.10-P-1000-02B

rd
lever position "D" MODEL 124 with CODE

ia
(498) Japan version

gn
Shift points in selector TRANSMISSION 722.5 in BE27.10-P-1000-02C
lever position "D" MODEL 129

.c
Shift points in selector TRANSMISSION 722.5 in BE27.10-P-1000-02D

om
lever position "D" MODEL 129 with CODE
(491) U.S. version
Shift points in selector TRANSMISSION 722.5 in BE27.10-P-1000-02E
lever position "D" MODEL 140
Shift points in selector TRANSMISSION 722 ... BE27.10-P-1000-02F
lever position "D"
Shift points in selector TRANSMISSION 722.5 in BE27.10-P-1000-02G
lever position "D" MODEL 210
Shift points in selector TRANSMISSION 722.4 in BE27.10-P-1000-02H
lever position "D" MODEL 129
Shift points in selector TRANSMISSION 722.4 in BE27.10-P-1000-02I
lever position "D" MODEL 140
Shift points in selector TRANSMISSION 722.4 in BE27.10-P-1000-02J
lever position "D" MODEL 140 with CODE
(498) Japan-Ausfuhrung
Shift points in selector TRANSMISSION BE27.10-P-1000-02K
lever position "D" 722.425 /426 /427 in
MODEL 202
Shift points in selector TRANSMISSION BE27.10-P-1000-02L
lever position "D" 722.421 /423 /424 in
 MODEL 202
Shift points in selector TRANSMISSION 722 ... BE27.10-P-1000-02M
lever position "D"
Shift points in selector TRANSMISSION 722.3 in BE27.10-P-1000-02N
lever position "D" MODEL 129
Shift points in selector TRANSMISSION BE27.10-P-1000-02O
lever position "D" 722.362 /366 /368 /370 /371
in MODEL 140
Shift points in selector TRANSMISSION 722.367 BE27.10-P-1000-02P
lever position "D" in MODEL 140
Shift points in selector TRANSMISSION 722.6 in BE27.10-P-1000-02S
lever position "D" MODEL 129
Shift points in selector TRANSMISSION 722.6 in BE27.10-P-1000-02T
lever position "D" MODEL 140
Shift points in selector TRANSMISSION 722.6 in BE27.10-P-1000-02UA
lever position "D" MODEL 170
Shift points in selector TRANSMISSION 722.6 in BE27.10-P-1000-02UB
lever position "D" MODEL 202

ca
Shift points in selector TRANSMISSION 722.6 in BE27.10-P-1000-02UC
lever position "D" MODEL 208

rd
Shift points in selector TRANSMISSION 722.6 in BE27.10-P-1000-02V

ia
lever position "D" MODEL 210 with ENGINE
104, 111

gn
Shift points in selector TRANSMISSION 722.6 in BE27.10-P-1000-02W

.c
lever position "D" MODEL 210 with ENGINE

om
112
Shift points in selector TRANSMISSION 722.6 in BE27.10-P-1000-02WA
lever position "D" MODEL 210 with ENGINE
113, 119
Shift points in selector TRANSMISSION 722.6 in BE27.10-P-1000-02WB
lever position "D" MODEL 210 with ENGINE
602, 604, 605, 606, 611,
612, 613
Shift points in selector TRANSMISSION 722.6 in BE27.10-P-1000-02X
lever position "D" MODEL 163.113 /154 /172
up to 31.1.00
Shift points in selector TRANSMISSION 722.6 in BE27.10-P-1000-02XA
lever position "D" MODEL 163.113 /154 /172
as of 1.2.00
Control pressure cable TRANSMISSION 722.5 BE27.10-P-1000-03A
Transmission oil level TRANSMISSION BE27.10-P-1000-08A
722.800 /801
Transmission electrical TRANSMISSION 722 ... BE27.19-P-1000-01A
system
Transmission electrical TRANSMISSION 722 ... BE27.19-P-1000-01B
 system
Transmission, electrics TRANSMISSION 722.648 BE27.19-P-1000-01E
with ENGINE 155.980
Test values for torque TRANSMISSION 722.5 BE27.20-P-1000-01A
converter
Test values for torque TRANSMISSION BE27.20-P-1000-01B
converter 722.6 /6 /6 /9 /9
Test values for torque TRANSMISSION 722.7 BE27.20-P-1000-01C
converter
Test values for torque TRANSMISSION BE27.20-P-1000-01D
converter 722.800 /801
Test values for rear TRANSMISSION 722.5 BE27.30-P-1000-01A
transmission cover
Test values for lower TRANSMISSION 722.3 /5 BE27.35-P-1000-01A
cover
Test values for gear set TRANSMISSION BE27.50-P-1000-01A
722.3 /5 /6 /7 /9
Brake band/multi-disk TRANSMISSION 722.3 /5 BE27.50-P-1000-02A

ca
brake
Brake band/multi-disk TRANSMISSION 722 ...

rd
BE27.50-P-1000-02B
brake

ia
Multi-disk clutch TRANSMISSION BE27.51-P-1000-01A

gn
722.3 /5 /7
Multi-disk clutch TRANSMISSION 722 ... BE27.51-P-1000-01B

.c
Transmission oil cooling TRANSMISSION 722.3 /6 BE27.55-P-1000-01A

om
Shift lock TRANSMISSION 722.6 BE27.60-P-1000-01A
Shift point TRANSMISSION 722.3 BE27.60-P-1000-02A

TRANSMISSION ELECTRICAL SYSTEM - BE27.19-P-1000-01A

Engines 104, 111, 112, 113, 119, 120

TEST AND ADJUSTMENT VALUES FOR TRANSMISSION ADAPTATION ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Number Designation Engine Engine Engine Engine
104 111.920/921/941/942 111.945/946/952 111.944/947
BE27.19- Acceleration Number for 1 - 4 4 4 4
P-1001- upshift of shift -> 2
01A repeats
1 --> 2 Nm 14...37 14...28 14...28 14...37
Number for 2 - 4 4 4 4
of shift -> 3
repeats
2 --> 3 Nm 17...59 17...46 17...46 17...59
Number for 3 - 3 3 3 3
 of shift -> 4
repeats
3 --> 4 Nm 17...46 17...46 17...46 17...46
Number for 4 - 3 3 3 3
of shift -> 5
repeats
4 --> 5 Nm 0...121 0...82 0...82 0...121
Max. rpm 2400 2700 2700 2400
engine
speed

TEST AND ADJUSTMENT VALUES FOR TRANSMISSION ADAPTATION ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Number Designation Engine Engine Engine Engine
111.951/955/956/957 111.958 111.970/974/977 111.973/975/982/983
BE27.19- Acceleration Number for 4 4 4 4
P-1001- upshift of shift 1 --
01A repeats > 2
1 --> 2 Nm 14...37 14...37 14...28 14...37

ca
Number for 4 4 4 4
of shift 2 --

rd
repeats > 3

ia
2 --> 3 Nm 17...59 17...59 17...59 17...59

gn
Number for 3 3 3 3
of shift 3 --

.c
repeats > 4

om
3 --> 4 Nm 17...46 17...46 17...46 17...46
Number for 3 3 3 3
of shift 4 --
repeats > 5
4 --> 5 Nm 0...121 0...121 0...82 0...121
Max. rpm 2400 2400 2400 2400
engine
speed

TEST AND ADJUSTMENT VALUES FOR TRANSMISSION ADAPTATION ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Number Designation Engine 112 Engine Engine
113.940/942/943 113.940/942/943
without touch with touch shift
shift
BE27.19-P- Acceleration Number of for 1 --> 2 4 4 4
1001-01A upshift shift repeats
1 --> 2 Nm 14...37 13...40 10...45
Number of for 2 --> 3 4 4 4
shift repeats
 2 --> 3 Nm 17...59 22...50 22...50
Number of for 3 --> 4 3 3 3
shift repeats
3 --> 4 Nm 17...46 22...70 22...65
Number of for 4 --> 5 3 3 3
shift repeats
4 --> 5 Nm 0...121 0...110 22...90
Max. engine rpm 2400 1800 1800
speed

TEST AND ADJUSTMENT VALUES FOR TRANSMISSION ADAPTATION ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Number Designation Engine Engine Engine Engine
113.361 119.980/982 119.981/985 120
BE27.19-P- Acceleration Number of for 1 --> 4 4 4 4
1001-01A upshift shift repeats 2
1 --> 2 Nm 17...50 17...50 13...40 17...50
Number of for 2 --> 4 4 4 4
shift 3

ca
repeats
2 --> 3 Nm 29...60 29...60 25...50 29...60

rd
Number of for 3 --> 3 3 3 3

ia
shift 4

gn
repeats
3 --> 4 Nm 29...80 29...80 22...70 29...80

.c
Number of for 4 --> 3 3 3 3

om
shift 5
repeats
4 --> 5 Nm 0...140 0...140 0...110 0...140
Max. rpm 1800 1800 1800 1800
engine
speed

TEST VALUES FOR TORQUE CONVERTER - BE27.20-P-1000-01B

Transmission 722

MODIFICATION NOTES
12.1.07 Installed height of torque 722.680/682
converter

TORQUE CONVERTER TEST VALUES

Number Designation Transmission
722.600/601/602/603/604/605/608/611/614/616/619/626/629/634/637/640/
BE27.20- Installed Distance mm 7 (-2)
P-1001- height of from
01B torque transmission
converter housing

TEST VALUES FOR TORQUE CONVERTER

Number Designation Transmission Transmission
722.620/622/625/627 722.621
BE27.20-P- Installed height Distance from mm 26 (-2) 19 (-2)
1001-01B of torque transmission
converter housing

TORQUE CONVERTER TEST VALUES

Number Designation Transmission Transmission Transmission
722.635/639/644 722.638 722.649
BE27.20-P- Installed Distance from mm 21 (-2) 26 (-2) 20 (-2)
1001-01B height of transmission
torque housing
converter

ca
TEST VALUES FOR TORQUE CONVERTER

rd
Number Designation Transmission

ia
722.689
BE27.20-P-1001- Installed height of Distance from mm 9.5 (-2)

gn
01B torque converter transmission housing

.c
om
TEST VALUES FOR TORQUE CONVERTER
Number Designation Transmission Transmission Transmission
722.9 except 722.906 722.671/675
722.906
BE27.20-P- Installed Distance from mm 39.5 (-2) 29.5 (-2) -
1001-01B height of transmission
torque housing
converter

TEST VALUES FOR GEAR SET - BE27.50-P-1000

Test values for gear set - BE27.50-P-1000-01A

Transmission 722

TEST VALUES FOR GEAR SET

Number Designation Transmission Transmission Transmission Transmission Transmission
722.3 722.5 722.6 722.7 722.9
BE27.50- Axial play mm - 0.1 - - -
P-1001- between
01A output shaft
and
intermediate
shaft
BE27.50- Axial play mm - 0.4 - - -
P-1002- between
01A output shaft
and rear
cover
BE27.50- Axial play mm 0,05...0,2 0,05...0,2 - - -
P-1003- between
01A freewheel
and
connecting
carrier
BE27.50- End play mm 0.4...0.5 - 0.3...0.5 - 0.20...0.40
P-1004- between
01A park pawl
gear and

ca
grooved ball
bearing

rd
BE27.50- End play mm - - 0.15...0.6 - 0,15...0,60

ia
P-1005- between
01A shim and

gn
circlip

.c
BE27.50- Axial play mm - - - 0,15...0,3 -

om
P-1006- between
01A input shaft
and
transmission
housing
BE27.50- Axial play mm - - - 0,25...0,4 -
P-1007- between
01A output shaft
and
transmission
housing
BE27.50- Axial play mm - - - 0,25...0,4 -
P-1008- between
01A countershaft
and
transmission
housing
BE27.50- Axial play mm - - - 0,35...0,5 -
P-1009- between
01A reverse gear
shaft and
 transmission
housing
BE27.50- Preload of mm - - - 0,26 -
P-1010- tapered
01A roller
bearings
from
differential

Brake band/multi-disk brake - BE27.50-P-1000-02B

Transmission 722

MODIFICATION NOTES
29.3.99 Values revised in rows
1001 and 1002

ADJUSTMENT VALUES OF MULTI-DISK CLUTCH

Number Designation Transmission Transmission Transmission

ca
722.6 722.6 up to 722.6 as of

rd
01.09.02 with 02.09.02 with
double sided single-sided

ia
multiple-discs multiple-discs

gn
BE27.50-P- Play in Number of 2 mm 2,30...2,70 2,30...2,70 2,20...2,60
1001-02B multiple- multiple- 3 mm 2,70...3,10 2,70...3,10 2.40...2.80

.c
disc brake discs

om
B1 4 mm 3,00...3,40 3,00...3,40 2,60...3,00
BE27.50-P- Play in Number of 4 mm 1,90...2,30 - -
1002-02B multiple- multiple- 5 mm 2,00...2,40 - -
disc brake discs
B2 6 mm - - -
BE27.50-P- Play in mm 1,0...1,4 - -
1003-02B multiple- Number of 3 mm - - -
disc brake multiple-
B3 discs 4 mm - - -
BE27.50-P- Clearance of multi-disk brake, mm - - -
1004-02B BR

ADJUSTMENT VALUES OF MULTI-DISK CLUTCH

Number Designation Transmission
722.9
BE27.50-P-1001- Play in multiple- Number of 2 mm -
02B disc brake B1 multiple-discs 3 mm 2,00...2,40
4 mm 2,20...2,60
BE27.50-P-1002- Play in multiple- Number of 4 mm 1,70...2,1
02B disc brake B2 multiple-discs 5 mm 1.80...2.20
6 mm 1.80...2.20
BE27.50-P-1003- Play in multiple- mm -
02B disc brake B3 Number of 3 mm 2,20...2,60
multiple-discs 4 mm 2,00...2,40
BE27.50-P-1004- Clearance of multi-disk brake, BR mm 1,00...1,40
02B

MULTI-DISK CLUTCH - BE27.51-P-1000-01B

Transmission 722

MODIFICATION NOTES
29.3.99 Figures in rows 1001 to
1003 revised

ADJUSTMENT VALUES OF MULTI-DISK CLUTCH

Number Designation Transmission Transmission Transmission

ca
722.6 without 722.6 with cup 722.6 up to

rd
cup spring spring 01.09.02 with
double sided-

ia
multiple-discs

gn
BE27.51-P- Play in Number of 3 mm - 2,70...3,10 2,70...3,10
1001-01B multiple- multiple- 4 mm - 3,00...3,40 3,00...3,40

.c
disc clutch discs 5 mm - 3.30...3.70 3.30...3.70

om
K1
6 mm - 3.60...4.00 3.60...4.00
BE27.51-P- Play in Number of 3 mm 1.40...1.80 2,30...2,70 -
1002-01B multiple- multiple- 4 mm 1.50...1.90 2.40...2.80 -
disc clutch discs 5 mm 1.70...2.10 2.50...2.90 -
K2
6 mm 1.80...2.20 2,70...3,10 -
BE27.51-P- Play in Number of 3 mm - 2,30...2,70 2,30...2,70
1003-01B multiple- multiple- 4 mm - 2.40...2.80 2.40...2.80
disc clutch discs
K3 5 mm - 2.50...2.90 2.50...2.90

ADJUSTMENT VALUES OF MULTI-DISK CLUTCH

Number Designation Transmission Transmission
722.6 as of 722.9
02.09.02 with
single-sided
multiple-discs
BE27.51-P- Play in Number of 3 mm 2.40...2.80 2,00...2,40
1001-01B multiple-disc multiple-discs 4 mm 2,60...3,00 2,20...2,60
clutch K1 5 mm 2.80...3.20 2.40...2.80
 6 mm 2.90...3.30 -
BE27.51-P- Play in Number of 3 mm - 1.70...2.10
1002-01B multiple-disc multiple-discs 4 mm - 1,90...2,30
clutch K2 5 mm - 2,10...2,50
6 mm - 2,20...2,60
BE27.51-P- Play in Number of 3 mm 2,30...2,70 -
1003-01B multiple-disc multiple-discs 4 mm 2.40...2.80 2,20...2,60
clutch K3 5 mm 2.50...2.90 2.40...2.80

TRANSMISSION OIL COOLING - BE27.55-P-1000-01A

Transmission 722

TEST VALUES FOR TRANSMISSION FLUID COOLING

Number Designation Transmission
755.3/6
BE27.55-P-1001- Functioning Electric fan On at °C 105
01A temperature transmission fluid

ca
temperature

rd
Electric fan Off at °C 100
transmission fluid

ia
temperature

gn
.c
om
 2000-2007 TRANSMISSION

Automatic Transmission - Testing & Repair - 215 & 220 Chassis

TESTING & REPAIR

CHECK OIL LEVEL IN AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION AND CORRECT IF NECESSARY. -
AR27.00-P-0100W

TRANSMISSION 722.9 /9

Shown on transmission oil pan without sloped surface

ca
rd
ia
Fig. 1: Checking Oil Level In Automatic Transmission - Shown On Transmission Oil Pan Without Sloped
Surface

gn
.c
om

Fig. 2: Draining Transmission Oil

MODIFICATION NOTES
25.7.06 Test temperature of the
transmission oil modified
and documentation
adapted to new repair
method
 Removing
Risk of injury to skin Depressurize the hydraulic system AS00.00-Z-0013-
or eyes caused by completely before starting any work on 01A
hydraulic fluid the system. Wear protective clothing and
spraying out under safety glasses.
high pressure. Risk of
poisoning caused by
swallowing hydraulic
fluid.
Risk of accident Secure vehicle to prevent it from moving AS00.00-Z-0005-
caused by vehicle by itself. 01A
starting off by itself Wear closed and snug-fitting work
when engine is clothes.
running. Risk of Do not touch hot or rotating parts.
injury caused by
contusions and burns
during starting
procedure or when
working near the

ca
engine as it is running
Risk of injury to skin Wear safety gloves, protective clothing AS00.00-Z-0002-

rd
and eyes caused by and safety glasses, if necessary. 01A

ia
handling hot or
glowing objects.

gn
Risk of death caused Align vehicle between columns of vehicle AS00.00-Z-0010-

.c
by vehicle slipping or lift and position four support plates at 01A

om
toppling off of the vehicle lift support points specified by
lifting platform. vehicle manufacturer.
General information Note different transmission fluid
temperatures when checking and
correcting the level of the transmission
fluid.
1 Remove rear section
from engine
compartment
paneling or lower
soundproofing
Checking
2 Inspecting Vehicles with transmission 722.901
transmission oil pan
The transmission oil pan and the
overflow pipe (1) have been redesigned
to optimize the oil supply of the
transmission. When checking and
correcting the fluid level, always note the
fluid temperatures associated with the
 specific individual oil pan versions: ?
Transmission oil pan and overflow pipe BT27.10-P-0006-
modified 01W
Check transmission
fluid level
3 Start the engine, then
allow it to idle and
maintain pressure on
the brake pedal while
shifting the
transmission through
the ranges "PR- N-D"
4 Call up the On transmissions with chamfered
transmission fluid transmission oil pan (white overflow
temperature using pipe), the transmission oil temperature
STAR DIAGNOSIS must be 45°C .
On transmissions without chamfered
transmission oil pan (black overflow
pipe), the transmission oil temperature

ca
must be 35°C .

rd
5 Allow the engine to The engine must run at idle speed
run in selector lever and each specified transmission oil

ia
position "P" temperature must be adhered to. A lower

gn
transmission oil temperature causes
measuring errors

.c
On transmissions with chamfered

om
transmission oil pan (white overflow
pipe), the transmission oil temperature
must be 45°C .
On transmissions without chamfered
transmission oil pan (black overflow
pipe), the transmission oil temperature
must be 35°C .
6 Carefully unscrew the With an oil flow of thickness (arrow a)
oil drain screw (3) or thickness (arrow b) the transmission
from the oil level is OK and does not have to be
transmission's oil pan corrected. With an oil flow of thickness
and observe the fluid (arrow c) the transmission oil level must
as it emerges, then be corrected and in addition must be
screw the oil drain checked again.
screw (3) back in
immediately
*BA27.10-P-1001-
03A
7 Turn off engine
Correct
 transmission oil level
(after check)
8 Start engine and
allow to run at idle
speed in selector lever
position "P"
9 Call up the Because the overflow tube (1) within
transmission fluid the oil pan is designed for operation at the
temperature using specified fluid temperature, this
STAR DIAGNOSIS temperature should never exceed the level
indicated.
On transmissions with chamfered
transmission oil pan (white overflow
pipe), the transmission oil temperature
must be 45°C .
On transmissions without chamfered
transmission oil pan (black overflow
pipe), the transmission oil temperature
must be 35°C .

ca
10 Mount adapter (2) Adapter and transmission oil filler (NAT

rd
and connect 2), see GOTIS
transmission oil filler

ia
[Link]

gn
11 Shift through the
drive positions "P-R-

.c
N-D" several times

om
when the brake is
actuated and the
engine is at idle speed
12 Pump 1 l transmission Always observe work procedure
oil using filling pump and Specifications for Operating Fluids,
into transmission otherwise transmission will be damaged.
*BF27.00-P-1001-
01C
13 Remove the adapter
(2)
14 Allow the excess The engine must run at idle speed
fluid for the indicated and the specified transmission oil
fluid temperature to temperature must be reached in each case,
drain, continuing until too much transmission oil is drained at a
only a small flow higher transmission oil temperature.
(arrow B) emerges
On transmissions with chamfered
transmission oil pan (white overflow
pipe), the transmission oil temperature
must be 45°C .
 On transmissions without chamfered
transmission oil pan (black overflow
pipe), the transmission oil temperature
must be 35°C .
15 Replace sealing ring *BA27.10-P-1001-
and screw in oil drain 03A
screw (3)
16 Turn off engine
Install
17 Install rear section of
engine compartment
paneling or lower
soundproofing

OIL PAN, AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

Number Designation Transmission 722.9
BA27.10-P-1001-03A Drain plug on Nm 22
transmission oil pan

ca
rd
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Number Designation Transmission 722.9 Transmission Transmission

ia
except 722.901 with 722.960/961/

gn
722.960/961/962 /963/964, code A25 962/963/964
except 722.901 with code

.c
A25

om
For new filling
BF27.00- Filling Initial charge Liters 9 6,7 9,6
P-1001- capacity during oil Liters - - -
01C change
Specifications Sheet BB00.40-P-0236-12A BB00.40-P- BB00.40-P-
for Operating 0236-12A 0236-12A
Fluids Sheet - - -

INSPECT ATF LEVEL IN AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION, ADD ATF IF NECESSARY - AR27.00-P-

0101A

Transmission 722.6 in MODELS 129, 140, 163, 170, 202, 208, 210, 211, 215, 220, 230, 240

Transmission 722.6 in MODEL 461, 463 (except, 463.270 /271)

Fig. 3: Identifying ATF Level Components

ca
Adding transmission oil
Risk of accident caused Secure vehicle to prevent AS00.00-Z-0005-01A

rd
by vehicle starting off by it from moving by itself.

ia
itself when engine is Wear closed and snug-
running. Risk of injury fitting work clothes.

gn
caused by contusions and Do not grasp hot or

.c
burns during starting rotating parts.
procedure or when

om
working near the running
engine
1 Drive vehicle to level
surface
2 Open engine hood
3 Remove locking pin (93a) Remove locking pin by
breaking off the plate of
the locking pin (93a) with
a suitable tool and
pressing out the pin
remaining in the cap (93)
downwards.
4 Remove cap (93) from oil
filler pipe
5 Fill with transmission oil After a complete
refill and after changing
the transmission oil, pour
in approx. 5 liters of
transmission oil before
 starting the engine.
Insufficient and excessive
quantities of oil result in
malfunctions and
transmission damage.
*BF27.00-P-1001-01C
Fig. 4
Fig. 6
6 Start engine and allow it to
idle in drive position "P"
7 Fill with remaining Initial charge
quantity of transmission
oil
8 Apply service brake and
shift through drive
positions several times
with vehicle stationary and
engine running at idle
speed

ca
9 Insert oil dipstick all When the transmission

rd
the way into oil filler pipe, is cold (approx. 25 °C),
pull it out again and read the transmission oil level

ia
off transmission oil level must be between the "min"

gn
and "max" mark of the
marking (A). The exact

.c
transmission oil level can

om
only be determined at a
transmission oil
temperature of 80 °C.
Fig. 5
10 Warm up transmission oil
to operating temperature
Check transmission fluid
level
11 Apply service brake and
shift through drive
positions several times
with vehicle stationary and
engine running at idle
speed
12 Connect STAR Wait for 2 minutes
DIAGNOSIS and check until the exact
transmission oil transmission oil
temperature in drive temperature can be
position "D" measured.
 Operate service brakes
at the same time. The
exact transmission oil
level can only be
determined at a
transmission oil
temperature of 80 °C.
STAR DIAGNOSIS *WH58.30-Z-1048-13A
diagnosis system
13 Insert oil dipstick all If too much
the way into the oil filler transmission oil is added,
pipe, pull out again, read it is absolutely essential to
off transmission oil level drain off or extract the
and correct if necessary surplus. Insufficient and
excessive quantities of oil
result in malfunctions and
transmission damage.
The transmission oil
level must be between the

ca
"min" and "max" mark of
the marking (B).

rd
Fig. 5

ia
Fig. 7

gn
14 Check transmission oil After filling with
level again transmission oil

.c
15 Mount cap (93) on oil

om
filler pipe and press in new
locking pin (93a) until it
latches
16 Perform engine test run
and, with engine running,
check transmission for
leaks and that it is
functioning correctly

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Number Designation Transmission Transmission Transmission
722.600/601/604/605/ 722.602/603/615 722.610/638
606/607/608/609/611/
613/614/616/617/618/
629/634/639/660/661/
662/664/665/689/695/
696/699
For new filling
BF27.00-P- Filling Initial charge Liters 7.5 (+0.5) 7,0 (+0,5) 8.0
1001-01C capacity
 Oil change Liters - - -
Specifications Sheet BB00.40-P-0236- BB00.40-P- BB00.40-P-
for Operating 10A 0236-10A 0236-10A
Fluids Sheet BB00.40-P-0236- BB00.40-P- BB00.40-P-
12A 0236-12A 0236-12A

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Number Designation Transmission Transmission
722.620/621 in 722.620/621 in
model 129 model 140,
transmission
722.622/623/
624/625/626/627/628/
630/631/632/633/635/
636/663/666/669
For new filling
BF27.00-P- Filling Initial charge Liters 8,2 (+0,5) 8,6 (+0,5)
1001-01C capacity Oil change Liters - -

ca
Specifications for Sheet BB00.40-P-0236- BB00.40-P-0236-10A
Operating Fluids 10A

rd
Sheet BB00.40-P-0236- BB00.40-P-0236-12A

ia
12A

gn
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

.c
Number Designation Transmissions Transmission Transmission

om
722.640/644 722.640/64472 722.667/668/67
2/676/690
For new filling
BF27.00-P- Filling Initial charge Liters 7.5 7,3 (+0,5) 9
1001-01C capacity Oil change Liters - - -
Specifications Sheet BB00.40-P- BB00.40-P- BB00.40-P-
for Operating 0236-10A 0236-10A 0236-10A
Fluids Sheet BB00.40-P- BB00.40-P- BB00.40-P-
0236-12A 0236-12A 0236-12A

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Number Designation Transmission 722.637 in Transmission Transmission
model 722.637 in 722.649
461.302/331/332 /342//345 model
463.322/323
For new filling
BF27.00- Filling Initial charge Liters 7.9 7.9 7.5
P-1001- capacity Oil change Liters - - -
01C Specifications Sheet BB00.40-P-0236-10A BB00.40-P- BB00.40-P-
 for Operating 0236-10A 0236-10A
Fluids Sheet BB00.40-P-0236-12A BB00.40-P- BB00.40-P-
0236-12A 0236-12A

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Number Designation Transmission Transmission
722.673 in model 722.674 in model
163 163
For new filling
BF27.00-P- Filling capacity Initial charge Liters 7,6-8,0 8,8-9,2
1001-01C Oil change Liters - -
Specifications for Sheet BB00.40-P-0236- BB00.40-P-0236-
Operating Fluids 12A 12A
- -
Sheet

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Number Designation Transmission Transmission Transmission

ca
722.641 in 722.612/697/ 722.612/ in

rd
model 170 698 in model model 202
202

ia
For new filling

gn
BF27.00-P- Filling Initial charge Liters 7,3-7,7 7,3-7,7 8,5-8,9
1001-01C capacity Oil change Liters - - -

.c
Specifications Sheet BB00.40-P-

om
BB00.40-P- BB00.40-P-
for Operating 0236-12A 0236-12A 0236-12A
Fluids Sheet - -

Fig. 4: Identifying Funnel (126 589 12 63 00)

Fig. 5: Identifying Dipstick (140 589 15 21 00)

ca
Fig. 6: Identifying Filling Pipe (140 589 49 63 00)

rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 7: Identifying Hand Pump (210 589 00 71 00)

COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE TOOLS

Number Designation
WH58.30-Z-1048-13A STAR DIAGNOSIS diagnosis 6511 1801 00
system, Compact Passenger Car

FILLING AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WITH FLUID - AR27.00-P-0270W

TRANSMISSION 722.9 /9 (except 722.960 /961 /962 /963 /964)

The illustration shows the transmission oil pan without the sloped surface
Fig. 8: Filling Automatic Transmission With Fluid - Transmission Oil Pan Without Sloped Surface

ca
rd
ia
gn
Fig. 9: Draining Transmission Oil

.c
om
MODIFICATION NOTES
3.2.04 Notice on modified Step 2
transmission oil pan added

Adding
transmission oil
Risk of accident Secure vehicle to prevent it from moving AS00.00-Z-0005-
caused by vehicle by itself. 01A
starting off by itself Wear closed and snug-fitting work
when engine is clothes.
running. Risk of Do not touch hot or rotating parts.
injury caused by
contusions and burns
during starting
procedure or when
working near the
engine as it is
running
The transmission
must be filled with
 transmission oil
before starting the
engine
Risk of death caused Align vehicle between columns of vehicle AS00.00-Z-0010-
by vehicle slipping or lift and position four support plates at 01A
toppling off of the vehicle lift support points specified by
lifting platform. vehicle manufacturer.
1 Raise vehicle The vehicle must be situated on the
lifting platform so that it is level in both
the longitudinal and transverse axes.
2 Inspecting To improve fluid supply to the
transmission oil pan transmission, the transmission oil pan and
the overflow tube have been redesigned.
When checking and correcting the fluid
level, always note the fluid temperatures
associated with the specific individual oil
pan versions: ?
Only category P with transmission BT27.10-P-0006-
722.901 01W

ca
Transmission oil pan and overflow pipe
modified

rd
3 Unscrew oil drain The adapter (2) and oil dispenser can

ia
screw (3) and mount be obtained from two manufacturers.

gn
adapter (2) and Adapter NAG 2, Flaco Gerate, refer to
connect oil dispenser GOTIS Oil dispenser, mobile

.c
(calibrated), refer to GOTIS

om
[Link]
4 Pump 6 liters of In order to avoid damage to the
transmission oil using transmission, always consult the
oil dispenser into Specifications for Operating Fluids.
transmission
On transmissions which have been
repaired the quantity of transmission oil
drained +0.5 liters should be poured in.
*BF27.00-P-1001-
01C
5 Call up the
transmission fluid
temperature using
STAR DIAGNOSIS
On transmissions
with chamfered
transmission oil pan
and white overflow
pipe, the transmission
oil temperature must
 be 40°C.
On transmissions without chamfered
transmission oil pan and with white
overflow pipe, the transmission oil
temperature must be 30°C.
STAR DIAGNOSIS Compact diagnosis
system for passenger cars, order number
6511 1801 00
6 Start engine and
allow to run in
selector lever
position "P"
7 Pump transmission After replacing the transmission and
oil using oil dispenser torque converter:
into transmission Pour in approx. 4 liters.
If the torque converter has not been
emptied:
Pour in approx. 2 liters.

ca
*BF27.00-P-1001-
01C

rd
Correct

ia
transmission fluid
level

gn
8 Shift through "P-R-
N-D" several times

.c
with the vehicle

om
stationary and the
engine idling
9 Allow engine to idle
in selector lever
position "P"
10 Call up the Because the overflow tube (1) within
transmission fluid the oil pan is designed for operation at the
temperature using specified fluid temperature, this
STAR DIAGNOSIS temperature should never exceed the level
indicated.
Connect STAR AD00.00-P-2000-
DIAGNOSIS and 04A
read out fault
memory
On transmissions with chamfered
transmission oil pan and white overflow
pipe, the transmission oil temperature
must be 40°C.
On transmissions without chamfered
transmission oil pan and with white
 overflow pipe, the transmission oil
temperature must be 30°C.
11 Remove the adapter
(2)
12 Allow the excess It is essential that the engine be
fluid (arrow a) for the running at idle speed, and that the
indicated fluid temperature of the transmission fluid not
temperature to drain, exceed the specified level. If the
continuing until only operation is carried out with the fluid at a
a small flow (arrow higher temperature, too much fluid will
B) emerges be drained.
For transmissions with chamfered
transmission oil pan and white overflow
pipe the transmission oil temperature
must be 40°C.
For transmissions with chamfered
transmission oil pan and black overflow
pipe the transmission oil temperature
must be 30°C.

ca
13 Replace sealing ring *BA27.10-P-1001-

rd
and screw in oil drain 03A
screw (3)

ia
14 Turn off engine

gn
15 Lower vehicle

.c
om
OIL PAN, AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Number Designation Transmission 722.9
BA27.10-P-1001-03A Drain plug on Nm 22
transmission oil pan

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Number Designation Transmission 722.9 Transmission
except 722.901 with
722.960/961/962 /963/964, code A25
except 722.901 with code
A25
Initial charge
BF27.00-P- Filling Initial charge Liters 9 6.7
1001-01C capacity during oil Liters - -
change
Specifications Sheet BB00.40-P-0236-12A BB00.40-P-
for Operating 0236-12A
Fluids Sheet - -

REMOVE/INSTALL OIL PUMP - AR27.10-P-0400A

TRANSMISSION 722.6

ca
Fig. 10: Identifying Oil Pump Components

rd
Remove/Install

ia
1 Remove transmission with Model 129, 140, 170, AR27.10-P-0500B

gn
torque converter 202, 208, 210
Model 163 AR27.10-P-0500GH

.c
Model 203 without AR27.10-P-0500P

om
4MATIC, 209
Model 203 with 4MATIC AR27.10-P-0500PW
Model 211 with 4MATIC AR27.10-P-0500TW
Model 215, 220 without AR27.10-P-0500I
4MATIC
Model 220 with 4MATIC AR27.10-P-0500IW
2 Put transmission down on
workbench
3 Take transmission housing Internal Torx drive
(1) off torque converter bolts (2a) 15 bolts and
housing (2) internal Torx drive bolts
(1a) 2 bolts.
Installation: The
intermediate panel (6)on
the torque converter
housing (2) can usually be
used several times. The
panel must not be coated
with sealant.
Bolt, transmission *BA27.40-P-1002-01A
 housing to converter
housing
4 Pull torque converter Ensure that the multi-
housing (2) off disk clutch K1 (3) does
transmission housing (1) not fall out.
5 Unscrew internal Torx Bolt, oil pump with *BA27.40-P-1003-01A
drive bolts (4a) of oil multi-disk brake B1 to
pump (4) converter housing
6 Screw two opposed bolts
(a) into the oil pump
housing (4) and press the
oil pump (4) out of the
converter housing (2) by
applying light blows with a
plastic hammer.
Inspect
7 Check oil pump (4) According to AR27.50-P-0720-01A
condition: ?
Dismantle and assemble

ca
oil pump

rd
8 Check teflon rings (5a) of Installation: Insert
multi-disk brake B1 (5),

ia
both teflon rings (5a) into
replace if necessary groove with grease so that

gn
the joint stays together.

.c
9 Install in the reverse order

om
HOUSING
Number Designation Transmission
Transmission 722.6 except 722.660/661/66
722.660/661/662 /663/666/674 2/663/666/674
BA27.40-P- Bolt, transmission Nm 20 20
1002-01A housing to torque
converter housing
BA27.40-P- Bolt, oil pump Nm 20 20
1003-01A with multi-disk
brake B1 to torque
converter housing

REMOVE/INSTALL TRANSMISSION WITH TORQUE CONVERTER - AR27.10-P-0500

Remove/install transmission with torque converter - AR27.10-P-0500I

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 215

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 220 (except 220.083 /084 /087 /183 /184 /187)
 ca
Fig. 11: Identifying Transmission With Torque Converter Remove/Install Components - Transmission

rd
722.6 In Model 215 & Transmission 722.6 In Model 220 (Except 220.083 /084 /087 /183 /184 /187)

ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 12: Identifying Active Body Control Hydraulic Line, Torque Converter And Bolts
Fig. 13: Identifying Retaining Clamp And Drain Hose

MODIFICATION NOTES
13.1.06 Oil drain screw to torque converter Transmission 722.6 *BA27.20-P-1001-01C
Bolt, torque converter to drive plate Transmission 722.6 *BA27.20-P-1002-01C

Remove/install
AH00.00-
Notes on self-locking nuts and
N-0001-
bolts
01A
Before starting the work the area
around the oil cooling lines (49)
must be thoroughly cleaned in
the area around the separation
points on the transmission. Even
the smallest dirt particles,
introduced into the hydraulic
components, can lead to

ca
malfunctions and a total failure

rd
of the transmission
Move selector lever to position

ia
1
"D".

gn
With TELE AID emergency call system, code 347
or code 855

.c
AR82.95-
Switch TELE AID to Service
2.1 As a result the additional battery is not

om
P-0005-
mode
discharged and no emergency call signal is 03AM
transmitted, see operator's manual.
AH82.95-
Notes regarding the Tele-Aid
P-0001-
emergency call system
01AM
Risk of explosion caused by
oxyhydrogen gas. Risk of
poisoning and caustic burns
No fire, sparks, open flames or smoking. Wear
caused by swallowing battery AS54.10-
acid-resistant gloves,
acid. Risk of injury with caustic Z-0001-
clothing and goggles. Only pour battery acid into
burns to eyes and skin from 01A
suitable and appropriately marked containers.
battery electrolyte or from
handling damaged lead-acid
batteries
Insulate ground line as a protection against
Disconnect ground cable of AR54.10-
3 unintentional contact of detached ground line with
battery P-0003I
ground point of battery.
AH54.10-
Notes on battery P-0001-
01A
 Risk of death caused by vehicle Align vehicle between columns of vehicle lift and AS00.00-
slipping or toppling off of the position four support plates at vehicle lift support Z-0010-
lifting platform. points specified by vehicle manufacturer. 01A
Raise vehicle with lifting
4
platform
Remove lower engine AR61.20-
5.1 Vehicles with gasoline engine
compartment paneling P-1105M
Remove bottom sections of AR94.30-
5.2 Vehicles with diesel engines
soundproofing capsule P-5300M
AR27.10-
Only detach oil filler pipe (61)
6.1 Except model 220.028/ 128/ 176 P-0500-
from the engine
04A
6.2 Remove oil filler pipe (61) Model 220.176
AR27.10-
Model 220.028/ 128
P-7010M
Unscrew oil drain screw (4) If the transmission fluid is burnt or contains
7 from the transmission oil pan wear particles, the oil cooler lines (49) and the oil
and drain transmission oil cooler must be flushed out: ?
Flush oil cooler and oil cooling lines

ca
AR27.55-
Installation: Replace sealing ring. P-0001A

rd
*BA27.10-

ia
P-1001-

gn
03A
Vehicles with oil drain screw (9) on torque

.c
converter (82)

om
If the transmission oil pan contains metal
shavings, drain the transmission fluid from the
Remove oil drain screw (9) from torque converter (82) via the drain hole through a
8.1 torque converter (82) and drain clean cloth.
If there are metal shavings in the cloth after
transmission oil
draining the transmission fluid, the torque
converter (82) must be replaced.
In cases of doubt only flush the torque converter
(82) with automatic transmission fluid. Metal
shavings lead to transmission damage.
*BA27.20-
P-1001-
01C
BT27.20-
Oil drain screw at torque
Transmission 722.6 P-0001-
converter no longer required
01A
Remove shield (62) and AR27.10-
9 disconnect electrical connector P-0500-
(26) 01A
Remove complete exhaust AR49.10-
10.1 Engine 628
system P-7000MB
 AR49.10-
10.2 Remove catalytic converters Engine 275
P-5500M
Remove complete exhaust AR49.10-
10.3 Engine 137
system P-7000L
Unscrew bolts (95) from torque
converter (82) on driven plate
11.1 Model 220.074/ 174
and detach cover from torque
converter (82)
*BA27.20-
P-1002-
01C
Remove cover (81) and unscrew
11.2 bolts (95) from torque converter Except model 220.074 /174
(82) at driven plate
Model 220.028/ 128/ 176: AR01.00-
Crank the engine at the torque converter (82). P-0100M
*BA27.20-
P-1002-
01C

ca
12 Detach oil cooling lines (49) Seal connections with plugs.

rd
ia
Installation: Replace sealing rings. Fig. 14
TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 220

gn
Banjo bolt or union nut, oil cooler line to *BA27.55-

.c
torque converter and transmission housing P-1002-
Transmission 722.6 in model 215

om
01A
*BA27.55-
Banjo bolt or union nut, oil cooler line to P-1002-
torque converter and transmission housing 01B
Remove retaining clamps of oil
13.1 cooling lines (49) from engine Model 220.028/ 128
oil pan
*BA27.55-
P-1004-
01A
Remove securing clip and
AR27.60-
14 unhook shift rod (63) from range
P-0990I
selector lever (33)
15 Remove exhaust bracket (64).
Support transmission using
16 transmission lift and
transmission plate
Transmission platform, see GOTIS
[Link]
Remove rear engine
 crossmember (65) with engine
17 Model 215.373/ 375
mount
Except model 220.028/ 128/ 176, model 215.373/ AR22.10-
375 P-1160AB
AR22.10-
Model 220.028 /128 /176
P-1170M
18.1 Remove flexible coupling Model 220.028 /128 /176
*BA41.10-
P-1001-
01A
Except model 220.028/ 128/ 176
The flexible coupling remains on the front
Disconnect front driveshaft
18.2 propeller shaft (66).
section (66) from transmission
Installation: Mount front propeller shaft (66)
on output flange of transmission:
AR41.10-
Model 215 except model 215.373 /374 P-0050-
07N

ca
AR41.10-
Models 215.373/ 374, 220
P-0050-07I

rd
*BA41.10-

ia
P-1001-
01A

gn
Loosen fitting sleeves of flexible
AR41.10-
19.1 coupling and slide back front If the fitted sleeves are jammed: ?

.c
P-0050-09I
propeller shaft (66).

om
WF58.50-
Prepare drift for loosening fitted sleeves in
P-4110-
flexible couplings.
01A
Except model 220.028/ 074/ 128/ 174 Vehicles
Unscrew bolts (10) on hydraulic with Active Body Control code 487: In order to
20.1
line of Active Body Control (12) guarantee access to the bolt (11) connecting the
automatic transmission to the crankcase.
Detach retaining clamp (50) of Model 220.028/ 128 with Active Body Control
21.1
high-pressure line code 487
Model 220.028/ 128 with Active Body Control
22.1 Remove screw (51)
code 487
Unhook drain hoses (52) from
23.1 the brackets on the transmission Model 220.028/ 128
and set aside
Secure torque converter to prevent it from
Detach transmission from
falling out.
24 crankcase and remove
downwards at an angle Installation: Align bolt holes in the torque
converter with the holes in the driven plate.

*BA27.40-
 P-1001-
Bolt, automatic transmission to crankcase 01B
*BA27.40-
Bolt, automatic transmission to engine oil pan P-1002-
01B
If necessary AR27.20-
Remove torque converter using
25.1 Installation: Grease crankshaft journals at the P-0500-
grab handles
torque converter lightly. 01B
*BR00.45-
Multi-purpose paste Z-1009-
06A
*BE27.20-
Installed height of torque converter P-1001-
01B
Fig. 15
26 Install in the reverse order
Deactivate service mode in AR82.95-
With TELE AID emergency call system, code 347
27.1 TELE AID emergency call P-0005-
or code 855
system

ca
03AM
Check oil level in transmission AR27.00-
28

rd
and correct if necessary P-0101A

ia
AR00.19-
29 Perform basic programming

gn
P-0200M
Read out fault memory with

.c
30 STAR DIAGNOSIS and erase if
necessary

om
A transmission adaptation must be carried out
31.1 Perform transmission adaptation
after replacing or repairing the transmission.
Risk of accident caused by
vehicle starting off by itself
when engine is running. Risk of Secure vehicle to prevent it from moving by itself. AS00.00-
injury caused by contusions and Wear closed and snug-fitting work clothes. Z-0005-
burns during starting procedure Do not touch hot or rotating parts. 01A
or when working near the engine
as it is running
Perform engine test run and
32 check transmission for leaks and
that it is functioning correctly

TORQUE CONVERTER TEST VALUES

Number Designation Transmission
722.600/601/602/603/604/605/608/611/614/616/619/626/629/634/637/640/
BE27.20- Installed Distance
P-1001- height of from mm 7 (-2)
01B torque transmission
 converter housing

TORQUE CONVERTER TEST VALUES

Number Designation Transmission Transmission
722.635/639/644 722.649
BE27.20-P- Installed height of Distance from
mm 21 (-2) 20 (-2)
1001-01B torque converter transmission housing

OIL PAN, AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

Number Designation Transmission 722.6 except Transmission Transmission
722.628/648/649 722.649 722.628
BA27.10-P- Oil drain screw
Nm 20 22 20
1001-03A to oil pan

TORQUE CONVERTER
Number Designation Transmission 722.6 except
722.648
BA27.20-P- Oil drain screw to torque M8 Nm 10

ca
1001-01C converter M10 Nm 15

rd
Straight threaded
Nm 42
connection

ia
BA27.20-P- Bolt, torque converter to Stage 1 Nm 4

gn
1002-01C drive plate Stage 2 Nm 30
Helical cut

.c
Angle
Stage 3 90
°

om
HOUSING
Number Designation Transmission 722.6 in Transmission 722.6 in
model 215 model 220
BA27.40-P- Bolt, automatic transmission to
Nm 40 40
1001-01B crankcase
BA27.40-P- Bolt, automatic transmission to
Nm 40 40
1002-01B engine oil pan

TRANSMISSION OIL COOLING

Number Designation Transmission 722.6 in
model 220
Stage
Nm 5
BA27.55-P- Banjo bolt or union nut, oil cooler line to torque 1
1002-01A converter and transmission housing Stage Angle
95
2 °
BA27.55-P-
Bolt, oil cooler line retaining clamp to oil pan Nm 8
1004-01A
 TRANSMISSION OIL COOLING
Number Designation Transmission Transmission Transmission
722.626/628 722.633/636/643 722.649 except in
model 230.477
Banjo bolt, Stage
Nm 5 5 5
BA27.55-P- transmission oil line 1
1002-01B to transmission Stage Angle
housing 90 90 95
2 °

PROPELLER SHAFT
Number Designation Model Model
215 220
BA41.10-P-1001- Self-locking nut, flexible coupling to transmission or M10 Nm - -
01A front propeller shaft M12 Nm 60 60

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
Fig. 14: Identifying Set Of Stop Plugs (129 589 00 91 00)

om
Fig. 15: Identifying Grab Handle (168 589 00 62 00)

REPAIR MATERIALS
Number Designation Order number
BR00.45-Z-1009-06A Multi-purpose paste A 000 989 80 51 10

Disconnecting and connecting plug connector - AR27.10-P-0500-01A

HOUSING
Number Designation Transmission 722.6 except
722.660/661/662/663/666/674
BA27.40-P-1014- Bolt, heat shield to
Nm 6
01A transmission housing

1. Unscrew bolt (62a) .

2. Undo bolt (62b)
3. Remove heat shield (62)

Heat shield (62) not installed on model 463.

ca
rd
Fig. 16: Identifying Heat Shield And Bolts

ia
4. Turn bayonet fitting of pilot bushing (21) 90° to the left and detach electrical connector (26).

gn
.c
Replace O-ring of electrical connector (26).

om
5. Install in the reverse order.

Fig. 17: Identifying Pilot Bushing And Electrical Connector

Remove/install oil filler pipe - AR27.10-P-0500-04A

1. Unscrew bolts (62, 63, 64)

2. Release wiring harness from oil filler pipe (61)
3. Use a suitable tool to lever the oil filler tube (61) out of the housing bore of the transmission housing.
 Installation: Replace O-ring on oil filler pipe (61).

Fig. 18: Identifying Oil Filler Pipe And Bolts

4.
1. Remove exhaust gas recirculation pipe (51) on exhaust manifold.

Engine 606.964.

ca
The exhaust gas recirculation pipe (51) need only be removed in a case of total removal. The oil

rd
filler tube (61) is only swung to one side for work such as transmission removal.

ia
gn
2. Remove transverse exhaust pipe.

.c
Engines 112, 113 except engine 113.993.

om
5. Install in the reverse order.

Fig. 19: Identifying Exhaust Gas Recirculation Pipe And Oil Filler Tube
Remove/install transmission with torque converter - AR27.10-P-0500IA

TRANSMISSION 722.901 in MODEL 215.375, 220.070 /075 /170 /175

ca
rd
ia
gn
Fig. 20: Identifying Transmission With Torque Converter Remove/Install Components

.c
om
MODIFICATION NOTES
*BA27.55-P-
12.4.06 Bolt, oil cooler line to engine oil pan
1003-01D
Model 722.9 transmissions, with
7.6.06 Installed height of torque converter
exception of model 722.906
Measurement for determining installed AR27.20-P-
13.6.06 Step 22
height of torque converter changed 0500-01W

Remove/install
AH00.00-N-
Notes on self-locking nuts and bolts
0001-01A
Before starting work the area around the
oil cooler lines (7) must be thoroughly
cleaned in the area around the separation
points. Even the smallest dirt particles,
introduced into the hydraulic components,
can lead to malfunctions and a total failure
of the transmission
1 Move selector lever into position "N"
 With TELE AID emergency call
system, code 347 or code 855
As a result the additional battery is AR82.95-P-
2 Switch TELE AID to Service mode
not discharged and no emergency call 0005-03AM
signal is transmitted, see operator's
manual.
Notes on TELE AID emergency call AH82.95-P-
system 0001-01AM
Vehicles with Keyless Go code 889:
Press the Keyless-Go start and stop
Switch ignition off, remove ignition key button repeatedly until the ignition is
3 switched off. Remove the Keyless Go
(transmitter key).
transmitter card or transmitter key from
the vehicle and store beyond the reach
of the transmitter (min. 2 m).
AR88.40-P-
4 Open engine hood
1000M
AR54.10-P-
5 Disconnect ground cable of battery
0003I

ca
AH54.10-P-
Notes on battery

rd
0001-01A
6 Raise vehicle with lifting platform

ia
Remove bottom engine compartment AR61.20-P-

gn
7
paneling 1105M
Detach shield (1) and separate electrical

.c
*BA27.40-P-
8
connector (2) 1014-01A

om
Remove right O2 sensor downstream of
AR14.00-P-
9 CAT (G3/6) and left O2 sensor
5303AA
downstream of CAT (G3/5)
If bolts are sluggish or thread is
Detach catalytic converter (3) on the left
10 damaged:
and right of the exhaust manifolds
?
Replace rivet nuts in the exhaust AR49.10-P-
manifold. 5531-01DA
*BA14.10-P-
1002-01B
Rotate engine at the crankshaft in
the direction of rotation of the engine
Remove cover (4) from the engine oil pan until the bolts (5) are accessible through
11
and unscrew bolts (5) the recess in the engine oil pan. After
unscrewing the bolts (5), press the
torque converter (6) backwards.
*BA27.20-P-
1002-01C
12 Detach oil cooling lines (7) from Seal connections with plugs.
 transmission
Installation: Replace sealing rings.
Fig. 14
*BA27.55-P-
1002-01D
Detach oil cooling lines (7) from engine Do not bend or kink oil cooling
13
and place to one side lines (7).
*BA27.55-P-
1003-01D
AR27.60-P-
14 Detach shift rod (8) at the transmission.
0990I
Check rubber mount of exhaust
15 Remove the exhaust bracket (9) bracket (9) for wear and replace if
necessary.
*BA49.10-P-
1007-01A
*BA49.10-P-
1008-01A

ca
Support k transmission with
transmission jack and transmission

rd
*WE58.40-
16
platform (10) and secure with tensioning Z-1030-11A

ia
strap

gn
*WE58.40-
Z-1018-11A

.c
Installation: Screw bolts of

om
Remove rear engine crossmember (11) rear engine crossmember (11) into
17
together with the rear engine mount underbody by hand to prevent damage
to tapped holes.
Installation: Secure ground strap on
rear engine mount.
*BA22.10-P-
1003-01L
*BA22.10-P-
1006-01L
Detach flexible coupling (12) from
18 transmission and propeller shaft and If the fitted sleeves are jammed: ?
remove
Loosen fitted sleeves of the flexible AR41.10-P-
coupling on the flange. 0050-09I
Fabricate drift for loosening fitting WF58.50-P-
sleeves in flexible coupling (12). 4110-01A
*BA41.10-P-
1001-01A
19
Detach hydraulic line (13) of steering
 from transmission
*BA27.40-P-
20 Detach bracket (14) from transmission
1019-01A
Secure torque converter (6) to
prevent it from falling out.
Detach transmission from crankcase and
21 Installation: Align threaded holes
remove downwards at an angle
of torque converter (6) with the holes in
the driven plate.
*BA27.40-P-
1008-01A
Remove l torque converter (6) with AR27.20-P-
22 If necessary
grab handles 0500-01W
23 Install in the reverse order
When installing new transmission or if AR27.00-P-
24 Fill transmission with gear oil
the transmission oil has been drained. 0270W
Check oil level in transmission and correct AR27.00-P-
25
if necessary 0100W
AR00.19-P-
26 Perform basic programming

ca
0200M
Read out fault memory with STAR

rd
*WH58.30-
27 STAR DIAGNOSIS diagnosis system
DIAGNOSIS and erase if necessary. Z-1048-13A

ia
After replacing or repairing

gn
28 Perform transmission adaptation transmission, perform transmission
adaptation.

.c
Risk of accident caused by vehicle
Secure vehicle to prevent it from

om
starting off by itself when engine is
moving by itself.
running. Risk of injury caused by AS00.00-Z-
Wear closed and snug-fitting work
contusions and burns during starting 0005-01A
clothes.
procedure or when working near the
Do not touch hot or rotating parts.
engine as it is running
Perform engine test run and check
29 transmission for leaks and that it is
functioning correctly

HOUSING
Number Designation Transmission 722.9
M10x40 Nm 38
BA27.40-P-1008-01A Bolt, automatic transmission to engine M10x90 Nm 38
M12 Nm -
BA27.40-P-1014-01A Bolt, heat shield to transmission housing Nm 9
BA27.40-P-1019-01A Bolt, leaf spring to transmission housing Nm 5

EXHAUST MANIFOLD
Number Designation Engine
 113.940/941/942/943/944/945/946/948/960/961/962/963/964/965/966/967/968/969
Flange
BA14.10- connection,
P-1002- exhaust Nm 20
01B manifold/front
exhaust pipes

TORQUE CONVERTER
Number Designation Transmission
722.9
Straight threaded
Nm 42
connection
BA27.20-P-1002- Bolt, torque converter to drive Stage 1 Nm 4
01C plate
Helical cut Stage 2 Nm 30
Stage 3 Angle° 90

TRANSMISSION OIL COOLING

Number Designation Transmission

ca
722.9

rd
Stage
Nm 5
Banjo 1

ia
BA27.55-P-1002- Bolt, transmission oil line to transmission bolt
Stage
01D housing Angle° 90

gn
2
Hex. screw Nm 12

.c
BA27.55-P-1003-

om
Bolt, oil cooler line to engine oil pan Nm 12
01D

EXHAUST SYSTEM
Number Designation Engine 113 in model 215, 220
BA49.10-P-1007-01A Bolt of exhaust bracket to transmission Nm 20
BA49.10-P-1008-01A Self-locking nut to front exhaust pipe Nm 20

ENGINE MOUNTS, ENGINE SUPPORTS

Number Designation Engine 112.922/944/972, Engine 275.950/980
113.941/960, 137.970 in model in model 220
220
BA22.10-P- Bolt, rear engine
Nm 40 40
1003-01L crossmember to body
BA22.10-P- Bolt or nut, rear engine M8 Nm - -
1006-01L mount to transmission M10 Nm 40 40

ENGINE MOUNTS, ENGINE SUPPORTS

Number Designation Engine 113.960 in model
 215
BA22.10-P-1003-
Bolt, rear engine crossmember to body Nm 40
01L
BA22.10-P-1006- Bolt or nut, rear engine mount to M8 Nm -
01L transmission M10 Nm 45

PROPELLER SHAFT
Number Designation Model Model
215 220
BA41.10-P-1001- Self-locking nut of flexible joint to transmission or M10 Nm - -
01A front propeller shaft M12 Nm 60 60

ca
rd
Fig. 21: Identifying Set Of Stop Plugs (129 589 00 91 00)

ia
gn
COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE TOOLS

.c
Number Designation
WH58.30-Z-1048-13A STAR DIAGNOSIS diagnosis 6511 1801 00

om
system, Compact Passenger Car

WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT
WE58.40-Z-1018-11A Transmission platform
WE58.40-Z-1030-11A Transmission jack

Remove/install transmission with torque converter - AR27.10-P-0500IW

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 220.083 /084 /087 /183 /184 /187

Shown on model 220

Fig. 22: Identifying Transmission With Torque Converter Remove/Install Components (Shown On
Model 220)

ca
Shown on model 220 with 4MATIC

rd
ia
gn
.c
Fig. 23: Identifying Transmission With Torque Converter Remove/Install Components (Shown On
om
Model 220 With 4MATIC)

MODIFICATION NOTES
13.1.06 Oil drain screw to torque converter Transmission 722.6 *BA27.20-P-1001-01C
Bolt, torque converter to drive plate Transmission 722.6 *BA27.20-P-1002-01C

Remove/install

AH00.00-
Notes on self-locking nuts and N-0001-
 bolts 01A
Before starting work the area
surrounding the oil cooling lines
in the vicinity of the separation
points on the transmission must
be thoroughly cleaned. Even the
smallest dirt particles, introduced
into the hydraulic components,
can lead to malfunctions and a
total failure of the transmission
Risk of explosion caused by
oxyhydrogen gas. Risk of
poisoning and caustic burns No fire, sparks, open flames or smoking. Wear
AS54.10-
caused by swallowing battery acid-resistant gloves, clothing and glasses. Only
Z-0001-
acid. Risk of injury caused by pour battery acid into suitable and appropriately
01A
burns to skin and eyes from marked containers.
battery acid or when handling
damaged lead-acid batteries
Insulate ground line as a protection
Disconnect ground cable of

ca
AR54.10-
1 against unintentional contact of detached ground P-0003I
battery
line with ground point of battery.

rd
AH54.10-

ia
Notes on battery P-0001-

gn
01A
Remove hot film mass air flow AR07.07-
2

.c
sensor P-1454AA

om
Risk of death caused by vehicle Align vehicle between columns of vehicle lift and AS00.00-
slipping or toppling off of the position four support plates at vehicle lift support Z-0010-
lifting platform. points specified by vehicle manufacturer. 01A
Raise vehicle with lifting
3
platform
Remove lower engine AR61.20-
4
compartment paneling P-1105M
Drain transmission oil at the If the transmission oil is burnt or interspersed
5 transmission oil pan and at the with abrasion, the oil cooler lines and oil cooler
torque converter must be flushed out: ?
AR27.55-
Flush oil cooler lines and oil cooler.
P-0001A
Installation: Replace sealing ring.
*BA27.10-
P-1001-
03A
*BA27.20-
P-1001-
01C
Remove right O2 sensor AR14.00-
6 downstream of CAT (G3/6) P-5303AA
Disconnect connector O2 left
AR14.00-
7 probe upstream of catalytic
P-5303AA
converter
AR27.10-
Disconnect plug on To do this, detach shield (10) over plug and
8 P-0500-
electrohydraulic controller unit unclip line. 01A
*BA27.40-
P-1014-
01A
Detach bracket (11) of connectors
9 O2-oxygen sensor at bottom of
transmission (5)
Installation: Check tapping plates (4) and
10 Remove exhaust bracket (6)
replace if necessary.
Mark front axle gear propeller
11 shaft (3) in relation to transfer
case flange
Detach front axle gear propeller

ca
12 Installation: Observe marking.
shaft (3) from transfer case flange

rd
*BA33.30-

ia
P-1005-
02C

gn
To unhook, press the locking device (14a)
Remove shift rod (14) from

.c
13 upwards until the bolts of the shift rod (14) can be
transmission (5)
moved out

om
Remove bolts (13); to do this, *BA27.20-
14 turn the torque converter into the P-1002-
appropriate position 01C
Detach exhaust shielding plate (1)
15 for front propeller shaft behind
transfer case (16)
Detach front propeller shaft from
16 Flexible disk remains on propeller shaft.
transfer case (16)
Installation: Attach front propeller shaft to AR41.10-
transfer case (16). P-0050-07I
*BA41.10-
P-1001-
01A
Loosen fitted sleeves on flexible AR41.10-
17 If the fitted sleeves are jammed: ?
coupling. P-0050-09I
WF58.50-
Prepare drift for loosening fitted sleeves in
P-4110-
flexible couplings.
01A
18 Detach ground line from transfer
 case (16)
*BA61.10-
Dismount reinforcement bridge
19 P-1002-
(8)
01D
Unhook rear exhaust system (7)
from the rubber mounts, lower
20
slightly and secure to prevent it
from falling down
Support transmission (5) with
Transmission platform, see GOTIS
21 assembly lift and transmission
[Link]
platform
Remove rear engine cross AR22.10-
22 Rear engine mount remains installed.
member (2) P-1160IW
Undo banjo bolt (12) on left oil
23 Seal off line connections using plugs.
cooling line from transmission (5)
Installation: Replace sealing rings.
Fig. 14
Remove banjo bolt (9) from right

ca
24 oil cooling line on transmission Seal off line connections using plugs.
(5)

rd
Installation: Replace sealing rings.

ia
Fig. 14

gn
25 Lower transmission (5) slightly
Remove bolts (5a) from Installation: Pay attention to different

.c
26
transmission (5) brackets.

om
Detach and remove oil filler pipe
(15) on the right of the Installation: Replace oil filler pipe O-ring
27
transmission (5) and on the (15).
cylinder head
Remove automatic transmission
28 (5) diagonally downwards using Secure torque converter to prevent it from
assembly lift falling out.
AR27.20-
Remove l torque converter using
29.1 If necessary P-0500-
grab handles 01B
Installation: Grease crankshaft journals at the
torque converter lightly.
*BE27.20-
Test values for torque converter P-1001-
01B
Fig. 15
*BR00.45-
Multi-purpose paste Z-1009-
06A
30 Install in the reverse order
Check oil level in automatic
AR27.00-
31 transmission (5); correct if
P-0100AC
necessary
AR00.19-
32 Perform basic programming
P-0200M
Read out fault memory with
33 STAR DIAGNOSIS and erase if
necessary
Transmission adaptation must be performed after
34.1 Perform transmission adaptation
the transmission is changed or repaired.
Risk of accident caused by
vehicle starting off by itself when
Secure vehicle to prevent it from moving by
engine is running. Risk of injury AS00.00-
itself.
caused by contusions and burns Z-0005-
Wear closed and snug-fitting work clothes.
during starting procedure or when 01A
Do not touch hot or rotating parts.
working near the engine as it is
running
Carry out engine test run and

ca
35 check transmission (5) for
function and leaks

rd
ia
TORQUE CONVERTER TEST VALUES

gn
Number Designation Transmission

.c
722.606/607/609/610/617/618/623/624/628/630/631/632/633/636/643/645/
Installed Distance

om
BE27.20-
height of from
P-1001- mm 19.5 (-2)
torque transmission
01B
converter housing

OIL PAN, AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

Number Designation Transmission 722.6 except 722.628/648/649
BA27.10-P-1001-03A Oil drain screw to oil pan Nm 20

HOUSING
Number Designation Transmission 722.6 except
722.660/661/662/663/666/674
BA27.40-P-1014- Bolt, heat shield to
Nm 6
01A transmission housing

TORQUE CONVERTER
Number Designation Transmission 722.6 except
722.648
M8 Nm 10
Oil drain screw to torque converter
BA27.20-P-
1001-01C M10 Nm 15
Straight threaded
Nm 42
connection
BA27.20-P- Bolt, torque converter to Stage 1 Nm 4
1002-01C drive plate
Helical cut Stage 2 Nm 30
Stage 3 Angle° 90

PROPELLER SHAFT
Number Designation Model
220
BA41.10-P-1001- Self-locking nut, flexible coupling to transmission or front M10 Nm -
01A propeller shaft M12 Nm 60

FRONT AXLE SHAFT

Number Designation Model
220.08/18
Stage
M8 Nm 15
1

ca
Stage
Angle° 30

rd
BA33.30-P-1005- Bolt of front axle gear propeller shaft to transfer 2
02C case flange

ia
Stage
M10 Nm -
1

gn
Stage
Angle° -

.c
2

om
FRAME FLOOR ASSEMBLY
Number Designation Model 220
BA61.10-P-1002-01D Collar bolt of rear reinforcement bridge to frame floor Nm 23

Fig. 24: Identifying Grab Handle (168 589 00 62 00)

Fig. 25: Identifying Set Of Stop Plugs (129 589 00 91 00)

AUXILIARY REPAIR MATERIALS

Number Designation Order number
BR00.45-Z-1009-06A Multi-purpose paste A 000 989 80 51 10

FASTEN TRANSMISSION ON ASSEMBLY STAND - AR27.10-P-0600

Fasten transmission to assembly stand Support plate for mounting transmission - AR27.10-P-0600-01B

ca
Only for transmission 722.626

rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 26: Identifying Assembly Stand (140 589 34 63 00)

Fig. 27: Identifying Support Plate (140 589 34 63 00)

1. Bolt support plate (071) to assembly stand (070).

2. Insert transmission into support plate (071) and secure with three bolts (arrows).
Fig. 28: Identifying Support Plate & Bolts

ca
rd
ia
gn
Fig. 29: Identifying Transmission & Support Plate

.c
Fasten transmission on assembly stand - AR27.10-P-0600-01W

om
Transmission 722.9

Fig. 30: Identifying Assembly Stand (116 589 06 59 00)

Fig. 31: Identifying Support Plate (140 589 34 63 00)

1. Bolt support plate (H) to assembly stand (B) at threaded holes (B1, B2, B3).
2. Align holes (G1, G2, G3) of torque converter housing (1w) with threaded holes (H1, H2, H3) of support
plate (H).

After positioning, secure the transmission to prevent it from tilting and slipping off.

3. Bolt torque converter housing (1w) to support plate (H) at threaded holes (H1, H2, H3).

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 32: Identifying Transmission Fastened On Assembly Stand

REMOVE/INSTALL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OIL PAN - AR27.10-P-7030W

TRANSMISSION 722.9 /9
 ca
rd
Fig. 33: Identifying Automatic Transmission Oil Pan Remove/Install Components - Transmission 722.9 /9

ia
Illustration shows transmission oil pan without sloped surface and with black overflow tube

gn
MODIFICATION NOTES

.c
3.2.04 Notice on modified Step 1

om
transmission oil pan added

Remove/install
Risk of death caused by Align vehicle between AS00.00-Z-0010-01A
vehicle slipping or columns of vehicle lift and
toppling off of the lifting position four support
platform. plates at vehicle lift
support points specified by
vehicle manufacturer.
General notes Pay attention to
cleanliness during all
operations. No fluffy
cleaning cloths may be
used. Chamois leathers are
the most suitable.
1 Check transmission oil The transmission oil
pan (3) pan (3) and the overflow
pipe (31) have been
redesigned to optimize the
oil feed of the
 transmission. After
removal, replace the old
transmission oil pan (3)
without chamfer with
black overflow pipe (31)
by the transmission oil pan
(3) with chamfer and with
white overflow pipe
(31): ? Transmission
722.901
Redesigned oil pan and BT27.10-P-0006-01W
overflow tube
2 Clean the transmission oil
pan (3) and its
surroundings thoroughly
3 Drain the transmission oil Unscrew drain plug
and collect for and pry overflow pipe (31)
determining the quantity off base (arrow) using
of transmission drift. The remaining

ca
transmission oil drains out
immediately after prying

rd
off.

ia
Installation: Replace

gn
sealing ring.
*BA27.10-P-1001-03A

.c
Fig. 34

om
4 Detach the transmission Installation: The
oil pan (3) from the clamping bodies (3a) are
transmission housing (1) only permissible for the
transmission 722.9 and
must not be mixed up with
other clamping bodies, as
otherwise contact
corrosion occurs. Replace
bolts (3b).
*BA27.10-P-1002-03A
5 Remove overflow pipe Installation: Replace
(31) from the transmission overflow pipe (31) and
oil pan (3) press firmly onto the base
(arrow).
The distance from the
upper edge of the
overflow pipe (31) to the
base of the transmission
oil pan (3) determines the
filling capacity of the
 transmission.
Clean
6 Remove and clean the Check the magnet (32)
magnet (32) from the for damage and replace if
transmission oil pan (3) necessary
7 Remove and clean seal A seal (33) which is
(33) not damaged can be used
again.
8 Clean the transmission oil
pan (3)
9 Replace oil filter (34)
10 Install in the reverse order
11 Fill transmission with Transmission 722.9 AR27.00-P-0270W
transmission fluid (except 722.960/961/962/
963/964)
To prevent damage
to the transmission, it is
essential to observe the

ca
work procedure and
Specifications for

rd
Operating Fluids.

ia
Risk of accident caused Secure vehicle to prevent AS00.00-Z-0005-01A

gn
by vehicle starting off by it from moving by itself.
itself when engine is Wear closed and snug-

.c
running. Risk of injury fitting work clothes.

om
caused by contusions and Do not touch hot or
burns during starting rotating parts.
procedure or when
working near the engine
as it is running
12 Perform engine test run
and check transmission
for leaktightness and
proper operation

OIL PAN, AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

Number Designation Transmission 722.9
BA27.10-P-1001-03A Oil drain screw to Nm 22
transmission oil pan
BA27.10-P-1002-03A Bolt, oil pan to Nm 4
transmission housing Angle ° 180
Fig. 34: Identifying Drift (722 589 03 15 00)

REMOVE/INSTALL ELECTROHYDRAULIC CONTROLLER UNIT (TRANSMISSION

INSTALLED) - AR27.19-P-0200

Remove/install electrohydraulic controller unit (transmission installed) - AR27.19-P-0200A

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 129, 140, 163, 170, 202, 208, 210, 211, 215, 220, 230 (except,
220.874/876)

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 461, 463 (except 461.331, 463.270 /271)

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om

Fig. 35: Identifying Electrohydraulic Controller Unit Components

MODIFICATION NOTES
10.5.05 Carry out transmission Step 15.1
adaptation inserted
 Remove/install
Before starting work, the
area around the
transmission separation
points must be thoroughly
cleaned. Even the smallest
dirt particles, introduced
into the hydraulic
components, can lead to
malfunctions and a total
failure of the transmission
1 Switch ignition off, Vehicles with Keyless Go
remove ignition key code 889: Press the Keyless-
(transmitter key). Go start and stop button
repeatedly until the ignition
is switched off. Remove the
Keyless Go transmitter card
or transmitter key from the
vehicle and store beyond the

ca
reach of the transmitter (min.
2 m).

rd
2.1 Raise vehicle with lifting Models 461,463 AR00.60-P-1000G

ia
platform

gn
2.2 Remove rear part section Model 140 with gasoline
of engine compartment engine: Detach rear section

.c
paneling of the lower engine

om
compartment paneling on the
vehicle underbody and
remove downwards.
Model 170 AR61.20-P-1105A
Model 163.172/174/175 AR61.20-P-1105GH
Model 211 with gasoline AR61.20-P-1105T
engine
Model 215, 220 with AR61.20-P-1105M
gasoline engine
Model 129, 202, 208, 210 AR61.20-P-1105AB
with gasoline engine
Model 230 with gasoline AR61.20-P-1105R
engine
2.3 Remove rear part of Model 140, 163 with diesel
bottom sections of engine: Detach rear section
soundproofing of noise bottom section of
soundproofing on vehicle
underbody and remove
downwards.
Model 202 with diesel AR94.30-P-5300A
 engine
Model 210 with diesel AR94.30-P-5300AB
engine
Model 211 with diesel AR94.30-P-5300T
engine
Model 220 with diesel AR94.30-P-5300M
engine
3 Detach front retaining Model 230
bracket of rear engine
compartment paneling
4.1 Disconnect plug Model 163, 463
connector (26)
4.2 Detach heat shield (62) Except model 163, 463 AR27.10-P-0500-01A
and unplug connector (26) *BA27.40-P-1014-01A
5 Loosen pilot bushing (21), AR27.19-P-0230A
remove from transmission
housing (2) and replace if
necessary

ca
*BA27.19-P-1003-01A
Pilot bushing modified BT27.19-P-0004-01A

rd
6 Drain transmission oil; to Installation: Replace

ia
do this, unscrew oil drain sealing ring.

gn
screw (4) *BA27.10-P-1001-03A
If the transmission oil is

.c
burnt or contains particles,

om
the oil cooling lines and oil
cooler must be flushed:
Except model 461, 463 AR27.55-P-0001A
Models 461,463 AR27.55-P-0001GA
7 Remove transmission oil Installation: Install new
pan (3) gasket
*BA27.10-P-1002-03A
8 Remove magnet (69) from Vehicles as of approx.
transmission oil pan (3) 04/2001
Clean magnet (69).
Magnet (69) in Passenger cars only BT27.40-P-0003-01A
transmission oil pan (3),
added for the first time
9 Remove oil filter (5)
10 Remove bolt (19a) and Pay attention to the
detach electric controller positions of the punched
unit (Y3/6) windows in the pulse rings
through the rpm sensor n3
hole (a) and the rpm sensor
 n2 hole(b).
If plastic part of selector
valve does not engage in
driver of detent plate: ?
Insert selector valve in driver AR27.19-P-0200-01A
of detent plate.
Disassemble/assemble AR27.19-P-0220A
electric controller unit
(Y3/6).
*BA27.19-P-1001-01A
11 Install in the reverse order
12 Add oil to transmission AR27.00-P-0101A
and check oil level
13 Read out fault memory
with STAR DIAGNOSIS
and erase if necessary
14 Perform transmission After replacing or repairing
adaptation transmission, perform

ca
transmission adaptation.
Risk of accident caused Secure vehicle to prevent it AS00.00-Z-0005-01A

rd
by vehicle starting off by from moving by itself.

ia
itself when engine is Wear closed and snug-fitting
running. Risk of injury work clothes.

gn
caused by contusions and Do not touch hot or rotating
burns during starting parts.

.c
procedure or when

om
working near the engine
as it is running
15 Perform engine test run
and check transmission
for leaks and that it is
functioning correctly

OIL PAN, AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

Number Designation Transmission Transmission Transmission
722.6 except 722.628 722.649
722.628/ 648/649
BA27.10-P- Oil drain screw Nm 20 20 22
1001-03A to oil pan
BA27.10-P- Bolt, oil pan to Nm 8 8 8
1002-03A transmission
housing Angle° - - -

ELECTROHYDRAULIC CONTROLLER UNIT

Number Designation Transmission 722.6
BA27.19-P-1001- Bolt, electrohydraulic Stage 1 Nm 8
01A controller unit to Stage 2 Angle° -
transmission housing
BA27.19-P-1003- Bolt, pilot bushing to electrohydraulic Nm 3
01A controller unit

HOUSING
Number Designation Transmission 722.6 except Transmission
722.660/661/662 /663/666/674 722.660/661/66
2/663/666/674
BA27.40-P- Bolt, heat shield to Nm 6 6
1014-01A transmission
housing

Insert selector valve into driver of detent plate - AR27.19-P-0200-01A

1. When inserting electrohydraulic control unit into transmission housing, plastic part of selector valve (10)
must engage in driver of detent plate (11).

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 36: Identifying Plastic Part Of Selector Valve, Driver Of Detent Plate

Remove/install electrohydraulic controller unit (transmission installed) - AR27.19-P-0200W

TRANSMISSION 722.9
 ca
rd
Fig. 37: Identifying Electrohydraulic Controller Unit Remove/Install Components - Transmission 722.9

ia
MODIFICATION NOTES

gn
10.5.05 Carry out transmission Step 10.1
adaptation inserted

.c
om
Remove/install
Risk of death caused by Align vehicle between AS00.00-Z-0010-01A
vehicle slipping or columns of vehicle lift
toppling off of the lifting and position four support
platform. plates at vehicle lift
support points specified
by vehicle manufacturer.
1 Switch off ignition, On vehicles with code
remove ignition key or 889 Keyless-Go: Press the
transmitter key start and stop button
repeatedly until the
ignition is switched off.
Remove the Keyless Go
transmitter card or
transmitter key from the
vehicle and store beyond
the reach of the
transmitter (at least 2 m).
2 Remove oil pan (3) AR27.10-P-7030W
3 Remove oil filter (34)
4 Remove heat shield above
the transmission connector
(4e)
5 Unplug 5-pin connector at Clean the transmission
transmission connector connector (4e) and
(4e) connector on the electric
controller unit (VGS) and
fully integrated
transmission control
controller unit (Y3/8).
6 Unscrew bolts (4s) and Installation: Replace
remove electric controller bolts (4s). Before
unit (VGS) and fully installing the Electric
integrated transmission controller unit (VGS) or
control controller unit fully integrated
(Y3/8) transmission control
controller unit (Y3/8)
plug the supply pipe into
the transmission housing

ca
(1).
When inserting the

rd
electric controller unit

ia
(VGS) or fully integrated
transmission control

gn
controller unit (Y3/8)

.c
insert the selector valve
(4w) into the drive plate

om
of the detent plate (82).
See: ?
Insert selector valve with AR27.19-P-0200-01A
driver into detent plate
*BA27.19-P-1001-01A
7 Install in the reverse order
8 Check oil level and AR27.00-P-0100W
correct if necessary
9 Read out fault memory STAR DIAGNOSIS
and erase Stored faults which can
result from cables being
disconnected or from
simulation during
removal and installation
or test work, have to be
processed and erased in
the fault memories after
completing the work
Connect STAR AD00.00-P-2000-04A
 DIAGNOSIS and read out
fault memory
10 Perform transmission After replacing or
adaptation repairing transmission,
perform transmission
adaptation.
Risk of accident caused Secure vehicle to prevent AS00.00-Z-0005-01A
by vehicle starting off by it from moving by itself.
itself when engine is Wear closed and snug-
running. Risk of injury fitting work clothes.
caused by contusions and Do not touch hot or
burns during starting rotating parts.
procedure or when
working near the engine
as it is running
11 Perform engine test run
and check transmission
for leaktightness and
proper operation

ca
rd
ELECTROHYDRAULIC CONTROLLER UNIT
Number Designation Transmission 722.9

ia
BA27.19-P-1001- Bolt, electrohydraulic Stage 1 Nm 4

gn
01A controller unit to
transmission housing Stage 2 Angle ° 90

.c
om
DISASSEMBLE AND ASSEMBLE ELECTROHYDRAULIC CONTROL UNIT - AR27.19-P-0220A

Transmission 722.6 in MODELS 129, 140, 163, 170, 199, 202, 208, 210, 211, 215, 220, 230, 240

Transmission 722.6 in MODELS 461.302 /332 /342 /345,

463.206 /209 /232 /233 /240 /241 /243 /244 /245 /246 /247 /248 /249 /250 /254 /270 /271 /308 /309 /322 /323 /33

Shown on the electrohydraulic control unit in model 163

Fig. 38: Identifying Shift Plate, Electrical Control Unit & Components

MODIFICATION NOTES

ca
24.9.97 Remove caps Step 1 new
24.9.97 Caps for solenoid valves, Step 1

rd
BT27.19-P-0003-01A
new

ia
gn
Disassemble/assemble
1 Take off caps of solenoid Only on transmission

.c
valves 722.6 as of 1.8.97

om
Caps for solenoid valve, new Transmission 722.6 BT27.19-P-0003-01A
2 Unscrew bolts (17a, 17b) and Installation: Note the
remove leaf springs (17) different lengths of the
bolts (17a, 17b).
*BA27.19-P-1002-01A
3 Use pliers to pull modulating Installation: Check
pressure control solenoid the O-rings on the
valve (Y3/6y1) and shift modulating pressure
pressure control solenoid control solenoid valve
valve (Y3/6y2) out of shift (Y3/6y1) and on the shift
plate (16) pressure control solenoid
valve (Y3/6y2); fit a new
valve if necessary.
Pliers Fig. 39
4 Use pliers to pull 1-2 and 4-5 Installation: Check
shift solenoid valve the O-rings on the 1-2
(Y3/6y3), 3-4 shift solenoid and 4-5 shift solenoid
valve (Y3/6y4) and 2-3 shift valve (Y3/6y3), 3-4 shift
solenoid valve (Y3/6y5) out solenoid valve (Y3/6y4)
 of shift plate (16) and 2-3 shift solenoid
valve (Y3/6y5); fit a new
valve if necessary.
Pliers Fig. 39
5.1 Remove electric control unit Transmission 722.6 up to
(Y3/6) from shift plate (16) end no. 0026194
Installation: Make
sure that the two
centering pins of the
electric control unit
(Y3/6) engage in the shift
plate (16).
5.2 Bend retaining lug on Transmission 722.6 as of
stiffening rib on oil- end no. 0026195
temperature sensor to one
side and remove electric
control unit (Y3/6) from shift
plate (16)
Retaining lug added to 722.6 BT27.19-P-0001-01A

ca
electrohydraulic control unit

rd
6 Disassemble shift plate (16) Only when the shift AR27.35-P-0350A
plate (16) is dirty or

ia
metal shavings are

gn
present in the
transmission oil.

.c
7 Assemble in the reverse

om
order

ELECTROHYDRAULIC CONTROL UNIT

Number Designation Transmission 722.6
BA27.19-P-1002-01A Bolt, solenoid valve to Nm 8
shift plate

Fig. 39: Identifying Pliers (606 589 00 37 00)

REPLACE PILOT BUSHING IN THE ELECTROHYDRAULIC CONTROL UNIT - AR27.19-P-0230A

TRANSMISSIONS 722.6

Fig. 40: Identifying Electrohydraulic Control Unit Components

ca
Remove/Install
In order to prevent damage

rd
to the electric control unit,
the transmission oil

ia
temperature must be < 50 °

gn
C when removing and
installing the pilot bushing

.c
(21).

om
1.1 Switch off ignition, Vehicles without Keyless
remove ignition key from Go
the EIS [EZS] control unit
1.2 Remove Keyless Go Vehicles with Keyless Go
transmitter (ignition key/ Code 889
card) from the vehicle and Switch off engine.
store outside the
transmitter range
2.1 Detach rear section of Vehicles with gasoline
engine compartment engine except model 461
paneling and 463
Model 129,202,208,210 AR61.20-P-1105AB
Model 140
Model Series 163 AR61.20-P-1105GH
Model 170, 202.0 AR61.20-P-1105A
Model 171 AR61.20-P-1105V
Model 199 AR61.20-P-1105SLR
Model 203, 209 AR61.20-P-1105P
Model 211 AR61.20-P-1105T
 Model 215, 220 AR61.20-P-1105M
Model 230 AR61.20-P-1105R
Model 240 AR61.20-P-1105H
2.2 Detach rear section of Vehicles with diesel
bottom sections of engines except model 461
soundproofing and 463
Model Series 163 AR94.30-P-5400GH
Model 202.1 AR94.30-P-5300A
Model 203, 209 AR94.30-P-5300P
Model 211 AR94.30-P-5300T
Model 220 AR94.30-P-5300M
3.1 Disconnect plug connector Model 163, 463
(26)
3.2 Detach heat shield (62) Except model 163, 463 AR27.10-P-0500-01A
and unplug connector (26) *BA27.40-P-1014-01A
4 Unscrew bolt (22) and When pulling out the
remove pilot bushing (21) pilot bushing (21), pay
from the electrohydraulic attention to transmission

ca
control unit (19) oil which runs out.

rd
If there is a green spot
on the pilot bushing (21),

ia
only the sealing rings need

gn
to be replaced and not the
complete pilot bushing.

.c
*BA27.19-P-1003-01A

om
5 Install in the reverse order
6 Pour ATF into automatic Except model 171, 199, AR27.00-P-0101A
transmission and inspect 203, 209, 219,
ATF level 463.270/271
Model 171 AR27.00-P-0101V
Model 199 AR27.00-P-0101SLR
Model 203, 209 AR27.00-P-0101P
Model 219 AR27.00-P-0101TZ
Model 463.270/271 AR27.00-P-0101GX

ELECTROHYDRAULIC CONTROL UNIT

Number Designation Transmission 722.6
BA27.19-P-1003-01A Bolt, pilot bushing to Nm 3
electrohydraulic control
unit

HOUSING
Transmission
Transmission 722.6 except 722.660/661/66
Number Designation 722.660/661/662 /663/666/674 2/663/666/674
BA27.40-P- Bolt, heat shield to Nm 6 6
1014-01A transmission
housing

REMOVE/INSTALL ELECTRONIC TRANSMISSION CONTROL (ETC) CONTROL MODULE -

AR27.19-P-1719I

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 215, 220

Shown on MODEL 220

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 41: Identifying Electronic Transmission Control (ETC) Control Module Remove/Install Components
(Shown On Model 220)

MODIFICATION NOTES
Step
28.4.03 Read out variant coding of ETC control unit (N15/3), replaces "Disconnecting battery"
1.1
Turn key in electronic ignition switch control unit to "0", replaces "Connecting quiescent Step
28.4.03
current retention unit" 1.2

Remove/Install

When installing new ETC control unit

(N15/3)
Read out variant coding of ETC Connect STAR DIAGNOSIS and read
1.1
control unit (N15/3) data of ETC control unit (N15/3) into
STAR DIAGNOSIS.
Installation: Transfer stored data into
 new ETC control unit (N15/3)
*WH58.30-Z-
Diagnosis system STAR DIAGNOSIS
1048-13A
Turn key in electronic ignition
1.2 switch control module in position When reusing ETC control unit (N15/3)
"0"
Vehicles with Keyless-Go Code 889:
press Start/Stop button repeatedly until
ignition is switched off.
Open engine hood and raise to AR88.40-P-
2
vertical position 1000M
Release and remove cover on right
3
fuse box (F1/1)
Unplug electrical connectors (1) Push wiring harnesses hanging over
4
from ETC control unit (N15/3) ETC control unit (N15/3) to one side.
Remove ETC control module
5 (N15/3) upwards out of right fuse
box (F1/1)

ca
6 Install in the reverse order
AR00.19-P-

rd
7 Perform basic programming
0200M

ia
8 Read out DTC memory

gn
COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE TOOLS

.c
Number Designation

om
WH58.30-Z-1048-13A STAR DIAGNOSIS diagnosis system, Compact Passenger Car 6511 1801 00

REMOVE/INSTALL TORQUE CONVERTER - AR27.20-P-0500

Remove/install torque converter - AR27.20-P-0500-01B

TEST VALUES FOR TORQUE CONVERTER

Transmission
722.620/622/ Transmission
Number Designation 625/627 722.621
BE27.20-P- Installed height Distance from mm 26 (-2) 19 (-2)
1001-01B of torque transmission
converter housing

TORQUE CONVERTER TEST VALUES

Number Designation Transmission Transmission
722.600/601/602/603/ 722.606/607/609/610/
604/605/608/611/614/ 617/618/623/624/628/
616/619/626/629/634/ 630/631/632/633/636/
637/640/642/660/661/ 643/645/662/663/664/
 682/683/695/699 665/666/667/668/669/
672/676/680/690/696/
698
BE27.20-P- Installed Distance from mm 7 (-2) 19.5 (-2)
1001-01B height of transmission
torque housing
converter

TORQUE CONVERTER TEST VALUES

Number Designation Transmission Transmission Transmission
722.635/639/ 722.638 722.649
644
BE27.20-P- Installed Distance from mm 21 (-2) 26 (-2) 20 (-2)
1001-01B height of transmission
torque housing
converter

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 42: Identifying Grab Handle (168 589 00 62 00)

Fig. 43: Identifying Hand Pump (210 589 00 71 00)

REPAIR MATERIALS
Number Designation Order number
BR00.45-Z-1009-06A Multi-purpose paste A 000 989 80 51 10

Remove torque converter

1. Position transmission vertically.

 2. Fit grab handles (065) to torque converter.
3. Remove torque converter from transmission housing.

4.1 If there are metal shavings in the transmission oil pan: Drain transmission oil from torque converter
through a clean cloth.

If there are metal chips in the cloth, replace torque converter. In case of doubt flush out the torque
converter with transmission oil.

Remaining metal chips can cause transmission damage!

5.1 If transmission oil is burnt or interspersed with abrasive particles: Flush oil cooler lines and oil cooler.

ca
rd
ia
gn
Fig. 44: Identifying Grab Handles & Torque Converter

.c
om
Install torque converter

6 Grease the crankshaft journals with multi-purpose paste and insert torque converter into transmission
housing.

Do not use force, otherwise the axial stop of the torque converter will be destroyed.

Move torque converter back and forth so that the teeth on the torque converter and the transmission
primary pump engage in one another.

Fig. 45: Identifying Torque Converter And Transmission Housing

Measure installed height of torque converter in transmission housing

7 Measure dimension "A" between transmission housing and torque converter mounting using a depth
gauge.

Torque converter and primary pump will be damaged if torque converter is seated incorrectly in
transmission housing.

Fig. 46: Measuring Between Transmission Housing And Torque Converter Mounting

ca
rd
Remove/install torque converter - AR27.20-P-0500-01W

ia
MODIFICATION NOTES

gn
7.6.06 Installed height of torque Type 722.9 transmissions, *BE27.20-P-1001-01B
converter with exception of

.c
Type 722.906

om
Installed height of torque Transmission 722.906 *BE27.20-P-1001-01B
converter
22.5.06 Measurement for Step 6
determining installed
height of torque converter
changed

TEST VALUES FOR TORQUE CONVERTER

Number Designation Type 722.9 Transmission
transmissions, 722.906
with exception of
Type 722.906
BE27.20-P- Installed height Distance from mm 39.5 (-2) 29.5 (-2)
1001-01B of torque transmission
converter housing
Fig. 47: Identifying Grab Handle (168 589 00 62 00)

ca
Fig. 48: Identifying Parallel Support (126 589 04 31 00)

rd
REPAIR MATERIALS

ia
Number Designation Order number
BR00.45-Z-1009-06A Multi-purpose paste A 000 989 80 51 10

gn
.c
Remove torque converter

om
1. Position transmission vertically.
2. Fit grab handles (065) to torque converter.
3. Remove torque converter from transmission housing.

4.1 If there are metal shavings in the transmission oil pan:

Drain transmission oil from torque converter through a clean cloth.

If there are metal chips in the cloth, replace torque converter.

In case of doubt flush out the torque converter with transmission oil.

Remaining metal chips can cause transmission damage!

4.2 If transmission oil is burnt or interspersed with abrasive particles: Flush oil cooler lines and oil cooler.
 Fig. 49: Identifying Grab Handles On Torque Converter

Install torque converter

5 Grease the crankshaft journals with multi-purpose paste and insert torque converter into transmission
housing.

Do not use force, otherwise the axial stop of the torque converter will be destroyed.

ca
Move torque converter back and forth so that the teeth on the torque converter and the transmission
primary pump engage in one another.

rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 50: Inserting Torque Converter Into Transmission Housing

Measure installed height of torque converter in transmission housing

6 Measure installed height dimension between parallel support (2) and converter mount using depth
gauge.

If the torque converter is seated incorrectly in the transmission housing, the torque converter and
the primary pump can be damaged.

Depth gauge, refer to GOTIS.

[Link]
 Fig. 51: Measuring Installed Height Dimension Between Parallel Support And Converter Mount

DISMANTLE AND ASSEMBLE SHIFT PLATE - AR27.35-P-0350A

ca
TRANSMISSION 722.6

rd
TRANSMISSION 722.610 in MODELS 463.209 /232 /233 /244 /245 /250

ia
gn
TRANSMISSION 722.611 in MODEL 463.308 /330 /331

.c
TRANSMISSION 722.630 in MODEL 463.206 /240 /241 /243 /246 /247 /248 /249 /254

om
TRANSMISSION 722.637 in MODEL 461.302 /331 /332 /342 /345, 463.322 /323

TRANSMISSION 722.638 in MODEL 463.309 /332 /333 722.645 in MODEL 463.270 /271

Location of regulating valve

Fig. 52: Identifying Shift Assembly

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
Fig. 53: Identifying Valve Body, Sealing Plate, Valve Housing
om
Fig. 54: Identifying Dowel Pin, Plastic Valve Body, Central Filter Screen

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 55: Identifying Valve Body, Selector Valve & Components
Fig. 56: Identifying Valve Housing, Shift Pressure Regulating Valve

ca
Disassemble/assemble

rd
1 Remove leaf spring (82)

ia
2 Remove valve body (72) Assembly: Insert

gn
from valve housing (74) locating pin (59) into valve
housing (74) (arrow).

.c
*BA27.35-P-1001-03A

om
Assembly: Observe for
transmission 722.6 as of
end number 0538312:
Strainer for modulating Transmission 722.6 BT27.35-P-0004-01A
pressure and shift pressure
control solenoid valve, new
Assembly: Observe for
transmission 722.6 as of
end number 0485895:
Strainer in inlet to converter Transmission 722.6 BT27.35-P-0005-01A
lock-up control solenoid
valve, new
3 Remove gasket (73) Located in the valve
housing (74) are four
plastic valve balls (75) and
eight steel valve balls (76).
4 Remove side cover from All the valves are only
valve housing (74) and valve to be checked for easy
body (72) movement and swarf in
case of requirement
 *BA27.35-P-1002-03A
Assembly:
The sleeves and pistons of
the components

 regulating valve, "2-

3" overlap with
sleeve and piston
(72.2),
 "3-4" overlap
regulating valve with
sleeve and piston
(72.8)
 and "1-2" and "4-5"
overlap regulating
valve with sleeve
and piston (74.18)
must not be
interchanged as

ca
otherwise
malfunctions will

rd
occur.

ia
gn
The shift valve "multi-

.c
disk brake B2" (74.27) can

om
only be removed and
installed if the valve body
(72) has been removed.
Assembly: Observe for
transmission 722.6 as of
end number 0027083:
Installation of a pressure BT27.35-P-0002-01A
feed valve
5 Wash all parts and blow Ensure that parts are not
them clean using compressed blown away. Only rags
air made of leather should be
used to clean parts.
6 Assemble in reverse order

TIGHTENING TORQUES OF VALVE HOUSING

Number Designation Transmission 722.6
BA27.35-P-1001- Bolt, valve body to M6x30 Nm 8
03A valve housing
BA27.35-P-1002- Bolt, side cover to M4x12 Nm 4
03A valve body and
valve housing

REMOVE/INSTALL RADIAL SHAFT SEALING RING AT OUTPUT FLANGE - AR27.40-P-0205I

Transmission 722.901 in MODEL 215.375, 220.070 /075 /170 /175

ca
rd
Fig. 57: Identifying Three Way Catalytic Converter Bracket, Shift Rod And Flex Disk

ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 58: Identifying Radial Shaft Sealing Ring Remove/Install Components

Removing
Notes on self-locking nuts and AH00.00-N-
bolts 0001-01A
Move selector lever into position
1
"N"
Align vehicle between the columns of the lifting
Risk of death caused by vehicle
platform and position the four support plates at AS00.00-Z-
slipping or toppling off of the
the lifting platform support points specified by 0010-01A
lifting platform.
the vehicle manufacturer.
2 Raise vehicle
Remove rear part section of AR61.20-P-
3
engine compartment paneling 1105M
 Detach catalytic converter
*BA49.10-P-
4 bracket (1) from catalytic
1008-01A
converter
Support transmission with
*WE58.40-
5 transmission jack and Telescoping / transmission jack Z-1030-11A
transmission plate
*WE58.40-
Transmission [Link] car Z-1018-11A
Installation: Fit bolts of rear engine
Remove rear engine crossmember to underbody by hand in order to
6 crossmember (2) together with prevent damage to the tapped holes.
rear engine mount (3) Installation: Secure ground strap on rear
engine mount.
*BA22.10-P-
Bolt, rear engine crossmember to body 1003-01L
Bolt or nut, rear engine mount to *BA22.10-P-
transmission 1006-01L
Detach shift rod (4) from
7
transmission

ca
Detach flexible coupling (5)

rd
from output flange (8), pull off
8 Flexible disk remains on propeller shaft.
backwards and put down on

ia
output flange (8)

gn
If the fitted sleeves are jammed: ?

.c
Slacken flexible coupling fitted sleeves on AR41.10-P-
flange.

om
0050-09I
WF58.50-P-
Drift for loosening fitting sleeves in flex disks.
4110-01A
*BA41.10-P-
1001-01A
9 Lower transmission slightly
Check sealing surface of output flange for AR27.50-P-
10 Remove output flange (8) galling, corrosion and damage, and replace
0620-02W
output flange if necessary.
*BA27.50-P-
1001-01A
Do not damage the seat of the radial
shaft seal in the transmission housing.
Using a wide screwdriver, lever
11 radial shaft sealing ring (9) out Installation: Using drift (09), press new
of the transmission housing (10) radial shaft sealing ring into the transmission
housing until the drift (09) abuts the
transmission housing.
Driver Fig. 59
12 Install in the reverse order
Risk of accident due to vehicle
 starting off when engine is
running. Secure vehicle to prevent it from moving by
Risk of injury caused by itself. AS00.00-Z-
contusions and burns during Wear closed and snug-fitting work clothes. 0005-01A
starting procedure or when Do not grasp hot or rotating parts.
working near the running engine
Check for leaks with engine
13
running

EXHAUST SYSTEM
Number Designation Engine 113 in model 215, 220
BA49.10-P-1008-01A Self-locking nut to front exhaust pipe Nm 20

ENGINE MOUNTS, ENGINE SUPPORTS

Number Designation Engine 112.922/944, Engine 275.950/980
113.941/960, 137.970 in model in model 220
220
BA22.10-P- Bolt, rear engine crossmember
Nm 40 40

ca
1003-01L to body
BA22.10-P- Bolt or nut, rear engine M8 Nm - -

rd
1006-01L mount to transmission M10 Nm 40 40

ia
gn
PROPELLER SHAFT

.c
Number Designation Model Model
215 220

om
BA41.10-P-1001- Self-locking nut of flexible joint to transmission or M10 Nm - -
01A front propeller shaft M12 Nm 60 60

GEAR ASSEMBLY
Number Designation Transmission 722.6 722.9
BA27.50-P-1001-01A Collar nut, output flange to output shaft Nm 200

Fig. 59: Identifying Drift (140 589 12 15 00)

WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT
WE58.40-Z-1018-11A Transmission platform
WE58.40-Z-1030-11A Transmission jack

REMOVE/INSTALL OIL PUMP RADIAL SHAFT SEALING RING - AR27.40-P-0300A

TRANSMISSION 722.6 /9 /9

Torque Converter Developed

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
Fig. 60: Identifying Radial Shaft Sealing Ring, Oil Pump Housing Components

om
Remove
1 Lever radial shaft sealing Do not damage
ring (1) out of oil pump seat of radial shaft sealing
housing (2). ring (1) to prevent oil loss
and therefore damage to
the transmission (3).
Install
2 Install radial shaft sealing Install new radial shaft
ring (1) flush using sealing ring (1).
drift (01). Coat radial shaft
sealing ring (1) between
lips with multi-purpose
paste.
Drift Fig. 61
Multi-purpose paste *BR00.45-Z-1009-06A
Fig. 61: Identifying Drift (722 589 00 15 00)

REPAIR MATERIALS
Number Designation Order number
BR00.45-Z-1009-06A Multi-purpose paste A 000 989 80 51 10

GROOVED BALL BEARING - AR27.50-P-0600

Screw on and secure twelve-point collared nut and secure - AR27.50-P-0600-04B

ca
GEAR SET
Number Designation Transmission 722.6 722.9

rd
BA27.50-P-1001-01A Collared nut, output NM 200

ia
flange to output shaft

gn
.c
Fig. 62: Identifying Wrench Socket (126 589 02 09 00)

1. Block transmission gear assembly by engaging park pawl.

om
2. Push output flange (48) onto the output shaft.

Transmission 722.611: On this model the output flange is not designed as a three-arm flange, the
attachment to the output shaft with the aid of a twelve-point collar nut corresponds to that on the three-
arm flange.

3. Fasten twelve-point collar nut (47) using the socket wrench bit 126 589 02 09 00.
 Replace twelve-point collar nut (47).

4. Secure twelve-point collar nut (47) by hammering the collar into the recess in the output shaft. (Arrow)

Fig. 63: Identifying Twelve-Point Collar Nut, Output Flange

Install grooved ball bearing in rear transmission housing - AR27.50-P-0600-05A

1. Press grooved ball bearing (67) into transmission housing using a suitable drift.

ca
Closed side of plastic cage must face towards park pawl gear.

rd
ia
2. Fit circlip (68) in groove.

gn
3. Use feeler gage to determine play between grooved ball bearing (67) and circlip (68).

.c
No play should exist between circlip (68) and grooved ball bearing (67). If circlip cannot be fitted, a

om
thinner one must be used. If play exists between circlip and grooved ball bearing, a thicker circlip must be
used.

Circlips (68) are available in thicknesses 2.0, 2.1 and 2.2 mm.

Fig. 64: Identifying Grooved Ball Bearing In Rear Transmission Housing

Measure end play between park pawl gear and grooved ball bearing - AR27.50-P-0600-06A

TEST VALUES FOR GEAR SET

Number Designation Transmission 722.6 Transmission 722.9
BE27.50-P-1004- End play between mm 0.3...0.5 0.20...0.40
01A park pawl gear and
grooved ball
bearing

Fig. 65: Identifying Parallel Support (126 589 04 31 00)

Determine measurement "a"

ca
1. Fit parallel support (029) on transmission housing. Using the depth gauge measure from the parallel
support (029) to the park pawl gear (15).

rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 66: Identifying Transmission Housing, Parallel Support & Park Pawl Gear

Determine measurement "b"

2. Using the depth gauge measure from the parallel support (029) to the contact surface of the grooved ball
bearing (67) in the transmission housing.
 Fig. 67: Identifying Parallel Support Transmission Housing, Grooved Ball Bearing

3. Adjust the axial play "E" by means of shim as per the calculation example.

Example calculation:

Dimension "a" 49.9 mm

Dimension "b" 49.0 mm

ca
rd
Difference 0.9 mm

ia
Axial play "E" - 0.4 mm

gn
Shim 0.5 mm

.c
om
4. Install the corresponding shim.

Shims are available in thicknesses of 0.2 to 0.5 mm. The graduation is 0.1 mm.

DETACH/ATTACH TRANSMISSION HOUSING ON TORQUE CONVERTER HOUSING. - AR27.50-

P-0601

Detach/attach transmission housing on torque converter housing. - AR27.50-P-0601A

TRANSMISSION 722.6
 ca
rd
ia
gn
Fig. 68: Identifying Transmission Housing & Torque Converter Housing Components

.c
MODIFICATION NOTES

om
27.7.01 Magnet in oil pan, newly Step 4 and 26 added BT27.40-P-0003-01A
included

Disassemble
1 Fasten transmission on AR27.10-P-0600-01B
assembly stand
Assembly stand Fig. 30
Support plate Fig. 26
Support plate for WF58.50-P-2750-04A
transmission mount
2 Loosen guide bush (21)
and remove from
transmission housing
3 Detach oil pan (3)
4 Remove magnet (69) from Vehicles as of 04/2001. BT27.40-P-0003-01A
oil pan Magnet in oil pan, newly
included
5 Remove oil filter (5)
6 Unscrew Torx socket AR27.19-P-0220A
 bolts (19a) and remove According to
electrohydraulic control condition:
unit (19) Disassemble and assemble
electrohydraulic control
unit
7 Detach output flange (48) Socket wrench bit Fig. 62
Model 463: The output
flange is not designed as a
three-arm flange but as a
cylindrical flange
8 Press out radial seal ring
(20)
9 Remove shim (67a) As of transmission no.
1658778.
10 Remove circlip (68)
11 Remove deep-groove ball AR27.50-P-0601-01A
bearing (67) from Puller Fig. 76
transmission housing Tensioning clamp Fig. 77

ca
12 Remove shim (18)

rd
13 Unscrew Torx socket Torx insert for Torx *WH58.30-Z-1039-06A
bolts (1 a, 2a) from bolts

ia
converter housing and

gn
transmission housing
14 Remove transmission Continued operations

.c
housing (2) from according to findings: ?

om
converter housing (1) Remove/install multi-disc AR27.50-P-0621A
clutch K1, K2 and K3 AR27.50-P-0781A
Remove/install multiple-
disc brake B2, multiple-
disk pack B3 and park
pawl gear
Assemble
15 Using grease, install both
Teflon rings (12a) in the
groove so that the joint
stays together
16 Mount transmission Align discs of
housing (2) on converter multiple-disc brakes B2
housing (1) and B3.
17 Screw in Torx socket *BA27.40-P-1002-01A
bolts (1a, 2a)
18 Measure end play between Only necessary when AR27.50-P-0600-06A
park pawl gear and installing new parts, e.g.
grooved ball bearing gear set, output shaft etc.
 Steel straightedge Fig. 48
*BE27.50-P-1004-01A
19 Install shim (18)
20 Install grooved ball AR27.50-P-0600-05A
bearing in rear
transmission housing
21 Insert shim (67a) As of transmission no.
1658778.
Additional shim between Transmission 722.6 BT27.10-P-0005-01A
grooved ball bearing and
output flange
22 Drive radial seal ring (20) Drift Fig. 59
into transmission housing
23 Install output flange (48) AR27.50-P-0600-04B
Socket wrench bit Fig. 62
*BA27.50-P-1001-01A
24 Install and tighten BA27.19-P-1001-01A
electrohydraulic control

ca
unit (19)
25 Install oil filter (5)

rd
26 Insert magnet (69) in oil Vehicles as of 04/2001. BT27.40-P-0003-01A

ia
pan Clean abrasion

gn
particles from magnet.
Magnet in oil pan, newly

.c
included

om
27 Mount oil pan (3) *BA27.10-P-1002-03A
28 Insert guide bush (21) in
transmission housing and
tighten

TEST VALUES FOR GEAR SET

Number Designation Transmission 722.6
BE27.50-P-1004-01A End play between park mm 0,3-0,5
pawl gear and grooved
ball bearing

HOUSING
Number Designation Transmission 722.6
except 722.660/661/66
2/663/666/674
BA27.40-P-1002-01A Bolt, transmission housing Nm 20
to torque converter
housing
 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OIL PAN
Transmission 722.6
Number Designation except 722.628/ 648/649
BA27.10-P-1002-03A Bolt, oil pan to Nm 8
transmission housing Angle -

GEAR ASSEMBLY
Number Designation Transmission 722.6 722.9
BA27.50-P-1001-01A Collar nut, output flange Nm 200
to output shaft

ELECTROHYDRAULIC CONTROL UNIT

Number Designation Transmission 722.6
BA27.19-P-1001- Bolt, electrohydraulic 1st stage Nm 8
01A control unit to
transmission housing 2nd stage Angle -

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 69: Identifying Assembly Stand (116 589 06 59 00)

Fig. 70: Identifying Drift (140 589 12 15 00)

Fig. 71: Identifying Socket Wrench Bit (126 589 02 09 00)

ca
Fig. 72: Identifying Puller (001 589 50 33 00)

rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 73: Identifying Support Plate (140 589 34 63 00)

Fig. 74: Identifying Collet Chuck (140 589 06 34 00)

Fig. 75: Identifying Parallel Support (126 589 04 31 00)

COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE TOOLS

Number Designation
WH58.30-Z-1039-06A Torx insert for Torx bolts

Remove grooved ball bearing in rear of transmission housing - AR27.50-P-0601-01A

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
Fig. 76: Identifying Puller (001 589 50 33 00)

om
Fig. 77: Identifying Clamping Pliers ((140 589 06 34 00)

1. Screw in clamping pliers in puller and tighten.

2. Position puller above bearing inner race.
3. Turning top part of puller counterclockwise (arrow) tightens clamping pliers (figure A).
4. Use puller to pull grooved ball bearing out of transmission housing (figure B).
 Fig. 78: Turning Top Part Of Puller Counterclockwise

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 79: Pulling Grooved Ball Bearing Out Of Transmission Housing

Detach/attach transmission housing on torque converter housing. - AR27.50-P-0601W

TRANSMISSION 722.9

Transmission removed
 ca
rd
ia
Fig. 80: Identifying Transmission Housing And Torque Converter Housing Components - Transmission
722.9

gn
.c
Disassemble/assemble

om
General information Pay attention to cleanliness
during all operations. No
fluffy cleaning cloths may
be used. Chamois leathers
are the most suitable.
1 Fasten transmission on AR27.10-P-0600-01W
assembly stand
Assembly stand Fig. 30
Support plate Fig. 26
2 Drain transmission oil and AR27.10-P-7030W
detach oil pan (3)
3 Remove oil filter (34) Installation: Replace
sealing ring.
4 Remove electrohydraulic AR27.19-P-0200W
controller unit (4)
5 Detach output flange (20) Installation: Replace the AR27.50-P-0620-02W
collar nut.
Socket Fig. 62
Pin wrench Fig. 84
 Puller Fig. 85
*BA27.50-P-1001-01A
6 Remove radial sealing ring Installation: Use drift.
(1r)
Drift Fig. 59
7 Remove grooved ball AR27.50-P-0601-01A
bearing (1l)
Puller Fig. 76
Clamping pliers Fig. 77
Installation: Check the AR27.50-P-0600-05A
play and insert the circlip.
8 Remove shim between Installation: Measure
grooved ball bearing (1l) and adjust the axial play
and park pawl gear between the park pawl gear
and grooved ball bearing
(1l):?
Measure end play between
park pawl gear and grooved

ca
ball bearing

rd
Transmission 722.9 except AR27.50-P-0600-06A
722.960/961/962/963/964

ia
Parallel support Fig. 48

gn
End play between park pawl *BE27.50-P-1004-01A
gear and grooved ball

.c
bearing

om
9 Detach rear engine mount Installation: Install new
bearing bracket (1h) bolts.
*BA27.40-P-1018-01A
10 Attach support plate (P1) Position the transmission
and valve lifter (H) to pry so that it is vertical with the
off transmission housing torque converter housing
(1) (1w) facing downward.
Support plate Fig. 90
Valve lifter Fig. 91
11 Remove internal Torx bolts Position the
(11w, 12w) transmission so that it is
vertical with the torque
converter housing (1w)
facing downward. The
transmission housing (1)
will otherwise fall down
when the last internal Torx
bolt is removed.
Installation: Replace the
 internal Torx bolts (11w,
12w).
*BA27.40-P-1015-01A
12 Detach transmission Installation:
housing (1) from torque Carefully mount the
converter housing (1w) transmission housing (1).
using lever (H) The disks of the BPC clutch
pack (5) and multidisk
brakes B2 (6) break off
easily.
Installation: The
transmission housing (1)
must lie completely flush
(without gaps) against the
seal (1d) on the torque
converter housing (1w)
(arrow). Never tighten the
transmission housing (1)
against the torque converter

ca
housing (1w) using the
internal Torx bolts (11w,

rd
12w).

ia
The disks of the BPC clutch
pack (5) and multidisk

gn
brakes B2 (6) will otherwise

.c
break off.
Installation: Align the

om
disks in the transmission
housing (1). Push the output
flange (20) onto the output
shaft (24). Quickly turn the
output shaft (24) and
simultaneously lift the
transmission housing (1) so
that the transmission
housing (1) gradually slips
at the seal (1d) of the torque
converter housing (1w).
13 Assemble in the reverse
order

TEST VALUES FOR GEAR SET

Number Designation Transmission 722.9
BE27.50-P-1004-01A End play between park mm 0.20 to 0.40
pawl gear and grooved
ball bearing
 GEAR ASSEMBLY
Number Designation Transmission 722.6 722.9
BA27.50-P-1001-01A Collar nut, output flange Nm 200
to output shaft

HOUSING
Number Designation Transmission 722.9
BA27.40-P-1015- Bolt, transmission Stage 1 Nm 10
01A housing to converter
housing Stage 2 Angle ° 90
BA27.40-P-1018- Bolt, bracket for rear Stage 1 Nm 10
01A engine mount to
transmission Stage 2 Angle ° 90

ca
rd
ia
gn
Fig. 81: Identifying Assembly Stand (116 589 06 59 00)

.c
Fig. 82: Identifying Support Plate (140 589 34 63 00) om

Fig. 83: Identifying Wrench Socket (126 589 02 09 00)

Fig. 84: Identifying Pin Wrench (129 589 01 07 00)

ca
Fig. 85: Identifying Two-Armed Puller (000 589 88 33 00)

rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 86: Identifying Clamping Pliers (140 589 06 34 00)

Fig. 87: Identifying Puller (001 589 50 33 00)

Fig. 88: Identifying Drift (140 589 12 15 00)

ca
Fig. 89: Identifying Parallel Support (126 589 04 31 00)

rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 90: Identifying Support Plate (722 589 00 31 00)

Fig. 91: Identifying Valve Lifter (442 589 00 31 00)

REMOVE/INSTALL MAIN COMPONENTS OF THE TRANSMISSION - AR27.50-P-0610W

TRANSMISSION 722.9
 ca
Fig. 92: Identifying Transmission Remove/Install Main Components - Transmission 722.9

rd
MODIFICATION NOTES

ia
1.7.03 Reference to Step 1
"disassembling

gn
electrohydraulic control

.c
unit" changed to
"removing".

om
Remove/Install
General note Pay attention to
cleanliness during all the
work Fluffy cleaning
cloths must not be used.
Leather cloths are
particularly suitable.
1 Remove electrohydraulic AR27.19-P-0200W
control unit (4)
2 Detach transmission AR27.50-P-0601W
housing (1) from torque
converter housing (1w).
3 Remove housing The housing AR27.50-P-0782W
components (55) components are BR
clutch pack, multi-disk
brake B2 and park pawl
gear.
4 Remove output unit (44) The output unit AR27.50-P-0611W
 consists of multi-disk
clutch K3, rear hollow
shaft, rear planet carrier,
output shaft and rear
internally-geared wheel.
5 Remove drive unit (33) The drive unit consists AR27.50-P-0612W
of drive shaft, multi-disk
clutch K2, front planet
carrier, internal plate
carrier, multi-disk clutch
K1 and multidisk brake
B3.
6 Remove multi-disk brake AR27.50-P-0721W
B1 (16) and oil pump
7 Install in the reverse order

REMOVE/INSTALL K3, REAR HOLLOW SHAFT, REAR PLANET CARRIER AND OUTPUT
SHAFT - AR27.50-P-0611W

ca
TRANSMISSION 722.9

rd
ia
gn
.c
om

Fig. 93: Identifying K3, Rear Hollow Shaft, Rear Planet Carrier And Output Shaft Remove/Install
Components - Transmission 722.9 (1 Of 2)
Fig. 94: Identifying K3, Rear Hollow Shaft, Rear Planet Carrier And Output Shaft Remove/Install
Components - Transmission 722.9 (2 Of 2)

Remove/install
General information Apply oil to the
transmission components
before installation in order
to prevent damage during
the starting phase.

ca
1 Detach transmission AR27.50-P-0601W

rd
housing from torque
converter housing (1w)

ia
2 Detach Torlon rings (2a) Installation: Replace

gn
from output shaft (24) the Torlon rings (2a).

.c
Fig. 95

om
3 Remove circlip (2b), shim Installation: Check the
(2c), axial needle roller axial play between the shim
bearing (2d) and thrust (2c) and circlip (2b):?
plate (2e) from output
shaft (24)
Check/adjust axial play AR27.50-P-0810-01A
between shim and circlip
4 Remove multidisk clutch According to condition: ?
K3 (21)
Disassemble/assemble AR27.51-P-0830W
multidisk clutch K3 (21).
5 Remove rear hollow shaft According to condition: ?
(22) from output shaft
Disassemble/assemble rear AR27.50-P-0851W
hollow shaft (22).
6 Remove output shaft (24)
7 Detach remaining Torlon Installation: Replace
rings from output shaft the Torlon rings.
(24)
Fig. 95
8 Remove circlip and
detach rear ring gear (25)
9 Install in the reverse order

Fig. 95: Identifying Sleeve (722 589 00 14 00)

REMOVING/INSTALLING DRIVE SHAFT WITH K2, FRONT PLANET CARRIER, INTERNAL

PLATE CARRIER WITH K1 AND B3 - AR27.50-P-0612W

TRANSMISSION 722.9

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 96: Identifying Drive Shaft With K2, Front Planet Carrier, Internal Plate Carrier With K1 And B3
Remove/Install Components - Transmission 722.9

Remove/Install
General note Lubricate transmission
components before
installing in order to
prevent damage during
starting phase.
1 Remove output unit Output unit consists of AR27.50-P-0611W
multi-disk clutch K3, rear
hollow shaft, rear planet
carrier, output shaft and
rear ring gear.
2 Remove drive shaft (11) According to findings ?
Disassemble and AR27.51-P-0820W
assemble multi-disk
clutch K2
3 Detach Torlon rings (1a) Installation: Install
from drive shaft (11) new Torlon rings (1a)
Fig. 97
4 Remove cylinder flange
together with front planet
carrier (12)
5 Remove internal plate
carrier (13)
6 Remove multi-disk brake Installation: Align

ca
B3 (15) holes (arrows) of multi-
disk brake B3 (15)

rd
precisely with multi-disk
brake B1 (16)

ia
According to findings ?

gn
B3 Disassemble and AR27.50-P-0890W

.c
assemble multi-disk brake
(15)

om
7 Remove multi-disk clutch According to findings ?
K1 (14)
Disassemble and AR27.51-P-0800W
assemble multi-disk
clutch K1 (14)
8 Install in the reverse order

Fig. 97: Identifying Sleeve (722 589 01 14 00)

OUTPUT FLANGE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION - AR27.50-P-0620-02W

 GEAR ASSEMBLY
Number Designation Transmission 722.6 722.9
BA27.50-P-1001-01A Collar nut, output flange Nm 200
to output shaft

Fig. 98: Identifying Socket Wrench Bit (126 589 02 09 00)

ca
rd
ia
gn
Fig. 99: Identifying Pin Wrench (129 589 01 07 00)

.c
Fig. 100: Identifying Two-Legged Puller (000 589 88 33 00)
om
Remove output flange

1. Counter-hold output flange (1) with pin wrench (07).

2. Unscrew twelve-point nut (2) from output shaft (3) using socket wrench bit (3).
 ca
Fig. 101: Identifying Twelve-Point Nut And Output Shaft

rd
3. Remove output flange (1).

ia
gn
If output flange (1) is firmly attached use two-arm puller (08).

.c
om
Install output flange

4. Push output flange (1) onto output shaft (3).

5. Counterhold output flange (1) using pin wrench (07) and tighten twelve-point nut (2) using socket
wrench bit.
 Fig. 102: Counterholding Output Flange

Replace twelve-point nut (2).

ca
6. Secure twelve-point nut (2) in duplicate; to do this, hammer collar into the two grooves (arrow) of the

rd
output shaft (3) using a drift punch.

ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 103: Identifying Twelve-Point Nut And Output Shaft

REMOVING AND INSTALLING MULTIPLE-DISC CLUTCHES K1, K2 AND K3 - AR27.50-P-0621A

TRANSMISSION 722.6
 ca
Fig. 104: Identifying Output Shaft With Center And Rear Gear Set And Clutch K3 Components

rd
ia
Dismantling

gn
1 Remove transmission AR27.50-P-0601A
housing from converter

.c
housing

om
2 Remove output shaft with According to
center and rear gear set findings ?
and clutch K3 (12) Dismantle and assemble AR27.50-P-0810A
output shaft with center
and rear gear set and K3
Dismantle and assemble AR27.51-P-0830A
clutch K3
3 Remove thrust needle
bearing (13) and thrust
washer (13a)
4 Remove drive shaft with According to
clutch K2 and front gear findings ?
set (58)
Dismantle and assemble AR27.51-P-0825A
drive shaft with clutch
K2 and front gear set
5 Remove clutch K1 (83) According to
findings ?
Remove, install multiple- AR27.50-P-0721A
disc brake B1 and oil
 pump
Dismantle and assemble AR27.51-P-0800B
clutch K1
Assembly
6 Using grease, insert *BR00.45-Z-1007-06A
Teflon rings in the
multiple-disc brake B1 in
the groove so that the joint
remains together
7 Mount clutch K1 (83)
8 Using grease, insert
Teflon rings (58a) in the
groove so that the joint
remains together
9 Install drive shaft with
clutch K2 and front gear
set (58)
10 Install front washer (13a)
and thrust needle bearing

ca
(13)

rd
11 Install output shaft with
center and rear gear set

ia
and clutch K3 (12)

gn
12 Install transmission AR27.50-P-0601A

.c
housing on converter
housing

om
REPAIR MATERIALS
Number Designation Order number
BR00.45-Z-1007-06A Grease A 001 989 37 51

DISMANTLING AND ASSEMBLING OIL PUMP - AR27.50-P-0720-01A

1. Remove pump gears (22 and 23) from pump housing

2. Check radial seal ring (24), replace if necessary
3. Replace O-ring (25)
4. Lubricate pump gears and place in the pump housing. Insert pump gear (22) so that the chamfer (arrow)
points towards the pump housing.

Use ATF oil

 Fig. 105: Identifying Pump Gears From Pump Housing

ca
rd
ia
gn
Fig. 106: Identifying Radial Seal Ring And O-Ring

.c
REMOVE/INSTALL MULTI-DISK BRAKE B1 AND OIL PUMP - AR27.50-P-0721

om
Remove/install multi-disk brake B1 and oil pump - AR27.50-P-0721A

TRANSMISSION 722.6
Fig. 107: Identifying Multi-Disk Brake B1 And Oil Pump Components

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 108: Identifying Oil Pressure For Clutch K1

MODIFICATION NOTES
2.8.00 Figure modified from 8 Value modified in *BA27.40-P-1004-01A
Nm to 10 Nm BA27.40-P-1004-01A for
transmission 722.6

Dismantle
1 Remove multi-disk clutch AR27.50-P-0621A
K1, K2 and K3
2 Unscrew Torx socket Removal: Screw two
bolts (7a) and remove oil opposed bolts into the oil
pump (7) pump housing and press
the oil pump out of the
converter housing by
applying light blows with
a plastic hammer.
According to
findings ?
Dismantle and assemble AR27.50-P-0720-01A
oil pump
3 Unscrew Torx socket Removal: Screw two
bolts (6a) and remove opposed bolts into the
multi-disk brake B1 (6) multi-disk brake B1 and
from converter housing separate from the
converter housing by
applying light blows with
a plastic hammer.
According to

ca
findings ?
Dismantle and assemble AR27.50-P-0870A

rd
multi-disk brake B1

ia
4 Detach intermediate Use a suitable tool for

gn
panel (8) from converter loosening
housing (1) Additional work ?

.c
Remove/install multi-disk AR27.50-P-0781A

om
brake B2, multi-disk pack
B3 and park pawl gear
Assembling
5 Place intermediate panel The intermediate
(8) on converter housing panel can generally be
(1) and align used several times. The
panel must not be coated
with sealant
6 Securely tighten multi- Installed position of
disk brake B1 (6) on multi-disk brake B1 in
converter housing (1) relation to converter
housing is specified by a
plain dowel pin in the
multi-disk brake B1
(arrow).
*BA27.40-P-1004-01A
7 Install oil pump (7) and *BA27.40-P-1003-01A
securely tighten
8 Install multi-disk clutch AR27.50-P-0621A
 K1, K2 and K3

HOUSING
Transmission 722.6
except 722.660/661/66
Number Designation 2/663/666/674
BA27.40-P-1003-01A Bolt, oil pump with Nm 20
multi-disk brake B1 to
torque converter housing
BA27.40-P-1004-01A Bolt, multi-disk brake B1 Nm 10
to converter housing

Remove/install multi-disk brake B1 and oil pump - AR27.50-P-0721W

TRANSMISSION 722.9

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 109: Identifying Multi-Disk Brake B1 And Oil Pump Remove/Install Components - Transmission
722.9 (1 Of 2)
Fig. 110: Identifying Multi-Disk Brake B1 And Oil Pump Remove/Install Components - Transmission
722.9 (2 Of 2)

Removal
General note Lubricate transmission
components before
installing in order to
prevent damage during
starting phase.
1 Remove drive unit Drive unit consists of AR27.50-P-0612W

ca
drive shaft, multi-disk
clutch K2, front planet

rd
carrier, internal plate
carrier, multi-disk clutch

ia
K1 and multi-disk brake

gn
B3

.c
2 Unscrew bolts (17a) and Screw two opposing
remove oil pump (17) bolts into housing (17g)

om
and release oil pump (17)
by tapping softly with a
plastic mallet.
Impellers (17r, 17z) lie
loose in housing (17g)
3 Unscrew bolts (16a) and Release multi-disk
remove multi-disk brake brake (16) by tapping
(16) softly with a plastic
mallet.
According to findings ?
Disassemble and AR27.50-P-0870W
assemble multi-disk brake
(16)
4 Remove gasket (1d)
Install
5 Place gasket (1d) on Generally it is possible
torque converter housing to use gasket (1d) several
(1w) and align times. Gasket (1d) must
not have any scratches
 and must not be coated
with sealing compound.
6 Attach multi-disk brake Installation position is
(16) to torque converter determined by a dowel
housing (1w) pin on multi-disk brake
(16)
*BA27.40-P-1004-01A
7 Attach oil pump (17) Install new radial
sealing ring and O-ring
(17 o)
Fit impeller (17r) such
that chamfer (arrow) faces
housing (17g)
*BA27.40-P-1003-01A
8 Install drive unit AR27.50-P-0612W

HOUSING
Number Designation Transmission 722.9

ca
BA27.40-P-1003-01A Bolt, oil pump with NM 20
multi-disk brake B1 to

rd
torque converter housing

ia
BA27.40-P-1004-01A Bolt, multi-disk brake B1 NM 11

gn
to converter housing

.c
INSERTING AND MEASURING MULTIPLE-DISC PACK B3 - AR27.50-P-0780-11A

om
ADJUSTMENT VALUES OF MULTI-DISK CLUTCH
Transmission
Number Designation 722.6
BE27.50-P-1003- Play in multiple-disc brake B3 mm 1,0...1,4
02B Number of 3 mm -
multiple-discs 4 mm -

Fig. 111: Identifying Transmission Housing (External Plate Carrier/B3)

Place new friction plates in ATF fluid 1 hour before installation.

 1. Assemble lamella for the multi-disk brake B3 in the sequence shown in the picture and insert
individually.
2. Using a feeler gage, measure the clearance "L" at three points between the snap ring (133a) and externally
toothed plate (133c).

For the measuring procedure the snap ring (133a) must abut the upper contact surface of the
groove in the external plate carrier.

3. with snap ring (133a), adjust if necessary.

Snap rings are available in thicknesses of 3.2, 3.5, 3.8, 4.1, 4.4 and 4.7 mm

ca
rd
ia
gn
Fig. 112: Identifying Externally Toothed Plate, Snap Ring

.c
REMOVING AND INSTALLING MULTI-DISK BRAKE B2, DISK PACK B3 AND PARK PAWL

om
GEAR - AR27.50-P-0781A

TRANSMISSION 722.6
 ca
Fig. 113: Identifying Multi-Disk Brake B2, Disk Pack B3 And Park Pawl Gear Components

rd
Disassembling

ia
1 Detach transmission AR27.50-P-0601A
housing from torque Bracket for transmission

gn
WF58.50-P-2750-03A
converter housing housing

.c
This bracket may only

om
be used if the torque
converter housing with
gear sets has been
detached from the
transmission housing.
2 Remove disk pack B3 To facilitate removal of
(133) and disk spring the snap ring (133a),
(133b) by removing snap compress the disk pack B3
ring (133a) in transmission (133).
housing Check disks for
scorch marks and wear.
3 Unscrew torx socket bolts
(11)
4 Remove multi-disk brake The externally toothed AR27.50-P-0880A
B2 (14) from transmission disk carrier for multi-disk
housing brake B2 is also the piston
for multi-disk brake B3
According to findings: ?
Disassembling and
assembling multi-disk
 brake B2.
5 Remove park pawl gear
(15)
Assembling
6 Insert park pawl gear (15)
7 Install multi-disk brake B2
(14) in transmission
housing (2)
8 Screw in torx socket bolts *BA27.40-P-1005-01A
(11)
9 Insert and measure disk Pay attention to AR27.50-P-0780-11A
spring (133b) and disk sequence of disks.
pack B3 (133)
Survey of multiple-disk Transmission 722.6 GF27.51-P-5200A
components, production
details
10 Fit snap ring (133a)
11 Attach transmission AR27.50-P-0601A

ca
housing to torque
converter housing

rd
ia
HOUSING

gn
Number Designation Transmission 722.6
except

.c
722.660/661/66

om
2/663/666/674
BA27.40-P-1005- Bolt, multi-disk 1st stage Nm 16
01A brake B2 to
transmission housing 2nd stage Angle -

REMOVE/INSTALL BPC CLUTCH PACK, MULTI-DISK BRAKE B2 AND PARK PAWL GEAR -
AR27.50-P-0782W

TRANSMISSION 722.9
 ca
Fig. 114: Identifying BPC Clutch Pack, Multi-Disk Brake B2 And Park Pawl Gear Remove/Install
Components - Transmission 722.9

rd
ia
Remove/install

gn
1 Dismount transmission AR27.50-P-0601W
housing from torque

.c
converter housing

om
2 Remove circlip (5s), for The thickness of the
this step press together circlip (5s) determines the
BPC clutch pack (5) clearance.
Installation: Measure AR27.51-P-7229-01W
clearance of BPC multi-
disk brake and adjust.
Clearance of BPC multi- *BE27.50-P-1004-02B
disk brake
3 Remove BPC clutch pack Check multiple-discs for
(5) scorch marks and wear.
Installation: Observe
lamella sequence: ?
Survey of multiple-disc GF27.51-P-5200W
components, production
details
4 Take out disk spring (5t) Installation: Fit in
disk spring (5t) so that the
arch of the inside
circumference points in
direction of the multi-disk
 brake B2 (6).
5 Remove multi-disk brake Installation: The
B2 (6), for this step external plate carrier of the
unscrew screws (6s) multi-disk brake B2 (6) is
simultaneously the piston
of the BPC clutch pack (5)
and must not be tilted.
Before tightening the
screws (6s) press the
external plate carrier from
inside against the park pawl
gear (7).
Installation: Replace
screws (6s).
*BA27.40-P-1005-01A
According to findings: ?
Disassemble/assemble AR27.50-P-0880W
multi-disk brake B2.
6 Measure clearance of

ca
AR27.51-P-7229W
multi-disk brake B2 (6)

rd
and adjust
7 Remove park pawl gear

ia
(7)

gn
8 Install in the reverse order

.c
om
ADJUSTMENT VALUES OF MULTI-DISK CLUTCH
Number Designation Transmission 722.9
BE27.50-P-1004-02B Clearance of BPC mm 1.00...1.40
multidisk brake

HOUSING
Number Designation Transmission 722.9
BA27.40-P-1005- Bolt of multiple-disc 1st stage Nm 10
01A brake B2 to
converter housing 2nd stage Angle ° 90

DISMANTLING AND ASSEMBLING OUTPUT SHAFT WITH CENTER AND REAR GEAR SET -
AR27.50-P-0810A

TRANSMISSION 722.6
 ca
rd
Fig. 115: Identifying Output Shaft With Center And Rear Gear Set Components

ia
Disassembling

gn
1 Detach transmission AR27.50-P-0601A
housing from torque

.c
converter housing

om
2 Remove multi-plate clutch AR27.50-P-0621A
K1, K2 and K3
3 Remove upper two visible
Teflon rings (42b) from
output shaft
4 Remove circlip (42f), shim
(42e), thrust needle
bearing (42d) and thrust
washer (42c) from output
shaft
5 Remove clutch K3 (44) According to
condition: ?
Disassemble clutch K3 AR27.51-P-0830A
and assemble
6 Remove rear tubular shaft According to
(45) from output shaft condition: ?
Dismantle and assemble AR27.50-P-0850A
rear tubular shaft
N Remove rear gear set (43)
 with integrated tubular
shaft of center gear set
from output shaft
Conversion from 18° to Transmission 722.6 BT27.50-P-0012-01A
23° teeth in front and rear
planetary gear set
8 Remove thrust washer
(43a)
9 Remove multi-disk brake AR27.50-P-0721A
B1 and oil pump, install
Assembling
10 Mount thrust washer (43a)
with the collar pointing
towards the planet carrier
11 Mount rear gear set (43)
with integrated tubular
shaft of the center gear set
on output shaft
12 Using grease, install lower

ca
*BR00.45-Z-1007-06A
three Teflon rings (42b) in

rd
the groove so that the joint
stays together

ia
13 Put rear tubular shaft (45) Inspect O-rings on

gn
on output shaft hollow shaft, replace if
necessary.

.c
14 Install clutch K3 (44)

om
15 Mount circlip, shim, thrust
needle bearing and thrust
washer (42c - 42f)
16 Using grease, insert the
upper two Teflon rings
(42b) in the groove so that
the joint remains together
17 Inspect axial play between AR27.50-P-0810-01A
shim (42e) and circlip *BE27.50-P-1005-01A
(42f)
18 Install multiple-disc clutch AR27.50-P-0621A
K1, K2 and K3

MULTI-DISK CLUTCH
Number Designation Transmission 722.6
BE27.50-P-1005-01A Axial play between shim mm 0.15- 0.6
and circlip

REPAIR MATERIALS
Number Designation Order number
BR00.45-Z-1007-06A Grease A 001 989 37 51

Checking and adjusting end play between shim and circlip - AR27.50-P-0810-01A

TEST VALUES FOR GEAR SET

Number Designation Transmission 722.6 Transmission 722.9
BE27.50-P-1005- Axial play between mm 0.15...0.6 0.15...0.60
01A shim and circlip

1. Using a feeler gage, check axial play "S" between shim (42e) and circlip (42f).

Push multi-disk clutch K3 (44) hard by hand in direction of arrow.

2. Remove shim (42e) and measure thickness.

3. Adjust play with shim (42e).

Shims (42e) are available in thicknesses 3.1 to 3.7 mm. They are available in graduations of 0.3 mm.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 116: Identifying Multi-Disk Clutch K3

DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING REAR HOLLOW SHAFT WITH REAR FREEWHEEL -

AR27.50-P-0850A

TRANSMISSION 722.6
Fig. 117: Identifying Rear Hollow Shaft With Rear Freewheel Components

ca
Disassemble/assemble
1 Detach transmission housing

rd
AR27.50-P-0601A
from torque converter

ia
housing

gn
2 Remove multi-disk clutch AR27.50-P-0621A
K1, K2 and K3

.c
3 Remove circlip (45h), shim Installation:

om
(45g), axle needle roller Check that circlip is
bearing (45f) from hollow correctly seated.
shaft (45a). Check O-rings (45b),
replace if necessary.
If using BT27.50-P-
0011-01A, axial needle
roller bearing and shim are
no longer required.
4 Remove rear sun gear (45e) Installation: Install
with internally toothed disk hollow shaft (45a) on
carrier/ K3 and rear freewheel and press in
freewheel (45d). while turning
counterclockwise
Friction bearing in sun gear Transmission 722.6 BT27.50-P-0011-01A
of rear planetary gearset
converted to anti-friction
bearing
5 Remove snap ring (45c) for
freewheel
6 Press freewheel out of sun Installation: The thrust
 gear. plate of the freewheel
(45d) must face the snap
ring (45c).
7 Assemble in reverse order

DISMANTLE AND ASSEMBLE REAR TUBULAR SHAFT - AR27.50-P-0851W

TRANSMISSION 722.9

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 118: Identifying Rear Tubular Shaft Dismantle/Assemble Components - Transmission 722.9

Disassemble/assemble
1 Remove circlip (22c), shim Installation: The
(22b) and axial needle roller needles of the axial
bearing (22a) needle roller bearing
(22a) must point towards
the shim (22b). Check
circlip (22c) for correct
seating.
2 Detach sun gear (22s) from Installation: Replace
hollow shaft (22w) O-rings (22d).
3 Remove bearing (22l)
4 Assemble in reverse order

DISMANTLING AND ASSEMBLING MULTI-DISK BRAKE B1 - AR27.50-P-0870

Dismantling and assembling multi-disk brake B1 - AR27.50-P-0870A

TRANSMISSION 722.6
 ca
Fig. 119: Identifying Multi-Disk Brake B1 Components

rd
ia
MODIFICATION NOTES
25.8.98 New special tool for

gn
AR27.50-P-0870-01A
setting clearance

.c
16.9.02 Multi-disks for B1, K1 Transmission 722.6 as of BT27.50-P-0013-01A

om
and K3 changed 02.09.02, refer to step 10.

Dismantling
1 Remove snap ring (6h)
2 Remove multi-disk pack Check multi-disks
(6g) and spring washer for scorch marks and wear.
(6f) from external plate
carrier
3 Place assembly device Assembly device Fig. 120
(073) on spring washer
(6d) and tension until the
snap ring (6e) is exposed
4 Remove snap ring (6e)
5 Remove piston (6c) from
the external plate carrier
by carefully blowing
compressed air into the
bore (A).
Assemble
6 Install piston (6c) in Inspect molded gasket,
external plate carrier replace if necessary.
Press in the piston with
the assistance of the spring
washer (6d) and the
assembly device (073).
7 Insert spring washer (6d) Insert spring washer
with the curvature towards
the multi-disk pack.
8 Place assembly device Assembly device Fig. 120
(073) on spring washer
(6d) and tension until the
groove of the snap ring is
exposed
9 Insert snap ring (6e) The collar of the
snap ring must point
towards the multi-disk
pack.
After installing, check snap

ca
ring for correct seat

rd
10 Insert spring washer (6f) Observe outer
and multi-disk pack (6g) multi-disk sequence

ia
in the external plate Inserting and measuring

gn
carrier and measure multi-disk pack B1: ?
TRANSMISSION 722.6 up AR27.50-P-0870-01A

.c
to 01.09.02

om
Pressing tool Fig. 122
Clearance of multi-disk *BE27.50-P-1001-02B
brake B1
Transmission 722.6 as of AR27.50-P-0870-01AA
02.09.02
Pressing tool Fig. 122
Clearance of multi-disk *BE27.50-P-1001-02B
brake B1
Thickness of steel multi- Transmission 722.6 BT27.51-P-0002-01A
disks B1, K1 and K2
changed
External plate carrier B1 Transmission 722.6 BT27.50-P-0008-01A
modified
Multi-disks for B1, K1 Transmission 722.6 as of BT27.50-P-0013-01A
and K3 changed 02.09.02
Survey of multi-disk Transmission 722.6 GF27.51-P-5200A
components, production
details
11 Insert snap ring (6h) For additional work, AR27.50-P-0721A
 see: ?
Remove/install multi-disk
brake B1 and oil pump

ADJUSTMENT VALUES OF MULTI-DISK CLUTCH

Number Designation Transmission Transmission
722.6 up to 722.6 as of
01.09.02 with 02.09.02 with
double sided single-sided
multi-disks multi-disks
BE27.50-P- Clearance of Number of 2 mm 2.30...2.70 2.20...2.60
1001-02B multi-disk multi-disks 3 mm 2.70...3.10 2.40...2.80
brake B1 4 mm 3.00...3.40 2.60...3.00

ca
rd
ia
gn
Fig. 120: Identifying Assembly Device (140 589 13 43 00)

.c
Fig. 121: Identifying Pressing Tool (208 589 00 21 00) om
Inserting and measuring multi-disk pack B1 - AR27.50-P-0870-01A

Thickness steel multi- BT27.51-P-0002-01A

disks B1, K1 and K2
changed

MODIFICATION NOTES
25.8.98 New special tool for Point 2 and 3 added
setting clearance
30.3.99 New values for clearance
 of multi-disk brake

ADJUSTMENT VALUES OF MULTI-DISK CLUTCH

Number Designation Transmission
722.6 up to
01.09.02 with
double sided
multi-disks
BE27.50-P-1001- Play in multi- Number of multi- 2 mm 2.30...2.70
02B disk brake B1 disks 3 mm 2.70...3.10
4 mm 3.00...3.40

ca
rd
Fig. 122: Identifying Pressing Tool (208 589 00 21 00)

ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 123: Identifying External Plate Carrier/B1, Spring Washer And Friction Multi-Disks

Soak new friction multi-disks in automatic transmission fluid for 1 hour before installation.

1. Assemble the disks for multi-disk brake B1 in the sequence shown in the diagram and insert one at a time.
2. Place pressing tool (078) on externally toothed plate (70c).
3. Press together multi-disk pack by pressing together pressing tool as far as stop using a lever press (the
marking ring can then still be seen, refer to small arrow ).
4. Using a feeler gage, measure the clearance "L" at three locations between the snap ring (6h) and the
externally toothed plate (70c).
 During the measuring procedure, the snap ring (6h) must touch the upper contact surface of the groove in
the external plate carrier.

5. Adjust clearance if necessary using appropriate snap ring (6h).

Snap rings are available in thicknesses of 2.6, 2.9, 3.2, 3.5, 3.8 and 4.1 mm.

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 124: Identifying Place Pressing Tool (078) On Externally Toothed Plate

Inserting and measuring multiple-disc pack B1 - AR27.50-P-0870-01AA

ADJUSTMENT VALUES OF MULTI-DISK CLUTCH

Number Designation Transmission
722.6 as of
02.09.02 with
single sided
multiple discs
BE27.50-P- Play in multiple- Number of 2 mm 2.20...2.60
1001-02B disc brake B1 multiple discs 3 mm 2.40...2.80
4 mm 2,60...3,00
Fig. 125: Identifying Thrust Device (208 589 00 21 00)

1. Assemble the new disks for the multi-disk brake B1 in the sequence shown and dismantle individually.

Insert the new disks in ATF oil before installation for 1 h.

ca
rd
ia
Fig. 126: Identifying Assembling Sequence Of Disks For Multi-Disk Brake B1

gn
2. Mount pressure device (078) onto end disk (70c).

.c
om
3. Compress the disk pack, to do so press the pressure device (078) together using a lever press up to
stop.

The marking ring (smaller arrow) is then still visible.

4. Use a feeler gauge to measure the clearance (L) at three points between the snap ring (6h) and end disk
(70c).

During the measuring procedure, the snap ring (6h) must lie against the upper contact surface of the
groove in the external plate carrier (6b).

5. Use corresponding snap ring (6h) to adjust clearance (L) if necessary.

The snap rings (6h) are available at sizes 2.6 mm, 2.9 mm, 3.2 mm, 3.5 mm, 3.8 mm and 4.1 mm.
 ca
Fig. 127: Pressing Tool Placed On Externally Toothed Plate

rd
ia
Disassemble/assemble multi-disk brake B1 - AR27.50-P-0870W

gn
TRANSMISSION 722.9

.c
om

Fig. 128: Identifying Multi-Disk Brake B1 Disassemble/Assemble Components - Transmission 722.9 (1 Of

3)

Fig. 129: Identifying Multi-Disk Brake B1 Disassemble/Assemble Components - Transmission 722.9 (2 Of

3)

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 130: Identifying Multi-Disk Brake B1 Disassemble/Assemble Components - Transmission 722.9 (3 Of
3)

Disassemble
1 Remove bearing (16l) Only on transmissions
up to year of construction
12/04 as the bearing on
transmissions as of year of
construction 01/05 is
permanently seated on the
inside diameter of the
Ravigneaux set and was
removed when the
planetary gear set was
removed.
Check the contact
surface and bearing (16l)
for swirl marks. Replace
the bearing (16l) if
 necessary.
2 Remove thrust bearing Check the contact
(161) surface and thrust bearing
(161) for swirl marks.
Replace the thrust bearing
(161) if necessary.
3 Remove bearing (162) Check the contact
surface on the bearing
(162) and sealing rings
(see arrow in picture 1)
for swirl marks and
damage. Replace the
bearing (162) if necessary.
4 Remove circlip (105s)
and end disk (105)
5 Remove disk pack (5) and Check disks for scorch
disk spring (5t) marks and wear.
Replace if necessary.
6 Place multidisk brake in

ca
lever press

rd
7 Place clamping device on Position the clamping
disk spring (16t) device precisely (see

ia
arrow in picture 2) to

gn
enable later removal of
the circlip (16s).

.c
om
Fig. 132
Fig. 131
8 Operate lever press until Stop lever press
circlip (16s) is exposed stoke as soon as
accessibility to groove is
sufficient. Excessive
clamping forces will
damage the plate supports.
9 Remove circlip (16s)
from groove
10 Move back lever press
11 Take clamping device and
multidisk brake out of
lever press
12 Remove circlip (16s)
13 Remove disk spring (16t)
14 Remove piston (16k) Check the vulcanized-
from external plate carrier on seal.
(16a)
Checking
15 Check external plate If an external plate
carrier (16a) carrier (16a) without inner
phase (1a) is fitted (see
picture 3), a circlip (16s)
with the following
replacement part number
must be used when
installing:
220 994 03 40
If an external plate
carrier (16a) with inner
phase (2a) is fitted (see
picture 3), a circlip (16s)
with the following
replacement part number
must be used when
installing:
001 994 18 40
Assemble

ca
16 Install piston (16k)
17 Install disk spring (16t) Insert the disk spring

rd
(16t) in such a way that

ia
the camber of the inner

gn
circumference faces the
piston (16k).

.c
18 Position circlip (16s) Final installation only

om
after actuation of the lever
press.
19 Place multidisk brake in
lever press
20 Place clamping device on Position the clamping
disk spring (16t) device precisely (see
arrow in picture 2) to
enable installation of the
circlip (16s).
Fig. 132
Fig. 131
21 Operate lever press until Stop lever press
groove of circlip (16s) is stoke as soon as
exposed accessibility to groove is
sufficient. Excessive
clamping forces will
damage the plate supports.
22 Install circlip (16s) Observe the
installation position of the
 circlip (16s). If installed
incorrectly, the disk
spring (5t) will jam.
23 Move back lever press
24 Take clamping device and
multidisk brake out of
lever press
25 Install disk spring (5t) and Insert the disk spring
disk pack (5) in external (5t) in such a way that the
plate carrier (16a) camber of the inner
circumference faces the
piston (16k).
Observe disk
sequence:
See Overview of GF27.51-P-5200W
multidisk components, as-
built configuration
26 Install end disk (105) and
circlip (105s)

ca
27 Measure and adjust AR27.51-P-7229W

rd
clearance
28 Install bearing (162)

ia
29 Install thrust bearing

gn
(161)

.c
30 Insert bearing (16l)

om
Fig. 131: Identifying Drift Set (722 589 04 15 00)

Fig. 132: Identifying Clamping Device (722 589 01 31 00)

DISMANTLING AND ASSEMBLING MULTIPLE-DISC BRAKE B2 - AR27.50-P-0880

Dismantling and assembling multiple-disc brake B2 - AR27.50-P-0880A

TRANSMISSION 722.6

ca
rd
ia
Fig. 133: Identifying Outer Multiple-Disc Carrier B2 Or Piston B3 Components (1 Of 2)

gn
.c
om

Fig. 134: Identifying Outer Multiple-Disc Carrier B2 Or Piston B3 Components (2 Of 2)

Fig. 135: Identifying Snap Ring, Assembly Device

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 136: Identifying Piston B2, Piston Guide Ring And Valve

Fig. 137: Identifying Oil Pressure Supply

MODIFICATION NOTES
25.8.98 New special tool for AR27.50-P-0880-02A
clearance adjustment

Dismantling
1 Remove snap ring (134a)
2 Take multiple-disc pack The outer
B2 (134) and disc spring multiple-disc carrier for
(134b) out of outer the multi-disc brake B2 is
multiple-disc carrier B2 the piston for the
multiple-disc brake B3 at
the same time.
Check multiple-discs for
burnt spots and wear.
3 Place assembly device Fig. 120
(074) on disc spring (29)
and tension until the
groove for the snap ring is
exposed (figure C)
4 Remove snap ring (31)

ca
5 Remove spring plate (30)

rd
and disc spring (29)

ia
6 Separate piston guide ring
(28) and piston/ multiple-

gn
disc brake B2 (27) from

.c
piston B3 (14a) by blowing
compressed air into the

om
bore (D) (figure E) .
7 Press piston guide ring
(28) out of piston B2 (27)
Peak-to-valley height on Transmission 722.6 BT27.50-P-0009-01A
piston B2 modified
Piston B2 modified Transmission 722.6 BT27.50-P-0010-01A
8 Separate piston guide (32)
from piston B3 (14a) by
blowing compressed air
into the bore (A) (figure
E) .
Assembling
9 Assemble piston guide AR27.50-P-0880-01A
(32) and piston B3 (14a) in
the correct position
10 Insert piston/multiple-disc Check all sealing rings,
brake B2 (27) in piston B3 replace if necessary.
(14a) The rounded off
edges on the sealing rings
 (14c), (28a) and (28b)
must point outwards The
rounded off edges on the
sealing ring (14d) must
point inwards (figure B)
11 Insert piston guide ring The valve (137) in
(28) the piston guide ring must
be on top (figure D)
12 Insert disc spring (29) and Insert disc spring
spring plate (30) with the curvature
towards the spring plate
13 Place assembly device Fig. 120
(074) on disc spring (29)
and tension until the
groove for the snap ring is
exposed
14 Insert snap ring (31)
15 Insert disc spring (134b) Observe outer AR27.50-P-0880-02A
and multiple-disc pack multiple-disc sequence.

ca
(134) in the outer multiple-

rd
disc carrier B2 and
measure

ia
Survey of multiple-disc Transmission 722.6 GF27.51-P-5200A

gn
pack components, as-built
16 Insert snap ring (134a)

.c
Follow up work ?

om
Remove, install multiple- AR27.50-P-0781A
disc brake B2 and
multiple-disc pack B3

Fig. 138: Identifying Assembly Device (140 589 13 43 00)

Assembling piston guide and outer multiple-disc carrier of multiple-disc brake - AR27.50-P-0880-01A
 ca
Fig. 139: Identifying Piston Guide And Outer Multiple-Disc Carrier Of Multiple-Disc Brake

rd
1. Insert piston guide (32) in transmission housing (2) and tighten securely.

ia
2. Press in outer multiple-disc carrier/B2 (14a) up to the stop in the piston guide (32).

gn
.c
The recess in the external splines or the opening in the outer multiple-disc carrier/B2 (14a) must
point downwards (arrow).

om
3. Remove assembled component from transmission housing again for further assembly work.

Inserting and measuring multiple-disc pack B2 - AR27.50-P-0880-02A

MODIFICATION NOTES
25.8.98 New special tool for Item 2 and 3 incorporated
clearance adjustment for the first time
30.3.99 New adjustment values for
clearance of multi-disk
brake
Fig. 140: Identifying Thrust Device (208 589 00 21 00)

ADJUSTMENT VALUES OF MULTI-DISK CLUTCH

Transmission
Number Designation 722.6
BE27.50-P-1002- Play in multiple- Number of 4 mm 1,90...2,30
02B disc brake B2 multiple-discs 5 mm 2,00...2,40
6 m- -

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 141: Identifying External Plate Carrier/B2, Piston/B2

Place new friction plates in ATF fluid 1 hour before installation.

1. Assemble lamella for the multi-disk brake B2 in the sequence shown in the picture an insert individually.
2. Mount the pressure device (078) on the externally toothed plate (134a).
3. Compress the clutch pack; to do this, compress the pressure device as far as the stop using a lever press
(the marking ring is still visible, see small arrow ).
4. Using a feeler gage, measure the clearance "L" at three points between the snap ring (144a) and externally
toothed plate (134a).

For the measuring procedure the snap ring (144a) must abut the upper contact surface of the
groove in the external plate carrier.

5. with snap ring (144a), adjust if necessary.

Snap rings are available in thicknesses of 2.9, 3.2, 3.5, 3.8 and 4.1 mm
 ca
rd
Fig. 142: Identifying Mount Pressure Device (078) On Externally Toothed Plate

ia
Disassemble/assemble multi-disk brake B2 - AR27.50-P-0880W

gn
TRANSMISSION 722.9

.c
om
 ca
rd
Fig. 143: Identifying Multi-Disk Brake B2 Disassemble/Assemble Components - Transmission 722.9 (1 Of

ia
2)

gn
.c
om

Fig. 144: Identifying Multi-Disk Brake B2 Disassemble/Assemble Components - Transmission 722.9 (2 Of

2)

Disassemble
1 Remove circlip (105s)
 and end disk (105)
2 Remove disk pack (5), Check disks for scorch
externally toothed plate marks and wear.
(105a) and spring washer
(5t)
3 Place assembly device Assembly device Fig. 120
on spring washer (61t)
and tension until the
circlip (61s) is exposed.
4 Remove circlip (61s)
5 Remove assembly
device.
6 Remove spring plate (61f)
and spring washer (61t)
7 Remove guide ring (61r) Blow compressed air
and piston (61k) by in carefully.
blowing compressed air
into bore (B) of piston
guide (61b)

ca
8 Detach piston guide (61b) Blow compressed air

rd
from external plate carrier in carefully.
(61a) by blowing

ia
The external plate
compressed air into bore carrier (61a) is also the

gn
(A) piston for multi-disk

.c
brake B3

om
Assemble
9 Assemble piston guide Install new sealing AR27.50-P-0880-01W
(61b) and external plate rings (161a, 161b, 161i).
carrier (61a) In the case of the sealing
rings (161a, 161b), the
rounded edges must point
outwards.
10 Install piston (61k) Install new sealing
ring (161k).
The rounded off edges
must point outwards.
11 Insert guide ring (61r) Install new sealing
ring (161r)
The rounded off edges
must point outwards.
12 Insert spring washer (61t) Insert spring washer
and spring plate (61f). (61t) with the curvature
towards the spring plate
(61f)
13 Place assembly device Assembly device Fig. 120
 on spring washer (61t)
and tension until the
groove for the circlip
(61s) is exposed.
14 Install circlip (61s)
15 Remove assembly
device.
16 Install spring washer (5t), Insert spring washer
externally toothed plate (5t) such that the inward
(105a) and disk pack (5). curvature is towards the
piston (61k)
Observe disk
sequence: ?
Survey of multi-disk GF27.51-P-5200W
components, production
details
17 Install end disk (105) and
circlip (105s)
18 Measure and adjust

ca
AR27.51-P-7229W
clearance

rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 145: Identifying Assembly Device (140 589 13 43 00)

Assembling piston guide and external plate carrier of multi-disk brake B2 - AR27.50-P-0880-01W

1. Install piston guide (61b) in transmission housing (1) and secure with bolts (6s).

Push piston guide axially into housing to prevent canting while being secured with bolts.

2. Push external plate carrier (61a) into piston guide (61b) as far as it will go.

Recess in gearing and opening in external plate carrier (61a) must face downwards (arrow).

3. Remove preassembled multi-disk brake from transmission housing (1) again B2 to allow further assembly
operations to be performed.
 ca
Fig. 146: Identifying Piston Guide And External Plate Carrier Of Multi-Disk Brake B2

rd
DISASSEMBLE/ASSEMBLE MULTI-DISK BRAKE B3 - AR27.50-P-0890W

ia
gn
TRANSMISSION 722.9

.c
om

Fig. 147: Identifying Multi-Disk Brake B3 Disassemble/Assemble Components - Transmission 722.9 (1 Of

3)
Fig. 148: Identifying Multi-Disk Brake B3 Disassemble/Assemble Components - Transmission 722.9 (2 Of
3)

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 149: Identifying Multi-Disk Brake B3 Disassemble/Assemble Components - Transmission 722.9 (3 Of
3)

Disassemble
1 Remove circlip (105s)
and end disk (105)
2 Remove disk pack (5) and Check disks for scorch
disk spring (5t) marks and wear.
3 Place multidisk brake in
lever press
4 Place clamping device on Position the clamping
disk spring (15t) in device precisely (see
external plate carrier arrow in picture 2) to
(15a) enable later removal of
the circlip (15s).
Fig. 132
Fig. 131
5 Operate lever press until Stop lever press
circlip (15s) is exposed stoke as soon as
accessibility to groove is
sufficient. Excessive
clamping forces will
damage the plate supports.
6 Remove circlip (15s)
from groove
7 Move back lever press
8 Take clamping device and
multidisk brake out of
lever press
9 Remove circlip (15s)
10 Remove disk spring (15t)
11 Remove piston (15k) Check the vulcanized-
from external plate carrier on seal.
(15a)
Checking

ca
12 Check external plate If an external plate
carrier (15a) carrier (15a) without outer

rd
phase (1) is fitted (see

ia
picture 3), a circlip (15s)
with the following

gn
replacement part number

.c
must be used when
installing:

om
220 994 03 40
If an external plate
carrier (15a) with outer
phase (2) is fitted (see
picture 3), a circlip (15s)
with the following
replacement part number
must be used when
installing:
001 994 18 40
Assemble
13 Install piston (15k)
14 Install disk spring (15t) Insert the disk spring
(15t) in such a way that
the camber of the inner
circumference faces the
piston (15k).
15 Position circlip (15s) Final installation only
after actuation of the lever
 press.
16 Place multidisk brake in
lever press
17 Place clamping device on Position the clamping
disk spring (15t) device precisely (see
arrow in picture 2) to
enable installation of the
circlip (15s).
Fig. 132
Fig. 131
18 Operate lever press until Stop lever press
groove of circlip (15s) is stoke as soon as
exposed accessibility to groove is
sufficient. Excessive
clamping forces will
damage the plate supports.
19 Install circlip (15s) Observe the
installation position of the

ca
circlip (15s). If installed
incorrectly, the disk

rd
spring (5t) will jam.

ia
20 Move back lever press

gn
21 Take clamping device and
multidisk brake out of

.c
lever press

om
22 Install disk spring (5t) and Insert the disk spring
disk pack (5) in external (5t) in such a way that the
plate carrier (15a) camber of the inner
circumference faces the
piston (15k).
Observe disk
sequence:
See Overview of GF27.51-P-5200W
multidisk components, as-
built configuration
23 Install end disk (105) and
circlip (105s)
24 Measure and adjust AR27.51-P-7229W
clearance
Fig. 150: Identifying Drift Set (722 589 04 15 00)

ca
Fig. 151: Identifying Clamping Device (722 589 01 31 00)

rd
DISASSEMBLE/ASSEMBLE CLUTCH K1 - AR27.51-P-0800

ia
Disassemble/assemble clutch K1 - AR27.51-P-0800B

gn
TRANSMISSIONS 722.6

.c
om
 ca
rd
Fig. 152: Identifying Clutch K1 Components

ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 153: Identifying Snap Ring, Assembly Tool

MODIFICATION NOTES
25.8.98 New special tool for AR27.51-P-0800-02A
clearance adjustment
16.9.02 Disks for B1, K1 and K3 Transmission 722.6 as BT27.50-P-0013-01A
changed from 02.09.02, see work
step 12.

Disassemble
1 Remove snap ring (90)
from outer multiple-disc
carrier
2 Take multiple-disc pack Check multi-disks
(89) out of outer multiple- for scorch marks and wear.
disc carrier
3 Place assembly device Assembly device Fig. 120
(072) on spring plate (87)
and tension until the snap
ring (88) is exposed
(figure A)
4 Remove snap ring (88)
5 Take out disk spring (86b)
and remove piston (86) by
carefully blowing
compressed air into the
bore (A) (figure B) .
6 Remove snap ring (91) According to condition.
and take out front

ca
freewheel (92).

rd
Assemble
7 Install piston (86) in outer Check sealing rings

ia
multiple-disc carrier (83b and 86a), replace if

gn
necessary.
The rounded off

.c
edges of the sealing rings

om
must face outwards
8 Insert disc spring (86b). Insert disk spring
with the curvature towards
the piston
9 Insert spring plate (87). Insert spring cup
with curvature towards sun
gear.
10 Place assembly device Assembly device Fig. 120
(072) on spring plate (87) Check sealing ring
and tension until the (87a), replace if necessary
groove of the snap ring is
exposed
11 Insert snap ring (88) After installing,
check snap ring for correct
seating
12 Insert multiple-disc pack Observe
(89) in the outer multiple- externally-toothed plate
disc carrier and measure sequence. Insert and
measure disk pack K1: ?
 Transmission 722.6 up to AR27.51-P-0800-02AA
01.09.02
Thrust device Fig. 122
Play in multiple-disc *BE27.51-P-1001-01B
clutch K1
Transmission 722.6 as of AR27.51-P-0800-02A
02.09.02
Thrust device Fig. 122
Play in multiple-disc *BE27.51-P-1001-01B
clutch K1
Strength of steel disks B1, Transmission 722.6 BT27.51-P-0002-01A
K1 and K2 changed
Disks for B1, K1 and K3 Transmission 722.6 as of BT27.50-P-0013-01A
changed 02.09.02
Survey of multi-disk Transmission 722.6 GF27.51-P-5200A
components, production
details
13 Insert snap ring (90)

ca
14 Insert front freewheel (92) The freewheel (92)
and fit snap ring (91) must be installed in

rd
direction of arrow

ia
Continuing operation,

gn
see: ?
Remove/install K1, K2 AR27.50-P-0621A

.c
and K3

om
ADJUSTMENT VALUES OF MULTI-DISK CLUTCH
Number Designation Transmission Transmission
722.6 up to 722.6 as of
01.09.02 with 02.09.02 with
double sided single-sided
multiple-discs multiple-discs
BE27.51-P- Play in Number of 3 mm 2.70...3.10 2.40...2.80
1001-01B multiple-disc multiple-discs 4 mm 3.00...3.40 2.60...3.00
clutch K1 5 mm 3.30...3.70 2.80...3.20
6 mm 3.60...4.00 2.90...3.30
Fig. 154: Identifying Assembly Tool (140 589 13 43 00)

ca
Fig. 155: Identifying Clamping Device (208 589 00 21 00)

rd
Insert and measure multi-disk pack K1 - AR27.51-P-0800-02A

ia
gn
Thickness of steel multi- BT27.51-P-0002-01A
disks B1, K1 and K2

.c
changed

om
MODIFICATION NOTES
25.8.98 New special tool for Point 2 and 3 added
setting clearance
30.3.99 New values for clearance
of multi-disk clutch

ADJUSTMENT VALUES OF MULTI-DISK CLUTCH

Number Designation Transmission
722.6 up to
01.09.02 with
double sided
multi-disks
BE27.51-P-1001- Clearance of Number of 3 mm 2.70...3.10
01B multi-disk clutch multi-disks 4 mm 3.00...3.40
K1 5 mm 3.30...3.70
6 mm 3.60...4.00
Fig. 156: Identifying Pressing Tool (208 589 00 21 00)

ca
Fig. 157: Identifying External Plate Carrier/K1, Spring Washer

rd
ia
gn
Soak new friction multi-disks in automatic transmission fluid for 1 hour before installation.

.c
1. Assemble the disks for multi-disk clutch K1 in the sequence shown in the diagram and insert one at a

om
time.
2. Place pressing tool (078) on externally toothed plate (89c).
3. Press together multi-disk pack by pressing together pressing tool as far as stop using a lever press (the
marking ring can then still be seen, refer to small arrow ).
4. Using a feeler gage, measure the clearance "L" at three locations between the snap ring (90) and the
externally toothed plate (89c).

During the measuring procedure, the snap ring (90) must touch the upper contact surface of the groove in
the external plate carrier.

5. Adjust clearance if necessary using appropriate snap ring (90).

Snap rings are available in thicknesses of 2.6, 2.9, 3.2, 3.5, 3.8 and 4.1 mm.
 ca
rd
Fig. 158: Identifying Place Pressing Tool On Externally Toothed Plate

ia
Insert and measure multi-disk pack K1 - AR27.51-P-0800-02AA

gn
ADJUSTMENT VALUES OF MULTI-DISK CLUTCH

.c
Number Designation Transmission

om
722.6 as of
02.09.02 with
single-sided
multiple-discs
BE27.51-P-1001- Play in multiple- Number of 3 mm 2.40...2.80
01B disc clutch K1 multiple- discs 4 mm 2,60...3,00
5 mm 2.80...3.20
6 mm 2.90...3.30

Fig. 159: Identifying Thrust Device (208 589 00 21 00)

1. Assemble and install the disks for the multi-disk clutch K1 in the sequence shown in the picture
individually.

Insert the new disks in ATF oil before installation for 1 h.

Fig. 160: Identifying External Plate Carrier, Internally Toothed Plate

2. Mount pressure device (078) onto end disk (89c).

ca
3. Compress the disk pack, to do so press the pressure device (078) together using a lever press up to
stop.

rd
ia
The marking ring (smaller arrow) is then still visible.

gn
4. Use a feeler gauge to measure the clearance (L) at three points between the snap ring (90h) and end disk

.c
(89c).

om
During the measuring procedure, the snap ring (90) must lie against the upper contact surface of the
groove in the external plate carrier (83a).

5. Use corresponding snap ring (90h) to adjust clearance (L) if necessary.

The snap rings (90) are available at sizes 2.6 mm, 2.9 mm, 3.2 mm, 3.5 mm, 3.8 mm and 4.1 mm.
 ca
rd
Fig. 161: Identifying Mount Pressure Device Onto End Disk

ia
Dismantling and assembling clutch K1 - AR27.51-P-0800W

gn
TRANSMISSION 722.9

.c
om

Fig. 162: Identifying Clutch K1 Dismantle/Assemble Components - Transmission 722.9 (1 Of 2)

Fig. 163: Identifying Clutch K1 Dismantle/Assemble Components - Transmission 722.9 (2 Of 2)

Dismantle
1 Remove circlip (105s)
and end disk (105)
2 Remove clutch pack (5) Check multiple-discs
and disk spring (5t) for scorch marks and
wear.
3 Place multi-disk clutch in
lever press

ca
4 Mount pressure device on Position pressure
piston cover (14b) device accurately in order

rd
to permit subsequent

ia
removal of the circlip

gn
(14s).
Fig. 122

.c
5 Operate the lever press Stop the lever

om
until the circlip (14s) is press stroke as soon as
free. accessibility is adequate.
Excessive contact forces
lead to damage.
6 Remove circlip (14s)
from the groove
7 Reset lever press
8 Remove pressure device
and multi-disk clutch
from lever press
9 Remove circlip (14s) and
piston cover (14b)
10 Remove spring support
(14f)
11 Remove piston (14k) Check vulcanized
gasket.
Assembling
12 Install piston (14k)
13 Insert spring support (14f)
14 Insert piston cover (14b)
15 Put on circlip (14s) The final installation is
only possible when the
lever press is operated.
16 Place multi-disk clutch in
lever press
17 Mount pressure device on Position pressure
piston cover (14b) device accurately in order
to permit subsequent
removal of the circlip
(14s).
Fig. 122
18 Operate lever press until Stop the lever
the groove (arrow) is free press stroke as soon as
and install circlip (14s) accessibility is adequate.
Excessive contact forces
lead to damage.
Check installation
position of circlip (14s).

ca
19 Reset lever press

rd
20 Remove pressure device

ia
and multi-disk clutch
from lever press

gn
21 Install disk spring (5t) Insert disk spring (5t)

.c
and clutch pack (5) in so that the curvature of

om
external plate carrier the inner circumference
(14a) points towards the piston
(14k).
Observe lamella-
sequence: ?
Survey of multiple-disc GF27.51-P-5200W
components
22 Install end disk (105) and
circlip (105s)
23 Measure and adjust AR27.51-P-7229W
clearance
Fig. 164: Identifying Thrust Device (208 589 00 21 00)

DISASSEMBLE/ASSEMBLE K2 CLUTCH - AR27.51-P-0820W

TRANSMISSION 722.9

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 165: Identifying K2 Clutch Disassemble/Assemble Components - Transmission 722.9 (1 Of 2)

Fig. 166: Identifying K2 Clutch Disassemble/Assemble Components - Transmission 722.9 (2 Of 2)

Disassemble
1 Remove bearing (11l) Check the contact
 surface and bearing (11l)
for swirl marks and
damage. Replace the
bearing (11l) if necessary.
2 Remove Torlon rings (1a)
3 Remove thrust bearing Check the contact
(2d) surface and radial bearing
(arrow) in the output shaft
guide for swirl marks and
damage. Replace the
thrust bearing (2d) and
radial bearing if
necessary.
4 Remove circlip (105s)
and end disk (105)
5 Remove clutch pack (5) Check disks for scorch
and disk spring (5t) marks and wear.
6 Place multidisk clutch
(11) in lever press

ca
7 Fit assembly device (076) Fig. 120

rd
on spring cup (11f)
8 Operate lever press and Stop lever press

ia
expose circlip groove stoke as soon as

gn
(104) accessibility to groove is
sufficient. Excess force

.c
can cause damage.

om
9 Remove circlip (11s)
10 Move back lever press
11 Remove assembly device
(076) and multidisk
clutch (11) from lever
press
12 Remove spring cup (11f)
13 Remove disk spring (11t)
14 Remove piston (11k)
Assemble
15 Install piston (11k) Replace sealing ring.
The rounded edge of the
sealing ring must face
outwards.
16 Insert disk spring (11t) Insert the disk spring
(11t) in such a way that
the curvature of the inner
circumference points
toward the spring cup
 (11f).
17 Position spring cup (11f) Replace sealing ring.
The rounded edge of the
sealing ring must face
outwards.
18 Place multidisk clutch
(11) in lever press
19 Fit assembly device (076) Fig. 120
on spring cup (11f)
20 Operate lever press and Position the spring
expose circlip groove cup (11f) precisely in
(104) order to prevent it from
canting.
Stop lever press
stoke as soon as
accessibility to groove is
sufficient. Excess force
can cause damage.
21 Install circlip (11s)

ca
22 Move back lever press

rd
23 Remove assembly device
(076) and multidisk

ia
clutch (11) from lever

gn
press

.c
24 Install disk spring (5t) and Insert the disk spring
clutch pack (5) (5t) in such a way that the

om
curvature of the inner
circumference points
toward the piston (11k).
Observe disk
sequence: ?
Survey of multiple-disc GF27.51-P-5200W
components
25 Install end disk (105) and
circlip (105s)
26 Measure and adjust AR27.51-P-7229W
clearance
27 Insert thrust bearing (2d)
28 Install Torlon rings (1a) Replace the Torlon
rings (1a).
Fig. 97
29 Install bearing (11l)
Fig. 167: Identifying Sleeve (722 589 01 14 00)

ca
Fig. 168: Identifying Assembly Tool (140 589 13 43 00)

rd
Inserting and measuring multiple-disc pack K2 - AR27.51-P-0820-02A

ia
Thickness of steel discs BT27.51-P-0002-01A

gn
B1, K1 and K2 revised
Additional disc spring in BT27.51-P-0003-01A

.c
multiple-disc pack K2

om
MODIFICATION NOTES
25.8.98 Special new tool for Items 2 and 3 incorporated
adjusting play for the first time
30.3.99 New adjustment values for
multi-disc clutch release
clearance

Fig. 169: Identifying Presser (208 589 00 21 00)

ADJUSTMENT VALUES - MULTIPLE-DISC CLUTCH

Number Designation Transmission Transmission
722.6 without 722.6 with
diaphragm diaphragm
spring spring
BE27.51-P- Play in Number of 3 mm 1.40-1.80 2.30-2.70
1002-01B multiple-disc discs 4 mm 1.50-1.90 2.40-2.80
clutch K2 5 mm 1.70-2.10 2.50-2.90
6 mm 1.80-2.20 2.70-3.10

ca
Fig. 170: Identifying Outer Multiple-Disc Carrier/K2, Piston

rd
Place new friction multiple-discs in ATF fluid for one hour before installing.

ia
1. Put discs for multiple-disc clutch K2 together in the sequence shown in the illustration and insert

gn
individually.

.c
2. Mount presser (078) on outer multiple disc (105c).

om
3. Compress multiple-disc pack, using a lever press compress presser as far as the stop (then the marking
ring is still visible, see small arrow ).
4. Using a feeler gauge, determine the play "L" at three points between the snap ring (106) and outer
multiple-disc (105c).

During the measurement the snap ring (106) must contact the upper bearing surface of the groove
in the outer multiple-disc carrier.

5. Adjust with snap ring (106), if necessary.

Snap rings are available in thicknesses of 2.3, 2.6, 2.9, 3.2, 3.5 and 3.8 mm.
 ca
rd
Fig. 171: Identifying Mount Presser On Outer Multiple Disc

ia
DISMANTLING AND ASSEMBLING DRIVE SHAFT WITH CLUTCH K2 AND FRONT GEAR SET -

gn
AR27.51-P-0825A

.c
TRANSMISSION 722.6

om
 ca
rd
ia
Fig. 172: Identifying Drive Shaft With Clutch K2 And Front Gear Set Components

gn
.c
om
Fig. 173: Identifying Snap Ring, Assembly Device

MODIFICATION NOTES
1.8.97 New assembly device Special tool for steps 8
and 13 modified
25.8.98 New special tool for AR27.51-P-0820-02A
setting loose play

Disassembling
1 Detach transmission AR27.50-P-0601A
housing from torque
converter housing, fit on
2 Remove multiple-disk AR27.50-P-0621A
clutch K1, K2 and K3,
install
3 Remove snap ring (84b)
from the inner multiple-
disc carrier / clutch K1
with integrated front gear
set (84) and take off
hollow gear (84a)
Conversion from 18° to Transmission 722.6 BT27.50-P-0012-01A
23° teeth in front and rear
planetary gear set
4 Remove drive shaft with
clutch K2 (100)
Plain bearings of input Transmission 722.6 BT27.50-P-0002-02A
shaft converted to anti-

ca
friction bearings
5 Remove needle thrust

rd
bearing (85)

ia
6 Remove snap ring (106)

gn
from outer multiple-disc
carrier / clutch K2

.c
7 Take out multiple-disc Inspect disks for

om
pack (105) scorch points and wear
8 Take out disk spring As of transmission no.
(107) 1596205
Additional disk spring in Transmission 722.6
multiple-disk set K2 BT27.51-P-0003-01A
9 Fit assembly device (076) Fig. 120
onto spring retainer (103)
Operate assembly
and press until snap ring
device with a lever press.
(104) is released (Fig. A)
10 Remove snap ring (104)
11 Take out disc spring Further work
(102) and pull piston according to condition: ?
(101) out of outer Remove multiple-disk AR27.50-P-0721A
multiple-disc carrier brake B1 and oil pump,
install
Assembling
12 Install piston (101) in Inspect seals (101a
outer multiple-disc carrier and 101b), replace if
necessary.
 The rounded
edges of the seals must
point to the outside.
13 Insert disk spring (102) Insert disk spring
and spring retainer(103) (102) with curved side
pointing toward spring
retainer (103).
Inspect seal (103a),
replace if necessary.
14 Place assembly device Fig. 120
(076) on spring plate
(103) and press until the
groove of the snap ring is
exposed
15 Insert snap ring (104)
16 Insert disk spring (107). As of transmission no.
1596205
Additional disk spring in Transmission 722.6 BT27.51-P-0003-01A
multiple-disk set K2

ca
17 Insert multiple-disk set Pay attention to AR27.51-P-0820-02A

rd
(105) into outer multiple- order of outer disks.
disk carrier and measure

ia
Thickness of steel disks Transmission 722.6

gn
BT27.51-P-0002-01A
B1, K1 and K2 modified

.c
Survey of disks fitted as- Transmission 722.6 GF27.51-P-5200A
built configuration

om
18 Fit snap ring (106)
19 Insert axial needle Insert axial needle *BR00.45-Z-1007-06A
bearing (85) into inner bearing (85) with a little
multiple-disk carrier/K1 grease to prevent it
slipping.
20 Install drive shaft in inner
multiple-disc carrier/
clutch K1 with integrated
front gear set
21 Fit internally-geared Pay attention to
wheel (84a) installation position.
Further work: ?
Remove multiple-disk AR27.50-P-0621A
clutch K1, K2 and K3,
install
Fig. 174: Identifying Assembly Device (140 589 13 43 00)

REPAIR MATERIALS
Number Designation Order number
BR00.45-Z-1007-06A Grease A 001 989 37 51

DISASSEMBLE AND ASSEMBLE CLUTCH K3. - AR27.51-P-0830

Disassemble and assemble clutch K3. - AR27.51-P-0830A

ca
TRANSMISSION 722.6

rd
ia
gn
.c
om

Fig. 175: Identifying Clutch K3 Components

MODIFICATION NOTES
25.8.98 New special tool for AR27.51-P-0830-01A
setting clearance
16.9.02 Multi-disks for B1, K1 Transmission 722.6 as of BT27.50-P-0013-01A
and K3 changed 02.09.02, refer to step 10.
 Dismantling
1 Remove snap ring (44h)
from external plate
carrier
2 Remove multi-disk pack Check multi-disks
(44g) and spring washer for scorch marks and
(44f) from external plate wear.
carrier
3 Place assembly device Assembly device Fig. 120
(072) on spring plate
(44d) and tension until
the snap ring (44e) is
exposed
4 Remove snap ring (44e)
5 Remove spring plate
(44d) and piston (44c)
from the external plate
carrier

ca
Assemble
6 Install piston (44c) in the Check sealing ring

rd
external plate carrier (44b) and replace if
necessary.

ia
The rounded off

gn
edges of the sealing ring

.c
must point outwards
7 Insert spring plate (44d)

om
Insert spring
washer with the curvature
towards the piston
8 Place assembly device Assembly device Fig. 120
(072) on spring plate and
tension until the groove
of the snap ring is
exposed
9 Insert snap ring (44e) The collar of the
snap ring must point
towards the multi-disk
pack.
10 Insert spring washer (44f) Observe outer
and multi-disk pack (44g) multi-disk sequence
in the external plate Inserting and measuring
carrier and measure clutch pack K3: ?
Transmission 722.6 up to AR27.51-P-0830-01A
01.09.02
Pressing tool Fig. 122
Play in multi-disk clutch *BE27.51-P-1003-01B
 K3
Transmission 722.6 as of AR27.51-P-0830-01AA
02.09.02
Pressing tool Fig. 122
Play in multi-disk clutch *BE27.51-P-1003-01B
K3
Thickness of friction and Transmission 722.6 BT27.51-P-0001-01A
steel multi-disks changed
Multi-disks for B1, K1 Transmission 722.6 as of BT27.50-P-0013-01A
and K3 changed 02.09.02
Survey of multi-disk Transmission 722.6 GF27.51-P-5200A
components, production
details
11 Insert snap ring (44h) For additional work,
see: ?
Install clutch K3 AR27.50-P-0810A

ADJUSTMENT VALUES OF MULTI-DISK CLUTCH

ca
Number Designation Transmission Transmission
722.6 up to 722.6 as of

rd
01.09.02 with 02.09.02 with

ia
double sided single-sided

gn
multi-disks multi-disks
BE27.51-P- Play in multi- Number of 3 mm 2.30...2.70 2.30...2.70

.c
1003-01B disk clutch multi-disks 4 mm 2.40...2.80 2.40...2.80
K3

om
5 mm 2.50...2.90 2.50...2.90

Fig. 176: Identifying Assembly Device (140 589 13 43 00)

Fig. 177: Identifying Pressing Tool (208 589 00 21 00)

Inserting and measuring multi-disk pack K3 - AR27.51-P-0830-01A

Thickness of friction and BT27.51-P-0001-01A

steel multi-disks K3
changed

MODIFICATION NOTES
25.8.98 New special tool for Point 2 and 3 added

ca
setting clearance
30.3.99 New values for clearance

rd
of multi-disk clutch

ia
gn
ADJUSTMENT VALUES OF MULTI-DISK CLUTCH
Number Designation Transmission

.c
722.6 up to

om
01.09.02 with
double sided
multi-disks
BE27.51-P-1003- Play in multi- Number of multi- 3 mm 2.30...2.70
01B disk clutch K3 disks 4 mm 2.40...2.80
5 mm 2.50...2.90

Fig. 178: Identifying Pressing Tool (208 589 00 21 00)

Fig. 179: Identifying Measuring Multi-Disk Pack K3 Thickness Of Friction And Steel Multi-Disks

Soak new friction multi-disks in automatic transmission fluid for 1 hour before installation.

1. Assemble the disks for multi-disk clutch K3 in the sequence shown in the diagram and insert one at a
time.
2. Place pressing tool (078) on externally toothed plate (41a).
3. Press together multi-disk pack by pressing together pressing tool as far as stop using a lever press (the

ca
marking ring can then still be seen, refer to small arrow ).

rd
4. Using a feeler gage, measure the clearance "L" at three locations between the snap ring (44g) and the
externally toothed plate (41a).

ia
gn
.c
During the measuring procedure, the snap ring (44g) must touch the upper contact surface of the groove

om
in the external plate carrier.

5. Adjust clearance if necessary using appropriate snap ring (44g).

Snap rings are available in thicknesses of 2.0, 2.3, 2.6, 2.9, 3.2, and 3.5 mm.
 ca
rd
Fig. 180: Place Pressing Tool On Externally Toothed Plate

ia
Inserting and measuring multiple-disc pack K3 - AR27.51-P-0830-01AA

gn
ADJUSTMENT VALUES OF MULTI-DISK CLUTCH

.c
Number Designation Transmission

om
722.6 as of
02.09.02 with
single-sided
multiple-discs
BE27.51-P-1003- Play in multiple- Number of 3 mm 2,30...2,70
01B disc clutch K3 multiple- discs 4 mm 2.40...2.80
5 mm 2.50...2.90

Fig. 181: Identifying Thrust Device(208 589 00 21 00)

1. Assemble and install the disks for the multi-disk clutch K3 in the sequence shown in the picture
 individually.

Insert the new disks in ATF oil before installation for 1 h.

Fig. 182: Identifying Multiple-Disc Pack K3

2. Mount pressure device (078) onto end disk (41a).

3. Compress the disk pack, to do so l press the pressure device (078) together using a lever press up to
stop.

ca
The marking ring (smaller arrow) is then still visible.

rd
4. Use a feeler gauge to measure the clearance (L) at three points between the snap ring (44g) and end disk

ia
(41a).

gn
During the measuring procedure, the snap ring (44g) must lie against the upper contact surface of the

.c
groove in the external plate carrier (44a).

om
5. Use corresponding snap ring (44g) to adjust clearance (L) if necessary.

The snap rings (44g)are available at sizes 2.0 mm, 2.3 mm, 2.6 mm, 2.9 mm, 3.2 mm and 3.5 mm.
 ca
rd
Fig. 183: Identifying Mount Pressure Device Onto End Disk

ia
Disassemble/assemble clutch K3 - AR27.51-P-0830W

gn
TRANSMISSION 722.9

.c
om

Fig. 184: Identifying Clutch K3 Disassemble/Assemble Components - Transmission 722.9 (1 Of 2)

Fig. 185: Identifying Clutch K3 Disassemble/Assemble Components - Transmission 722.9 (2 Of 2)

Dismantling
1 Remove circlip (105s)
and end disk (105)
2 Remove disk pack (5) and Check disks for scorch
disk spring (5t) marks and wear.
3 Place assembly device on Assembly device Fig. 120

ca
disk spring (21t) and
tension until circlip (21s)

rd
is exposed

ia
4 Remove circlip (21s)

gn
5 Remove assembly device
6 Remove disk spring (21t) Check sealing ring

.c
and piston (21k) from (arrow) and stop faces for

om
external disk carrier (21a) damage and swirl marks.
Assembling
7 Install piston (21k) in
external plate carrier
(21a)
8 Insert spring plate (21) Install disk spring (21t)
such that curvature of
inner circumference faces
piston (21k)
9 Place assembly device on Assembly device Fig. 120
disk spring (21t) and
tension until circlip (21s)
is exposed
10 Install circlip (21s) Pay attention to
installation position of
circlip (21s). If installed
incorrectly, disk spring
(5t) will become jammed.
11 Remove assembly device
12 Install disk spring (5t) and Install disk spring (5t)
disk pack (5) such that curvature of
inner circumference faces
piston (21k)
Make sure that disks
are installed in correct
sequence: ?
Survey of multi-disk GF27.51-P-5200W
components, production
details
13 Installed end disk (105)
and circlip (105s)
14 Measure and adjust AR27.51-P-7229W
clearance

ca
rd
ia
gn
Fig. 186: Identifying Assembly Device (140 589 13 43 00)

.c
om
MEASURE AND ADJUST CLEARANCE - AR27.51-P-7229W

TRANSMISSION 722.9

Multiple-plate brake B1, B2, B3 and Multiple disk clutch K1, K2, K3
Fig. 187: Identifying Distance Between Upper Edge Of Parallel Support And End Disk (1 Of 2)

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 188: Identifying Distance Between Upper Edge Of Parallel Support And End Disk (2 Of 2)

Measuring
General note Disks must be laid in ATF
oil at least one hour prior
to measuring clearance so
that friction lining can
soak.
1 Place multi-disk brake /
multi-disk clutch in lever
press
2 Place drifts of thrust Position drifts on
device on end disk (105) end disk (105) such that
they cannot slip off during
pressing procedure.
Thrust device Fig. 132
Drift set Fig. 131
3 Actuate lever press Markings (M1) to
(M4) indicate required
pressure force. If pressure
force is exceeded, disks
and disk carrier will be
damaged.
Multi-disk brake B1: (M1)
Multi-disk brake B2: (M3)
Multi-disk brake B3: (M1)
Multi-disk clutch K1:
(M2)
Multi-disk clutch K2:
(M4)
Multi-disk clutch K3:
(M1)
4 Position parallel support Fig. 48
5 Using depth gage (T), Measure distance at
measure distance between two points on
upper edge of parallel circumference of end disk

ca
support and end disk (105) and note down mean
(105) value as value "a"

rd
6 Return lever press to

ia
original position

gn
7 Push end disk (105) Carefully insert
against circlip (105s) tool (e.g. screwdriver)

.c
between end disk (105)

om
and first friction disk
(arrow). Do not turn tool,
otherwise disks will be
deformed and friction
lining will be damaged.
8 Using depth gage (T), Measure distance at
measure distance between two points on
upper edge of parallel circumference of end disk
support and end disk (105) and note down mean
(105) value as value "b"
Difference between
values "a" and "b" gives
clearance value.
Adjust clearance
9 Remove circlip (105s)
and determine its
thickness
10 Adjust clearance; to do Circlips (105s) are
so, install circlip (105s) of available in graduations of
appropriate thickness 0.3 mm.
 Multi-disk brake B1 *BE27.50-P-1001-02B
Multi-disk brake B2 *BE27.50-P-1002-02B
Multi-disk brake B3 *BE27.50-P-1003-02B
Multi-disk clutch K1 *BE27.51-P-1001-01B
Multi-disk clutch K2 *BE27.51-P-1002-01B
Multi-disk clutch K3 *BE27.51-P-1003-01B
Assignment of number
of disks to respective
transmission type: ?
Survey of multi-disk GF27.51-P-5200W
components, production
details

ADJUSTMENT VALUES OF MULTI-DISK CLUTCH

Number Designation Transmission
722.9
BE27.50-P-1001- Play in multi- Number of disks 2 mm -
02B disk brake B1 3 mm 2.00...2.40

ca
4 mm 2.20...2.60
BE27.50-P-1002- Play in multi- Number of disks 4 mm 1.70...2.1

rd
02B disk brake B2 5 mm 1.80...2.20

ia
6 mm 1.80...2.20

gn
BE27.50-P-1003- Play in multi- mm -
02B disk brake B3

.c
Number of disks 3 mm 2.20...2.60

om
4 mm 2.00...2.40

ADJUSTMENT VALUES OF MULTI-DISK CLUTCH

Number Designation Transmission
722.9
BE27.51-P-1001- Play in multi- Number of disks 3 mm 2.00...2.40
01B disk clutch K1 4 mm 2.20...2.60
5 mm 2.40...2.80
6 mm -
BE27.51-P-1002- Play in multi- Number of disks 3 mm 1.70...2.10
01B disk clutch K2 4 mm 1.90...2.30
5 mm 2.10...2.50
6 mm 2.20...2.60
BE27.51-P-1003- Play in multi- Number of disks 3 mm -
01B disk clutch K3 4 mm 2.20...2.60
5 mm 2.40...2.80
Fig. 189: Identifying Thrust Device (722 589 01 31 00)

ca
Fig. 190: Identifying Drift Set (722 589 04 15 00)

rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 191: Identifying Parallel Support (126 589 04 31 00)

Measure and adjust clearance of BR multi-disk brake - AR27.51-P-7229-01W

ADJUSTMENT VALUES OF MULTI-DISK CLUTCH

Number Designation Transmission 722.9
BE27.50-P-1004-02B Clearance of BR multi- mm 1.00...1.40
disk brake

Disks must be laid in ATF oil at least one hour prior to measuring clearance so that friction lining can soak.

1. Using a feeler gage, determine clearance at three points between circlip (133a) and externally toothed
plate (133c).

During measuring procedure, circlip (133a) must lie against upper contact surface of groove in
external plate carrier.
 2. Remove circlip (133a) and determine its thickness.
3. Adjust clearance; to do so, install circlip (133a) of appropriate thickness.

Replacement circlips (133a) are available in thicknesses 3.2 to 4.7 mm. They are available in
graduations of 0.3 mm.

Fig. 192: Identifying Clearance Between Circlip (133a) And Externally Toothed Plate (133c)

ca
FLUSH OUT OIL COOLER LINES AND OIL COOLER - AR27.55-P-0001

rd
Flush out oil cooler lines and oil cooler - AR27.55-P-0001A

ia
TRANSMISSION 722.6 /7

gn
.c
om

Fig. 193: Flushing Out Oil Cooler Lines And Oil Cooler Components

Shown on model 168

Fig. 194: Flushing Out Oil Cooler Lines And Oil Cooler Components - Shown On Model 168

ca
Extracting oil
1 Connect pump (2) to See: Fig. A

rd
vacuum connection on

ia
reservoir (3)

gn
2 Attach plastic hose to
connection fitting (1) and

.c
push all the way down the
oil filler pipe into the oil

om
pan
3 Actuate pump The extracted oil runs
into the reservoir (3).
Flushing
4 Connect pump (2) to See: Fig. B
pressure connection on
reservoir (3)
5 Fill reservoir (3) with
kerosene
6 Attach plastic hose to Ensure that the
connection fitting (1), kerosene can flow through
screw onto one of the two freely. Blow out oil cooler
oil cooler lines using the and oil cooler line
appropriate connection thoroughly with
piece (4) and flush out with compressed air.
kerosene
7 Connect the second plastic Secure the plastic hose
hose to the second oil on the connection fitting
cooler line and collect the with a hose clamp if
 escaping transmission fluid necessary.

Fig. 195: Identifying Hand Pump (210 589 00 71 00)

Flushing out oil cooler lines and oil cooler - AR27.55-P-0001R

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 211, 215, 220, 230 with ENGINE 113

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
Fig. 196: Flushing Out Oil Cooler Lines And Oil Cooler Components om
Fig. 197: Identifying Oil Cooling Line

ca
MODIFICATION NOTES

rd
Kerosene cleaning agent replaced by 7-speed automatic transmission fluids (ATF, Step
30.5.07
specification 236.12) for the flushing process. 6

ia
gn
Remove/install

.c
om
Depressurize the hydraulic
Risk of injury to skin or eyes caused by
system completely before
hydraulic fluid spraying out under high pressure. AS00.00-Z-
starting any work on the system.
Risk of poisoning caused by swallowing 0013-01A
Wear protective clothing and
hydraulic fluid.
safety glasses.
AH00.00-N-
Notes on self-locking nuts and bolts
0001-01A
Before opening the hydraulic system, thoroughly
clean the area surrounding the separation point.
Even the smallest dirt particles, introduced into
the hydraulic components, can lead to
malfunctions and a total failure of the hydraulic
system
AR61.20-P-
1 Remove bottom engine compartment paneling Model 211
1105T
AR61.20-P-
Model 215, 220
1105M
AR61.20-P-
Model 230
1105R
2 Unscrew drain plug from transmission oil pan *BA27.10-
 and drain transmission oil P-1001-03A
*BA27.55-
3 Remove bolts (5, 6) from oil cooling lines (7, 8)
P-1002-01D
Detach retaining clamps of the oil cooling lines *BA27.55-
4
(7, 8) on the engine oil pan P-1003-01D
Do not kink or bend oil
cooling lines (7, 8) otherwise
damage will occur.
5 Pull oil cooling lines (7, 8) out of transmission Collect transmission oil
which flows out in a container.
Installation: Fit new O-rings
on the oil cooling lines (7, 8).
Flushing
Fill reservoir (3) of hand pump (2) with
6 Fig. 7
transmission oil
7-gear automatic transmission fluids (ATF, BB00.40-P-
specification 236.12) 0236-12A
Connect hand pump (2) with pressure fitting to
7

ca
reservoir (3)
Connect plastic hose to connection fitting (1) and Secure plastic hose to

rd
8 connect appropriate connector (4) to oil cooler connection fitting (1) using hose

ia
line (7) clamp if necessary.

gn
9 Connect plastic hose to oil cooling line (8)
In the event of severe

.c
contamination, change the

om
transmission oil several times.
Operate hand pump (2) and flush out oil cooling
10 Collect transmission oil
lines (7, 8) and oil cooler with transmission oil
which flows out in a container.
Ensure that the transmission oil
flows freely.
11 Remove hand pump (2)
12 Install in the reverse order
Always observe work
procedure and Specifications for AR27.00-P-
13 Fill transmission with gear oil
Operating Fluids, otherwise 0270W
transmission will be damaged.
STAR DIAGNOSIS diagnosis
14 Read out fault memory and erase if necessary
system
Secure vehicle to prevent it
Risk of accident caused by vehicle starting off
from moving by itself.
by itself when engine is running. Risk of injury
Wear closed and snug-fitting AS00.00-Z-
caused by contusions and burns during starting
work clothes. 0005-01A
procedure or when working near the engine as it
Do not touch hot or rotating
is running
parts.
Carry out engine test run, checking the
15 transmission for function and oil leaks

TRANSMISSION OIL COOLING

Number Designation Transmission
722.9
Stage
Nm 5
1
Banjo bolt
BA27.55-P-1002- Bolt, transmission oil line to Stage
Angle° 90
01D transmission housing 2
hex. head
Nm 12
screw
BA27.55-P-1003-
Bolt, oil cooler line to engine oil pan Nm 12
01D

OIL PAN, AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

Number Designation Transmission 722.9
BA27.10-P-1001-03A Oil drain screw to oil pan Nm 22

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 198: Identifying Hand Pump (210 589 00 71 00)

FLUSH OUT AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION AND CONVERTER - AR27.55-P-0100A

TRANSMISSION 722.6
Fig. 199: Identifying Convertor Plate Locking Pin

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 200: Identifying Oil Cooling Line Connection, Banjo Bolt
Fig. 201: Identifying Right Oil Cooling Line, Hose Clamp

ca
Remove/install
Risk of injury to skin or Depressurize the hydraulic AS00.00-Z-0013-01A

rd
eyes caused by hydraulic system completely before

ia
fluid spraying out under starting any work on the

gn
high pressure. Risk of system. Wear protective
poisoning caused by clothing and safety glasses.

.c
swallowing hydraulic
fluid.

om
Risk of accident caused Secure vehicle to prevent it AS00.00-Z-0005-01A
by vehicle starting off by from moving by itself.
itself when engine is Wear closed and snug-
running. Risk of injury fitting work clothes.
caused by contusions and Do not grasp hot or
burns during starting rotating parts.
procedure or when
working near the running
engine
Risk of death caused by Align vehicle between the AS00.00-Z-0010-01A
vehicle slipping or columns of the lifting
toppling off of the liftingplatform and position the
platform. four support plates at the
lifting platform support
points specified by the
vehicle manufacturer.
Notes on self-locking nuts AH00.00-N-0001-01A
and bolts
Before opening the
hydraulic system,
 thoroughly clean the area
surrounding the separation
point. Even the smallest
dirt particles, introduced
into the hydraulic
components, can lead to
malfunctions and a total
failure of the hydraulic
system
1.1 Remove the rear section of Vehicles with gasoline
the engine compartment engine except model 461
paneling and 463
Model 129,202,208,210 AR61.20-P-1105AB
Model 140
Model 163 except AR61.20-P-1105GH
163.136/154/157
Model 163.136/154/157
Model 170 AR61.20-P-1105A
Model 171 AR61.20-P-1105V

ca
Model 199 AR61.20-P-1105SLR

rd
Model 209, 203 with AR61.20-P-1105P
gasoline engine

ia
Model 211 AR61.20-P-1105T

gn
Model 219 AR61.20-P-1105TX
Model 215, 220

.c
AR61.20-P-1105M
Model 230 AR61.20-P-1105R

om
Model 240 AR61.20-P-1105H
1.2 Remove rear part of Vehicles with diesel engine
bottom sections of except model 461 and 463
soundproofing Model 140
Model 163 AR94.30-P-5400GH
Model 202.1 AR94.30-P-5300A
Model 209, 203 with diesel AR94.30-P-5300P
engine
Model 210 AR94.30-P-5300AB
Model 211 date service. AR94.30-P-5300T
Model 220 AR94.30-P-5300M
2 Unscrew drain plug from The transmission oil
the transmission oil pan should have an operating
and drain transmission oil temperature of 80 °C.
*BA27.10-P-1001-03A
3 Detach transmission oil Caution: when
pan and install a new removing the transmission
transmission oil filter oil pan, approx. 2.5 liters
of transmission oil will still
 be in the transmission oil
pan.
4 Mount transmission oil Install new gasket.
pan *BA27.10-P-1002-03A
5 Detach clamps for right oil Model 163, 171, 211, *BA27.55-P-1004-01A
cooling line (2) from 219, 220, 461, 463
engine oil pan Model 199, 203, 209, *BA27.55-P-1003-01B
215, 230
6 Unscrew banjo bolt (3) Model 163, 171, 211, *BA27.55-P-1002-01A
from connection (1) on 219, 220, 461, 463
right oil cooling line (2) Model 199, 203, 209, *BA27.55-P-1002-01B
215, 230
7 Join connection fitting (4) Remove the connection
with an approx. 1.5 meter fitting (4) from the l hand
long hose using a hose pump.
clamp (5) Fig. 7
8 Mount banjo bolt (3) and
oil cooling line (2) to

ca
connection fitting (4)

rd
9 Hold hose into a bucket The bucket should have
with a scale on it a capacity of 10 liters.

ia
10 Unlock cap (93) Break off plate (93a)

gn
using a suitable tool and

.c
press out locking pin (93b)
remaining in cap (93)

om
downwards.
11 Detach cap (93) from oil
filler pipe
12 Fit funnel to oil filler The entire flushing
pipe and pour 5 liters of procedure requires 14 liters
oil into transmission of transmission oil.
Fig. 4
Flushing
An assistant is required for
the flushing procedure
13 Start the engine and drain Always observe
transmission oil via the work procedure and
hose into the bucket operating fluid
specifications, otherwise
transmission will be
damaged.
14 Once 3 liters of
transmission oil are in the
bucket stop the engine
 immediately
15 Pour in 3 liters of
transmission oil
16 Repeat flushing process
twice
17 Add remaining Model 129, 140, 163, 170, AR27.00-P-0101A
transmission oil (3 liters) 202, 208, 210, 211, 215,
and check transmission oil 220, 230, 240, 461, 463
level except 463.270/ 271
Model 171 AR27.00-P-0101V
Model 199 AR27.00-P-0101SLR
Model 203, 209 AR27.00-P-0101P
Model 219 AR27.00-P-0101TZ
Model 463.270/271 AR27.00-P-0101GX
18 Install in the reverse order
19 Carry out engine test run,
checking the transmission
for function and oil leaks

ca
rd
OIL PAN, AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Number Designation Transmission Transmission Transmission Transmission

ia
722.6 except 722.628 722.648 722.649

gn
722.628/
648/649

.c
BA27.10-P- Oil drain plug Nm 20 20 20 22

om
1001-03A to oil pan
BA27.10-P- Bolt, oil pan Nm 8 8 8 8
1002-03A to
transmission Angle° - - - -
housing

TRANSMISSION, OIL COOLER

Number Designation Transmission Transmission Transmission
722.660/ 661 in 722.662/ 722.6 in model
model 163 663/666/ 171
673/674 in
model 163
BA27.55-P- Banjo bolt or Stage 1 Nm 20 20 5
1002-01A union nut, oil
cooler line to
torque
converter and Stage 2 Angle° - - 95
transmission
housing
BA27.55-P- Bolt, clamp of Nm 8 8 8
1004-01A oil cooler line
to oil pan

TRANSMISSION, OIL COOLER

Transmissions
Transmission Transmission Transmission 722.610/
722.6 in 722.643 in 722.6 in 611/630/
Number Designation model 211 model 219 model 220 637/638/ 645
BA27.55- Banjo bolt or Stage 1 Nm 5 20 5 20
P-1002- union nut, oil
01A cooler line to
torque
converter Stage 2 Angle° 95 - 95 -
and
transmission
housing
BA27.55- Bolt, clamp of oil Nm 8 8 8 8
P-1004- cooler line to oil pan
01A

ca
rd
TRANSMISSION, OIL COOLER

ia
Number Designation Transmission Transmission Transmission
722.648 722.649 except 722.695

gn
in model

.c
230.477
BA27.55-P- Banjo bolt, Stage 1 Nm 20 5 5

om
1002-01B transmission
oil line to
transmission Stage 2 Angle° - 95 90
housing
BA27.55-P- Bolt, oil cooler Nm - 11 11
1003-01B line to engine
oil pan

Fig. 202: Identifying Funnel (126 589 12 63 00)

Fig. 203: Identifying Hand Pump (210 589 00 71 00)

REMOVE/INSTALL IGNITION LOCK CONTROL CABLE - AR27.60-P-0122I

TRANSMISSION 722.6 /9 in MODEL 215, 220

Shown on model 220

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
Fig. 204: Identifying Ignition Lock Control Cable Remove/Install Components (Shown On Model 220)
om
Remove/Install
Connect quiescent current retention device AR54.10-
1
(trickle charger) P-1030-07I
Key cannot be withdrawn.
Turn key in electronic ignition lock EIS With Keyless Go, code 889: Press
2
into position "0". start/stop button repeatedly until the
ignition is switched off.
Risk of explosion from explosive gas. Risk No fire, sparks, open flames or
of poisoning and caustic burns from smoking. Wear protective gloves, acid-
swallowing battery electrolyte. Risk of resistant clothing and safety glasses. AS54.10-
 injury through burns to skin and eyes from Pour battery electrolyte only into Z-0001-
battery acid or when handling damaged suitable and appropriately marked 01A
leadacid batteries containers.
AR54.10-
3 Disconnect ground cable from battery
P-0003I
AH54.10-
Notes on battery P-0001-
01A
AR68.20-
4.1 Remove cover on center console Model 215
P-2350N
AR68.20-
5.1 Remove cover on shift lever Model 220
P-2310M
Remove operating / display unit with Model 220 with COMAND operating AR82.85-
6.1
control module and display system, code 352a. P-7472I
AR68.20-
7 Remove center console Model 215
P-2000N
AR68.20-
Model 220 except 220.074 /174
P-2000M

ca
AR68.20-
Model 220.074/ 174
P-2000AM

rd
Unscrew fixing rosette on electronic
8 ignition switch control unit (N73) using

ia
Fig. 205
claw-type wrench

gn
Pull electronic ignition switch control
9
module (N73) out of instrument panel

.c
Installation: Switch ignition

om
switch to position "0".

 It must only be possible to move

Compress retaining lugs (arrows) and push the selector lever out of position
out cable (1) of ignition switch on "P" when the transmitter key is in
10 position "2" and the brake pedal
electronic ignition switch control unit (N73)
in the direction of the arrow is depressed.
 It must only be possible to
withdraw the ignition key when
the selector lever is in position
"P".
Press locking tab (1b), twist
Unlatch cable (1) from ignition switch on
11 electronic selector lever module control unit coupling (1c) through 90° in direction
of arrow and pull off ignition switch
(N15/5)
cable (1).
Remove ignition switch cable (1) from When removing do not damage
12
instrument panel sound insulating mat.
13 Install in the reverse order
AR00.19-
14 Perform basic programming P-0200M

Fig. 205: Identifying Claw-Type Wrench For Rosette On Ignition/Starter Switch (210 589 00 07 00)

REMOVING AND INSTALLING WIRE CABLE / TRANSMISSION FOR PARKING SHIFT LOCK
ON TRANSMISSION - AR27.60-P-0500-05B

For removal and installation, move selector lever or range selector lever to position "P" and, with control
cable / gears removed, leave in position "P".

ca
Removing

rd
1. Turn cable/transmission (80) on transmission counterclockwise and remove.

ia
gn
.c
Fig. 206: Turning Cable/Transmission On Transmission Counterclockwise
om
Installation

2. Install cable/transmission (80) and turn clockwise

After installation, adjust cable for parking shift lock and check for proper operation.
 Fig. 207: Identifying Cable/Transmission

REMOVE/INSTALL FLOOR SHIFT - AR27.60-P-0900I

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 215.373 /375 /376 /378 /379,

220.025 /026 /028 /063 /065 /067 /070 /073 /075 /083 /084 /087 /125 /126 /128 /165 /167 /170 /173 /175 /176 /17

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
Fig. 208: Identifying Floor Shift Remove/Install Components
om
Remove/Install
Disconnect shift rod from intermediate AR27.60-P-
1
lever 0990I
AR68.20-P-
2 Remove center console Model 215
2000N
AR68.20-P-
Model 220
2000M

Remove air duct for center rear Does not apply to air
 compartment air nozzle conditioning system in rear, code
3.1
582.
Hexagon socket head bolts, *BA27.60-P-
4 Unscrew hexagon socket head bolts (40)
floor shift to body 1001-02A
Disconnect couplings at electronic
5
selector lever module control unit (N15/5)
Unclip ignition switch control cable from
AR27.60-P-
6 ignition switch control cable connecting Models 215, 220
0122I
pipe (1)
Remove electronic selector lever module
7
control unit (N15/5)
After installing the floor shift,
8 Install in the reverse order erase fault code with STAR
DIAGNOSIS.
STAR DIAGNOSIS diagnosis *WH58.30-Z-
system 1048-13A

TIGHTENING TORQUES FOR FLOOR SHIFT

ca
Number Designation Transmission 722.6
BA27.60-P-1001-02A Hexagon socket head bolts, floor shift to body Nm 6

rd
ia
COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE TOOLS

gn
Number Designation
WH58.30-Z-1048-13A STAR DIAGNOSIS diagnosis system, Compact Passenger Car 6511 1801 00

.c
om
REMOVING AND INSTALLING ELECTRONIC SELECTOR LEVER MODULE (ESM) - AR27.60-P-
0901

Removing and installing electronic selector lever module (ESM) - AR27.60-P-0901AM

TRANSMISSION 722.643 in MODEL 215.374, 220.074 /174

Fig. 209: Identifying Electronic Selector Lever Module Connector Pin And Electronic Selector Lever
Module Control Module

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 210: Identifying Electronic Selector Lever Module (ESM) Remove/Install Components

Remove/Install
AR61.20-P-
1 Remove engine compartment paneling Only remove rear part.
1105T
Move selector lever to position
2 Disconnect shift rod from floor shift "D"
Remove securing clip for this step.
 AR82.95-
Activate the service mode in the TELE AID
3.1 Only with code 347, 855. P-0005-
emergency call system
03AM
AH82.95-
Notes regarding the Tele-Aid emergency call
system Only with code 347, 855. P-0001-
01AM
Risk of explosion from explosive gas. Risk No fire, sparks, naked flames or
of poisoning and caustic burns from smoking. Wear protective gloves,
swallowing battery electrolyte. Risk of acid-resistant clothing and safety AS54.10-Z-
injury through burns to skin and eyes from glasses. Pour battery electrolyte only 0001-01A
battery acid or when handling damaged into suitable and appropriately
leadacid batteries marked containers.
Turn key in electronic ignition AR54.10-
4 Disconnect ground cable of battery switch EIS into position "0". Key P-0003I
cannot be withdrawn.
Vehicle fitted with code (889)
Keyless-Go:
Switch off engine, remove Keyless
Go cards from the vehicle and keep

ca
outside the range of the transmitter.
Installation: Read out fault

rd
memory after connecting, adjust time

ia
display on combination instrument,

gn
code radio, normalize power window
and activate steering angle sensor.

.c
Vehicles with stationary heater:

om
adjust time display on stationary
heater.
Ensure that ground cable will not
come into renewed contact with the
battery terminal as you are working.
AH54.10-
Notes on battery All models P-0001-
01A
AR68.20-
5 Remove selector lever cover
P-2310M
AR68.20-
6 Remove center console
P-2000AM
Press locking tab (1b), twist
Release ignition lock cable (1) at electronic
coupling (1c) through 90° in the
7 selector lever module control module
direction of the arrow and pull off
(N15/5)
ignition lock cable (1).
Unplug electronic selector lever module
8
connector (2)

9 Remove selector lever module Pull locking plate off pin (3) and
press pin (3) backwards to access the
 front bolt.
10 Install in the reverse order
AR82.95-
Deactivate service mode in TELE AID
11.1 Only with code 347, 855. P-0005-
emergency call system
03AM
Perform basic programming AR00.19-
12 Render electrical system operational (normalize windows and sliding roof, P-0200M
etc.).
13 Perform function check If result is negative: ?
AR27.60-
Adjust shift rod.
P-0990I

Remove/install electronic selector lever module (ESM) - AR27.60-P-0901R

Transmission 722.617 in MODEL 220.063

Transmission 722.618 in MODEL 220.065 /165

ca
Transmission 722.626 in MODEL 220.026

rd
Transmission 722.628 in MODELS 215.378, 220.178 /878

ia
Transmission 722.632 in MODEL 220.070 /170

gn
.c
Transmission 722.633 in MODELS 215.375, 220.075 /175 /875

om
Transmission 722.639 in MODEL 220.028 /128

Transmission 722.636 in MODELS 215.373, 220.073 /173

Transmission 722.6 in MODEL 230

Fig. 211: Identifying Electronic Selector Lever Module (ESM) Remove/Install Components
(Transmission 722.6 In Model 230)

ca
rd
Remove/install

ia
AH00.00-N-
Notes on self-locking nuts and bolts

gn
0001-01A
Information on preventing damage to electronic AH54.00-P-

.c
components due to electrostatic discharge 0001-01A

om
See ?
1 Unhook head on intermediate lever Remove/install and
adjust shift rod:
AR27.60-P-
Model 230
0990R
AR27.60-P-
Model 215, 220
0990I
Model 230 up to AR68.20-P-
2.1 Remove cover on center console
14.1.04 2350R
Model 230 as of AR68.20-P-
15.1.04 2350RA
AR68.20-P-
2.2 Remove center console Model 215
2000N
AR68.20-P-
Model 220
2000M
Only on model 215,
3.1 Remove air duct for center rear compartment air nozzle 220 without rear air
conditioner, code 582
4.1 Remove bolts (5) Only for model 230
 On model 230 use
Allen wrench with ball
head.
5 Remove bolts (6)
Installation:
Replace self-locking
bolts (6).
*BA27.60-P-
1001-02A
Detach electric plugs on electronic selector lever module
6
control unit (N15/5)
Raise locking lug (2), press coupling (3) over the cable
connection fitting (4) against the spring force, turn the
7 coupling (3) through 90° (arrow) and detach ignition
switch cable (1) from electronic selector lever module
control unit (N15/5)
On model 230 raise
rear center console
Remove electronic selector lever module control unit
8 Installation: Pay
(N15/5).
attention to electrical

ca
lines.

rd
9 Install in the reverse order
Read out fault memory with STAR DIAGNOSIS and STAR DIAGNOSIS

ia
*WH58.30-
10
erase if necessary. diagnosis system Z-1048-13A

gn
Carry out function check of electronic selector lever
11

.c
module control unit (N15/5)

om
TIGHTENING TORQUES FOR FLOOR SHIFT
Number Designation Transmission 722.6
BA27.60-P-1001-02A Bolt, floor selector to body Nm 6

COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE TOOLS

Number Designation
WH58.30-Z-1048-13A STAR DIAGNOSIS diagnosis system, Compact Passenger Car 6511 1801 00

Removing and installing electronic selector lever module (ESM) - AR27.60-P-0901RB

TRANSMISSION 722.901 in MODEL 215.375, 220.070 /075 /170 /175

Fig. 212: Identifying Electronic Selector Lever Module (ESM) Remove/Install Components
(Transmission 722.901 In Model 215.375)

ca
rd
Remove/Install

ia
Align vehicle between the columns of the lifting
Risk of death. Death may

gn
platform and position the four support plates at AS00.00-Z-
result if vehicle slips or topples
the lifting platform support points specified by 0010-01A

.c
from the lifting platform.
the vehicle manufacturer.

om
Notes on self-locking nuts and AH00.00-N-
bolts 0001-01A
The vehicle must be horizontal Position vehicle on the lifting platform.
Carry out control unit
When replacing the electronic selector lever
1.1 adaptation using STAR
module control unit (N15/5).
DIAGNOSIS
*WH58.30-
Diagnosis system STAR DIAGNOSIS
Z-1048-13A
Move selector lever to position
2
"R".
Key cannot be withdrawn.
Turn key in electronic ignition With Keyless Go, code 889:
3
lock EIS into position "0". Press start/stop button repeatedly until the
ignition is switched off.
Lift the vehicle and unhook
shift rod from electronic AR27.60-P-
4
selector lever module control 0990I
unit (N15/5)
5 Remove center console Model 215 AR68.20-P-
 2000N
AR68.20-P-
Model 220
2000M
6 Unscrew screw (2)
Unscrew hexagon socket bolts
7 Use Allen wrench with ball head.
(3)
*BA27.60-P-
1001-02A
Disconnect electrical plug
sockets from electronic
8
selector lever module control
unit (N15/5)
Lift up locking lug (5) and press coupling (6)
Unlatch cable (4) from ignition
against the spring force into the electronic
switch on electronic selector
9 selector lever module control unit (N15/5), rotate
lever module control unit
through 90° (arrow) and disconnect ignition lock
(N15/5)
cable (4).
Lift up center console at rear
and remove electronic selector Installation: Do not jam any electric cables in

ca
10
lever module control unit between.

rd
(N15/5)
11 Install in the reverse order

ia
12 Read out DTC memory

gn
Connect STAR DIAGNOSIS AD00.00-P-

.c
and read out fault memory 2000-04A

om
13 Perform function check If in bad condition: ?
AR27.60-P-
Adjusting shift rod
0990I

FLOOR SELECTOR TIGHTENING TORQUE

Number Designation Transmission 722.9
BA27.60-P-1001-02A Bolt, floor selector to body Nm 6

COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE TOOLS

Number Designation
WH58.30-Z-1048-13A STAR DIAGNOSIS diagnosis system, Compact Passenger Car 6511 1801 00

REMOVING AND INSTALLING SELECTOR LEVER HANDLE - AR27.60-P-0920-01A

STAR Remove

1. Loosen clamp (3) by turning anticlockwise (arrow A).

2. Pull selector lever handle (1) off selector lever (4).
 Install

3. Push selector lever handle (1) onto the selector lever (4) and tighten the clamping piece (3) in clockwise
direction (arrow B).

ca
Fig. 213: Identifying Selector Lever Handle Components

rd
REMOVE/INSTALL PARK PAWL MECHANISM - AR27.60-P-0950

ia
gn
Remove/install park pawl mechanism - AR27.60-P-0950A

.c
TRANSMISSION 722.6

om
 ca
rd
ia
gn
Fig. 214: Identifying Park Pawl Mechanism Components

.c
Remove

om
1 Remove range selector
lever; unscrew bolt (60) to
do this
2 Remove detent plate with
tapered rod (35, 34)
3.1 Undo bolt (36) Except model 215, 220
4.1 Remove bolt (141) Except model 215, 220
Bolt is caulked
5.1 Pull linkage (50) out of Except model 215, 220
transmission housing and
detach lock pawl (139)
6 Remove circlip (52) of
pilot bushing (51)
7 Press park detent (53)
against spring (54) and
press pilot bushing (51)
out of transmission
housing using a suitable
tool
8 Remove circlip (56) and
bearing pin (55)
9 Remove park detent (53)
with spring (54)
Install
10 Insert park detent (53) and Check O-ring (55a)
spring (54) into and replace if necessary
transmission housing and
install bearing pin (55)
with circlip (56)
11 Press park detent (53) Press in pilot
against spring (54) as far bushing until it snaps into
as stop and insert pilot place
bushing (51) into Check O-ring (51 a)
transmission housing so and replace if necessary
that the park detent snaps
into the recess of the pilot
bushing
12 Install circlip (52).

ca
13.1 Insert linkage (50) into Except model 215, 220

rd
transmission housing and
attach lock pawl (139)

ia
14.1 Install bolt (141) Except model 215, 220

gn
Bolt must be
caulked on transmission

.c
housing side

om
Check O-ring (141a)
and replace if necessary
15.1 Tighten bolt (36) Except model 215, 220
*BA27.60-P-1001-03A
16 Insert detent plate with
tapered rod (35 and 34)
17 Mount range selector Check sealing ring
lever (33) (33a), replace if necessary
*BA27.40-P-1006-01A

HOUSING
Transmission 722.6 except
722.660/661/66
Number Designation 2/663/666/674
BA27.40-P-1006-01A Bolt, detent plate to Nm 8
range selector lever

TIGHTENING TORQUES OF LINKAGE FOR PARKING SHIFT LOCK

Number Designation Transmission 722.6
BA27.60-P-1001-03A Bolt, parking shift lock Nm 8
linkage to transmission
housing

Remove, install park pawl mechanism - AR27.60-P-0950W

TRANSMISSION 722.9

Transmission removed

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 215: Identifying Park Pawl Mechanism Remove/Install Components - Transmission 722.9

Remove/install
General information Pay attention to
cleanliness during all
operations. No fluffy
cleaning cloths may be
used. Chamois leathers
are the most suitable.
1 Fasten transmission on AR27.10-P-0600-01W
assembly stand
Assembly stand Fig. 30
Support plate Fig. 26
2 Drain transmission oil and AR27.10-P-7030W
detach oil pan
3 Remove oil filter Installation: Replace
O-ring.
4 Remove electrohydraulic AR27.19-P-0200W
controller unit
5 Detach rear engine mount Installation: Install
bearing bracket new bolts.
*BA27.40-P-1018-01A
6 Remove range selector Check the sealing ring
lever (81); to do so, (81d) and replace if
unscrew bolt (82s) necessary.
*BA27.40-P-1006-01A
7 Remove detent plate (82)
with tapered rod
8 Remove bearing pin (85); Pull out the bearing
to do so, unscrew screw pin (85) using a bar
plug (85s) magnet.
*BA27.40-P-1017-01A
9 Remove pilot bushing Press the park detent
(84); to do so, unscrew (83) as far as possible
screw plug (84s) against the spring (83f)

ca
and pull out the pilot
bushing (84) using a bar

rd
magnet.

ia
*BA27.40-P-1016-01A

gn
10 Remove park detent (83) Installation: Push the
together with spring (83f) spring (83f) onto the stud

.c
(arrow) of the park detent

om
(83) and insert both
components together into
the transmission housing
(1).
11 Install in the reverse order

HOUSING
Number Designation Transmission 722.9
BA27.40-P-1006- Bolt, detent plate to Nm 8
01A range selector lever
BA27.40-P-1016- Screw plug, pilot Nm 70
01A bushing of park pawl
mechanism
BA27.40-P-1017- Screw plug, bearing Nm 22
01A bolt of park detent
BA27.40-P-1018- Bolt, bracket for rear Stage 1 Nm 10
01A engine mount to
transmission Stage 2 Angle ° 90
Fig. 216: Identifying Assembly Stand (116 589 06 59 00)

ca
Fig. 217: Identifying Support Plate (140 589 34 63 00)

rd
ADJUSTING WIRE CABLES FOR PARKING LOCK INTERLOCK - AR27.60-P-0965B

ia
TRANSMISSION 722.60/61,

gn
.c
722.620 ## as of 1681,

om
722.621 ## as of 1977,

722.622 ## as of 16287,

722.623 /624 /625 /626 /627 /628 /629 /63 /66 /69
Fig. 218: Identifying Wire Cables For Parking Lock Interlock Components

ca
MODIFICATION NOTES
15.10.97 Sequence of work steps

rd
revised

ia
gn
The selector lever must be in
position "P" for all

.c
adjustment work.

om
Adjusting wire The wire
cable/steering lock cable/transmission must be
installed to adjust the wire
cable/steering lock.
1 Pretension spring on
adjusting button (79a)
2 Turn key in steering lock to
position "0"
3 Adjust wire cable/steering
lock (79) by pressing
adjusting button (79a)
(arrow)
Adjusting wire
cable/transmission
4 Pretension spring on
adjusting button (80a)
5 Turn key in steering lock to
position "0"
6 Adjust wire
 cable/transmission (80) by
pressing the adjusting button
(80a) (arrow) Figure A

REMOVE/INSTALL AND SET SHIFT ROD - AR27.60-P-0990I

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 215, 220, 240

TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 215, 220

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
Fig. 219: Identifying Set Shift Rod Remove/Install Components

Remove
Align vehicle between the columns of the lifting
Risk of death. Death may result
platform and position the four support plates at AS00.00-Z-
if vehicle slips or topples from
the lifting platform support points specified by 0010-01A
the lifting platform.
the vehicle manufacturer.
The vehicle must be horizontal Position vehicle on the lifting platform.
Move selector lever to position
1
"D".
2 Raise vehicle.
Remove shield in the area of the
3.1 electronic selector lever module Models 215, 220
control unit (N15/5)
3.2 Remove cover from shield Model 240
Unclip locking plates (1) using a
4
screwdriver
5 Detach rod head (98) from
 intermediate lever (97)
Position range selector lever (33)
6
in position "R"
Detach shift rod (63) at range
7
selector lever (33)
Remove shift rod (63) together
8
with rod head (98)
Inspect
Check bushes in range selector
lever (33) and in intermediate
9
lever (97) for damage and replace
if necessary
Setting, installing
Saw slot in bolt head of locking
10.1 bolt (2) and unscrew locking bolt Vehicles with locking bolt
(2) from rod head (98)
10.2 Loosen grub screw (99) Vehicles with grub screw
Attach shift rod (63) at range
11

ca
selector lever (33)
Move range selector lever (33) to

rd
12
position "D"

ia
Attach rod head (98) to
13

gn
intermediate lever (97)
14 Clip in locking plates (1) Install new locking plates (1)

.c
Vehicles with locking bolt

om
Replace locking bolt (2).
Screw in locking bolt (2) at rod
15.1 For tightening, counter-press at rod head (98)
head (98)
Do not move range selector lever (33) from
position "D".
*BA27.60-P-
1001-04A
Vehicles with grub screw
Replace grub screw (99).
15.2 Tighten grub screw (99) For tightening, counter-press at rod head (98)
Do not move range selector lever (33) from
position "D".
*BA27.60-P-
1001-04A
16 Perform function check
Install shield in the area of the
17.1 electronic selector lever module Models 215, 220
control unit (N15/5)
17.2 Install cover in the shield Model 240
 TIGHTENING TORQUES FOR SHIFT ROD
Number Designation Transmission 722.6 Transmission 722.9
BA27.60-P-1001-04A Bolt in rod head M8x10 Nm 12 12

REMOVING AND INSTALLING WIRE CABLE FOR PARKING LOCK INTERLOCK - AR27.60-P-
1000B

TRANSMISSION 722.60/61,

722.620 ## as of 1681,

722.621 ## as of 1977,

722.622 ## as of 16287,

722.623 /624 /625 /626 /627 /628 /629 /63 /66 /69

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
Fig. 220: Identifying Wire Cable For Parking Lock Interlock Components om
Removing and installing
wire cable/ steering lock
1 Remove cover below left of ra68001400150x
instrument panel
2 Unhook wire cable/steering Installation : Position
lock (79) by pressing in the key in steering lock in
locking tongues and at the position "1"
same time pressing
(arrows) against the
steering lock (figure A)
3 Remove stop lamp switch AR42.10-P-0040A
4 Unhook wire cable/steering
lock (79) at the release
lever (77) (arrow) (figure
B)
5 Compress locking device
(arrows) and at the same
time push the wire
cable/steering lock upwards
out of the mount on the
pedal bearing bracket
(figure C)
6 Remove wire cable/steering
lock
7 Install in reverse order
8 Adjust wire cables for AR27.60-P-0965A
parking lock interlock
Removing wire

ca
cable/transmission
9 Remove cover below left of ra68001400150x

rd
instrument panel
10 Pull off entrance strip

ia
upwards

gn
11 Remove A-pillar footwell

.c
cover
12 Unscrew accelerator pedal

om
from floor panel
13 Remove driver side floor Do not fold up
lining complete floor carpet, foamed
insulating material
cracks.
14 Remove air duct for rear
compartment heating
15 Unhook wire
cable/transmission (80) at
release lever (77) (arrow)
(figure B)
16 Compress locking device
(arrows) and at the same
time push the wire
cable/transmission upwards
out of the mount on the
pedal bearing bracket
(figure C)
17 Turn wire To install and AR27.60-P-0500-05B
 cable/transmission (80) remove, position selector
counterclockwise and pull lever or range selector
off (figure D) lever in position "P" and
leave in position "P"
when wire cable/
transmission is removed.
Installation : Attach
wire cable/ transmission
and turn clockwise
(figure E)
18 Remove rubber boot on
tunnel
19 Open cable straps behind Installation : Attach
cover on left of tunnel and wire cable/ transmission
remove wire in the bracket on the
cable/transmission jacket tube
20 Install in reverse order
21 Adjust wire cables for AR27.60-P-0965A
parking lock interlock

ca
rd
ia
gn
.c
om
 2000-2007 TRANSMISSION

Automatic Transmission - Torque Specifications - 215 & 220 Chassis

TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
TIGHTENING TORQUES: PASSENGER CARS: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION - BA27.00-Z-
9999AZ

MODEL all

Vacuum unit TRANSMISSION 722.3 /4 /5 BA27.10-

P-1000-
01A
Secondary TRANSMISSION 722.3 /4, 722.5## ## up to 3652930 BA27.10-
pump P-1000-
02A
Oil pan, TRANSMISSION BA27.10-
automatic 722.3 /372 /382 /396 /397 /398 /399 /4 /5 /6 /610 /611 /630 /637 /638 /645 /7 /9 P-1000-

ca
transmission 03A

rd
Oil pan, TRANSMISSION 722.800 /801 BA27.10-
automatic P-1000-

ia
transmission 03C

gn
Complete TRANSMISSION 722.3 /4 /5 BA27.10-
automatic P-1000-

.c
transmission 04A

om
Complete TRANSMISSION 722.700 /701 /702 in MODEL 168 TRANSMISSION BA27.10-
automatic 722.750 /751 in MODEL 414 P-1000-
transmission 04B
Complete TRANSMISSION 722.648 in MODEL 199 BA27.10-
automatic P-1000-
transmission 04C
Complete TRANSMISSION 722.800 /801 BA27.10-
automatic P-1000-
transmission 04D
Complete TRANSMISSION 722.9 /9 BA27.10-
automatic P-1000-
transmission 04E
Primary pump TRANSMISSION 722.7 BA27.10-
P-1000-
05A
Electrohydraulic TRANSMISSION 722.6 /6 /6 /9 /9 BA27.19-
control unit P-1000-
01A
Electric control TRANSMISSION 722.800 /801 BA27.19-
unit P-1000-
 03A
Torque TRANSMISSION 720.1, 722.3 /4 /5 /7 BA27.20-
converter P-1000-
01A
Torque TRANSMISSION 722.800 /801 BA27.20-
converter P-1000-
01B
Torque TRANSMISSION 722.6 /6 /9 /9 BA27.20-
converter P-1000-
01C
Front TRANSMISSION 722.3 /4 /5 BA27.30-
transmission P-1000-
cover 01A
Rear TRANSMISSION 722.3 /4 /5 BA27.30-
transmission P-1000-
cover 02A
Rear TRANSMISSION 722.800 /801 BA27.30-
transmission P-1000-
cover 02B

ca
Shift valve body TRANSMISSION 722.3 /4 /5 /7 BA27.35-

rd
P-1000-
01A

ia
Lower cover TRANSMISSION 722.3 /4 /5 BA27.35-

gn
P-1000-
02A

.c
Shift valve body TRANSMISSION 722.6

om
BA27.35-
P-1000-
03A
Housing TRANSMISSION 722.3 /5 /6 /7 /9 BA27.40-
P-1000-
01A
Housing TRANSMISSION 722 ... BA27.40-
P-1000-
01B
Housing TRANSMISSION 722.800 /801 BA27.40-
P-1000-
01C
Housing TRANSMISSION 722.643 /901 in MODEL 219 BA27.40-
P-1000-
01D
Housing TRANSMISSION 722.9 in MODEL 216, 221 BA27.40-
TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 216, 221 P-1000-
01E
Housing TRANSMISSION 722.6 /9 in MODEL 204 BA27.40-
P-1000-
 01F
Gear assembly TRANSMISSION 722.3 /4 /5 /6 /9 BA27.50-
P-1000-
01A
Gear assembly TRANSMISSION 722.800 /801 BA27.50-
P-1000-
01B
Transmission TRANSMISSION 722 ... BA27.55-
oil cooling P-1000-
01A
Transmission TRANSMISSION 722 ... BA27.55-
oil cooling P-1000-
01B
Transmission TRANSMISSION 722.800 /801 BA27.55-
oil cooling P-1000-
01C
Transmission TRANSMISSION 722.9 BA27.55-
oil cooling P-1000-
01D

ca
Transmission TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 216, 221 BA27.55-

rd
oil cooling P-1000-
01E

ia
Parking shift TRANSMISSION 722.5 /9 BA27.60-

gn
lock P-1000-

.c
01A
Floor-mounted TRANSMISSION 722.6 /7 /9

om
BA27.60-
shift P-1000-
02A
Floor shift TRANSMISSION 722.5 in MODEL 210 BA27.60-
P-1000-
02B
Floor-mounted TRANSMISSION 722.800 /801 BA27.60-
shift P-1000-
02C
Linkage for TRANSMISSION 722.6 BA27.60-
parking lock P-1000-
interlock 03A
Shift rod TRANSMISSION 722.6 /9 BA27.60-
P-1000-
04A

OIL PAN, AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION - BA27.10-P-1000-03A

Transmission 722
 OIL PAN, AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Number Designation Transmission Transmission Transmissions Transmissions Tr
722.3 722.372/382/396/397/398/399 722.4/5/7 722.6 except 72
722.628/648/649
BA27.10- Drain plug Nm 14 14 22 20 20
P-1001- on
03A transmission
oil pan
BA27.10- Bolt, oil pan Nm 8 8 8 8 8
P-1002- to
03A transmission Angle° - - - - -
housing
BA27.10- Bolt, oil Nm 8 8 - 8 -
P-1003- filler pipe to
03A cylinder
head
BA27.10- Bolt, oil Nm 8 8 - 8 8
P-1004- filler pipe to
03A transmission

ca
housing
BA27.10- Bolt, oil Nm - - - 8 8

rd
P-1005- filler pipe to

ia
03A heat shield

gn
BA27.10- Bolt, oil Nm - - - 8 8
P-1006- filler pipe to

.c
03A oil dipstick

om
guide tube
BA27.10- Bolt, oil Nm - - - - -
P-1007- filler pipe
03A bracket
BA27.10- Bolt of oil Nm - - - 8 -
P-1008- filler pipe
03A retaining
clamp to
bracket
BA27.10- Bolt, oil Nm - - - 8 -
P-1009- filler pipe to
03A bracket

OIL PAN, AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

Number Designation Transmission Transmission Transmission
722.648 722.649 722.9
BA27.10-P- Drain plug on Nm 20 22 22
1001-03A transmission oil
pan
BA27.10-P- Bolt, oil pan to Nm 8 8 4
1002-03A transmission Angle° - - 180
housing
BA27.10-P- Bolt, oil filler Nm - - -
1003-03A pipe to cylinder
head
BA27.10-P- Bolt, oil filler Nm - 8 -
1004-03A pipe to
transmission
housing
BA27.10-P- Bolt, oil filler Nm - - -
1005-03A pipe to heat
shield
BA27.10-P- Bolt, oil filler Nm - - -
1006-03A pipe to oil
dipstick guide
tube
BA27.10-P- Bolt, oil filler Nm - 8 -
1007-03A pipe

ca
BA27.10-P- Bolt of oil filler Nm - - -

rd
1008-03A pipe retaining
clamp to bracket

ia
BA27.10-P- Bolt, oil filler Nm - - -

gn
1009-03A pipe to bracket

.c
ELECTROHYDRAULIC CONTROL UNIT - BA27.19-P-1000-01A

om
Transmission 722.6/9

ELECTROHYDRAULIC CONTROL UNIT

Number Designation Transmission Transmission
722.6 722.9
BA27.19-P- Bolt, 1st stage Nm 8 4
1001-01A electrohydraulic
control unit to
transmission Stage 2 Angle ° - 90
housing
BA27.19-P- Bolt, solenoid Nm 8 8
1002-01A valve to shift plate
BA27.19-P- Bolt, pilot bushing Nm 3 -
1003-01A to
electrohydraulic
control unit
BA27.19-P- Shift shaft clamp Nm 8 8
1004-01A screw to detent
 plate
BA27.19-P- Bolt of spring Nm 8 9
1005-01A element of detent
plate to
electrohydraulic
control unit

TORQUE CONVERTER - BA27.20-P-1000-01A

Transmission 720, 722.3/4/5/7

TORQUE CONVERTER
Number Designation Transmission Transmission Transmission
720.1 722.3 722.4
BA27.20-P- Oil drain Nm 14 14 14
1001-01A plug to
torque
converter
BA27.20-P- Bolt, torque Stage 1 Nm - 42 42

ca
1002-01A converter to Stage 2 Nm - - -

rd
drive plate Stage 3 Angle° - - -

ia
gn
TORQUE CONVERTER
Number Designation Transmission Transmission

.c
722.5 722.7

om
BA27.20-P- Oil drain plug to Nm 14 -
1001-01A torque converter
BA27.20-P- Bolt, torque Stage 1 Nm 42 42
1002-01A converter to Stage 2 Nm - -
drive plate Stage 3 Angle° - -

SHIFT VALVE BODY - BA27.35-P-1000-03A

Transmission 722.6

TIGHTENING TORQUES OF SHIFT VALVE BODY

Number Designation Transmission 722.6
BA27.35-P-1001- Bolt, valve housing M6x30 Nm 8
03A to shift valve body
BA27.35-P-1002- Bolt, side cover to M4x12 Nm 4
03A valve housing and
shift valve body

HOUSING - BA27.40-P-1000
Housing - BA27.40-P-1000-01A

Transmission 722

HOUSING
Number Designation Transmission Transmission Transmission 722.6 except
722.3 722.5 722.660/661/662/663/666/674
BA27.40- Transmission Nm 70 70 -
P-1001- overload
01A protection
pressure
switch to
transmission
housing
BA27.40- Bolt, Nm - - 20
P-1002- transmission
01A housing to
converter
housing

ca
BA27.40- Bolt, oil Nm - - 20
P-1003- pump with

rd
01A multi-disk

ia
brake B1 to
torque

gn
converter

.c
housing

om
BA27.40- Bolt, multi- Nm - - 10
P-1004- disk brake B1
01A to converter
housing
BA27.40- Bolt, multi- 1st stage Nm - - 16
P-1005- disk brake B2
01A to
transmission 2nd stage Angle° - - -
housing
BA27.40- Bolt, detent Nm 8 - 8
P-1006- plate to range
01A selector lever
BA27.40- Bolt, locking Nm - - -
P-1007- pawl to shift
01A lock lever
BA27.40- Bolt, M10x40 Nm 55 - -
P-1008- automatic M10x90 Nm 45 - -
01A transmission
to engine M12 Nm 65 - -
BA27.40- Screw plug Nm 13 - -
P-1009- for
01A measuring
point for
modulating
pressure,
control
pressure and
working
pressure
BA27.40- Bolt of Nm - - -
P-1010- transmission
01A housing to
reverse idler
shaft
BA27.40- Bolt, Nm - - -
P-1011- expansion
01A reservoir to
transmission
housing

ca
BA27.40- Bolt, Nm - - -
P-1012- expansion

rd
01A reservoir to

ia
torque
converter

gn
casing

.c
BA27.40- Bolt, ground Nm - - 20
P-1013- line to

om
01A transmission
housing
BA27.40- Bolt, heat Nm - - 6
P-1014- shield to
01A transmission
housing
BA27.40- Bolt, 1st stage Nm - - -
P-1015- transmission
01A housing to
converter 2nd stage Angle° - - -
housing
BA27.40- Screw plug, Nm - - -
P-1016- pilot bushing
01A of park pawl
mechanism
BA27.40- Screw plug, Nm - - -
P-1017- bearing bolt
01A of park detent
BA27.40- Bolt, bracket 1st stage Nm - - -
P-1018- for rear 2nd stage Angle° - - -
01A engine mount
to
transmission
BA27.40- Bolt, leaf Nm - - 8
P-1019- spring to
01A transmission
housing
BA27.40- Bolt, 1st stage Nm - - -
P-1020- transmission
01A housing of
all-wheel
drive to 2nd stage Angle° - - -
adapter
housing
BA27.40- Bolt, 1st stage Nm - - -
P-1021- transmission
01A housing to 2nd stage Angle° - - -
servo module

ca
rd
HOUSING
Number Designation Transmission Transmission Transmission

ia
722.660/661/662/663/666/674 722.7 722.9

gn
BA27.40- Transmission Nm - - -
P-1001- overload

.c
01A protection

om
pressure
switch to
transmission
housing
BA27.40- Bolt, Nm 20 25 -
P-1002- transmission
01A housing to
converter
housing
BA27.40- Bolt, oil Nm 20 - 20
P-1003- pump with
01A multi-disk
brake B1 to
torque
converter
housing
BA27.40- Bolt, multi- Nm 10 - 11
P-1004- disk brake B1
01A to converter
housing
BA27.40- Bolt, multi- 1st stage Nm 16 - 10
P-1005- disk brake B2
01A to 2nd stage Angle° - - 90
transmission
housing
BA27.40- Bolt, detent Nm 8 8 8
P-1006- plate to range
01A selector lever
BA27.40- Bolt, locking Nm - 8 -
P-1007- pawl to shift
01A lock lever
BA27.40- Bolt, M10x40 Nm 40 - 38
P-1008- automatic M10x90 Nm 40 - 38
01A transmission
to engine M12 Nm - - -
BA27.40- Screw plug Nm - - -
P-1009- for
01A measuring
point for

ca
modulating
pressure,

rd
control

ia
pressure and
working

gn
pressure

.c
BA27.40- Bolt of Nm - 20 -

om
P-1010- transmission
01A housing to
reverse idler
shaft
BA27.40- Bolt, Nm - 5 -
P-1011- expansion
01A reservoir to
transmission
housing
BA27.40- Bolt, Nm - 5 -
P-1012- expansion
01A reservoir to
torque
converter
casing
BA27.40- Bolt, ground Nm 20 - 9
P-1013- line to
01A transmission
housing
BA27.40- Bolt, heat Nm 6 - 9
P-1014- shield to
01A transmission
housing
BA27.40- Bolt, 1st stage Nm - - 10
P-1015- transmission
01A housing to
converter 2nd stage Angle° - - 90
housing
BA27.40- Screw plug, Nm - - 70
P-1016- pilot bushing
01A of park pawl
mechanism
BA27.40- Screw plug, Nm - - 22
P-1017- bearing bolt
01A of park detent
BA27.40- Bolt, bracket 1st stage Nm - - 10
P-1018- for rear
01A engine mount
to 2nd stage Angle° - - 90

ca
transmission
BA27.40- Bolt, leaf Nm - - 5

rd
P-1019- spring to

ia
01A transmission

gn
housing
BA27.40- Bolt, 1st stage Nm - - 10

.c
P-1020- transmission

om
01A housing of
all-wheel
drive to 2nd stage Angle° - - 90
adapter
housing
BA27.40- Bolt, 1st stage Nm - - 4
P-1021- transmission
01A housing to 2nd stage Angle° - - 90
servo module

Housing - BA27.40-P-1000-01B

Transmission - 722.6

MODIFICATION NOTES
Bolt, automatic transmission to crankcase
20.4.06 Bolt, automatic transmission to engine oil pan Transmission 722.6 in model 211
Bolt, heat shield to transmission housing

HOUSING
Number Designation Transmission Transmission Transmission Transmission
722.6 in model 722.6 in model 722.648 in 722.6 in model
163 171 model 199 203
BA27.40- Bolt, automatic
P-1001- transmission to Nm 40 38 35 38
01B crankcase
BA27.40- Bolt, automatic
P-1002- transmission to Nm 40 38 35 38
01B engine oil pan
BA27.40- Bolt, heat shield to
P-1003- transmission Nm 8 8 - 8
01B housing
Bolt, shield to
BA27.40-
hexagon special
P-1004- Nm - - - -
bolt for shift
01B
module (ISM)
Hexagon special
BA27.40- bolt, shift module
P-1005- (ISM) to Nm - - - -

ca
01B transmission
housing

rd
Standard bolt, shift

ia
BA27.40-
module (ISM) to
P-1006- Nm - - - -

gn
transmission
01B
housing

.c
om
HOUSING
Number Designation Transmission Transmission Transmission
722.6 in model 209 722.6 in model 211 722.6 in model 215
BA27.40-P- Bolt, automatic
Nm 38 38 40
1001-01B transmission to crankcase
Bolt, automatic
BA27.40-P-
transmission to engine oil Nm 38 38 40
1002-01B
pan
BA27.40-P- Bolt, heat shield to
Nm 8 8 8
1003-01B transmission housing
Bolt, shield to hexagon
BA27.40-P-
special bolt for shift Nm - - -
1004-01B
module (ISM)
Hexagon special bolt, shift
BA27.40-P-
module (ISM) to Nm - - -
1005-01B
transmission housing
Standard bolt, shift
BA27.40-P-
module (ISM) to Nm - - -
1006-01B
transmission housing
 HOUSING
Number Designation Transmission Transmission Transmission 722.649 Transmission
722.6 in model 722.649 in model in model 722.6 in model
220 230.476/477/479 240.078/079/178/179 461, 463
BA27.40- Bolt, automatic
P-1001- transmission to Nm 40 38 38 40
01B crankcase
BA27.40- Bolt, automatic
P-1002- transmission to Nm 40 38 38 40
01B engine oil pan
Bolt, heat
BA27.40-
shield to
P-1003- Nm 8 8 8 8
transmission
01B
housing
Bolt, shield to
BA27.40- hexagon
P-1004- special bolt for Nm - - - -
01B shift module
(ISM)

ca
Hexagon
special bolt,

rd
BA27.40-
shift module
P-1005- Nm - - - -

ia
(ISM) to
01B

gn
transmission
housing

.c
Standard bolt,

om
BA27.40- shift module
P-1006- (ISM) to Nm - - - -
01B transmission
housing

GEAR ASSEMBLY - BA27.50-P-1000-01A

Transmission 722

GEAR SET
Number Designation Transmission Transmission 722.6
722.3/4/5 722.9
BA27.50-P-1001- Collared nut, output NM 120 200
01A flange to output
shaft
BA27.50-P-1002- Bolt, detent plate to NM 8 -
01A transmission
housing
BA27.50-P-1003- Bolt, support flange NM 11 -
01A K2 to transmission
 housing

TRANSMISSION OIL COOLING - BA27.55-P-1000

Transmission oil cooling - BA27.55-P-1000-01A

Transmission 722

MODIFICATION NOTES
Banjo bolt or union nut, oil cooler line to torque converter and Transmission 722.6 in model
21.1.05
transmission housing, 1st stage 211
Banjo bolt or union nut, oil cooler line to torque converter and Transmission 722.6 in model
21.1.05
transmission housing, 1st stage 220
Banjo bolt or union nut, oil cooler line to converter housing and Transmission 722.7 except
21.1.05
transmission housing 2nd stage 722.750/751

TRANSMISSION, OIL COOLER

Number Designation Transmission Transmissions Transmission

ca
722.372/382/396/397/398/399 722.610/611/630/637/638/645 722.7 except
722.750/751

rd
Union nut
BA27.55-
connecting

ia
P-1001- Nm - 25 -
transmission oil

gn
01A
line to cooler
Banjo bolt

.c
or union Stage

om
nut, oil Nm 34 20 30
1
BA27.55- cooler line
P-1002- to torque
01A converter
and Stage
Angle° - - -
transmission 2
housing
BA27.55- Banjo bolt
P-1003- connecting ATF Nm - 25 -
01A line to oil cooler
BA27.55- Bolt, clamp of oil
P-1004- cooler line to oil Nm - 8 -
01A pan
BA27.55- Bolt, auxiliary oil
P-1005- cooler bracket on Nm - - -
01A front end
BA27.55- Bolt, bracket to
P-1006- auxiliary oil Nm - - -
01A cooler
Union nut,
BA27.55- transmission oil
P-1007- line to automatic Nm - - -
01A transmission
BA27.55- Bolt, transmission
P-1008- oil line clamp to Nm - - -
01A engine

TRANSMISSION, OIL COOLER

Number Designation Transmission Transmission Transmission
722.662/663/666/673/674 722.6 in model 722.6 in model
in model 163 171 211
BA27.55- Union nut connecting
P-1001- transmission oil line to Nm 18 - 25
01A cooler
Banjo bolt or
Stage
union nut, oil Nm 20 5 5
BA27.55- 1
cooler line to
P-1002-
torque converter
01A Stage
and transmission Angle° - 95 95

ca
2
housing

rd
BA27.55-
Banjo bolt connecting
P-1003- Nm 30 - 25

ia
ATF line to oil cooler
01A

gn
BA27.55-
Bolt, clamp of oil cooler
P-1004- Nm 8 8 8

.c
line to oil pan
01A

om
BA27.55-
Bolt, auxiliary oil cooler
P-1005- Nm - - -
bracket on front end
01A
BA27.55-
Bolt, bracket to
P-1006- Nm - - -
auxiliary oil cooler
01A
BA27.55- Union nut, transmission
P-1007- oil line to automatic Nm - - -
01A transmission
BA27.55-
Bolt, transmission oil
P-1008- Nm - - 12
line clamp to engine
01A

TRANSMISSION, OIL COOLER

Number Designation Transmission Transmission
722.6 in model 220 722.750/751 in model
414
BA27.55-P- Union nut connecting transmission oil
Nm 25 -
1001-01A line to cooler
 Stage
Banjo bolt or union nut, oil Nm 5 25
BA27.55-P- 1
cooler line to torque converter
1002-01A Stage
and transmission housing Angle° 95 -
2
BA27.55-P- Banjo bolt connecting ATF line to oil
Nm 25 -
1003-01A cooler
BA27.55-P-
Bolt, clamp of oil cooler line to oil pan Nm 8 -
1004-01A
BA27.55-P- Bolt, auxiliary oil cooler bracket on
Nm - 10
1005-01A front end
BA27.55-P-
Bolt, bracket to auxiliary oil cooler Nm - 8
1006-01A
BA27.55-P- Union nut, transmission oil line to
Nm - 25
1007-01A automatic transmission
BA27.55-P- Bolt, transmission oil line clamp to
Nm - -
1008-01A engine

Transmission oil cooling - BA27.55-P-1000-01B

ca
Transmission 722

rd
ia
TRANSMISSION, OIL COOLER

gn
Number Designation Transmission Transmission Transmission Transmission
722.626/628 722.633/636/643 722.648 722.649

.c
except in

om
model
230.477
BA27.55- Union nut Nm 25 25 - 25
P-1001- connecting
01B transmission
oil line to
cooler
BA27.55- Banjo bolt, Stage 1 Nm 5 5 20 5
P-1002- transmission
01B oil line to
transmission Stage 2 Angle° 90 90 - 95
housing
BA27.55- Bolt, oil Nm 11 11 - 11
P-1003- cooler line to
01B engine oil
pan
BA27.55- Bolt, dual Nm 11 11 - 11
P-1004- clamp to oil
01B line
BA27.55- Line Nm 25 25 - -
P-1005- connectors
01B to dual
clamp
BA27.55- Bolt, Stage 1 Nm - - 20 -
P-1006- transmission
01B oil line to
transmission Stage 2 Angle° - - - -
housing

TRANSMISSION, OIL COOLER

Number Designation Transmission Transmission
722.649 in model 722.695
230.477
BA27.55-P- Union nut Nm - 25
1001-01B connecting
transmission oil
line to cooler
BA27.55-P- Banjo bolt, Stage 1 Nm 5 5
1002-01B transmission oil

ca
line to
Stage 2 Angle° 95 90

rd
transmission
housing

ia
BA27.55-P- Bolt, oil cooler Nm 11 11

gn
1003-01B line to engine oil
pan

.c
BA27.55-P- Bolt, dual clamp Nm 11 8

om
1004-01B to oil line
BA27.55-P- Line connectors Nm - -
1005-01B to dual clamp
BA27.55-P- Bolt, Stage 1 Nm - -
1006-01B transmission oil
line to
transmission Stage 2 Angle° - -
housing

SHIFT LOCK - BA27.60-P-1000

Parking shift lock - BA27.60-P-1000-01A

Transmission 722.5/9

PARKING SHIFT LOCK

Number Designation Model 124, 129, 140 with Transmission
automatic transmission 722.9
BA27.60-P- Nut, operating lever for parking
NM 5 -
1001-01A shift lock to brake pedal
BA27.60-P- Nut, support plate on shift bracket
NM 5 -
1002-01A housing of parking shift lock
BA27.60-P- Bolt, clamp connection of detent
NM - 8
1003-01A plate to range selector lever
BA27.60-P- Screw plug, pilot bushing for park
NM - 70
1004-01A pawl mechanism
BA27.60-P- Screw plug, bearing pin for park
NM - 22
1005-01A detent

Floor-mounted shift - BA27.60-P-1000-02A

Transmission 722

FLOOR SELECTOR TIGHTENING TORQUE

Number Designation Transmission Transmission Transmission
722.6 722.7 722.9
BA27.60-P- Bolt, floor Nm 6 8 6
1001-02A selector to body

ca
BA27.60-P- Bolt, shift gate Nm 6 - -
1002-02A to lower part of

rd
bearing bracket

ia
BA27.60-P- Bolt, shift lock Nm 3.5 - -
1003-02A bracket to upper

gn
part of bearing
bracket

.c
om
Linkage for parking lock interlock - BA27.60-P-1000-03A

Transmission 722.6

TIGHTENING TORQUES OF LINKAGE FOR PARKING LOCK INTERLOCK

Number Designation Transmission 722.6
BA27.60-P-1001-03A Bolt, parking lock Nm 8
interlock linkage to
transmission housing

Shift rod - BA27.60-P-1000-04A

Transmission 722.6, 9

TIGHTENING TORQUES FOR SHIFT ROD

Number Designation Transmission Transmission
722.6 722.9
BA27.60-P- Bolt in rod head M8x10 Nm 12 12
1001-04A
 2000-2007 TRANSMISSION

Automatic Transmission - Trouble Diagnosis - 215 & 220 Chassis

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
ELECTRONIC TRANSMISSION CONTROL (ETS): DTC 116 - AF27.19-P-8001A

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 129, 140, 163, 170, 202, 203, 208, 209, 210, 211, 215, 220, 230

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 461, 463

MODIFICATION NOTES
8.11.00 Supersedes STIP 27.19-
007 dated 08.11.2000

Damage code Cause Remedy

27 264 74 DTC 116 stored in ETC If customer complaint not
control unit (not current, present: ?

ca
background error). 1 Ignore error and erase.

rd
In the event of a customer

ia
complaint indicating "Engine
does not start occasionally" ?

gn
2 Remove/install/replace

.c
wiring harness according to
EPC

om
We have noticed that an
increased number of floor
shifts (touch shift) are
returned which are not
defective.
Replace floor shift only when
a corresponding DTC is
stored in the electronic
selector lever module.
Always note this on the
warranty return slip. If this is
not observed, we reserve the
right to reject the warranty
claim.

ENGINE CANNOT BE SHUT OFF, SELECTOR LEVER LOCKS IN "P" - AF27.60-P-6401A

TRANSMISSION 722.6 in MODEL 215, 220, 230 with CODE (889) Keyless go

OPERATION NO. OF OPERATION TEXTS OR STANDARD TEXTS AND FLAT RATES

Range Op. Operation text Time Acc. Code
no. no.
004
P 541011 Perform quick test - -
WU/0.3h
Remove/install electronic selector lever module, replace 023
P 272355 - -
according to condition, for model 230 WU/1.9 h
Remove/install electronic selector lever module, replace 018
P 272355 - -
according to condition, for models 215/220 WU/1.5 h

Damage Cause Remedy

code
Communication interferences following
internal reset of electronic selector lever 1 Remove/install/replace floor shift.
module
Following electronic selector module reset,
Observe vehicle model and national
the electronic selector lever module goes to the
version.
intermediate position "P-R" (actual values).
Engine cannot be shut off with button on SBC added value can be recognized on

ca
selector lever module, if started previously with the presence of the features "SBC hold" and
keyless go. "SBC stop".

rd
Immediate measure (until replacement

ia
part is present in workshop):

gn
Position "R" can be displayed in instrument ?
cluster (position "P" is not recognized). 2 Inform customer, that vehicle can only be

.c
started with key in electronic ignition/starter

om
control module (EIS).

PARTS ORDERING NOTES

Part no. Designation Quantity
A 220 267
Selector lever module, only for models 215/220 (ECE + USA/Canada/Australia) 1
33 24
A 230 267 Selector lever module, only for model 230 (ECE without SBC added value, not
1
46 24 for USA/Canada/Australia)
A 230 267 Selector lever module, only for model 230 (USA/Canada and Australia with SBC
1
49 24 added value)
A 230 267 Selector lever module, only for model 230 (Australia with SBC added value, not
1
52 24 for USA/Canada/ECE)
A 230 267 Selector lever module, only for model 230 (ECE with SBC added value, not for
1
55 24 USA/Canada/Australia)